Humanity and Social Science Proceedings of the International Conference on Humanity and Social Science (ICHSS2016)

Liguang Liu Editor

ISBN:978-981-3208-49-0 Humanity and Social Science Humanity and Humanity and Social Science Social Science 2016 International Conference on Humanity and Social Science (ICHSS2016) was successfully held in Xiamen, China, on April 22nd – 24th. Proceedings of the International Conference on Humanity and Social Science (ICHSS2016) The ICHSS2016 received over more than 198 submissions, and after careful peer review process, only 68 are included in this proceedings, covering management, education, economy and finance, culture, social science and sports. The program of ICHSS2016 consisted of keynote presentation, invited sessions and technical workshops.

The conference provides an opportunity for researchers from all over the regions to come together to discuss issues and compare research outcomes in education and humanity, and exchange ideas to move in the right directions should be the focus of attention.

Liu Liguang Liu Editor

World Scientific ISBN 978-981-3208-49-0 www.worldscientific.com 10405 hc World Scientific 10405_9789813208490_tp.indd 1 5/1/17 11:28 AM b2530 International Strategic Relations and China’s National Security: World at the Crossroads

b2530_FM.indd 6 01-Sep-16 11:03:06 AM 10405_9789813208490_tp.indd 2 5/1/17 11:28 AM Published by World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd. 5 Toh Tuck Link, Singapore 596224 USA office: 27 Warren Street, Suite 401-402, Hackensack, NJ 07601 UK office: 57 Shelton Street, Covent Garden, London WC2H 9HE

British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.

HUMANITY AND SOCIAL SCIENCE Proceedings of the International Conference on Humanity and Social Science (ICHSS2016) Copyright © 2017 by World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd. All rights reserved. This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or any information storage and retrieval system now known or to be invented, without written permission from the publisher.

For photocopying of material in this volume, please pay a copying fee through the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, USA. In this case permission to photocopy is not required from the publisher.

ISBN 978-981-3208-49-0

Printed in Singapore

Sarah - Humanity and Social Science.indd 1 20-12-16 9:13:16 AM

Preface

2016 International Conference on Humanity and Social Science (ICHSS2016) was successfully held in Xiamen, China, on April 22nd – 24th. The conference provides an opportunity for researchers from all over the regions to come together to discuss issues and compare research outcomes in Humanity, exchange ideas on future directions should be the focus of attention.

The ICHSS2016 received over more than 198 submissions, and after careful peer review process, only 68 are included in this proceedings; covering management, education, economy and finance, culture, social science and sports. The program of ICHSS2016 consisted of keynote presentation, invited sessions and technical workshops. We hope your experience is a fruitful and long lasting one. With your support and participation, we shall be looking forward to more successful conferences for years to come.

Hereby, we would like to take this opportunity to express our gratitude to all participants of this conference, and not to forget our ICHSS2016 conference committee, who had spent tireless effort to plan, execute the all aspects of the plan to make this conference such a success. Finally, our special thanks to the review committee

v for commenting and selecting among the many articles, the best 68 papers to be in this proceedings. Without them, it would be impossible to organize such a big conference.

Organizing Committee of ICHSS2016 Xiamen, China

Committees of ICHSS2016

General Chair Pro. Lizhen Yang, Beijing Institute Of Graphic Communication, China

Co-Chair Pro. Liguang Liu, Central University of Finance and Economics, China

Technical Program Committee

Pro. Liguang Liu, Central University of Finance and Economics, China Prof. Lianhong Gao, China University of Political Science and Law, China Dr. Kam Po Wong, Division of Science and Technology, Hong Kong Community College, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, Hong Kong, China. Dr. Steven E. Wallis, Fielding Graduate University, CA Dr. Phil. Idhamsyah Eka Putra, Psychology Graduate Programs Persada Indonesia University, Indonesia

vii

Dr Ahmed Hankir, Harvard Medical School, British Dr. Navid Mollaee, CRM Times Co., Tehran, Iran Dr. Sanaullah Ansari, Shaheed Zulfikar Ali Bhutto Institute of Science & Technology (SZABIST), Islamabad, Pakistan. Dr. Xunjie Liu, Shenyang University Of Chemical Technology, China Dr. Zhongxin Yang, Shijiazhuang University, China Dr. Fanqiu Wang, Xi'an University Of Posts & Telecommunications, China Dr. Muxi Zhang, Yantai University, China Dr. Shuchen Gao, Nanjing Forestry University, China Dr. Ying Feng, Sichuan Agricultural University, China Dr. Hua Zhu, Liaoning University Of Technology, China Dr. Xiuzhao Yun, Kunming University of Science and Technology, China Dr. Diyun Zhang, Inner Mongolia Medical College, China Dr. Loukai Dai, University Of Science And Technology Liaoning (ustl), China Dr. Jinnuo Ding, Zhejiang Gongshang University, China Dr. Chenshi Yao, Shandong Jianzhu University, China Dr. Bijian Bao, University Of South China, China Dr. Liusi Shen, Changsha University, China Dr. Huijin Su, Jimei University, China Dr. Zhuqing Yang, Guangdong University of Technology, China Dr. Ailng Yi, Liaoning Institute Of Science And Technology, China

viii Dr. Yihuai Tian, Liaocheng University, China Dr. Manjin Rong, Agricultural University Of Hebei, China Dr. Yuling Ning, Wenzhou University, China Dr. Qiong Tang, Agricultural University Of Hebei, China Dr. Nihe Cai, Jianghan University, China Dr. Bo Deng, North China Electric Power University, China Dr. Ruida Ren, Tianjin University Of Technology, China Dr. Juxia Song, Liaoning University Of Technology, China Dr. Muchai Han, University Of Science And Technology Liaoning (ustl), China Dr. Wukou Yang, East China Institute Of Technology, China Dr. Fangqin Ji, Shaanxi University Of Science & Technology, China

ix b2530 International Strategic Relations and China’s National Security: World at the Crossroads

b2530_FM.indd 6 01-Sep-16 11:03:06 AM Contents

Preface v

Committees vii

Chapter 1. Management 1 OTO Collaborative Management Mechanism of Multimedia Equipment via Mobile Internet ...... 3 Xue-Lian Hou and Fa-Lu Xu

Analytic Hierarchy Process And Fuzzy Assessment Method in the Application of the Risk Evaluation of Electronic Commerce ...... 8 Chao Lin and Lu Ma

A Study of Human Resource Management Based on Game Theory ...... 16 Min Wei and Lu Ma

Discussion on Human Resources Management Issues for SMEs — A Case Study of Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd...... 22 Dan-Yang Wang and Lu Ma

Study on the Influence Factors of Small and Medium Enterprises on the Usage Intention of Mobile Information Platform — Based on TAM and UTAUT Integration Perspective ...... 28 Chao-Yan Wu

xi An Evaluation of Regulations Regarding Ethical Leadership and the Influence on the Psychological Security of Employees ...... 35 Qing-Quan Pan and Xiao-Wei Lu

The Application of 3D Printing Technology in Modern Clothing Design ...... 41 Xiao-Hua Lin

The Influential Effect of Narcissism Leadership and Its Managerial Implications ...... 48 Qing-Quan Pan and Fang Yu

The Construction of College Students’ Psychology New Management Pattern in the Network Era ...... 55 Wei-Jia Meng and Han Du

Determinants Affecting Staffs Intention to Leave in Public Nursing Care Sectors ...... 61 Shao-Yu Li, Pei-Kuan Lin and Hien Thi Thu Nguyen

Management Strategies for the Phenomenon of Dwindling University Students Enrollment in Taiwan ...... 67 Pei-Chi Lii and Shao-Yu Li

Chapter 2. Education 75

Research and Practice of Teaching a Person According to His Aptitude in Modern Apprenticeship ...... 77 Qing-Qing Guo, Ji Song, Bin-Bin Ren and Xu Zhang

Analysis and Thoughts on the Development of the Information Security Profession in Advanced Education ...... 84 Xin-Lei Wang, Wei-Dong Lv, Xue-Guang Zhou and Wei Guo

xii

Bilingual Teaching Efficiency of Prosthodontics in Different Teaching Methods ...... 96 Bin Deng

Research and Discussion on the Cultivation Of Interdisciplinary Doctoral Students ...... 102 Kan Li and He-Yan Huang

Stakeholders Analysis of the Driving Force for Integrated Optimization of Teaching Resources of Higher Vocational Colleges ...... 108 Si-Bao Wang and Qiao-Ying Wang

Implementation of Modern Apprenticeship in “HNA-Class” in Sanya Aviation and Tourism College ...... 117 Xu Zhang, Hong Chen, Shu-Jiao Yin, Qing-Qing Guo and Bin-Bin Ren

Effects of CBL Mode to Residency Training Doctor of Prosthodontics for Making Diagnosis and Treatment Plan ...... 125 Bin Deng

Analysis of the Significance of Skills Competition Based on Civil Engineering Specialty Group at Vocational Colleges for Training Highly-Skilled Individuals ...... 130 Cheng-Bin Liu, Xiu-Qing Gao, Hong-Xiao Gao, Min-Qi Han, Dun Zhang and Hao Zhang

The Analysis and Research on Incentive Mechanism and Its Application in Network Education ...... 137 Min Hou, Jun Han, Jing Liu and Jia-Sha Zhang

Analysis of Psychological Problems and Possible Solution Among Postgraduate Students in China ...... 143 Da-Peng Zou, Xin Wang, Si-Yuan Cheng and Zhong-Ning Guo

xiii

The Path of China Higher Education Governance Reform Based on Comparative Study on the Governance Pattern of Higher Education in the United States and Japan ...... 150 Wei-Hua Zhang

Study of Computer-Aided Training for Executive Function Of Autistic Children ...... 156 Han-Xue Xu, Xiao-Wei Chen and Yun Xu

The Strengthening of Expressive Skills in Modern Chinese Classes ...... 163 Duan Zhang

Experiment Teaching for the Training of Quality Control in Textile and Clothing Materials Science Courses ...... 169 Peng-Peng Cheng, Dao-Ling Chen, Ying-Jin Gan and Dong-Sheng Chen

The Potential Marker Role of Salivary Cortisol for Personality Trait in Acute Stress ...... 176 Chen Li, Yu-Qin Ma, Li-Qin Chen, Jin Yang, Kang-Wei Shen, Yuan Song and Xue-Jun Kang

Review for Interorganizational Learning ...... 183 Min Qi and Lu Ma

Research-Oriented Teaching Means And Measures to Improve Students' Innovating Ability ...... 191 Shu-Qin Wang and Zhi-Hui Du

A Tentative Discussion on The Teaching Reform of the “Book Design” Course ...... 198 Li-Li Zhang

xiv

Construction and Practice of Medicine Massive Open Online Courses of Obstetrics and Gynecology Ultrasound ...... 206 Guo-Rong Lv, Zhen-Hua Wang and Jia-Xiang Wu

Differences in Student Satisfaction as a Function of Instruction Method ...... 211 Xiao-Hong Li

Segmentations and Distributaries Cultivation Reform of Vehicle Service Specialties Based on “Platforms + Developments” Model ...... 218 Liang-Rong Zhu and Zhuang-Wen Wu

University Towns’ Strategic Options for Sharing Sports Resources ...... 223 Yang Zhao, Yue-Yue Zhang and Xiao-Ping Wang

Implementation of Olympic Education in Higher Education Institutions ...... 231 Yang Zhao, Yue-Yue Zhang and Xiao-Ping Wang

Flipped Classroom In Computer networks ...... 240 Yin Tian, Ke Yao, Pei-Qi Wang and Bao Ge

The Application of Flipped Classroom Model Based on MOOC in "Hydraulic and Pneumatic Transmission" Courses ...... 246 Xiao-Ming Sheng and Xue-Wu Hu

Research on the Integration of Campus Sports Culture in The Merged Multi-Campus Colleges ...... 253 Yang Zhao, Tao Guan and Yue-Yue Zhang

PBL-Based Course Design and Practice of Introduction to Digital Media ...... 260 Shu-Xia Dong and Bai-Hui Yin

Analysis of Psychological Health Among Grade 2015 College Students ...... 267 Sheng-Lin Zhang, Xu-Long Wang and Hong-Chao Liu

Exploration and Practice on the Development of Creativity Among College Students ...... 274 Li-Zhen Yang, Bo-Wen Liu and Fu-Yun Li

A Comparison of First and Second Language Acquisition ...... 281 Xin-Yan Gao

An Analysis of Effective Interaction in the ESL Classroom ...... 289 Wen-Jun Zhang

Text Mining Method in Qualitative Research and Application on Chan Ding Testimonies: After Chan Ding Education and Citizenship Instruction ...... 295 Ya-Wen Chen, Kang-Ming Chang, Hsiao-Ting Jannis Su and Hung-Meng Liang

An Empirical Study on Rural Household Biogas Policy in China ...... 301 Long Xia, Wei Wang, Wei-Chun Cui, Ai-Xue Tang and Qin Zhu

Discussion on Design Training Courses for Clothing Enterprises ...... 307 Xu-Bing Xu and Meng-Chao Zhao

An Empirical Study of the Effectiveness of Phonetic Teaching on Listening Ability ...... 314 Cai-Xia Wang and Ning Zhang

Rethink the Curriculum for Furniture Design Inspired by the Teaching of Three Knowns from Mo-Tse ...... 320 Ting Wang, Xiao-Hui Wang and Xiao-Jun Liu

xvi

Response of Elementary School Students to Earthquake Disaster — A Case Study in Yushu, Qinghai Province ...... 326 Ben-Yong Wei and Huan-Jie Wu

Problem-Based Learning Approach for the Teaching Microcontroller ...... 333 Shu-Yan Zhang, Ji-Ya Tian and Juan Zhu

Fuzzy Clustering Analysis on Graduate Employment Quality and Its Application ...... 339 Feng Du

Research on Teaching of “Advanced Mathematics” Based on Strategic Thinking ...... 357 Hong-Mei Pei, Xuan-Hai Li and Jie-Lin Shang

Chapter 3. Economy and Finance 363

Research on Financial Crises with Infectious Disease Model ..... 365 Feng-Hua Fan and Yong-Chang Huang

The Correlation Between Creative Inclinations and Job Selection ...... 373 M. E. Stan and S. Shah

Research on the Effect of Landscape Pattern by Rural Land Circulation based on GIS Analysis — A Case Study of Tongziyan Village, Wusheng county ...... 382 Ya-Qiong Xu, Yong Wu and Lei Wang

An Empirical Study on Factors Affecting the Cash Dividends of China’s Listed Companies - Based on Year 2014 Data on Publicly Listed Construction Companies ...... …395 Shan Liu and Ru-Yu Li

xvii A Study on Silver Stock in Britain ...... 401 X. Ji

Price Analysis of Land Rent, Price, and Interest in Britain (1200–1700) ...... 406 H. W. Wang

A Case Study of Development Intervention Techniques: Job Design and Redesign ...... 412 Pei-Lun Ju

An Empirical Study of the Impact on the Export Competitiveness of Labor-Intensive Industries Affected by the Changes of Industry- Specific Exchange Rates and Producer Prices ...... 419 Jing Hong

Recommendation for the Cost Control of Foreign Trade Enterprises in RMB Cross-Border Settlement...... 431 Jing Zhang

Chapter 4. Culture 441

The model of Deformed Ancient Tower ...... 443 Jun-Er Ma, Meng-Yuan Li and Dong-Ming Li

Study on the Modern Folk Robes Shape and Structure Recovery ...... 450 Peng-Peng Cheng and Dao-Ling Chen

American Modernist Poetry under Intertextual Perspective ...... 459 Rong Yu and Wei-Yan Shen

Using Films to Promote Cultural Awareness in an EFL classroom ...... 469 M. H. Hu, Y. Y. Sun and Z. Y. Li

xviii Chapter 5. Social Science and Sports 477 The Empirical Study of Factors that Influence Housing Satisfaction — Case of Community in Foshan City, Guangdong Province ...... 479 Min-Jun Lan and Yong Wu

Stochastic Frontier Analysis of Dental Care Industry in United States of America ...... 488 Lei Chen

Optimal Sequence of Parallel Activities with Generalized Precedence Relations ...... 495 Han-Ying Wei and Zhi-Xiong Su

Analysis on the Characteristics of the Tactical Ability and Technical Skill of Chinese Women Table Tennis Rising Star Zhu Yuling ...... 502 Mei-Rong Wan and Liang Tan

Author Index 511

xix

Chapter 1

Management

OTO Collaborative Management Mechanism of Multimedia Equipment via Mobile Internet

Xue-Lian Hou† and Fa-Lu Xu

Electronic Teaching Office, State Grid of China Technology College, Jinan, Shandong, China †E-mail:[email protected]

The increasingly popular multimedia device greatly improves the teaching environment and enriches teaching resources. Therefore, an effective management mechanism is essential for facilitating equipment management. We researched and designed an effective online-to-offline (OTO) collaborative management mechanism utilizing the advantages of high mobility and immediacy of the mobile internet through QQ, WeChat and other software platforms. Consequently, we developed a specific management model for the effective and efficient management of multimedia devices. Keywords: Mobile Internet; Software Platform; Management Model; OTO.

1. Introduction The earliest OTO is a new type of e-commerce model; the main application is online marketing and offline business. Today is a mobile Internet era, OTO model has been widely used in online travel, booking tickets, car rental, HR training and other fields, and has huge development potential. With the constant optimization of multimedia teaching environment, and the enrichment of the teaching resources, also effective use of the mobile Internet, the design of online collaborative management mechanism, is an effective method for management of multimedia classroom. This text set about from the mobile Internet and its characteristics, analyses the application and development trend of online, in combination with the practical situation of college, design effective online collaborative management mechanism and implementation plan.

2. The Mobile Internet Era At the beginning of this century, mobile communication and Internet is leader in the development of communications and information field, in recent years, the combination of mobile and wireless network promotes the rapid growth of the mobile Internet. With the development of technologies such as cloud computing, big data, now we are in the outbreak period of the mobile Internet.

2.1. The mobile internet Mobile communications has experienced in two stages: mobile communication network access network, wireless network access network. When the

combination of mobile communication and Internet, then created a mobile Internet. The current mobile Internet refers to in a variety of wireless network as access network, through the mobile terminal access to the network [1].

2.2. The characteristics of the mobile Internet The mobile Internet has full popularity in people's life, work and other fields. It allows people to have a completely different experience from the desktop Internet users. By comparison, mobile Internet mainly reflects the following characteristics: 1) Mobility: With the continuous development of mobile terminals and its portability, and with the support of communication technology, people are no longer restricted in fixed network, and they can use all kinds of terminal to access to the network anytime and anywhere. 2) Integration of terminal: With the support of the wireless network, mobile terminals gradually develop into a powerful platform, such as media, video, video playback, communication, etc. Based on its characteristics of portable, it will also be integrated with more and more functions [2]. 3) Personalized: Mobile communication and Internet have the ability, such as orientation, personalized portal, which makes mobile Internet has become personal Internet with strong personalization [2]. 4) Limitations: Mobile Internet development is rapid, but limited by the mobile terminal, it also has its limitations, such as terminal processing power, battery capacity, system platform, and so on [3].

3. Application Status and Development Trend of OTO Mode

3.1. The present situation of the application of OTO OTO is a new phenomenon which based on the Internet. In 2012, Lee in speech said "we think OTO will change China in the future, once online and offline are connected, this is a huge explosive strength"[4]. So far, with its unique advantages, OTO mode has been widely used in various fields, with the development of mobile Internet, it shows great potential.

3.2. The development trend of OTO Early, OTO model applied in electronic commerce, only pay attention to the flow of information transfer. With all things implementation of the Internet, information flow and cash flow are realized the online operation, marked the O2O has entered a new stage[5]. At the same time, the rapid developments of the mobile terminal promotes the rapid expansion of electronic commerce, also 4

make the O2O service pattern began the transformation and upgrading, and gradually applied to more fields. Whatever in which application field, searching for online collaborative management mechanism is the inevitable trend of its development, also confirmed that the development of the O2O mode extensity of prospects. The current multimedia classroom management is saturated with the idea of online. In the era of mobile Internet, combined with the feature of the era of mobile Internet, with the help of software platforms such as QQ, WeChat, completed online notice issued, Failure notification, etc. While the actual equipment maintenance work, need to offline operation. This is the equipment management of OTO collaborative mechanism.

4. OTO Collaborative Mechanism As the campus expansion and rising in the construction of multimedia classrooms, multimedia classroom management style becomes the administrator’s a new direction to explore. On the condition of geographically dispersed, classroom number increased, and using personnel fluidity, effective management is important. At the beginning of the multimedia classroom building, mostly adopts enclosed management, to make an appointment in advance of the classroom, the administrator distribute key, and get recorded, most of things are small and complicated, many cases need to repeat the work, to a certain extent, it made the waste of manpower and time. Along with the continuous renewal of multimedia technology, the continuous development of communication technology, the widespread use of the Internet and the rapid development of mobile terminal, changed enclosed management method into the open, with the help of QQ, WeChat, space and other software platform support, OTO collaborative management mechanism based on the Internet is particularly desirable.

4.1. Open Management Here open management, refers to the use to make an appointment, keys, use the registration, etc. The current multimedia devices are using electronic lock or password to close or open the rack, with the unified central control system to control equipment, and it make equipment management convenient, provides the guarantee for the safety of the equipment. Advanced equipment make the enclosed management methods are no longer preferable, using the electronic key directly, especially use password directly, can avoid the trouble of issue keys, and saves manpower and time. Open management is one of the changes of multimedia classroom management style.

4.2. Online and offline operation After the open management, some jobs don't need to walk into every classroom, don't need to face to face with each administrator, such as notice issued, classroom equipment conditions, equipment used to remind, etc. We can use QQ, WeChat software platform support to do on-line operation. Some work is need maintenance personnel must be present, which is the offline operation. For multimedia classroom equipment management, a good online and offline operation scope, for the implementation of OTO collaborative management provide better guidance. 1) The online operation: In the process of management, online operation is usually notice, announcement, remind class event. Before centralized maintenance, notify the administrator tell them what need they to be prepared online, it will saves time and effort in the maintenance. Also, after handling the common faults, we can communicate with the administrators, to enable them to master the basic ability of maintenance and improve their practical ability. 2) The offline operation: Specific maintenance work need maintenance personnel must be present to implementation, so the adjustment of the equipment, software update, hardware change, fault judgment and resolved, these problems should belong to the offline operation.

4.3. OTO collaborative management In the whole management process, we need the effective collaboration of online and offline, to finish the operations of equipment operational. For example, before the detailed maintenance offline, through online communicate with the administrator, determine the necessary preparations and maintenance time, and then for offline concrete maintenance, this will also avoid unnecessary duplication of effort.

5. Conclusion OTO is based on the Internet, at the same time it also get along with the development of virtual community [6]. In multimedia classroom management, it just make full use of the advantages of the mobile Internet, if coupled with the characteristics and function of the virtual community, it will be to a great extent, improve the effectiveness of online management, better guarantee for the offline operation. So, OTO collaborative management system based on virtual community is worth to make further discussion.

References: 1. Zhi-Hui Xiao. The reviewed mobile Internet research [J]. Telecommunications Science, 2009(10):30–36. 2. Xiao-Hui Yu. The development and thinking of mobile Internet [J]. Telecommunications Network Technology, 2008(12):21–27. 3. Wen-Tao Kang. The research of mobile Internet’s development trend [J/OL]. Electronic manufacture, 2015(05). http://www.cnki.net/kcms/detail/ 11.3571.TN.20150428.1411.116.html 4. Yang Chen. OTO closed-loop of online marketing [J]. New Marketing, 2013(2):20–22. 5. Yu-Quan Zhang. The new development model of online collaborative research [J]. Computer CD Software and Applications, 2014(15):47–48. 6. Jun-Jie Zhou, Mei-Yun Zuo. The research of relationship between online interactions, population differentiation and the knowledge sharing [J]. Chinese Journal of Management Science, 2012(20):185–191.

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

Analytic Hierarchy Process and Fuzzy Assessment Method in the Application of the Risk Evaluation of Electronic Commerce

Chao Lin and Lu Ma School of Management, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Liuzhou, Guangxi, China E-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]

Due to the rapid development of the internet, there has been increased attention from researchers regarding the electronic commerce (e-commerce) risk and security issues. This paper utilizes the analytic hierarchy process combined with the fuzzy comprehensive evaluation method to analyze and evaluate e-commerce risk because it provides more reasonable and scientific findings than the traditional hierarchical analysis method to evaluate the e-commerce risk of enterprise M. Firstly, this paper establishes the risk evaluation index system of e-commerce. Secondly, the analytic hierarchy process and fuzzy comprehensive evaluation method was used to determine the weight of each security risk index and risk factors of fuzzy membership. Lastly, the safety risk assessment results were calculated and discussed. The results obtained demonstrated that enterprise M’s e-commerce system contains several weak links and thus further analysis for influence factors of e-commerce security risk should be conducted.

Keywords: E-commerce; Risk Evaluation; Analytic Hierarchy Process; Fuzzy Assessment Method.

1. Introduction With the advanced science and technology in the 21st century, e-commerce is almost geometric growth, such as Taobao, Dangdang, Jingdong and other e-commerce company, which had a strong impact on the traditional commerce way, changing people's consumption thought and way of shopping and bring the convenience and fast life. However, electronic commerce can not only gives opportunities but also brings risks. So, it's an important topic to study the risk of e-commerce in business and academic circles. E-commerce systematic information include confidential and core secrets, so the electronic commerce security problem is not only related economic security, but also related to the social security. Therefore, more and more people have attention the electronic commerce risk and security issues. Analysis various risks that may exist in the

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

electronic commerce, and to evaluate the risk, and take corresponding risk management and safety measures is particularly important. This paper use analytic hierarchy process and fuzzy comprehensive evaluation method to determine the weight of each security risk index and the risk factors of fuzzy membership through electronic commerce risk evaluation index system, and calculated the electronic commerce system safety risk assessment results. It can fills the traditional hierarchical analysis method and let the conclusion more scientific and reasonable.

2. Model formulation

2.1. The mathematical principle of the analytic hierarchy process Analytic hierarchy process method basic principle: the various elements of the evaluation system's relevant alternatives divided into several levels and the various elements of the same level in accordance with the elements of the upper layer judge each other and calculate the elements' weight, through the single and total level sequencing according to the maximum weight principle to determine the optimal scheme. The application of AHP to solve the problem generally includes the following 4 steps:

2.1.1. To establish the hierarchical structure model The involved elements use hierarchical ranking according to the analysis to the decision problem. The involved elements generally divided into three layers, the top layer is the target layer, the bottom layer is index layer and the middle layer is the rule layer.

2.1.2. To construct the judgment matrix One factor above level as the criterion and judge each two elements to construct Aa= judgement matrix () ij nn × , Where aij is the relative importance of elements ui

and u j on the accounting standards. Any judgment matrix should meet:

aij>0；； aaa ii == 1 ij 1/ ji. Usually use nine scale method to comparise all elements, the specific scale and its meaning are shown in Table 1.

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

Table 1. Judgment matrix and its corresponding meaning

Scaling The corresponding meaning 1 Through the comparison, the importance of the two factors of the same 3 Through the comparison, the importance of two factors in a slightly higher than another 5 Through the comparison, the importance of two factors in a significantly higher than another 7 Through the comparison, the importance of two factors in a strong higher than another 9 Through the comparison, the importance of two factors in the extreme higher than another 2,4,6,8 The two adjacent judgment value

2.1.3. Single level sorting and consistency check On the basis of the following formula for each judgment matrix to calculate the

maximum eigenvalue λ max and the corresponding eigenvectors W , the

component of the W is the corresponding weight. AW= λ max W. The main method are eigenvalue calculation method and eigenvector, such as anc, root mean square and power method. It mainly use the "anc method", the calculation steps are as follows.The first step is to normalize the judgment matrix according n ， to the column, which is aij= a ij /∑ ∑ aij , ij, =… 1, 2, n;the sceond step is to j=1 n ， sum the judgment matrix by row, it can get Wi =∑ aij , ij , =… 1, 2, n, sign j=1 T vector W′ =…[] ww12, , , wn ; the third step is to normalized vector W ′ , that n ，，， T is Wii= w/∑ w ik , =… 1, 2, n, the normalized vector W=…[] ww12,, , wn k =1 is eigenvector matrix;the fourth step: the calculation of the maximum eigenvalue n （）（） λ max = ∑ AWi / nwi . In the formula: AW i is the section I of judgment i=1

matrix A and characteristic vector W. Use the formula CI=− (λ max − n) /1() n to test the consistency of judgment matrix and the RI to test the consistency of the judgment matrix whether satisfied. The average random consistency index as shown in Table 2.

Table 2. Mean random consistency index

n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RI 0 0 0.58 0.9 1.12 1.24 1.32 1.41 1.45

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

2.1.4. The level of total ordering and consistency check The level of total ordering needs from the top to the bottom layer, and also need to check the consistency check. Assume that A layer has m elements, it can get

single level sequencing aa12,,… am ,, and its next layer B have n elements, for

Aj , its single level sequencing results is bb12,,… bn ,then the total order random nn consistency ratio of layer B is CR= (∑∑ ajj CI )(/) a jj RI , CI j means the jj−=11

consistency index of judgment matrix; RI j means the average random consistency index in the A layer corresponding with B layer. Similarly, when CR < 1.0 , it shows that the level of total ordering is satisfaction.

2.2. The principle of constructing model of fuzzy comprehensive evaluation method Fuzzy comprehensive evaluation is based on fuzzy mathematics, applying the principle of fuzzy transformation and the principle of maximum membership, a method of comprehensive evaluation for the "fuzziness". Its basic principle: first, establish evaluation matrix; second, do the fuzzy linear transformation; third, determine the index weights of the factors set; lastly, conduct the calculation of fuzzy comprehensive evaluation and conclude the level, that is

rr11 12 … r1n rr… r 21 22 2n B== WRo { w1,, w21 … win }=… {}b,, b2 b   ri1 rr i2 … in  O is fuzzy operator.

2.3. To establish the hierarchical structure model The index system in the electronic commerce risk evaluation should follow the following principles: system principle, scientific and objective principle. According to the above principles, this paper constructs the electronic commerce risk evaluation index system as Table 3:

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

Table 3. Electronic commerce risk evaluation index system

Target layer (O） Rule layer(C) Index layer(I)

Electronic physical layer security (I1) Technical security risk (C1) securing in network layer (I2) application layer security (I3)

Commerce administrative management (I4)

Safety risk management (C2) technical management (I5) risk management (I6)

Communication encryption (I7) Risk Network isolation and access

Communication operation safety risk (C3) control (I8) Intrusion detection, access control and audit (I9) Construction of laws and (I10) Infrastructure security risk Standard Construct (I11) (C4) The certification authority platform (I12)

3. Numerical analysis

3.1. To construct the judgment matrix Compared the index at the same level and shown the judge matrix as follows:

1 3 53  1/3 1 2 1 A =  1/5 1/2 1 3  1/3 1 1/3 1 According to the above calculation formula to calculate the maximum eigenvalue is 4.1331 and the corresponding feature vector after normalization is W = (0.3053， 0.4814,0.1415,0.1055),T according to the formula can get CI = ()()4.1331− 4 / 4 −= 1 0.0443, when n=4,RI=0.9, then calculate CR= CI/ RI =<0.0492 1.0, so the consistency of judgment matrix is satisfied. The index layer with respect to the judgment matrix criterion layer as shown below:

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

1 32  1 24  1 35  1 23  AA====1/3 1 5  1/2 1 3  AA 1/3 1 3  1/2 1 4  1  2  34   1/2 1/5 1  1/4 1/3 1  1/5 1/3 1  1/3 1/4 1  Similarly, according to the formula described above, we can get the weight coefficient of each evaluation relative to criterion layer. After the calculate, we

TT can get WW12==(0.2146，， 0.2043 0.2305), ( 0.1632， 0.2533，0.52 5)1 W3 =

T T (0.2246，， 0.2203 0.2084), W4 = ()0.1261，， 0.1602 0.1289 .

3.2. To calculate the weight of each index layer The combined weight of each index factors by calculating related to the target layer is I = (0.0655，，，，，，，， 0.0624 0.0704 0.0786 0.1219 0.2511 0.0318 0.0312

0.0295，，， 0.0133 0.0169 0.0136)T

3.3. To conduct the consistency checking Check the consistency of the total ordering again and according to the consistency test formula: we can get nn

CR=(∑∑ ajj CI )(/ a jj RI ) =<0.0427 1.0 jj==11 This shows that the consistency of the total ordering is satisfactory. The calculation results can be obtained that the electronic commerce system security risk is mainly from the application layer security risks, threats existing in the network layer and risk management, while the risk in the construction of laws and regulations and PMI platform is minimum.

3.4. To implement the fuzzy comprehensive evaluation This paper assessed the risk degree of each index in the field of electronic commerce risk through experts from the field of electronic commerce. We can the evaluation matrix from the experts, then we can normalized it to get the fuzzy membership degree matrix. Finally, the fuzzy comprehensive evaluation results are as follows: B = [0.0531，，，， 0.1054 0.1186 0.4094 0.131 ]5 At last, we can get the final risk indicators about this enterprise as shown in Table 4:

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

Table 4. The evaluation results of the risk of the electronic commerce of the website

Relatively low low Medium High Highest Technical security risk 0.16 0.14 0.34 0.36 0.06 Safety risk management 0.03 0.10 0.22 0.32 0.36 Communication operation safety risk 0.05 0.36 0.19 0.17 0.35 Infrastructure security risk 0.17 0.05 0.27 0.39 0.18 The overall risk assessment results 0.0532 0.1051 0.1182 0.4093 0.1312

3.5. The analysis of evaluation results According to the principle of maximum degree of membership, we can see from the above assessment results, the overall evaluation results in a higher risk of membership degree is 0.4093, the evaluation of the high risk of membership is 0.1312, the two add up to 0.54, it can be seen as the probability of 54%, therefore we can draw the risk grade of e-commerce in the enterprise is high, that there are still some weak links in e-commerce security system. Therefore, it is necessary to further analysis the influence factors of e-commerce security risk, in order to reduce or avoid these risk factors.

4. Conclusion Based on the above analysis,we can draw a conclusion that the risk grade of e-commerce in this enterprise has some weak links in e-commerce security system. Therefore, it is necessary to further analysis the influence factors of e- commerce security risk, in order to reduce or avoid these risk factors.

References 1. Holloway J. Managing your technology risk[J].Futures:News, Analysis & Strategies for Futures, Options &Derivatives Traders, 2011,33(7). 2. Chen Xinghao. A Research Based on Fuzzy AHP for Multi criteria Supplier Selection in Supply Chain[D]. National technology university, 2012. 3. Zou B. A goal-driven approach to assessing the usability of an E-Commerce system. Cutter IT Journal[J], 2013（4）：25–34. 4. Yong Jin Kim, G. Lawrence Sanders. Strategic Actions in Information Technology Investment based on Real Option Theory[J]．Decision Support Systems，2013(33)：1–11.

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch02

5. David GW., Birch. Risk Analysis for Information Systems [J]. Journal of Information Technology (Rutledge，Ltd.), 2014(7):44–53. 6. Eloff L.L.J.H. Electronic commerce: the information security challenge [J]. Information Management & Computer Security, 2014 (08).

A Study of Human Resource Management Based on Game Theory

Min Wei1 and Lu Ma2a Management School, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Liuzhou, P. R. China 545006 E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

Today, people are aware of the role of human resource management in the enterprise at the advent of the knowledge economy. It becomes particularly important and gets more and more attention by enterprise. However, at present, the system of human resource management of China is not perfect. There are many problems in the process of the selection of personnel, recruitment, training, motivation and other processes, resulting in the enterprise can not effectively select and retain qualified personnel. Now human resources management has become a hot topic of scholars and business discussion. This paper is based on the science perspective of game theory and discussing issues related to the game theory in the human resources management process of Chinese enterprises in detail. At the same time, this paper proposes appropriate countermeasures of Chinese enterprises based on current development, and raises an important guidance to our human resources management.

Keywords: Game Theory; Recruitment; Training; Performance Appraisal.

1. Introduction With the rapid development of economic globalization, the competition of multinational enterprises with domestic enterprises and domestic enterprises with domestic enterprises becomes increasingly fierce, which will undoubtedly promote the enterprises to strengthen human resources management efforts. In the knowledge society, the strength of the competition among enterprises has largely become into the competition of human resources [1]. Even human resources become strategic resources. The pros and cons of human resources depend on the level of the development of human resources. If an enterprise can recruit and retain talent has become a decisive factor to success in the competition. To study the problems of human resource management and improve the human resource management system based on Game Theory for enterprises is imminent.

2. Definition of Concept The term "human resources management" comes from the book of "HR functions", written by Wright Barker and published in 1958 [2]. He is the first to regard human resource management as the basic management functions to

elaborate. In the knowledge society, human resources management already gets much attention from entrepreneurs and scholars. In the study process, many scholars who are from China and foreign country believe that human resources management should be divided into generalized and narrow. The so-called generalized human resource management is constituted by its theoretical basis, microscopic application and market competition. The narrow human resource management is different from the generalized human resource management. It is defined at the perspective of a specific definition of the division of labor, including the recruitment of human resources, training, evaluation, motivation, promotion and other aspects. There is a strong explanatory power to establish a model at the micro aspects of human resource management and to analyze it with Game Theory. So many domestic and foreign scholars study human resource management in recruitment, performance measurement, training, motivation and other applications of Game Theory [3]. Game Theory can be defined as: the process that groups or individuals make their own decisions and choose from the allowed all policies and behavior separately or simultaneously, and ultimately obtain the corresponding return based on intelligence and information that they obtained under the constraints of certain conditions and environmental [4]. Game theory is generally constituted by the game participant, game information, game strategy, game order and the benefits of game players.

3. The Application of Game Theory in Human Resource Management

3.1. Application in recruitment That recruitment is the key process to the human resources management, as well as it is the primary task. Enterprises can select excellent talents for enterprises effectively through recruitment, thereby enhancing the power of innovation and improving their efficiency. Therefore, the success of recruitment determines the survival of enterprises. However, since the available information for the companies and job seekers is asymmetric in the process of recruitment, so there are many immoral and unfair phenomenons during the recruitment inevitably. First, in order to be selected successfully, the candidates will try their best to package themselves, even taking some deception [5]. During the recruitment, the companies cannot master of the personal circumstances, the quality of professional, professional knowledge, professional skills about new employees correctly. At the same time, employees only know very few for the companies, such as the internal salary

conditions for businesses, promotion, the development of the situation, the level of enhance space and the level of business. So, naturally a situation of similar to game formed between businesses and job seekers [6]. On the one hand the job seekers will try to cover up their own shortcomings and deficiencies. At the same time they make their best to close the businesses to get more business information. On the other hand, in order to obtain more and more real information about the job seekers, the business will examine candidates through various interviews and written tests.

Table 1. Two behavior choices by job seekers

Job seekers Not cheat Cheat

Trust (8,8) (-16,16) Enterprise Mistrust (-4, -4) (0,0)

As shown in the table: job seekers and businesses respectively have two kinds of behavior to choose, namely deception and do not cheat, trust and mistrust. If job seekers do not cheat, and companies choose to trust, the two sides have eight units; if candidates choose not to cheat but companies do not trust, the businesses and job seekers lose all 4 units; if job seekers chose to cheat and the companies have chosen to trust, the companies will lose 16 units for this behavior, job-seekers will get 16 units; if job seekers choose fraud and companies have chosen mistrust, the parties are 0 units.

3.2. Application in performance appraisal The so-called performance appraisal is the evaluation of work performance to employees during the working process [7]. In this process, the decision-maker is the game player who participates in the evaluation, and performance of employees is the object of the game, the results of the final evaluation is the interests of the Game Party [8]. 3.2.1. The analysis of model Here we will analyze the decisions that employees and directors make and the benefit related the decisions.

(1) When both employees and directors take collaborative decision-making, HR department can obtain the evaluation results to make proper treatment. The benefit of employees and directors in charge of decision-making is 4 utility units.

(2) When employees use collaborative decision-making, but directors take uncooperative decision-making, HR department may take the opinion that tend to employees. So that the results of evaluation is in favor of employees, which can be counted as eight utility units. At the same time human resources department draw the conclusion that directors failed to complete duties, thus affecting the performance evaluation and the promotion of directors , which can be counted as -1 utility units. (3) When employees take uncooperative decision-making, but directors take cooperative decision-making, the supervisor's opinion makes a larger proportion in the process. HR department think that the employees lack of professionalism, thus affecting the performance evaluation of employees. This can be counted as -1 utility unit. At the same time it provides a good foundation for the promotion of directors, it may be counted as eight utility units. (4) When both employees and directors take uncooperative decision-making, HR department will incline to compromise strategy for lack of the necessary data source, thus they will make a decisions that is in favor of employees and directors in the short term. The proceeds of executives and employees in decision-making can be counted as 6 utility. Therefore, we can represent this Game using the payoff matrix of the employees and directors decision-making (Table 2):

Table 2. The payoff matrix of the employees and directors decision-making Directors Cooperative Uncooperative Cooperative (4,4) (8, -1) Employees Uncooperative (-1,8) (6,6)

4. Conclusion Today in the advent of the knowledge economy, people are aware of the role of human resource management in the enterprise [9]. It is particularly important and get more and more attention in enterprises. The paper have studied the problems of recruitment and performance appraisal aspects in human resource management based on the Game Theory. We find that the best strategy to employees and enterprises is cooperation. Only in this way enterprises and employees can achieve win-win situation. In addressing the problems in recruitment, companies should prevent adverse selection and unethical behavior that caused by information asymmetry through providing a platform for data integrity to record the applicant's credit.

Next, using the incentive mechanism. Because it is an effective measures to retain great employees [10]. So companies can adopt balance wage system and pay attention to provide some mental stimulation to meet the psychological needs of employees. HR department always evaluate the performance appraisal based on the actual performance of employees through deeply interviews and satisfaction surveys and other means. First, before the evaluation, the professional evaluation staff and the entire staff should be trained to make sure that both sides are clear to the processes, scope and significance of evaluation. Absolutely it requires that employees and supervisors have to make corresponding evaluation based on actual job performance. Secondly, we must ensure that all information should be treated as confidential information and the human resources department is responsible for the custody to protect employee privacy and avoid unnecessary disputes. During the course of the game employees and directors want to make their benefit maximize, so eventually they choose cooperative behavior while it will promote the development of enterprises [11]. With the theoretical advantages of Game theory, it can solve the problems of human resources management through modeling, and it provides a new idea for human resource management.

Acknowledgments

Work partially supported by Grant 2013J040404 of the Liuzhou Science and Technology Department of Soft Science Project.

References 1. Lingyu Sun, Hongqu He. The research of ecological industry chain based on evolutionary Game [J]. Qinghai Social Sciences, 2011,02: 96–101. 2. Qiu Ling, Luo Shuming. The research based on evolutionary game model of corporate governance ethics dynamic equilibrium stability [J] . Business Times, 2010, 26: 87 to 88. 3. Tan Weizhong. The problems and countermeasures of recruitment [J]. Oriental Culture, 2012, 09: 38. 4. Zhang Yu, Xing Zhanjun. Game theory and its application in the enterprise [J]. Enterprise Reform and Management, 2011,12: 19–20. 5. Ding XiaQi, Tian Kun, Yang Chungsen. Game Theory in Human Resource Management [J]. Human Resource Management, 2011,06: 32–34. 6. Gao Ying Ping, Shen Zhicheng. Enterprise Performance Evaluation Model Based on Game Theory [J]. Hebei University of Technology, 2009, (4).

7. Chen Jiaojiao. Executives of listed companies under the framework of game theory and behavioral countermeasures. [J]. Nankai Business Review, 2005, (3). 8. Zhang Wei-wei. Discussion on human resource management strategies in IT enterprises [A]. 2011 International Conference on Electronics, Communications and Control, 2011,3154–3156. 9. Wang Yan. Domain driven data mining in human resource management: A review of current research [A]. ICISE2010 - Proceedings, 2010:2631–2634. 10. Xu Xing, Hu Hao. Human resource management system based on factory method design pattern [A]. Information Computing and Applications-Third International Conference, ICICA 2012, Proceedings, 2012:43–444. 11. Ling Zhong. The study on Optimum University human resource management based on modern statistics analysis method[J]. International Journal of Digital Content Technology and its Applic; Jan2012, Vol. 6 Issue 1, p311.

Discussion on Human Resources Management Issues for SMEs — A Case Study of Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd.

Dan-Yang Wang1 and Lu Ma2 School of Management, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Liuzhou, Guangxi, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

The key to the competition competitiveness of enterprises is an effective human resource management, attained through human resource development and investment management. In this paper, Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. is used as an example to analyze the current human resource management system to identify existing problems. Several countermeasures are proposed to assist the development of effective human resource management in SMEs in the future.

Keywords: SMEs; Human Resource Management; Development.

1. Introduction With the role of human resources management in small and medium business management is becoming increasingly important, human resource management issues China is also gradually pay attention to it [1]. On the status of human resource management of SMEs in China were analyzed, researchers found several common human resource management of SMEs in China the following issues: Firstly, there is little emphasis on human resource management in many SMEs; secondly, some SMEs for weak human resources management concept, people recognize the importance of human resource management is not enough; thirdly, human resource management framework is not yet fully established, resulting in many systems and functions are not perfect; fourthly, fit more difficult to develop human resource management tools and ways for SMEs in China; the last domestic-related human resource management Professionals relatively scarce. This paper discusses the human resource management issues for SMEs by analyzing a case study of Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd.

2. SWOT Analysis of Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. Over the years, Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. broke Qinzhouhuang Huang Guzi "can not be down, can not yield, not fertilization," the three can not help on; succeeded in making "Huang Qin state," the brand out of the Qin County, Changzhi out towards China and the only one in Shanxi Province won the "China top ten enterprises grains processing" unit in 2012. The following from

the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats analysis Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. from four aspects. Advantages: "Huang Qin state millet" is known as "the best millet" and its market has not fully open, it can be said of its development potential is relatively large; now with the people's attention grains, counties, cities and provinces have also begun Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. pay attention to it, we can say that with government support; it Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. itself, it is a better corporate culture, and have their own plan for the future five years. Weaknesses: Since Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. is to pay attention to it especially in recent years, and its geographical area – Qin County is a poor county basic wage, the producer is not very high, resulting in the introduction of technology and hiring personnel with relatively poor. Opportunity: China is a huge market, many companies are utilizing the favorable conditions to develop. Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. should also take advantage of this condition, so the rate of increase in their market share, thereby enhancing their position in the industry. Threat: Because of its geographical area of economic backwardness, awareness of the idea of human resource management is also inadequate, and the lack of a sound and effective employee incentive and restraint mechanisms, which have led to a lot of deficiencies in human resource management this one. From the above SWOT analysis can be concluded that the biggest problem Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. far is the lack of presence of subjective human resource management. Only by addressing this issue, hiring more relevant aspects of talent to help expand its market share in order beneficial to improve their position in the industry. 3. Situation of Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. Human Resources Management Six modules of human resource management is an organic whole, are indispensable, but in a different phase, to adjust the focus of these six modules according to the actual situation of different enterprises [2]. 3.1. Human resources planning In human resources planning in this regard, Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. still have some plan, but the plan does not fully covers the scope, and the plan only simple short and medium term planning, but no long-term planning. There are some strategic planning, but not specific; planning and developing the system of planning and organization is not obvious; there are staff planning, but somewhat lacking in personnel demand and supply forecasting [3].

3.2. Staff recruitment and configuration Recruitment and configuration for an enterprise is very important. It can be said that talent is the soul of business and development [4]. Over the years, Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. through a combination of internal and external promotion of the introduction of talent, talent to create an open, fair and just working conditions and career stage. However, due to Huang Qin, Millet, Ltd. is located in the poor counties Qin County, economically backward, leading to poor remuneration and other benefits, so to recruit staff undergraduate or higher is more difficult.

3.3. Training and development Training and development for an enterprise is very important link. At present, Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. in training and development investments are not many. For the training and development of senior staff is still relatively focused on, but for ordinary staff training and development as well as awareness of the intensity is not enough, resulting in many ordinary employees their jobs and job requirements are not particularly familiar with [5].

3.4. Performance management From the needs of enterprises, and the need for managers to manage and staff need three personal growth point of view, performance management is very important [6]. Performance management this regard, Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. for senior management personnel is more important, but the degree of importance for the management of staff is not enough, can lead to many employees do not understand their own good, to discover their own problems, thus affecting the development of enterprises.

3.5. Pay and benefits management Compensation and Benefits is one of the core human resource management, employees want equal pay, employees will be able to feel like this fair, this way it can for the future development of the employees have a strong incentive [7]. On the pay and benefits issues, since Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. Qin County in this poverty-stricken counties, their pay and benefits compared to other industry peers is not particularly good. Thus leading to the company's employees, mostly from the county and the surrounding counties, difficult to recruit highly educated, high-level talent.

3.6. Labor Relations Management For businesses, good labor relations, to promote the production and enhance shareholders' equity. Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. for the management of labor relations is more important, and in accordance with working hours and minimum wage. However, due to staff workers congress and other institutions not know the place, so I do not make full use of its resources.

4. Countermeasures of Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. Through the company's human resources management analysis can be found due to the Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. in Qin County, this poverty-stricken counties, resulting in their pay and benefits compared to other companies in the same industry is not particularly good. It is for this particularity, led to the company at the time of recruitment, recruiters are not able to promise high wages, high benefits, thus making the hiring of highly educated, high-level talent is difficult, resulting in a serious brain drain problem. And due to the small size of the company, less capital, talent shortage, plus the poverty-stricken counties in this particularity, resulting in the implementation of its human resources management it is more difficult. In addition, the company human resources development and training in this aspect can be said that the investment is very small, and then the staff can not be trained in time when the need for training, which affects the performance of employees. In addition, the company's human resources management system is imperfect, the first human resources planning in post management system is imperfect, leading to the other five modules can not play its role well.

4.1. To establish a scientific human resources management concepts Human resources management Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd., largely due to human resource management awareness managers weak, do not pay attention to their cause. So in order to change the status quo of human resource management, we must first change the concept of managers, aware of the level of allowed quantity and quality of human resources is a decisive factor in how much the survival and development of. Realizing its importance on the basis to establish a people-oriented concept. On this basis, to human resources management system gradually perfected.

4.2. The establishment of an effective recruitment system Recruitment of a direct impact on the quality of other follow-up work can be

smoothly carried out. Therefore, recruitment for an enterprise is essential. Only by establishing an effective recruitment system, in every aspect of recruitment regarded good relations, from requirements analysis, responsible for recruitment, recruitment process to staffing, must strictly be able to do part of the recruitment process that basis.

4.3. Increase investment in training and development Enterprises should increase investment in training and development to provide more training and learning opportunities for staff, for example, can be induction training for staff and a variety of job training. Through effective training can improve employee quality of self, so that employees can work even easier, thereby enhancing the competitiveness of enterprises. In addition, the importance of staff training is also a good means of established talent pool. For employees, training is also an effective incentives.

4.4. Improve the incentive mechanism In order to ensure a certain degree of compensation and benefits, Maslow's theory suggests that human needs are physiological needs first, so salaries and welfare is paramount; and mental stimulation as well on this basis. First, to ensure that performance evaluation fair, reasonable; second, to create a good corporate culture; third, to be good managers and supervisors, peers and subordinates communication to achieve management effectiveness.

5. Conclusion Since Qinzhouhuang Millet Co., Ltd. small-scale, less assets, talent shortage, plus the poverty-stricken counties in the objective reasons, resulting in its human resources management cannot very well. However, because of this, we have to be more subjective reasons for the settlement of its human resources management, and constantly improve the business environment, discover, develop, use, retain existing talent; full use of its advantages and opportunities, enterprises can achieve sustainable development and enhance the competitiveness of enterprises.

Acknowledgments

Work partially supported by grant 2013J040404.

References 1. Nada Zupan, Irena Ograjensek. The Link Between Human Resource Management and Company Performance [J]. Journal of East-West Business, 2004, 101. 2. Jesus Perdomo-Ortiz, Javier Gonzalez-Benito, Jesus Galende. An analysis of the relationship between total quality management-based human resource management practices and innovation [J]. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 2009, 205. 3. Inas Khayal, Amro M. Farid. Axiomatic Design Based Human Resources Management for the Enterprise Transformation of the Abu Dhabi Healthcare Labor Pool[J]. Journal of Enterprise Transformation, 2015, 53. 4. Damianos Giannakis, Michael J Harker, Tom Baum. Human resource management, services and relationship marketing: the potential for cross- fertilisation[J]. Journal of Strategic Marketing, 2015, 236. 5. Audra I. Mockaitis, Lena Zander, Helen De Cieri. Special issue of International Journal of Human Resource Management: The benefits of global teams for international organizations: HR implications [J]. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 2016, 271. 6. Shoeb Ahmad. Green Human Resource Management: Policies and practices [J]. Cogent Business & amp; Management, 2015, 21. 7. Ali Farazmand. Innovation in Strategic Human Resource Management: Building Capacity in the Age of Globalization [J]. Public Organization Review, 2004, 41.

Study on the Influence Factors of Small and Medium Enterprises on the Usage Intention of Mobile Information Platform — Based on TAM and UTAUT Integration Perspective

Chao-Yan Wu School of Management, Chongqing University of Technology Chongqing, China E-mail: [email protected]

In the wake of the rapid development of mobile internet, this paper studies the influence factors that affect the use of mobile information platform for small and medium enterprises (SMEs). Through the analysis of statistics based on 237 samples of SMEs questionnaire survey responses, we demonstrated that perceived usefulness and perceived ease of use have positive impacts on the adoption attitude towards mobile information platform, which in turn has a positive effect on usage intention. Therefore, subjective norms and the platform’s public image positively influence the SME’s usage intention.

Keywords: SMEs; Mobile Information Platform; TAM; UTAUT.

1. Introduction With the rapid development of mobile Internet, mobile information platform has also been paid more concern and attention, mobile information platform not only changing the way of personal social and lifestyle, but also affecting the production, service, transaction and other aspects of the enterprise participate in the competition of in the Internet economy, which becomes the important means for enterprises to gain the right of discourse in industry. The mobile information platform using mobile phone as access carrier, which is a real social relationship based media platform. It provides a new channel for small and medium-sized enterprises to publish product information commodity promotion implementation. In the current study, the main researches focus on technical support of platform, platform characteristics and the influence of service quality to individual choice or willingness to use. It is lack of attention to corporate users. Facing the research problem of mobile information platform in the enterprise user groups , this paper takes the SMEs in China as the research object, and try to construct a using model of influencing factors of the small and medium-sized enterprise which will use the mobile platform. And confirm the relationship between the variables by empirical research method, the research conclusion would providing advice to mobile information service business for acquisition and retain the enterprise customers.

2. Research Hypothesis

2.1. The research hypothesis based on TAM Studies have shown that perceived usefulness first impact attitude then influence using willingness through the attitude. Kim constructed the mobile network usage intention model based TAM and believed that because of the majority of users of the mobile information service is individuals; they are both information technology user and service consumers. So the usefulness in progress of adoption is the determinants of using information platform. There is a perceived ease of use effect usage intention through attitude. Venkatesh shows that, under the background of some organizations and non-governmental organizations, perceived ease of use has been shown to have directly influence on the adoption attitude, more; perceived ease of use can indirectly influence usage intention through adoption attitude. Based on above mentioned, this paper puts forward the following hypothesis: H1: The perceived usefulness of mobile information platform has a significant positive impact on adoption attitude; H2: The perceived ease of use of mobile information platform has a significant positive effect on adoption attitude; H3: The adoption attitude on mobile information platform has significant positive effect on SMEs usage intention.

2.2. The research hypothesis based on UTAUT The UTAUT model suggests that social influence is an important factor which affecting the usage intention and the conclusions is supported by empirical research of Hsu and Lu. Social influence is composed of two parts: subjective norms and image. Subjective norms refer to people will listen to views from the important one of them and take their recommended. In the SMEs choose mobile information platform, not only solicit opinions of consumers, and the choice the information platform easy to accept by consumers or with the use of a preference. SMEs using mobile information platform, the main purpose is to shape corporate image, product information transmission, brand promotion and the implementation of the marketing activities. So in the process of choosing mobile information platform will examine and evaluate the image of the platform in the consumers’ impression to seek the mobile platform whose image is matched with their corporate image. They try to format the spillover effect of the two

sides between cooperation. Based on above mentioned, this paper puts forward the following assumptions: H4: The subjective norms of mobile information platform have significant positive impact on social influence; H5: The image of mobile information platform has a significant positive effect on social influence; H6: The social influence of mobile information platform has significant positive effect on SMEs usage intention. The relationship between the variables can be expressed as the following theoretical model (Figure 1).

Perceived usefulness Adoption Perceived ease attitude of use Usage intention Subjective norms Social influence Image of platform

Fig. 1. The theoretical model of SMEs’ usage intention on the mobile information platform.

3. Empirical Study

3.1. Measures According to the scale of Davis, we measure perceived usefulness form increased degree of SMES’ work performance by mobile information platform. By adapting the questionnaire of Dishaw & Strong, we use three items to measure perceived ease of use. Subjective norms are measured by a three-item scale adapted from Liu & Chen. The platform of image adapted Hsu & Lu. Adoption attitude comprehensive reference to literature of Dishaw & Stong and adapt to the questionnaire of Hsu & Lu to measure social influence. According to the scale of Davis, we use three items to measure use intention. The

questionnaire survey required respondents writing a mobile information platform name which they frequently used, as the judgment standard of the validity of questionnaire. The other items were adopted Likert scale to score (1 for strongly disagree, 7 is completely agree).

3.2. Sample and data collection According to the convenient sampling principle, we collect data for SMEs in different cities in China, respondents are mainly marketing or market managers, because of they have a complete understanding of the strategy of mobile information platform. We issue 309 questionnaires in survey stage and take back 288 questionnaires. We reject incomplete or detail tendency questionnaire, finally there are 237 valid samples have be retained, the effective recovery rate was 76.7%. Through statistics the adoption of mobile information platform, we found that the mobile information platform which enterprises frequently used including Sina micro blog APP, Wechat, Tencent QQ APP and MOMO et al., in which Sina micro blog APP accounted for the highest proportion of 35.3%.

3.3. Reliability and validity analysis By evaluating the internal consistency of measurement, the research checks the reliability of measuring scale, which is a measuring method of evaluating the homogeneity between the multi-items or the indicators. The research also uses composite reliability (CR) to estimate the reliability of each variable. Table 1 shows that α values and CR values are all more than the standard value 0.70. We use Amos 17.0 to build the measurement model and adopt confirmatory factor analysis (CFA) method to test convergent validity of scale. On the basis of goodness of fit is well, we further test the standardized factor loading. The results show that the factor loading and average variance explained (AVE) of all items are above 0.5. To test the discriminate validity, we compared the correlation between two latent constructs with the square root of AVE. The results shows, at the 95% confidence interval, the absolute value of the correlation coefficient between the variables were less than 0.4, the absolute value of the square root of AVE is greater than the correlation coefficient in the row and column, the result shows that the measurement of the discriminate validity is obtained.

Table 1. The results of measure reliability and convergent validity test.

Construct Items Loading CR α AVE PU1 0.789 PU2 0.719 Perceived usefulness 0.841 0.836 0.571 PU3 0.699 PU4 0.810 PE1 0.775 Perceived ease of use PE2 0.726 0.822 0.820 0.607 PE3 0.833 SN1 0.811 Subjective norms SN2 0.752 0.826 0.822 0.613 SN3 0.784 PI1 0.865 PI2 0.793 Image of platform 0.901 0.896 0.695 PI3 0.824 PI4 0.851 AT1 0.817 AT2 0.762 Adoption attitude 0.851 0.847 0.589 AT3 0.733 AT4 0.756 SA1 0.687 Social influence SA2 0.835 0.816 0.812 0.597 SA3 0.789 WU1 0.673 Use intention WU2 0.725 0.762 0.758 0.517 WU3 0.756

3.4. Hypothesis test To verify the theoretical model that contains a number of research hypotheses, we first estimate the parameters of structural equation model. We choose the method of maximum likelihood model to judge the goodness of fit between model and data. Furthermore, we adopt absolute index, relative index and parsimony index to judge the quality of structural model according to multiple evaluation criteria. Absolute index shows χ2/df=1.866, GFI=0.923, RMSEA=0.053. Relative index and parsimony index shows CFI=0.931, TIL=0.932, PGFI=0.687. The goodness of fit of model is acceptable and we can test the path coefficients between the variables. On the basis of result of goodness of fit is satisfied, we further examines the research hypotheses proposed in theoretical model. The results are shown in Table 2. At the TAM level, perceived usefulness and perceived ease of use have positive relationship with adoption attitude of SMEs for mobile information platform, H1 and H2 pass the test. The adoption attitude of SMEs has a positive impact on use intention for the mobile information platform. At the UTAUT

level, the subjected norms and image of platform have positive effect on social influence of SMEs, so H4 and H5 are supported. At last, the social influence of SMEs has a positive impact on use intention for the mobile information platform.

Table 2. The path coefficient of conceptual model and hypothesis testing results.

T value Hypotheses Estimate Results (p value) H1: Perceived usefulness→ Adoption attitude 0.256 3.211 (***) Supported H2: Perceived ease of use → Adoption attitude 0.275 3.417 (***) Supported H3: Adoption attitude → Use intention 0.553 6.869 (***) Supported H4: Subjected norms → Social influence 0.318 4.012 (***) Supported H5: Image of platform → Social influence 0.198 2.721 (**) Supported H6: Social influence → Use intention 0.368 4.384 (***) Supported Note: ** for p<0.01; *** for p<0.001.

4. Conclusion This paper based on the purpose of publish information of SMEs and the characteristics of the mobile information platform, constructing the research model of SMEs’ use intention for mobile information platform through integrating TAM and UTAUT. The mobile information service providers should improve the perceived usefulness and perceived ease of use of the SMEs, increasing the use process and after the use of the attitude. At the same time, the mobile information service providers should pay more attention to the internal and external factors that affects the SMEs social impact perception, paying attention to develop image platform and construction.

References 1. F. D. Davis, Perceived Usefulness, Perceived Ease of Use, and User Acceptance of Information Technology, MIS Quarterly.13, 3(1989). 2. V. Venkatesh, M. G. Morris and G. B. Davis, et al. Acceptance of Information Technology: Toward a Unified View. MIS Quarterly. 27, 3(2003). 3. H. W. Kim, H. C. Chan and S. Gupta. Value-based Adoption of Mobile Internet: An Empirical Investigation. Decision Support System. 43, 1(2007).

4. C. L. Hsu and H. P. Lu. Why Do People Play Online Games? An Extended TAM with Social Inﬂuences and Flow Experience. Information and Management. 41(2004). 5. M. T. Dishaw and D. M. Strong. Extending the Technology Acceptance Model with Task-technology Fit Constructs. Information & Management. 36, 1(1999).

An Evaluation of Regulations Regarding Ethical Leadership and the Influence on the Psychological Security of Employees

Qing-Quan Pan and Xiao-Wei Lu

Economic and Management school, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Liuzhou, 545006, P.R. China E-mail:[email protected], [email protected]

The recent unethical behavior of large and medium enterprises have created a crisis of social mistrust, thus ethical leadership has gained increasing attention from researchers. There have been numerous discussions on the research of ethical leadership connotation, casual factors and results, etc. This paper discusses the positive adjustment effect that ethical leadership has on psychological security using traditionalism and LMX, hence providing a potential research direction for future works on ethical leadership.

Keywords: Ethical Leadership; Psychological Security; Traditionality; LMX.

1. Introduction In recent years, business ethical problems have been broken out in large and medium-sized enterprises. The public begin pay attention to the ethical behavior. Undeniably, managers’ ethical behavior has a big impact on the staff behavior. In view of the important position of ethical leadership, the antecedent of ethical leadership and the consequence variables has become a hot issue of research1.Studies have found that ethical leadership is significant positive related to organizational citizenship behavior, employees' psychological security, etc. In addition, Chinese traditional culture emphasis on morality and courtesy and righteous. In this situation, administrators need to improve their moral quality and build the model of ethical to influence subordinates. So as to establish a formal or informal relationship that closely related to mutual trust and respect to maintain the development of the organization, thus traditional and LMX may play an important regulating role. On the whole, this paper gives a detailed review on ethical leadership, employees' psychological security and traditionality, the function relationship in LMX.

2. The connotation of ethical leadership and the impact on employees' psychological security

2.1. The connotation of ethical leadership and correlative research Before 2005, the definition of ethical leadership is not clear. Brown 2 et al. built an ethical leadership scale. They believed that ethical leadership refers to the

leader as an example of all employees, and shows the morality, corporate identity, normative and rational behavior in enterprise, and supervise subordinates to perform it through communication and system formulation. Zhang 3 defines that ethical leadership as a moral man who has the qualities of integrity and fair, and also setting clear standards. The studies of Brown2 et al. have found that ethical leadership could strengthen their care for employees and integrity as a leader, and then has significant impact on employee job satisfaction, etc. As stated above, it can be speculated that ethical leadership with honest and trust worthy, two-way communication and the behavior of caring can improve employee psychological safety awareness. In addition, due to the influence factor of employee's gender, age, and education level, it leads to the different of traditional between employees. Thus, the impact on employees' psychological security from ethical leadership may be affected by the traditionality.3

2.2. Ethical leadership and employee psychological security Psychological security originated in the research of organizational change, it refers that when individual shows themselves to others, they believes their impression, evaluation and career are not subject to negative perception.4 Kahn 1 after systematically studied the connotation of psychological security with a particular emphasis on the role of psychological security under the group level. The scholars called it team psychological safety, and this study provides a foundation for subsequent empirical studies. However, in view of the length limited, this paper mainly study the psychological security of individual level. According to the Maslow's hierarchy of needs, people's security is on based on his physiological needs they have been met, An3 points out that the psychological security could meet the feeling of the demand about someone— now or in the future. In order to keep pace with rapid development of market, enterprises often generate transforming strategies. However, the series of uncertainty will make some changes about employees' psychological.4 With a good atmosphere of psychological security could make staff more rest during work, there will reach higher achievements and more innovative behaviors. A high level of psychological security, employees could be given free play space and not affected by other people’s gossip.3 In other words, the psychological security could build better ethical atmosphere in the team, also could make more employees confidence and have better interpersonal relationship with their colleagues. Ethical leadership has set an example for employees. More specifically, ethical leadership’s work bases on their morality. Their moral will not affected by other factors such as interests. Thus ethical

leadership attach more importance of honest and trustworthy, and also will be more respect for employees. When superior and subordinate have high quality of communication and mutual respect, the organization will have a high trust level. A moral leader will show all kinds of moral quality not only in the work, but also will adopt different ways of management to promote ethical behavior within the team. When your team have such a leader, employees can be perceived ethical conduct is regarded.2 The perception could help employees to reduce the risk of matters related to their expectations. Therefore, ethical leadership can help improve the staff's psychological security.2

3. Adjustment analysis of Traditionality and LMX

3.1. Adjustment of traditional between ethical leadership and employee psychological security

3.1.1. The connotation of traditionality Although China has been experienced thousands of years historical changes, most Chinese people values and personality characteristics were still influenced by traditional Chinese culture, and affects the relationship between the staff and the organization.3 The values of traditional Chinese people have Chinese characteristics, and so do cognitive and behavior. They are generally based on work nature or social roles given by others for work and do other activities.4 Traditionality, some scholars define it as cognitive attitude and behavior patterns which is formed by individual under the influence of Chinese traditional culture. Liu5 et al. think that obsession of hierarchy of high traditional employees relatively strong, namely has absolute obedience and respect for authority. On the whole, this part defines "traditionality" as concept of this thesis, it defines that personal cognitive and behaviour under the influence of Chinese traditional culture.5

3.1.2. Adjustment of traditional between ethical leadership and employee psychological security An old Chinese saying goes, fish begins to stink at the head, so the management style and moral quality of leadership will have great influence on employees. Confucianism occupy the most important role in Chinese traditional culture, it has produced profound influence to Chinese thought and behavior. Nowadays, if organization leader regulate their own behavior as the gentleman to cultivate

one's morality ethics, and standardize organization staff, they will manage the whole team well. The traditionality of Chinese often shows that the subordinate accept superior's instructions without a murmur. High traditional employees abnormally compliance to this code, and it is not easily challenged the decision of the leadership. Due to high traditional employees more likely to show anxieties and worries such as I will be looked down upon by others, and my leader will dissatisfaction with my job, and these anxieties and worries show the subordinates obey of leadership and emphasis on interpersonal relationships in a way. As a result, this paper can infer that for high traditional workers, following every resolution of leaders will strengthen employees' psychological security from ethical leadership. Low traditional employees means ethical leadership has moderate effect on this kind of employees' psychological.

3.2. LMX between ethical leadership and employee psychological security adjustment Leading Members Exchange (LMX) theory was purposed in 1972, after that, there has been a large number of scholars to explore it. Graen and Cashman 6 indicated that, any enterprise exists informal social exchange process between leaders and their subordinates. The theory believes that: attitudes of leaders show differences when they cope with subordinates, so the quality of leader — member exchange relationship will be different because of the limiting factors such as resources, energy. Leaders will establish different quality of leading members exchange relationship. When subordinates with high compatibility in personality characteristics of leadership, it is easier to become "insiders", who could get more authorization, support and trust from leadership. However, most employees as "outsiders". Numerous studies have confirmed that the high-quality LMX means that in leadership and subordinate most of resources that can be exchanged. At the same time, employee with a high quality of LMX will show the behaviour out of range in the organization more than itself because of the high psychological security. High quality leading members exchange relationship could easier to have the cognition of "insider".5 Undeniably, high-quality LMX can make employees feel more confident.4 From the perspective of the Attachment Theory, high quality of LMX could help leader make more trust from their subordinate. Emotional attachment to leadership, and improve the psychological security.4

In the future, organizations will face more instability and low job security environment, ethical leadership has gradually become the important factor for members to access to psychological security. Ethical leadership should be to create a stronger organization atmosphere that could improve employees' psychological security, in favor of encourage employees to innovation and promote teamwork.5

3.3. Ethical leadership and employee relationship model of psychological security

Traditionality

Ethical leadership Psychological

LMX

Fig.1. Relationship model of ethical leadership and psychological security.

4. Conclusion As is known to all, China is promoting Confucian culture, so China is a high power distance country. However, with the deepening of the reform and opening up, people's ethical consciousness, obedience and respect for authority idea has great change, which is more different with past situation.6 In recent years, with frequent business scandals, ethical leadership has become one of the focus point of the leadership behavior research. The study found that high ethical leadership has stronger influence on traditional employees’ psychological security. The significance of this study is that: Firstly, the organization can use an ethical leadership model to improve employees’ psychological security. Ethical leadership, however, the employees respect and support staff in all aspects, pay attention to two-way communication. This style of leadership, for the traditional staff, will provides higher psychological security; Secondly, enterprise need to pay attention to the influence of Chinese traditional values. In view of traditionalism has already been entrenched, it is impossible to eliminate traditionality completely. But it could break through traditional employees' worried, and lay a foundation to improve employees' psychological security.6 Thirdly, the organization should pay attention to use high-quality LMX employees' psychological security. The traditional Chinese society has always had a high level of power distance, the materiality of employees' psychological security need to be valued. Additionally, ethical leadership is a leadership model

that regarded by most people. Managers should be set up good moral example and promote the moral level of the team. In addition, enhance employee psychological security, it is necessary to development organizational innovation, but need some empirical test if explore.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by National Natural Science Foundation of China (NSFC) “The study of based on entrepreneurial team members of APIM dynamic evolution that trust each other and its influencing factors” (71162026); the fund of Guangxi University of Science and Technology (03081577).

References 1. Liang J. and Farh J L. Psychology antecedents of promotion and prohibitive voice behavior：A two-wave long examination. Academy of Management Journal，No.55(China, 2012),pp.71-92. 2. Brown M E, Trevino L K and Harrison D A. Ethical Leadership: A Social Learning Perspective for Construct Development and Testing. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes,Vol.97 (America, 2005), pp.117-134. 3. Zhang Y J. The influence of ethical leadership to employees’ CWB: from social learning and social exchange perspective. Journal of Business Economics, No.12(China, 2012),pp.23-32. 4. Liang J. Ethical Leadership and Employee Voice: Examining a Moderated- Mediation Model. Acta Psychologica Sinica, Vol.46(China, 2014), pp.252- 264. 5. Liao J Q, Zhao J and Zhang Y J. The Influence of Power Distance on Leadership Behavior in China. Chinese Journal of Management, Vol.7 (China, 2010),pp.988-992. 6. Wu L Z, Liu J and Liu G. Abusive Supervision and Employee Performance: Mechanism of Traditional and Trust. Acta Psychologica Sinica, Vol.41(China, 2009),pp.510-518.

The Application of 3D Printing Technology in Modern Clothing Design

Xiao-Hua Lin School of Fashion and Art Engineering, Minjiang University Fuzhou Fujian China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

As 3D printing technology advances, it not only meets the individual needs of human consumption but also provides a wider space for clothing design. This paper focuses on the advantages of 3D printing technology and describe its application in modern fashion design for the purpose of bringing more diverse design for the modern fashion design.

Keywords: 3D Printing; Modern Clothing; Design and Application.

1. Introduction Known as additive manufacturing, 3D printing technology is an important product of the digital age. Based on the principle of three-dimensional digital model, it innovatively merges information, biology, materials with control technology. In 3D printing, successive layers of material are formed under computer control to create an object which is the perfect combination of a variety of materials. With a good design concept and design process, 3D printing makes it possible to simplify the manufacturing process and quickly and cheaply produce goods. No matter how complex the products are, 3D printing technology can manufacture them and ensure that the end product is a desired form of the design. 3D printing technology is applied to a variety of fields quickly and it has achieved a series of remarkable breakthroughs. Additive manufacturing sets no limits in geometry and complexity of three-dimensional design and thus it can create a more innovative and beautiful shape, close to the natural form. With its unique manufacturing process, it gives our lives meaning of the times.

2. The advantages of 3D printing technology in modern clothing design Unlike traditional time and cost expended clothing production which is time and cost consuming, 3D printing technology has the advantages of high efficiency, high precision, zero pollution, finally bringing new impetus to the modern apparel industry.

2.1. To reduce garment production cycle and costs With the use of 3D printing technology, combined computers with laser 3D printing materials through the clothing CAD, real clothing will be soon printed out; and species diversity also has the feature of free production cost. That is to say, product cost and the cost of printing the same product is basically the same with that of printing different products. At the same time, it realizes the variety of products and meanwhile it saves the production cost of finished products to a great extent. Compared with traditional printing and dyeing industry, the use of 3D printing is equivalent to 20% of the amount of labor when completing the same amount of work. 3D automated production reduces the cost of equipment and personnel for a large number of companies, greatly saving production costs and reducing the production cycles.

2.2. Personalized design 3D printing technology is not restricted by modeling, materials and equipment and therefore it offers more possibilities and enforceability for fashion designers’ fantasy ideas.The use of 3D printing inks in leather, silk and other fabrics allows the designers to print out the desired patterns through specialized software. Without the restriction of external factors, the imagination of the designers can be fully aroused and more personalized and imaginative works will be created.

2.3. Provide accurate “tailor-made” Accurate three-dimensional scanning provides technology for a perfect fit and it also reduces the cost. Body scanning and 3D-modelling techniques allow you to produce the design which meets customer demand, greatly improving the specificity of apparel, functionality and comfort.

2.3.1. Environmental protection 3D printing inks can be directly used to print colorful patterns on the fabric. Besides, it prints fast and it can finish a tube of cloth in 3 minutes. What’s more, compared to the traditional printing and dyeing enterprises which emit wasted water to pollute the environment, using 3D printing inks does not generate waste water and scrap, greatly improving the utilization of the fabric and protecting the environment.

3. Use in the Dress Design On the Paris Fashion Show in early 2013, 3D printing fashion show presented by Holland fashion designer Iris van Herpen and Materialise jointly, brings a strong visual feast. 3D printing perfected the three-dimensional shape which is difficult for traditional cloth t to interpret and bring a new visual impact. It is different from the clothing produced by traditional mode in the style, pattern, and fabric. Compared with the traditional garment production, 3D printing technology breaks the limitations of the conventional manufacturing process, styling, materials and equipment. In a sense, it makes the modeling more close to the original design requirements. As shown in the picture is U.S. Continuum Fashion studio's first 3D printing dress, it caused a great sensation in the fashion world.

Fig. 1 3D printing evening dress 3.1. Use in woman's underwear design

Fig. 2 3D printing underwear Fig. 3 3D scanning accuracy

Modern women are concerned about their own "inner beauty", especially underwear with adjustable function being more sought after by consumers. Although modern underwear designs have different styles, each woman's waist size, hip size, leg length are not the same. And the size of the required adjustment of underwear will be greatly different. The traditional customized

underwear is finished after repeated measure in order to constantly adjust the design of custom-made underwear. Besides, it needs to be constantly adjusted to the changing size of the underwear. All in all, its shortcomings are as follows, firstly, the production process is complicated. Secondly, the underwear lacks comfort in traditional mode of producing. Thirdly, exclusive custom is more expensive, and thus ordering customized underwear can not be widely used by ordinary women. Through 3D printing technology, we can utilize the precise 3D scanning equipment to scan the body (Figure 3) and the data obtained can be used to design the underwear towards a perfect fit of our customers (Figure 2) which greatly improves the comfort and specificity of the underwear. On the other hand, it also reduces the cost of producing greatly.

4. Use in Clothing Accessories 4.1. Application in the design of shoes and socks With the improvement of people’s living quality, people begin to pay more attention to their accessories. Due to differences in individuals’ bones and walking habits, it is difficult to buy a pair of shoes that fit their feet perfectly. For that reason, people have to adapt their feet type and exercise habits to the limited shoe sizes and models in the market. The emergence of 3D printing technology can change that situation to a large extent. Designers can take advantage of 3D printing technology, designed and manufactured according to the customer's own needs, preferences and habits, shoe design models (including shoes designs, shoes structural bonding), from the beautiful shoes, novelty and comfort features meet customer needs, thereby achieving a tailor-made product.

Fig. 4 3D printing fashion sandals Fig. 5 NIKE 3D printing sneakers

Designers can take advantage of 3D printing technology, designed and manufactured shoes according to the customer's ow needs, preferences and habits. Designers can design shoe models (including shoes designs and shoes

structural bonding) to meet customers’ needs with the features of beautiful outward appearance, novelty and comfort, thereby achieving a tailor-made product. For example in 2013, NIKE companies use 3D printing technology to design shoes that are lightweight with strong grip, realizing greater degree of sneakers ‘movement’ function. Socks that are produced by using 3D seamless printing not only have breakthroughs in graphic but also can eliminate the troubles that many threads exist in the opposite of the socks and eliminate the gap in the socks. Socks and pantyhose are no longer plagued by these threads and gaps and they are improved a lot both in style and comfort.

4.2. Application in jewelry design Filigree, chisel, inlay and gold-plating are commonly used crafts in traditional jewelry design and these crafts have a very high requirements to the skill of the producers because they have to accumulate rich experience and sophisticated skills to reach the production level. Thus the production of the traditional jewelry is limited by the skills of the producers and production level. 3D printing sets no limit to the materials and it can employ a variety of material such as metal, glass, ceramics, resin, etc. And these materials can be powdered, liquid or filamentous. 3D printing can produces new materials by mixing different proportions of materials. For example, it can use adhesives by cutting in layered manufacturing to achieve stereo lithography and use UV ultraviolet irradiation liquid photosensitive resin layer by layer deposition modeling. Such techniques can be applied into a fine production of the jewelry and the phone shell design and they can also be used to directly print precious metals replacing traditional jewelry production process. In the traditional craft of silver filigree enamel bead, filigree is one of the key techniques. 3D printing technology can complete the process of the tread surface of silver filigree decorative patterns, which greatly improves the accuracy and delicacy of patterns lines and effectively shorten time and more diverse exquisite filigree decorative patterns can be designed by computer software. "Filament", as one of the palace art, draws precious metal into filament with eight procedures of knitting, weaving, pile, base, pinch, fill in, save and welding. This sophisticated process requires producers to have superior skill of its craftsman and have enough patience and carefulness because any mistake can lead to the failure of works. The use of 3D printing technology has the characteristics of high accuracy, repeating and no welding. And it can be used to create beautiful filigree shape. Blending these fine filament shape into modern

jewelry designs will popularize the palace art which is enjoyed by noble people in the palace. Besides, 3D printing of high precision is a good solution to the materials accurately fitting problems in the traditional making process of Jinyincuo and Jinxiangyu. The first step is that through the computer drawing, the joint part of the precious metals and jade is drawn. And then the digital engraving machine and a 3D printer print the jade and precious metal at the same time. With the rapid prototyping technology, it is able to achieve the desired effect on the yield and quality.

Fig. 6 The inset jades jewelry 5. Conclusion So far, 3D printing technology plays an increasingly important role in many fields. However, as its application is influenced by many factors such as modeling, design, it is difficult to use it widely. Besides, additive manufacturing, starting with today's infancy period, requires manufacturing firms to be flexible, ever-improving users of all available technologies to remain competitive. With the rapid development of science and technology and continuous innovation of digital age, 3D printing technology is bound to combine with existing technologies more closely, maximizing the sharing of design outcome. I believe in the near future, 3D printing technology will directly affect designers’ design ideas. And finally it will constantly break through the traditional manufacturing and finally change the world.

References 1. Ka Gan, Ji-Yao Ling. Art morphology, (Translated by Jin Yana, Shanghai: Stanford University Press, 2008).

2. Yue-Di Liu, After the end of art, (Nanjing: Nanjing Publishing House, 2006). 3. Yan-Zai Yuan, In the design of the design, (Jinan: Shandong People's Publishing House, 2006). 4. Li Zhou, Yue Mi, Long-Lin Zhang. Costume design analysis based on 3d printing, (Decoration, 2014:05). 5. Ting-Ting Liu, 3d printing technology in the application of the custom- made gift packaging design, (Science and Technology, 2015:05). 6. Jian-Hua Qin, 3d printing technology in the application of the culture and art, (The visual design, 2015:05). 7. Rong-Hong Zhang, Wei Xiong, Nan Zhang, 3d printing technology in the application of traditional process performance research, (Gems and precious stones, 2015:01). 8. Yong-Hu Wang, Guang-Hong Yang, 3d printing technology's influence on the visual design, (Journal of Chongqing Institute of Technology Social Science Edition, 2015:02). 9. Chao-Gang Wu, The application of 3d printing technology in the modern clothing, (In science and technology, 2015:05). 10. Cong-Cong Wang, Yi Zhang, 3d printing technology application and development prospect, (Printing engineering, 2014:04). 11. Yu-Tong Zhang, 3d printing technology in the application of the product modeling design, (Design practice y, 2014:05).

The Influential Effects of Narcissism Leadership and Its Managerial Implications

Qing-Quan Pan and Fang Yu

Economic and Management school, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, YuFang, Liuzhou,545006, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

There are increasing numbers of leaders associated with narcissism, be it in academia, business or politics. Although narcissistic leaders have defining qualities such as being bold, innovative and visionary, their negative characteristics such as arrogance and lack of empathy for others are despised by others. This article reviews the relevant literature on narcissistic leadership, and explores the characteristics and influence of narcissistic leadership, and on this basis, provides directions for future works on narcissistic leadership. Keywords: Narcissism; Narcissistic Leadership; Leadership Effectiveness; Negative effects.

1. Introduction The famous American magazine "Science" has reported that narcissist give the impression that 50% higher than the restrained person in the workplace. Narcissists rely on their extraordinary passion and self-confidence to express their cognitive ability and the world, more easily convince the audience to win recognition from leaders, and thus contribute to their promotion, easier moving towards leadership positions. Currently the study on narcissistic leadership has become a new focus of led research. However, the relevant study effect that the narcissistic leadership for the organizational impact is no agreement. For example, some scholars have pointed out the high narcissists have a lower transformational, while some scholars have found that there is a positive correlation between high levels of narcissism and transformational leadership [1]. In fact, the narcissistic leadership has both the destructive narcissistic side, and constructive side. In order to play an active role narcissistic leader, it requires in-depth grasp and analyze the characteristics and influence of narcissistic leadership, which is provided by this paper.

2. The Connotation and Measurement of Narcissistic Leadership

2.1. The connotation of narcissistic leadership The most famous study on the relationship between narcissism and leadership is scholars Ketsde which use psychological analysis tools to explore is the subjective world to describe the origin of narcissism and related behavior. Narcissistic leaders more infatuated with power and success, exaggerate their importance, lack of compassion and concern for others. This excessive self-affirm lead them hold relatively confident and optimistic attitude to risk, performance results what makes decisions to the various schemes will go to have a overestimated tendency. From the point of view of trait theory, narcissistic leaders in pursuit of power and others admiration as motivation, less or even disregard empathic concern of the organizations or agencies which he leaders, but also has ultra-charismatic leadership and vision [2]. However, Pittinsky exceeded previous scholars’ thought and give a new definition: narcissistic leaders selfish behavior of treating themselves as center is much higher than what he contributed to the leadership organizations or groups, they often take different actions of leadership according to their own needs. In order to make the theory more operational, Gerard (2010) proposed the five elements of narcissistic leaders, namely charisma, intelligence suppression, fraud motivation, egoism and pretend to care.

2.2. The measurement of narcissistic leadership At domestic and abroad, the measurement of narcissistic leaders mainly uses individual measurement of narcissism. The Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI) measuring narcissistic tool has three sources, that clinical diagnosis, narcissism diagnostic criteria (diagnostic and Statistical Manual of mental disorders, DSM), Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI). Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory narcissism is in the sub scale. The dosage form is mainly composed of DSM-III (diagnostic and Statistical Manual of mental disorders) and MMPI derived. Hogan (2009) developed "adventure" scale for narcissists’ features, applicable to boast large narcissists may also be used for vulnerable narcissism. Zheng Yong and Huang (2005), divided quinoa scale into two dimensions: overt and covert narcissism, form the narcissistic personality questionnaire. Zhou Hui (2009) according to the questionnaire, interviews and other methods, developed narcissistic personality scale that are applicable to the general Chinese

population, but can only measure the dominant feature on the surface of narcissistic person. Generally speaking, at present, the academic circles have not reached a consensus on the questionnaire of narcissism.

3. The Positive Effect of Narcissistic Leaders 3.1. Improve a good self-image of the leader Narcissistic leaders tend to pay more attention to enhance the personal image in life and work, such as dress more clean, more stylish, more grade, etc.. Some scholars had put into the study of narcissism in the president's speech analysis, the results found that narcissistic leaders are more attractive in the impression of people, and have the basic ability and quality of successful leadership — social skills, influence and appeal. Find by hard and thorough search, unique and innovative ability, cohesion, strategic vision, persistent pursuit and the courage of withstanding risks of narcissistic leaders created a good personal image. 3.2. Obtain a higher degree recognition of followers Narcissistic leaders have two unique advantages, that is, the rich imagination and the ability to call for a large number of followers [3], the organization should vigorously promote the two major advantages of narcissism. On the one hand, the rich imagination of the narcissism led them to see a more ambitious blueprint, a bold vision of the future, it are grand vision and extraordinary charm so that they get a large number of followers of the favor. On the other hand, followers are able to meet the demand of narcissistic leaders for praise and glorification, so it further strengthen Narcissistic leaders’ the self-confidence and firm of the future vision. This kind of good circulation has strengthened the affirmation and approval of the followers to the self-love leadership. 3.3. Have a stronger appeal to subordinates Excellent social skills and charisma of narcissistic leaders have strong appeal to others, which further strengthen the effectiveness of leadership. Studies have shown that narcissistic leaders not only play an active role in special circumstances, also has a positive role in stabilizing the environment, narcissists have self-confidence, courage, cohesion and co-ordination force and other leaders in the basic quality, giving form a natural leader model. In addition, narcissistic leader's vision, brave and decisive, bold and steadfast dedication to the pursuit of success, infected tissue and their team, so that the subordinates is full of vitality, not afraid of challenges and difficulties.

3.4. Improve business performance in crisis and change situations In 1986, Post pointed out that under the special conditions (organizational change, external and internal crises of organization), narcissistic leaders and teamwork of subordinate will bring beneficial results [1]. Studies have shown that when the enterprises are facing internal crisis or external threat, narcissistic leaders themselves have the spirits of highly confidence and bold pursuit of the future, so followers not because of enterprise environment to reduce the work enthusiasm. Narcissistic leaders are good at expressing their wishes clearly and boldly change the target-oriented, which have an important role to enhance the ability of the team to take risks.

4. The Negative Effects of Narcissistic Leaders

4.1. Destruction of superior-subordinate relationship Narcissistic leadership is good at using hyperbole to show off their success, and is easy to push the errors and failures to subordinates, such self-centered, contradict the views of subordinates, unwilling to admit mistakes and other characteristics of the leaders in long run will undermine their relationship with their subordinates [4]. In addition, some scholars also have suggested, in the leadership of the ruling narcissistic organization's environment, subordinates usually will increase with the leadership of the psychological sense of distance, it is difficult to generate trust and recognition of leadership, which greatly increases the staff turnover intention.

4.2. The increase of non-ethical behavior Some scholars have suggested that narcissists are arrogant, conceited, overconfidence, which make them a certain lack of moral sense. Therefore, Hornell and Fredericks think narcissistic leader is more working for themselves, that it is difficult to achieve the company vision and moral purpose [5]. In order to win the respect and praise of others, narcissistic leaders often regardless of any way to get the resources in some sectors, but rarely consider the cost. They rejected all views different from theirs, seek privileges. Some scholars have even suggested that narcissistic leaders are autocratic and they pursuit power and status, which lead to the generation of exploitation and unethical behavior.

4.3. Make more unnecessary high-risk decisions Narcissism is not only related to overconfidence but also irrelevant self-assessment. Leaders with high narcissistic traits like high risk and even viable option, they want to overturn the tradition, such selective interpretation of environment makes leaders more arrogant. At the same time, the high risk behavior of narcissistic leaders led to make the risk decision, and they often use deception, oppression and other means to their subordinates to lose their trust, which makes them in crisis or critical moment no one to communicate with them, then, they can only make decisions based on their own judgment, and ultimately lead to organizational performance decline.

4.4. The destruction of the good atmosphere of the organization Studies have shown that narcissistic leaders could undermine good organizational atmosphere [6]. On the one hand, in pursuit of goals, they often spared no expense in the image, bent on the pursuit of success, resulting in a serious lack of care from subordinates and leadership seriously. On the other hand, narcissistic leaders eager to get other people's praise, and be good at cultivating his cronies, which leads to loss of confidence in other subsidiaries. In addition, narcissistic leaders are not pragmatic and grandiose in terms of thinking, increasing the workload of subordinates to make significant changes in organizational performance challenges. In the long run, employees throughout the organization will tend to reject the bad news, filter real information, distort the facts to satisfy their collective sense of honor.

5. Management Revelation

5.1. Selection and appointment of narcissistic leaders Significance of reaching narcissistic leaders is to fully tap the potential advantages of narcissistic leadership to make it bring maximum benefit to the organization at the appropriate time and environment. Narcissistic leaders influence identity of subordinates and thereby affect turnover intention of subordinates [3]. Therefore, in the selection of leaders enterprises should be fully aware of leads’ characteristics weather suitable for the development of enterprises. If there have a high narcissistic leader, corporate boards should be avoiding disadvantages, and at the right time to control the power of narcissistic leaders, the adverse effects of control within a certain range to prevent enterprises suffered losses. Therefore, how to accurately measure various

aspects of narcissistic leaders’ qualities and make full use of these qualities to optimal state becoming particularly important, future research could more attention to this aspect.

5.2. The prevention and control of the negative impact of narcissistic leaders Ultra-narcissistic leaders’ cynicism makes employees prefer to flattery so that employees report only the good but not the bad, over time, employees in order to maintain their collective sense of honor will gradually become narcissistic, if each organization employees have narcissistic tendencies, which will lead the corporate culture also have narcissistic tendencies. This vicious collective narcissism brings bad influence to employees but also to the company's survival fatal hazards. Therefore, the negative impact on how to prevent and control negative impact of narcissistic leadership or how to teach employees do not blindly chasing the leader in the analysis and discussion from a certain theoretical and practical significance is important.

5.3. Concern the quality of financial reporting Narcissistic leadership and corporate finance have closely link. Financial Accounting verbal expression, behavior style and other characteristics resulted in the generation of narcissistic some unethical behavior, and enhance the degree of narcissism narcissistic leadership [4]. To support these views, succeeding scholars through Fortune 500 Companies Data, found that it exists a positive correlation between narcissistic the degree of leaders and EPS, and narcissistic leaders get good recognition and admiration of others through manipulation of subordinates and EPS indicators or disclosed accounting information. So we should pay attention to the company's financial statements of narrative narcissistic leadership whether exist the possibility of financial fraud.

6. Conclusion At present, research scholars put forward narcissistic leadership model, but still a lot of theoretical gaps to be filled, such as the relationship between narcissism and performance evaluation were made at different conclusions by different scholars. Inconsistent findings imply the possibility of presence for mediating variables and regulation variable. Future research still needs to conduct in-depth research and empirical test on the mechanism of narcissistic leadership impact on the organization, performance and the like.

References 1. Huang Yau Li, Li Lu leading research organization in the narcissistic Review [J] Foreign Economics and Management, 2014,07: 24–33. 2. Li Yu Meng deadly "narcissistic" CEO [J] China Private Technology and Economy, 2012, Z2: 128–130. 3. Zhang Tianbu. [J]. Health management cadres of narcissistic personality harm, 2014,02:89–93. 4. Wu Qing Feng, Gao Lin. Western research review and Prospect of narcissistic leaders [J]. Leadership Science, 2014,35:24–26. 5. Wu Qing Feng, Gao Lin. "Narcissistic" leading defense enterprise management [J]., 2015,03:41–43. 6. Ma Hao. Self love leadership [J]. Business (review), 2015,03:148.

The Construction of College Students’ Psychology New Management Pattern in the Network Era

Wei-Jia Meng and Han Du Aviation University of Air Force Changchun, China E-mail: [email protected]

With the advent of "Internet +" age, college students’ psychology is meeting more important changes than ever before. So how to improve the management level to the college students’ mental, build college students’ mental management mode to satisfy the needs of the times, strengthen college students’ psychological self-management ability and improve the psychological health level in the new period, these aspects become the important subjects to the college students’ ideological and political education work.

Keywords: Psychology; Network; Management; Pattern.

1. The Impact of Network to College Students’ Psychology

1.1. The demanding desalination in interpersonal communication by the virtual network Marx said: "the essence of man is the sum of all social relations” [1]. Network communication is not the traditional face to face communication, but an interaction where people can hear its sound and see its view with less authenticity. Although this manner can break the restrictions in real communication, it can create simplicity with a one-sided relationship. Long time for network communication will lead to college students away from the real world, escape from the reality of social interaction, and would rather look for warmth in the virtual world, which is not conducive to college students’ mental health.

1.2. The weakening of self-discipline by the network consciousness In the real life everyone is responsible to their actions, can manage their images, and have all sorts of credit system. But in the network it is lack of similar credit mechanism, and everyone is a virtual with a digital symbol form. And in communication both sides can not be sure of each other’s true identity. Then there is the possibility of no responsible or faking out another pair of image, and in reality it is a very different role. The situation that college students are lack of binding makes students’ individualism too obvious and causes the weakening of self-discipline consciousness [2].

1.3. The decline of thinking ability by the network convenience Network has very large amount of information, and it is easy to make some college students be excessive pursuit the “quantity” and ignore the quality, which lead to indigestion phenomenon. In a certain period of time the students receive limited information. If the input quantity of information is more than the normal accommodate quantity, the information will be overload. That can lead to be confusion, and the residual information will interference on college students’ learning and value orientation, eventually lead to the decline of thinking ability. Overall, the advent of network age makes the college students’ psychological produced some important changes. If they can not effectively control the negative effects, the mode of young people knowing the world, getting along with others, and the value orientation of dealing with problems would appear some situation that is not conducive to their healthy growth and development.

2. The Significance of Strengthening College Students’ Psychology Management in the Network Age

2.1. The connotation of college students’ psychology management The so-called psychological management, first is to help individual establish the right psychological cognitive models, thinking patterns, values and behavior; second is to create the harmonious individual growth situation providing groups and organizational factors which are conducive to the development of individual mental health; third is to provide effective support system for individual psychological response to various stress and pressure, maintain individual personality development, and promote the individual happiness index. In the college stage, the education subject makes college students’ psychological management education [3]. They follow the things development and the development of the students’ psychological characteristics, consciously and purposefully through various media to arouse students’ subjective initiatives, which makes them maintain a good mentality and improve their mental health ability, in order to realize the teaching goal and management. The purpose is, based on the research of the student individual and group psychological and in accordance with the law, to manage and make effective guidance, and make their desire, motivation merge together the teaching process. For improving the teaching effect it will have very good result.

2.2. The current college students’ psychological management way Psychological management is a kind of “soft” management, and once upon a time it belongs to the category of the ideological and political education. With the times progress, the importance of mental health has been generally acknowledged, and the students’ psychological management has also been more the attention for educators. Through the effective psychological management, it can make the students’ poor manner and negative psychological factors into the healthy and positive psychological factors in time. Nip in the bud, and it greatly reduces the probability of various potential psychological problems. For a long time, the college educators have developed some effective ways to psychological management. They include establishing the psychological files, making psychological health education and setting up special psychological consulting institutions and so on. However, in the network environment, the information source and information flow are controlled difficultly. Many factors, outlook on life and values that are not conducive to college students’ mental health, will also be constantly entered the view of the college students, and it leads to the college students’ value secularization be orientation and utilitarian. Traditional management ways focus on the external management, ignore students’ self-management, and fail to arouse young students to pay attention to the inherent motivation, and it is lack of an effective internal incentive mechanism for the college students’ self-management. Management innovation is the motive force that pushes forward the reform. Education reform and innovation not only put forward new and higher requirements to the teaching mode and teaching system, but also put forward new challenges to the psychological management concept in teaching institutions.

3. The Mode Construction Countermeasures for College Students’ Psychological Management in Network age The mainstream of contemporary college students’ psychological characteristics is positive, and the network impacting on their psychological are not serious and negative. On the contrary, the college students growing up in the network environment have certain ability to identify, and have unique psychological and behavioral characteristics. Colleges can fully grasp the psychological characteristics and behavior patterns for university students after 90, and can make into a more scientific and positive thinking in the process of college students’ mental health education [4].

3.1. The positive role of network in the psychological management Network age have the unique advantages that are fast information transmission, wide spread and large amount. Therefore, in the college students’ mental management practice, people can make the students contact and understand various information resources, and have better understanding and perception. And it is associated with their own actual situation and constantly improves themselves, which promotes college students’ personality quality to develop and improve. At the same time, for college students’ psychological management work the using of the network provides the more effective way and it promotes the psychological management activities smoothly. The Internet’s biggest advantage are equality and interactivity. It is different from China’s traditional education that eliminates the situation the teachers are on their high position with psychological difficulties in communication. The most significance is equality for students. With “dialogue” on the net, they dare to put forward their own opinions. Such psychological communication is respect for individual needs, and promote the online psychological education and facing psychological education to be cohesion and communication, and also promote the in-depth implementation of psychological education. For example, many college students have a lot of resistance to mental health counseling, and they are unwilling to let other students and teachers know [5]. Even if there is confusion, they are not active to seek teacher’s psychological help, either, which to a certain extent hindered the school psychological management work smoothly. However, under the network environment, schools can use the Internet to set up special BBS to help students solve various psychological perplexity, and teachers can also set up personal blog site and publish papers on the website about how to manage the psychological or put forward mental health problems, which provides effective way for college students to solve psychological confusion, and using the Internet it can spread mental health knowledge.

3.2. The importance of college students’ self- management ability training College psychological workers should construct humanistic management idea, change the traditional management idea and mode, and provide students with “influence”, “choice”, “service” and “guide” instead of “persuaded” and “preaching” or “indoctrination”, And they should “take the student as the center, and take the mental life as the center”, and promote students’ self-psychology management consciousness. Today’s students, facing school, ability training and 58

employment problems, are taking multiple pressure from themselves, family and society, so the net becomes “paradise” where students escape from reality and the virtual world of social responsibility. According to these characteristics, psychological education workers should encourage students to reflect on their own management pattern, and bravely face their problems in real life. Good self-management cannot be lack of a healthy reference frame. Good social support system is an important symbol of psychological health, and it is effectively the important measures for psychological management. Mental management workers should help students create a benign interactive interpersonal environment, and according to the students’ body and mind development characteristic, and by using the respective advantages together students in the communist youth league, student union and class committee they should carry out the second classroom activity with various forms and rich education significance, which let the students in the collective life form healthy personality and good communication skill, and let them realize when their own have psychological management problems, peer’s understanding and attention are the important way to solve the problem.

3.3. Improving the level of teachers’ psychology management Now at schools many teachers have many years of experience in the psychological health education but do not understand the students’ characteristics in Internet age, and the teachers are familiar with the network but do not make psychological phenomenon in management. So it puts forward a serious problem for the psychological management work in colleges and universities: if we can’t understand the characteristics of our management object along with the time development, how to achieve our desired teaching effects? So, on the one hand, it should make the students realize rapid promotion of self- psychological management ability by using the massive amounts of resources in net. On the other hand, our psychological management workers should be close to students and close to the era characteristic, to adapt to the new situation of psychological management needs. Only with a dialectical point to analyze the network’s advantages and disadvantages, it can make the managers’ ability and level match the situation of continuous development, improve management quality, and promote the ideal education effect in the college students’ mental management [6]. We have to strengthening the guidance of psychological management on the basis of the inherent advantages, and guide students to have stable and orderly study life whether in prosperity or adversity, through the management of the external environment impact and inner self psychological

debugging. That can help college students improve self-growth and self- adjusting ability, and promote the positive role on the road of life having more perfect personality.

4. Conclusion Overall, the good psychological management in the university education have strong appeal, penetration and driver. It can stimulate the students to give full play to their initiative, enthusiasm and creativity, and also it can promote the students’ innovative talents and improve the learning efficiency. So as the college educators, in the future people should strengthen the consciousness of mental management being combination of students psychological characteristics in network age, and attaches great importance to the subtle implicit effect on the students.

References 1. Young K S. Cyber-Disorders: The mental health concern for the new millennium. Cyber psychology behavior, 1999, 2(5): 475–479. 2. Chien Chou, Ming-Chun Hsiao. Internet addiction, usage, gratification and pleasure experience the Taiwan college student’s case. Computer & Education 2000, 35: 65–80. 3. Davis R A. A cognitive-behavior model of pathological internet use. Computers in Human Behavior 2001, 17(2): 187–195. 4. Hapira NA, Goldsmith TD, Keck PE, et al. Preliminary communication: Psychiatric features of individuals with problematic internet use. Journal of Affective Disorder, 2000, 57: 267–272. 5. Daantje Derks, Agneta H. Fischer, ArjanE. R. Bos. The role of emotion in computer-mediated communication: A review. Computers in Human Behavior, 2008, (24). 6. Robin-Marie Shepherd. Robert J. Edelmann. Reasons for internet use and social anxiety.

Determinants Affecting Staff Intention to Leave in Public Nursing Care Sectors

Shao-Yu Li International Language Center, Dayeh University, Changhua County, 51591, Taiwan E-mail: [email protected]

Pei-Kuan Lin* and Hien Thi Thu Nguyen Department of Business Administration, Asia University, Taichung City, 41354, Taiwan E-mail: [email protected]

This paper investigated the impacts of job satisfaction and job stress on turnover intention of Vietnam’s nurses. Quantitative research methodology was applied to the study and a research tool was developed based on relevant literature reviews. A total of 400 questionnaires were distributed to Vietnamese nurses in two public hospitals in Quang Ninh province, Vietnam. The findings revealed that that job stress and extrinsic job satisfaction had the most significant influences on turnover intention. The results of the study may provide valuable insights for hospital managers, nurses and researchers on tackling the turnover intention issue among Vietnamese nurses.

Keywords: Turnover Intention; Nursing; Job Satisfaction; Job Stress.

1. Introduction The healthcare market of Vietnam has been dominated by public hospitals. Many of them have long history of development and operations and enjoy a good reputation of that they have the best trained, experienced doctors in the country. However, more and more public hospitals are facing challenges posed by private hospitals-competitors. Regardless of reception of a great portion of governmental allocations, public hospital sectors still reported their small margin of profits around 5–10%. It is common for private hospitals to retain renowned doctors from public hospitals, especially in early years of their operation, in order to bring a number of the past patients of these doctors or attract new customers before they can build their own crew and clients. Furthermore, a lot of existing medical equipment and supplies in public hospitals are too outdated and deficient too meet the demands. Both doctors and nurses have to work under stressful and disadvantageous working environments.

* Corresponding author.

These reasons resulted in many hospitals’ staffs wanting to quit their job. Reducing turnover intention has become a pressing issue in healthcare sectors. In Vietnam, nursing staffs are severely lacking. A recent report made by Vietnam Ministry of Health in 2012 stated the ratio of doctors and nursing staffs was only 1:1.8; while a ratio of 1:4 was needed according to the recommendation of the World Health Organization. Many Vietnamese nursing staffs work with unfavorable working conditions, such as healthcare-associated infection and injuries, disrespect treatments, coping with patients’ frustration, shortage of involvement in making the decision, poor communication with management, low wages, poor benefits, and lack of adjustability in scheduling (Albaugh, 2003) [1]. All of these problems may increase turnover intention of Vietnamese nursing staffs. Based upon these observations, the present study sought to investigate whether job satisfaction and stress could predict Vietnamese nursing staffs’ turnover intention. It is hoped that the findings of this study may serve as a useful reference for current hospital managers.

2. Theoretical Framework

2.1. Job satisfaction and turnover intention Job satisfaction is an ambiguous concept, which is classified into two dimensions: Extrinsic and intrinsic job satisfaction (Cowin, 2002) [2]. Extrinsic job satisfaction includes the tangible facets of the job such as bonuses, benefits and wages, whereas intrinsic values comprise recognition, status, promotion opportunities, and other similar elements (Cowin, 2002) [2]. In healthcare sector, job satisfaction may have impacts on nurses’ decision to stay or leave the hospital. Nurses with low job satisfaction will be resulted in negative outcomes like higher turnover intentions (Ulrich, Krozek, Early, et al., 2010) [3]. Turnover intention of nurses was found strongly related with hospital’s incentives and compensation (extrinsic rewards) (El-Jardali, Jamal, Abdallah, et al., 2007) [4]. Tzeng (2002) also found that low emotional exhaustion, burnout and motivation impacted nurse’s turnover intention [5]. Therefore, the author suggested that job satisfaction could be a multi-dimensional construct and should consider both extrinsic as well as intrinsic factors to evaluate job satisfaction. Therefore, the present study predicted significant correlations between extrinsic and intrinsic job satisfaction and turnover intention.

2.2. Job stress and turnover intention Gupta and Beehr (1979) indicated that job stress can explain better turnover intention issues rather than the resignation itself [6]. According to their research, nurses who repeatedly deal with stress situations will wish to quit their current job without necessarily resigning because many external elements may disrupt the decision (e.g. husband’s/wife’s job, social fabric, etc.). Higher job stress can result in nurses tend to leave their current hospitals (e.g. Almalki, FitzGerald, & Clark, 2012; Battistelli, Portoghese, Galletta, et al., 2013) [7, 8]. Those authors’ researches suggested that the more stressful nurses perceive in their job, the more they want to leave their job. Based upon the above assertions, we predicted a significant correlation between job stress and turnover intention.

3. Methods The purpose of the present study was to investigate the influences of job satisfaction and job stress on turnover intention in Vietnam’s health sector. 400 nurses in two public hospitals in Quang Ninh province at the North of Vietnam were invited to participate in this study. The researchers developed a questionnaire based upon the review of literature. Some adjustments were also made in the survey for it to work in the present study. Concerning job satisfaction level of nursing staffs, it was measured using the 10 items adopted from Schriesheim, Powers, Scandura, et al. (1993), and Martins (2008) instruments [9, 10]. The assessment tool consisted of two subscales: Intrinsic satisfaction (5 items) and extrinsic satisfaction (5 items). The measure requires the respondents to evaluate their satisfied level for each item. For example, items include: “The chance to do things for other people (intrinsic),” “the pay” (extrinsic), “the amount of work I do” (extrinsic), etc. The respondents were asked to mark each item upon a five point Likert scale, where 5 indicates “very satisfied,” and 1 indicates “very dissatisfied.” As for nurses’ job stress level, it was measured using the 5 items of French, Lenton, Walters, et al. (2000) instrument [11]. The participants responded to those items upon a five point Likert scale where 5 indicates “always stressful” and 1 indicates “never stressful.” Finally, nurses’ turnover intention was measured using the 4 items of Solomon (2013) instrument [12]. The participants marked those items upon a five point Likert scale where 5 indicates “strongly agree,” and 1 indicates “strongly disagree.” All the survey items were originally stated in English, and were translated into Vietnamese for use in the study. The survey was sent to the formal respondents after a completion of validity and reliability examination.

4. Results As shown in Table 1, extrinsic job satisfaction (EJS) (β= -.506, t= -8.013, p<.001) had statistically significant influences on turnover intention (TI) of Vietnamese nursing staffs; while intrinsic job satisfaction (IJS), its relationship with TI was not accepted (β= -.027, t = -.783). Verifying job satisfaction overall (JSA), the variable had significant influences on TI (β= -.171, t= -3.764, p<.01). In terms of job stress (JSTR), it had highly significant influence on TI (β= .862, t = 18.985, p<.001).

Table 1. Regression analysis summary.

Variables Std. Coefficients β t-value Total R adj. R² Job IJS -.027 -.171 -.783 - 3.764*** Satisfaction EJS -.506 -8.013*** .772 .594 Job Stress .862 18.985*** Note. Dependent variable: turnover intention. **p<.01, ***p<.001. Greene, et al., 2012; Battistelli, Portoghese, Galletta, al., 2013) [15, 7, 16, 8].

5. Management Implications The results of this study confirmed that job stress was a dominant predictor for nursing staffs’ turnover intention, following that was extrinsic job satisfaction. High turnover intention rate will result in the financial costs for hospitals such as selection, recruitment, training new staff cost, etc. On the other hand, hospitals will suffer from losing a high valuable nursing staffs who has a high skills, abilities and knowledge or nurses who work in area where there is a labor shortage. This will cause negative outcomes for hospitals such as poor performance, productivity, and low benefits. Moreover, if nursing staffs become unemployed in a long time, this in turn places one of burdens on society. Therefore, reducing turnover intention in Vietnamese hospitals is the priority for hospital managers to consider. From the management views, the findings suggested that Vietnamese hospitals’ managers could provide more flexible scheduling for nurses. Providing reasonable shift schedules for nurses to arrange adequate time to ensure that they have enough sleep and time of rest will reduce nurses’ stress. Likewise, managers should offer a safe, respectful, incentive, and lifelong learning oriented organization environment and take action on appropriate complaints from nurses. They also can think about increasing nursing staffs’

motivation such as salary, bonus, promotion, etc. if nurses have satisfactory job performance. It is hoped that the above suggestions can offer some insights into Vietnamese hospitals to retain their valuable nursing staffs.

6. Conclusion The findings of this study indicated that extrinsic job satisfaction had significant influence on turnover intention. Intrinsic job satisfaction actually was not proved significant to nurses’ turnover intention, revealing that Vietnamese nurses of the present study did not consider much about skill usage, self-growth, and self- fulfillment factors when they had intention to quit the job. Instead, long working hour, low wages, poor benefits, etc. were seen to be the most dominant factors that frustrated nurses (Albaugh, 2003) [1]. Job dissatisfaction is an essential predictor of nurses’ turnover intention (Tzeng, 2002) [5]; hospital managers should motivate their nurses with more attractive salary, benefits, and the opportunity for promotion or growth to keep staffs stay at the hospital. Nurses will be willing to stay at the hospital in consideration of good benefits (Meyer & Allen, 1993; Chen, Hui, & Sgo, 1998) [13, 14]. Besides, the impacts of job stress on turnover intention was proved again in this study. Obviously, job stress is a key factor that can greatly result in nurses’ intention to leave. The awareness of a stress in working place provokes nurses to truly leave their hospitals (e.g. Han, Sohn, & Kim, 2009; Almalki, FitzGerald & Clark, 2012; Brewer et al., 2012).

References

[1] J. Albaugh, Keeping nurses in nursing: The profession’s challenge for today, Urologic Nursing, 23, 193–199 (2003). [2] L. Cowin, The Self-Concept of Nurses and Its Relationship to Job Satisfaction and Retention, (Unpublished PhD Thesis, The University of Western Sydney, Australia, 2002). [3] B. Ulrich, C. Krozek, S. Early, C. Hipps Ashlock, L. Marquez Africa, and M. L. Carman, Improving retention, confidence, and competence of new graduate nurses: Results from a 10-year longitudinal database, Nursing Economics, 28(6), 363–375 (2010). [4] F. El-Jardali, D. Jamal, A. Abdallah, and K. Kassak, Human resources for health planning and management in the eastern Mediterranean region: Facts, gaps and forward thinking for research and policy, Human Resources for Health Journal, 5(9), 1–12 (2007).

[5] H. M. Tzeng, The influence of nurses’ working motivation and job satisfaction on intention to quit: An empirical investigation in Taiwan, International Journal Of Nursing Studies, 39, 867–878 (2002). [6] N. Gupta and T. A. Beehr, Job stress and employee behaviors, Organizational Behavior and Human Performance, 23, 373–387 (1979). [7] M. J. Almalki, G. FitzGerald, and M. Clark, The relationship between quality of work life and turnover intention of primary health care nurses in Saudi Arabia, BMC Health Service Research, 12, 314 (2012). [8] A. Battistelli, I. Portoghese, M. Galletta, and S. Pohl, Beyond the tradition: test of an integrative conceptual model on nurse turnover, International Nursing Review, 11, 60–103 (2013). [9] C. A. Schriesheim, K. J. Powers, T. A. Scandura, C. C. Gardiner, and M. J. Lankau, Improving construct measurement in management research: Comments and a quantitative approach for assessing the theoretical content adequacy of paper-and-pencil survey-type instruments, Journal of Management, 19(2), 385–417 (1993). [10] H. Martins, Impact of Firm-Promoted Accreditation of Prior Learning Processes on the Worker-Organization Relationship: A Cross-Sectional Survey in Portuguese Industrial Firms (Master Thesis, Universidade de Coimbra, 2008). [11] S. E. French, R. Lenton, V. Walters, and J. Eyles, An empirical evaluation of an expanded nursing stress scale, Journal of Nursing Measurement, 8(2), 161-178 (2000). [12] O. O. Solomon, Influence of job satisfaction on turnover intentions of library personnel in selected universities in south west Nigeria, Library Philosophy and Practice (e-journal) (2013). [13] J. Meyer and N. Allen. Commitment in the Workplace. (Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE Publications, 1997). [14] X. P. Chen, C. Hui, and D. J. Sego, The role of organizational behavior in turnover: Conceptualization and preliminary tests of key hypothesis, Journal of Applied Psychology, 83: 922–931 (1998). [15] S. S. Han, I. S. Sohn, and N. E. Kim, New nurse turnover intention and influencing factors, Journal of Korean Academic Nursing, 39(6), 878–887 (2009). [16] C. S. Brewer, C. T. Kovner, W. Greene, M. Tukov-Shuser, and M. Djukic, Predictors of actual turnover in a national sample of newly licensed registered nurses employed in hospitals, Journal of Advanced Nursing, 38, 68–521 (2012).

Management Strategies for the Phenomenon of Dwindling University Students Enrollment in Taiwan

Pei-Chi Lii

Department of Management Sciences, Tamkang University, New Taipei City, 25137, Taiwan E-mail: [email protected]

Shao-Yu Li International Language Center, Dayeh University, Changhua County, 51591, Taiwan E-mail: [email protected]

Dwindling university student enrollment in higher education system is becoming an issue due to rapid fertility decline in Taiwan as shown by recent negative growth of college student enrollment since 2004. This study divided freshman enrollment around Taiwan into eight clusters by current ranking. In comparing historical student enrollment distribution data retrieved from Taiwan Ministry of Education with grouping system, This research made some predictions about the effects of the dwindling student candidate pool upon the enrollment distribution of upcoming school years. To cope with the issue, this research also provided current university managers with three management strategies to improve the situation. Keywords: Student Enrollment; Management Strategies; University.

1. Introduction Extensive expansion of the higher education systems in the developed countries is a common phenomenon for promoting education, economic, social, and cultural standings for their citizens (A1-Atiqu & Alharbi, 2009) [1]. Trow (2001) argued that the expansion of higher educational opportunity would be the most remarkable educational change since World War II [2]. However, such extensive expansion also brings out some related negative consequences, including uneven overall educational quality, higher unemployment rate for new graduates, loss of students’ motivation to study and employment competitiveness, mismatched employable skill requirements between academia and industries, as well as governmental regulations that blur individual university’s characteristics, etc. (Levy, 2010) [3]. In Taiwan, those current issues can be categorized into three areas of concerns.

1.1. International competiveness In view of competition of developed countries to attract international students into their respective higher education systems, Taiwan is apparently at disadvantaged position. Relative presence of international students within a country is a good indicator for internationalization, which will affect economic development, academic trend, society evolution, cultural interactions, and political interests (Levy, 2006) [4]. While competition for enrolling international students is getting into high gears among developed countries, Taiwan higher education institutions have less means in attracting international students.

1.2. Domestic impedances Ministry of Education (MOE) in Taiwan is a central regulatory agency for all aspects of education issues, among which financial funding to the higher education systems is its main tool of measure. However, MOE’s regulations have made most universities uncharacteristically lack of distinctive features. Without some unique school characteristics of their own most prospective students will just follow the statistical rankings of the universities.

1.3. Dwindling university students enrollment Dwindling university student enrollment in higher education system is also becoming a current issue due to rapid decline of fertility in Taiwan. Tuition income has been the major financial resource for most higher education institutes in Taiwan, but governmental regulations have set upper limit for tuition incomes in view of financial affordability of general public, as a result of which artificial limitation impedes the growth of higher education systems and further erodes even the sustainability due to the dwindling student enrollment (Chin & Ching, 2012) [5]. As illustrated in Table I, MOE forecasts that the prospective student enrollees in the higher education system will diminish from 275,616 in 2011 to 247,251 in 2016 and 178,059 in 2023, about 3.54% annually. Such negative student enrollment trend posts multifaceted issues for the higher education management, including restructuring academic and administrative organizations to save on expenses, and inevitably terminating some personnel employment as well. Some educational experts consider the negative effect of diminishing student enrollment will be most profound for private university sector since their financial dependence on the student tuition income is disproportionally higher than that in public university sector (Chou & Ching, 2012) [6].

Table 1. Freshman population estimated enrollment.

School Total freshman Real registration number Estimation minus Real year population (general (general plus occupational) registration number plus occupational) 2010 268,733 183,824 -84,909 2011 275,616 188,404 -87,212 2012 277,756 190,661 -87,095 2013 274,305 184,921 -89,384 2016 247,251 - - 2023 178,059 - - Source: Statistics Council, Ministry of Education, Taiwan, 2014

2. Analysis of Factors Affecting Student Enrollment Distribution among Universities in Taiwan

2.1. Student enrollment predictions for 2012-2021 Based on the statistics of MOE, this research used score analyses to further rank student enrollment distributions into eight groups for the academic year 2012– 2013. From historical student enrollment distribution data using our grouping system, it predicts the effect of the dwindling student candidate pool upon the enrollment distribution of upcoming school years. Table II depicts the ranking distribution of the incoming student enrollment for school year 2014. Our predictions of the effect of dwindling university enrollment up to school year 2021 is shown in Table III. H group will be dwindling from 2014 to 2015, and eliminated by 2016; followed by diminishing of G group in 2016 and eliminated by 2017. Starting from 2017 to 2019, about half of the F group will be lost, and by 2010 and 2011 most F group students will be eliminated.

Table 2. Freshman accumulation count for academic year 2014.

Group Cumulative Count Accumulation % A 12,593 11.98% A~B 22,125 21.05% A~C 30,844 29.34% A~D 44,444 42.27% A~E 53,739 51.11% A~F 75,535 71.84% A~G 89,237 84.87% A~H 105,148 100.00%

Table 3. Forecast of freshman enrollment count of each group.

School Estimated Differenceb Freshmen General Affected year freshmen enrollment university Groups countª count student count (≈ 50%) 2012 277,756 87,095 190,661 - - 2013 274,305 89,384 184,921 - - 2014 274,755 90,000 184,755 92,378 part of H 2015 270,961 180,961 90,481 most of H 2016 250,426 160,426 80,213 H + most of G 2017 235,846 145,846 72,923 G, H + ½ F 2018 247,925 157,925 78,963 G, H + ½ F 2019 238,667 148,667 74,334 G, H + ½ F 2020 210,410 120,410 60,205 G, H + most of F 2021 199,263 109,263 54,632 G, H + most of F Note: Table notes. a Source adopted from Statistics Council, Education of Ministry, January 2014. b cf. Estimation minus Real registration number in Table 1.

2.2. University management strategies in face of dwindling student enrollment population There are four devised university management tactics to deal with the dwindling student enrollment situation: For one thing, there is a natural migration desire for student to move up in ranking group during summer and winter semester recess. To prevent existing student population from migrating out, each academic department in the

university will make efforts to know and care for current students better and set up internship program during recess periods to make sure of fulfilling academic experience. In addition, such fulfilling academic experience will also attract other outside students to migrate in. Secondly, university departments may actively analyze the competitive advantages of each academic department in the university and enhance them fully. Take three other competing universities as targets and devise better strategies for attracting potential new students using SWOT analysis as basis. Thirdly, a university having long history of operation does not guarantee its survival in the competition of the newer universities, and tuition income alone is not enough to cover the university operation with inflation faction considered. Each academic department should have action plan to generate additional revenues such as adult education classes and academic- industrial cooperation programs. Finally, regional university needs to have better ties with regional high schools to bolster potential incoming students, and preventing them from going to other public or private universities with cheaper tuition charges.

3. Discussion The current number of higher education institutes clearly is not sustainable and needs to be reduced. But closing those unsustainable institutes will have very significant negative society impacts and consequences, including transformation of school buildings and re-assignment of entire educational staffs (Neubauer, 2010) [7]. Using unique score ranking statistics, the research offers three broad management strategies in conclusion to deal with the dwindling prospective university student enrollment phenomenon in Taiwan.

3.1. Adjust quantitatively of the prospective student enrollment Based on the total allotted prospective undergraduate student allocation from MOE, actively adjust the quantity of prospective student enrollment to best use of existing university resources. Freeze the current graduate student enrollment allotment and adjust the graduate academic programs to best showcase the academic strength within the university.

3.2. Widen the source of prospective student supply Actively widen the source of prospective student supply internationally, especially prospective students from mainland China, and officially recognize the academic credentials from China’s education institutes. International student

enrollment in Taiwan has expanded from 14,255 students in 2006, to 16,120 in 2007, and 17,684 in 2008. After recruiting new students from China in year 2011, international student count has grown from 25,032 in 2011 to 33,206 in 2013.

3.3. Widen the source of prospective student supply MOE shall establish detailed rehabilitation guidance action plan that is consistent with its published rehabilitation guidance framework to assist failing institute to improve educational quality and school operation, and protect legal benefits of university staffs and students in order to nurture the failing institution back to its health. In case of failed institute, MOE shall provide clear guidance for existing students to transfer to similar neighboring universities in accordance with their wishes, protects affected university staffs legal rights in early retirement, public workers’ annuity and re-employment assistance, and release financial assistance for flexible use in related to expenses for transformation of failed institute.

4. Conclusion To sum up, the dwindling prospective student enrollment phenomenon has deep effects in political, economic, social, and cultural aspects in Taiwan and needs to be handled with delicate maneuvering to minimize the negative effect of failed institute to society public in general and local community in specific.

References

[1] I. M. Al-Atiqi and L. M. Alharbi, Meeting the challenge: Quality systems in private higher education in Kuwait, Quality and Higher Education, 15(1), 5–16 (2009). [2] M. Trow, Problems in the Transition from Elite to Mass Higher Education. (Berkeley: Carnegie Commission on Higher Education, 1973). [3] D. C. Levy, An international exploration of decline in private higher education, International Higher Education, 61, 10–12 (2010). [4] D. C. Levy, How private higher education’s growth challenges the new institutionalism, in The New Institutionalism in Education, H.-D. Meyer and B. Rowan, eds. (Albany, NY: State University of New York Press, 143–161, 2006).

[5] M. C. Chin and G. S. Ching, 2012. Apple and oranges: comparison of Taiwan higher education institutions’ internationalization, International Journal of Research Studies in Education, 1, 3–22 (2012). [6] C. P. Chou and G. S. Ching, Taiwan Education at the Crossroad: When Globalization Meets Localization (New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2012). [7] D. Neubauer, Ten globalization challenges to higher education quality and quality assurance, Evaluation in Higher Education, 4(1), 13–37 (2010).

Chapter 2

Education

Research and Practice of Teaching a Person According to His Aptitude in Modern Apprenticeship

Qing-Qing Guo, Ji Song, Bin-Bin Ren and Xu Zhang Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Department, Sanya Aviation & Tourism College, Sanya, Hainan Province, China E-mail: [email protected]

The principle of teaching a person according to his or her aptitude is an important educational methodology that holds great potential. Based on the practice of modern apprenticeship, this paper proposes some specific methods for the implementation of this principle. Students are divided into two groups of classes based on their personality characteristics and trained using different methods. This educational system has been implemented in Sanya Aviation & Tourism College for three years and has achieved some success. The difficulties and problems encountered are further discussed.

Keywords: Modern Apprenticeship; University-Enterprise Cooperation; Teaching a Person According to His Aptitude.

1. Introduction It is an important education principle to teach a person according to his aptitude. The objects of education are so unique that they are different in intelligence, emotion, personality, physiology and mentality. Different individuals have different nature and nurture, resulting in different strengths and weaknesses [1]. Each student can become a useful person when being educated in a suitable way. It conforms to the requirement of the society, because of the diversified requirements of talents. The expression ‘teaching a person according to his aptitude’ is not put forward definitely in some country. But the principle is obeyed in practice widely, such as German tow - way education system. In this country with highly developed vocational education system, during the process of implementation of modern apprenticeship, students can choose different way for their education from middle school, according to their abilities in reading, writing and calculation, and then they will be divided into two groups and be educated in two different ways. For the two groups of students, they also have chances to change their ways according to the changed situation. The two ways

are reversible in practice [2, 3]. It fully embodies the education principle of ‘teaching a person according to his aptitude’. Many of the practices in current education system in China deviate to the principle of teaching a person according to his aptitude. It also affects advanced vocational education. Though students master the theoretical knowledge, their lack of practical experience is apparent. It results in that the abilities of graduates can not meet the requirements of enterprise. The major in our college, which called “mechanical and electrical equipment maintenance of aviation”, belongs to technology-intensive industry, having the characteristics of high specialty and high skill requirement. At the same time, there are strict rules for aviation maintenance personnel from the following aspects: education, skills, experience and so on, because of the civil aviation laws and regulations of aviation maintenance. The training is of great difficulty. This paper proposes the application of modern apprenticeship based on the principle of teaching a person according to his aptitude. Modern apprenticeship is based on university-enterprise cooperation, sharing resource with both college and enterprise. It highly conforms to the requirements of current economic and social development, and it is an effective way to promote the combination of learning with working. In the teaching process of modern apprenticeship, one master teaches one apprentice at the specific work. The principle of teaching a person according to his aptitude must be implemented. 2. Method In the process of implementing the modern apprenticeship, our college cooperating with the enterprise divides the students into two groups, according to comprehensive assessment about them from following aspects: physical quality, psychological quality, intelligence and manipulative ability. The two groups are named ‘General Class’, and ‘Hainan Airlines Class’ which trained for Hainan Airlines (short for HNA) enterprise. Students of Hainan Airlines Class are chosen in accordance with the Professional requirements and standards of the enterprise, whose bodies are stronger, manipulative abilities are greater, and English level is higher. The students of general class are trained by basic and general knowledge and ability. Compared with the Hainan Airlines Class, they have more job choices with greater difficulty. 2.1. Hainan Airlines Class The college cooperates with HNA Technic from 2012. There are three terms of graduates since the ‘Hainan Airlines Class’ founded in 2012. The two general steps of choosing and training the students are as follows:

2.1.1. Preparatory phase The key to this stage is the cooperation between the college and the enterprise. It is a strict process to select suitable students according to their willingness and ability, as the students having another identity ‘apprentice’. The main contents of the work are as follows: (1) The enterprise defines the standards and requirements of the professional ability, and finally institutes the selection criteria of the class together with the school. All students who meet the criteria can attend the selection according to their willingness. (2) Sign agreement to define responsibilities and rights of the three parties ‘college, enterprise and student’. (3) Set up a special working group to lead the performance of the modern apprenticeship. The members of the working group consist of college leaders, enterprise technologists and professional teachers. It can ensure the implement of the item. (4) The college and the enterprise define the training program together. Establish course system for the modern apprenticeship, which defines training purpose, course standard, acceptance standard of apprenticeship, daily management rules, and so on. The work performance and assessment of the master are important parts of the general achievement of the students.

2.1.2. Implementation phase This phase aims at the purpose of ‘intake of students equals to intake of workmen, entering class equals to entering factory’. Fully implement the modern apprenticeship from aspects of intake, training, and assessment. The main contents are as follows: (1) Define double identities of the students: students at school and apprenticeship in the company. Combine the course learning at school and job training in company, and implement new educational system. The new training system divides the terms into ‘1+1+0.5+0.5’ mode, so as to that students can learn theoretical knowledge and basic skills at school with half of the time. (2) Resource sharing, including technical data, training equipment, training ground, etc. The most important resources are skilled masters and professional teachers. (3) Management of students and teaching process. The enterprise must fully take part in the whole process, and provides technical experts to be

part time teacher and skilled experts to be masters. The master and the apprenticeship are one-to-one, teaching according to students’ aptitude in practice.

2.2. General class The training of general class is not limited to some certain kind of job requirements, but for the occupation groups and relevant industry requirements. It demands more solid basic knowledge, more general ability, more plastic characteristic. The main relevant industries of the major are aviation, car industry, and general Machinery processing industry. (1) Through research in a lot of enterprises, determine the general requirements of the industry, the basic skills required, and then combine with the requirements of higher education to translate into the specific teaching requirements. As the student in general class having more time at school, they will learn more basic knowledge. (2) Select the typical work items from the productive task in factory as the carrier of vocational ability training. Create ‘simulating factory’ according to the work items and implement ‘school apprentice’ mode. Compared with the real modern apprenticeship, ‘new enterprise’ consists of training center of the school and technical experts, and the school leader and professional teachers become the ‘new school’ party. (3) Skill assessment and theoretical examination are of equal importance. Inspect the training quality of the "school apprentice" in accordance with the both standards of the industry and the school, to ensure graduates become high quality skilled talents who directly meet the requirements of the enterprise.

3. Results As the education mode has been implemented for more than three years, three class students of ‘Hainan Airlines Class’ have been trained, respectively is grade of 2011 (admission in 2011, the same below), 2012 and 2013. The students of grade 2011 and 2012 have graduated and go to work. Grade 2011 has 32 students, and 29 members of them gets the jobs into Hainan Airlines, employment rate reaching 90%; grade 2012 has 45 students, and 35 members gets the jobs, the employment rate is 78%. The employment rate of grade 2012 has descended because of that the English score didn’ t reach the standard. The college will increase class hour of English course to conform to the requirements

of the job. The performance of the graduate in job is good basing on the feedback information of the enterprise. For the students of general class, the college comprehensively broadens the employment opportunities by cooperating with other aviation companies and relevant industry companies. At present, the college and Grand China Aviation Technik Limited Company (short for GCA Technik) are preparing to found ‘GCA Technik Class’. We will choose the suitable students and provide targeted train according to their aptitude. It is effective to teach a person according to his aptitude in modern apprenticeship, and the reasons of the success are as follows: (1) Improve learning interest of the students. The master teaches the apprenticeship in the real work environment. The students can obtain more sense of achievement, and their questions are solved duly and really. It is meaningful to improve learning interest and effectiveness. (2) Improve the social adaptability of the students. The students take part in the productive process as apprenticeship, and practically be guided and trained in real job. As a result, the students can improve ability and broaden their horizon. (3) Increase the major counterpart employment rate. Vocational ability training has partly advanced to the college. It is good at connection from college to enterprise. (4) Promote the cooperation enthusiasm of the enterprise. As the apprenticeship has been trained in the real work environment, it reduces production costs for the company. (5) Build a bridge between school and enterprise. The cooperation of the college and the company reaches the highest point, because of the double identities of the students: student at school and apprenticeship in the company.

4. Discussion In the practice for more than three years, we met many difficulties and problems. Some of them are solved, and the others are not. It’s worthy of discussion deeply.

4.1. More investment We must pay attention to vocational ability development of individuals, in order to teach a person according to his aptitude. More equipment that is professional

is needed. More teachers are needed, especially the skilled expert. The supplement and maintenance of consumptive material also cost a lot[4].

4.2. Feasibility of supervisor responsibility system Supervisor responsibility system is effective to institute more reasonable training plan for every students and develop their strong point and advantage[5]. Recently the members of the Hainan Airlines Class can get help from their master by one-to-one mode at work. But the other students can’t copy this mode easily because of the lack of the supervisor.

4.3. How to assess capabilities adequately It is not fair to divide students according to intelligence level[6]. Most of the assessment is so unilateral that the other aspects of the intelligence and ability are not assessed adequately. It will cause serious adverse consequences in practice[7]. It’s still a difficult and important question to assess capabilities perfectly.

4.4. Associate Bachelor's Degree for Apprenticeship Students in higher vocational college are not admitted deeply by the traditional view in china. It’s possible to set up associate bachelor's degree to show respect for the skilled talent, according to the way of the two year community college in the United States.

5. Conclusion Compared with the ordinary higher vocational education, it is better to improve learning interest of the students to implement the principle of teaching students in accordance with their aptitude in the modern apprenticeship system. As the improvement of the professional quality and manipulative ability, the employment rate in related industry increases apparently. Another performance of the improvement is the enhancement of the social adaptability of the graduates. On the other side, it still exists some questions which are worthy of discussion. Acknowledgments

This work is supported by research project of advanced education reform in Hainan Province (No:Hnjg2015ZD-19).

References 1. Fang-Ting Li. Discussion and Analysis on Phenomenon of “Paradox of Teach Students in Accordance of Their Aptitude”, Journal of Yellow River Conservancy Technical Institute. Apr. 011, 23(2):95–98. 2. Philipp Grollmann, Felix Rauner. Exploring Innovative Apprenticeship: Quality And Costs, Education&Training, 2007, (49/6): 431–446. 3. Martina Behrens, Matthias Pilz and Oliver Geuling. Taking a Straightforward Detour: Learning And Labour Market Participation in the German Apprenticeship System [J]. Vocational Education and Training, 2007(60/1): 93–104. 4. Man-Sheng Zhou. Some trends of the development of international vocational education and enlightenment for China [J]. Educational Research, 1996, 11: 9–17. 5. Wei-Zhi Yan, Lan Liu. The effective implementation of supervisor responsibility system in professional technical college [J]. Piazza of science and technology. 2008. 9; 235–237. 6. Hong-Lin Wang. Brief analysis of teaching a person according to his aptitude in vocational education [J]. Tokyo Literature, 2014, 3:49–49. 7. Wen Pu. The theory of multiple intelligence and curriculum revolution of advanced teacher-training education [J]. Academic Forum, 2011, 2:205–207.

Analysis and Thoughts on the Development of the Information Security Profession in Advanced Education

Xin-Lei Wang Department of 24 Pox, Unit of 92001, PLA Qingdao 266000, China E-mail: [email protected]

Wei-Dong Lv, Xue-Guang Zhou and Wei Guo Department of Information Security, Navy University of Engineering Wuhan 430033, China E-mail: [email protected]

The Information Security profession has successfully matured from a conception and project into a professional system in the past decade. However, higher education institutions still hold conservative opinions with regards to the field of Information Security. This paper analyses existing conditions of professional norms, course installation and talent demand, based on the status quo of the development of Information Security profession. Several suggestions are proposed to improve the construction of the Information Security profession such as massive open online course (MOOC), improvements in practical and theory teaching methods, development of a training base and organizing industry activities, etc.

Keywords: Information Security; Professional System; Practical Teaching; Training Base; MOOC.

1. Introduction The General Office of CCCPC has submitted NO.27 document in July, 2003, that is “Guidance on Strengthening Information Security Supplementary Task”, which becomes the programmatic instructions of improving the information security in China under the background of the rapid development of globalization of economy and informatization of society. After that, in 2004, the NO.2 document of central military commission and the NO.73 document of State Personnel Board both emphasized the task of developing information security. The state council submitted the document of “Several Suggestions on Advancing Informatization and Defending Information Security”, which

specified to strengthen the publicity and education, cultivation of talents, to conduct the training of information security application and education, to support the establishment of Information Security profession faculty, education institutions, key laboratories, and to conduct regular information security training to government agency and related units. By July 2014, more than 80 colleges and universities have established Information Security profession (military universities not included), 17 high education institutions have established the major of Information Countermeasure, and another 10 universities have set up the major of Information Privacy. Many high education institutions seek to meet the demands for talents of Information Security by reforming and adjusting the courses installation of Information Security profession, but bosses of some Information Security enterprises seem to be not satisfied, even uninterested for the graduates [1]. The author has participated the information security salon of CNNCC2013, NISE2013 and National Information Competition 2014. This article begins with the analysis of the status quo of the developments of Information Security profession, and gives the meditation for the improvement of Information Security profession.

2. Analysis on Status Quo of the Construction of Information Security Profession in High Education Institution At present, Chinese government has published the “Information Security Norms” and set up Information Security profession in more than 100 universities. What’s more, Information Security professional system with different characteristics has been established on the basis of professional norms. This chapter thoroughly analyses the construction of Information Security profession from 3 aspects: the limits to the Information Security professional norms, the problems exist in the professional courses in colleges and the demands for Information Security talents.

2.1. Analysis on the limits to information security professional norms Information Security profession is a burgeoning subject which makes research on the threats and defending in retrieval, storage, transmission and processing of information. According to state profession category of general institutes of higher education, Information Security is subject to engineering science, computer class and the profession code is 080904K. Most qualified universities in China chooses to set up Information Security profession on their advantage disciplines. According to a research conducted by Wuhan University,

universities in China have established Information Security profession under 14 first-lever discipline. The major research direction in Information Security discipline includes the cryptology, network security, information system security and information content security. The theory foundation for Information Security includes mathematics, computing theory, theory of information, cybernetic, systematology, game theory and other theories. Take computing theory for an example, it consists of computability theory and computational complexity theory. Computability theory decides whether the problem is interpretable, while the other one discusses whether the computing of the problem is realistic. Information Security technology takes human as the core, it combines qualitative and quantitative analysis and makes use of the quantity breeds quality theory to solve the problems in theory, technology and application of Information Security. Information Security professional knowledge hierarchy consists of varied areas, which includes Information Security basic knowledge area, cryptography area, network security area, information system security and information content security area. While the basic knowledge area is on the universities themselves, the other areas have to follow the professional norms. In the professional norms, two proposals are presented for universities to choose. The first one focuses on building the ability of exploitation and developing in students (hereafter referred to as exploitation proposal), the other one majors in training students to conduct the application service work in Information Security field (hereafter referred to as application proposal). Compare with the application proposal, exploitation proposal offers 24 periods of advanced algebra courses and 18 periods of cryptology courses. The two norms also differs in periods of optional courses, exploitation proposal offers extra courses like computing complexity, logic theory, coding theory and combinatorial mathematics. Universities can choose these courses on the condition of their advantages and develop Information Security profession of their own characteristics. The analysis shows that professional norms have the following limitations: The professional norms off the shelf are proposed to mix the Information Security professions in different colleges and the related majors. It’s a minimum course collection for the basic demand of Information Security profession. The existing norms have taken the source major of Information Security profession in different colleges into consideration and taken the characteristics of computer science, communication and information system, cryptology and other disciplines. But they fail to propose a new professional norms for Information Security profession. 86

In the curriculum provision, they just simply fix the courses name set by most colleges and set the other varied courses as optional. In other words, the exiting norms haven’t been thoroughly analyzed. The Information Security profession is not a first-level discipline itself. Universities have to set it under the first-level they have, thus leaving shadows of other disciplines.

2.2. Analysis on the problems in curriculum provision in information security profession in colleges There are more 100 universities with Information Security profession. In this article, several famous universities are chose to compare the curriculum provision. Details are shown in Table 1.

Table 1. The information security curriculum provision of several universities. College name Information Security related courses offered Wuhan University The first one in China to set Information Security profession. Strictly practice professional norms in training program. Professional knowledge is divided into 5 directions: basis for Information Security, cryptology, network security and Information content security. Assorted experiment courses and comprehensive practice are given. Beijing University Information Security profession has been set up. The training program of Posts and divides the professional knowledge into 4 directions: cryptology, network Telecommunications security, digital content security, information system security. Assorted experiment courses and comprehensive practice are given. Naval University of Information Security profession has been set up. Courses of Information Engineering Security mathematics basis, cryptology, network security theory, information system security, Information Security project, information countermeasure theory, Information Security application, Information Security management and others are given. Some of them offer assorted experiment courses and comprehensive practice Information Information Security profession have been set up. Courses like Engineering introduction of Information Security, technology of Information Security, University cryptology, introduction of Information Security system design, Information Security management, Information Security application are given. Optional courses cover the Information Security equipment maintenance project, PKI, Information Security system curriculum design, military simulation. Table 1 shows the comparison of the courses provision of some higher education institutions. As is shown in Table 1, several problems exist in the Information Security profession courses provision:

The first one is the casualty of the provision. Every university has its own characteristics, specifics and aim of service, thus the provision of courses cannot escape from the influences of original courses system. That is to say, Information Security profession of the mentioned colleges is related to the first- level discipline it belongs to. And the course provision of Information Security profession is rather weak. And the development of practical course system remains to be strengthened. Limited by varied conditions of hardware and the rating of the Information Security profession in colleges, differences exist in the funds poured into practice education, site condition, human resources and other aspects, leading to the different treatment of different colleges graduates. Graduates of some colleges are behind the demands, while the others find it hard to acquire a job. The third problem is that the course provision is severely influenced by the lack of professional teacher resource. Some colleges hold the theory that certificates decide everything when hiring new teachers, while the new teachers are weak in the knowledge system: they focus on technology, foundational theories but ignore administration, project and practice. Some colleges offer courses for certain people but don’t obey the professional norms, thus affecting the quality of Information Security profession students. The last problem is that the course provision takes the bad examples of old curriculum system. The foundation courses are not given for the building of the foundation of professional curriculums. On the contrary, they are given as much as possible. And the provision of professional curriculum fails to be related to requirements. The combination of courses and the demands of employers is ignored when courses are given. The phenomenon of different teaching parts competing for periods also exists, which severely affects the quality of students accepting training. 2.3. Analysis on the status quo of demands of information security profession talents Tingzhu Pan, CSO of Venustech, standing director of CCF, has given the patterns of Information Security talents needed by the enterprises [1]. The first type is science talent, who continues the study in advanced education institutions. The second type is professional talent who enters enterprises to deal with the work like exploitation of Information Security products and application of Information Security service. Talents of the third type will enter the other Information Security field, while those of last type will enter non- Information Security field. Pan also sorts Information Security talents into 6 types: countermeasure type, exploitation type, consultation type, project type,

administration type and govern type. He also conclude the demands for Information Security ability to Information Security analyzing ability, information countermeasure ability and information system developing ability. He holds the opinion that none of the university in China offer the training of the 3 abilities yet. Students acquire these abilities either by self-study or training on position, which leaves the impression of Information Security profession graduates lacking practicing abilities in employers. Yungang Bao, receiver of CCF-Intel Young scholar Promotion Program and advanced member of CCF, mentions in document [3] that: now information security business circles think that the academic circles are comforting themselves but making no contributions but wasting time and money; while the academic circles believe that business circles have no innovation ability and low level technical capability. This phenomenon also reflects in domestic information security field.

3. Meditation for the Improvement of the Construction of Information Security Profession in High Education Institution Through analysis above, a conclusion can be drawn that it take comprehensive efforts of certain departments, education institutions, and Information Security fields to build the Information Security profession in China. This chapter mainly gives the meditation on improvement in Information Security profession from Information Security theory education, practical education, Information Security practice training base development, Information Security activities relies on Information Security industry.

3.1. Improve theory teaching level in colleges through new methods like MOOC MOOC is a course of study made available over the Internet without charge to a very large number of people. Recently China’s most colleges are concerned about whether MOOC can meet the demands of China’s quantity of academician, quality of education and business type. MOOC mainly relies on certificate, introducing by students, advertisements of teaching materials, charges on copyrights and degree to making profits [4]. The main characters of MOOC includes the study mode based on short video and interactive practice, emphasizing first time feedback, individual service based on big data, interaction based on internet, online curriculum similar to real courses[5]. “Five years later, people can get all the best courses free of charge, which are better

than any same courses provided by any single university”, said by Bill Gates, in 2010. The development of MOOC should firstly rely on universities abroad. By introducing MOOC, Chinese higher education institutions can obtain promotion in both education quality and stage.

3.2. Improve practical teaching ability in colleges through interaction between students and teachers Practical ability in students is the aim of both colleges and employers, which can be acquired through practical teaching periods and some innovative parts. Details are shown in Table 2.

Table 2. The capacity and training requirement for advanced educator in education practice

Educating Capacity Teaching Practice Innovation Period requirement Universities that set up Some teachers Some teachers Few teachers set up Information Security major for provide related provide innovative undergraduates (approximately Information practical experimental groups make up for 80%) Security curriculums according to personal curriculums interest Few universities that recruit Recruit masters Be able to Improve laboratory masters major in Information and doctors from arrange further environment Security (approximately related majors as education for make up for 15%) teaching resource some teachers Top universities that recruit Professional Inner training Large amount of doctors major in counterparts /foreign training investment /High Information Security import/cultivation teachers requirement for (approximately make up for environment, long 5%) cycle

By participating the Information Security Salon 2013, the author get the information that Information Security profession graduates acquire practical abilities through following methods. Details are shown in Table 3.

Table 3. Cultivation in practical capacities for professional talents major in information security from corporations

Practical Interest Process Reverse thinking Capacities

Talents layers New talents Cultivate personal Make the new talents A new talent without the interest, set up talent themselves ability to reverse thinking adopt direction store, addicted to some talents can only be a programmer, guide new talents in development directions the growth of a new talent corporations to choose by full participation and need reverse thinking personal development combat during the ability and can be direction whole process cultivated step by step Technical Approve and award Set up strict and orderly Select backbones who backbone the backbones who disciplines to restrict owns reverse thinking ability perform technical backbones on purpose to take up the the best by means of in corporations tasks of research allocation of tasks, to always apply their and development investigation of capacities to create of Information Security schedule, Management Inform the further Combine the selection “there’s no making without development of and cultivation of new breaking” is the highest corporations to the talents with the requirement for management, management to make self-grownup of technical as aleader in management them take up backbones to guarantee layer, only responsibilities to seek adequate mature period can he lead a corporation breakthrough. and degree for when he masters management layer the reverse thinking ability

Through analyzing the building of practical abilities, a conclusion can be drawn that practical teaching can be conducted through 3 steps. • Most colleges seek to complete professional practical teaching Most universities in China with Information Security profession are taking advantage of their own specialty to defend the future of their own graduates. There is a general requirement of strengthen the foundation, broaden the majors and strengthen practice. Most advanced education institutions seem to focus on the first two terms, but for strengthening of practical skills, they just offer the programs within their capacities. The trend of emphasizing basic theory and ignoring practical skills is still in the air. Some universities take advantage of certain Information Security profession to attract student, but they are not qualified, neither will they conduct teaching tasks under the training program. In one word, it’s urgent for most universities to complete practical teaching system. • Few colleges pursue to improve professional practical teaching abilities

As document [1] shows, the practical education of Information Security profession in most universities is hard to access, taken-in. Some students acquire the skills or codes of network countermeasure through internet out of interests, and make troubles to teachers and other undergraduates in practical courses. In order to cease these trends, some universities prohibit students from taking source code to labs, some others set up the rules like only LAN can be used. These deeds are casting more obstacles in building the practical skills in undergraduates. To improve practical education capacity, some universities pour large amount of money in Information Security professional training systems. For example, a university has introduced the ISIES-2005 designed by SJTU and SimpleISES designed by SimpleWare, which can meet the basic demands of practical teaching. But they still fail to meet the demand of students’ urgent for practical abilities because they only support basic experiments and virtual simulation, thus they cannot be used in comprehensive design experiments nor in the innovative experiments, leaving students lack of training in these two fields. • Top colleges seek to build high-level Information Security practical training platform As far as author knows, apart from SJTU, Wu Han University and few other advanced education institution have developed Information Security experiment systems independently. This activity is a good method to train both the Information Security teaching staff and students. Only the top universities are capable of developing the Information Security experiment platform. This work in far from simply financially aid, it’s a index of a university’s Information Security capacity and practical skills.

3.3. Taking advantage of information security enterprises through building information security practical training base The cultivation of talents has its stages, which includes academic education stage, career education stage and continual education stage. Only those who have been through all these stages can become authorities in the industry. Academic education is mainly conducted by advanced education institution. The rest two stages can be conducted by both universities and enterprises. The key points of 3 stages are shown in Table 4.

Table 4. Key factors in the 3period of talent cultivation

Cultivation period Key factors Academic education Fundamental theory, professional base, professional curriculum ,edit of textbook, professional internship, social practice, and so on Professional education Cryptography ,access control, security development, laws and disciplines, security equipment, system security and so on Continual education Multilevel protection, industrial control protection ,safety assessment, study of new technology, teaching by video, exercise training and so on

“The combination of academic education and career education is an important method to improve the general ability of Information Security staff and to meet the demand for Information Security professional talents” said by Bin Li, from China Information Security Evaluation Center. The gap of registered Information Security professional staff (CISP) is about 500,000 by now. Chinese Ministry of Industry and Information Technology (MIIT) has established Information Security practical training base in universities like Beijing University of Information Science and Technology, Jinan University, Tianjing University of Technology and enterprises like SimpleWare, seeking to make it easier and more convenient to conduct Information Security professional experiment teaching. The other universities can take full advantage of enterprises through conducting joint development, establishing joint labs and leading Information Security practical education activities.

3.4. Leading the development of information security profession nationwide through industry activities China has large amount of industries related to Information Security industry closely, but they haven’t achieved a joint power yet. For example, the teaching directive committee of Information Security profession in Education Department has been organizing National Information Security Competition since 2008, and has won great success by now, leading a mania of Information Security research in Chinese universities. MIIT has establishes some Information Security practical training base and improved the Information Security profession practical skills in universities. Work Committee of CCF and education have taking all efforts in national Information Security professional academic meetings, the selection of thesis and some other activities. The advice of author is achieving a criterion through industry, organizing more competitions and meetings, accomplishing the joint power of education as soon as possible.

3.5. Taking advantage of the status quo to establish the first-level discipline of cyber space security In 2014, Chinese government has established a new ministry-level institution, the office of national network and information security, which takes full charge of the domestic information security issues, including the military information security and internet information security. According to the demands of industry development, the education department established a new first-level discipline of Cyber space security on the foundation of full demonstration. The work above paves the way for us to conduct the development of Information security major. So, the author believes that new Cyber space security major can be established well with the effort of the nation, now the main tasks are listed below. The first task is to category the subordinate disciplines of Cyber space security major and figure out the relationship between it and other related disciplines, which means that it can’t be simply taking the old majors to the new discipline. The second task is to demonstrate the professional and theory curriculum and to have some famous advanced educational institution to compile the theory teaching materials, also, there should be some characteristic campus compiling the professional teaching materials. The third task is to establish the Cyber space security discipline doctor station, which should be conducted by some selected famous advanced education institution. In the beginning the student source can be some related major, but it will be too late to do this job when the undergraduates and the postgraduates come out of the schools.

4. Conclusion This paper analyzes the status quo of development of Information Security profession in advanced education institutions from 3 directions: the limitations of professional norms, the problems of Information Security curriculum provision and the demands of Information Security enterprises. Then he proposes 4 meditations for the improvement of Information Security profession development, which include improving theory teaching level through MOOC, improving practical teaching level through interaction between teachers and students, improving Information Security development level through establishing Information Security practical training base and organizing industry activities.

Acknowledgments This work is supported by the National Social Science Foundation of China project of grant No.14GJ003-152 and the Education Science Research Program of Naval University of Engineering (Project of grant No. NUE2014110).

References 1. Pan Z Y. The road of information security discipline education (In Chinese) [J]. CCCF, 9th, Vol. 9, 2013,pp.43–47. 2. Zhang H G, Du R Y, Fu Jian Ming, et al. Information security professional guidance of professional standards (In Chinese) [S]. 2010.5. 3. Bao Y G. On the collaborative research between industry and academia (In Chinese) [J]. CCCF, 10th,Vol. 5, 2014, pp. 36–42. 4. Wu W J. Investigation of MOOC in America (In Chinese) [J]. CCCF, 9th, Vol. 10, 2013, pp.46–50. 5. Sun M S. To look at the MOOC from a technical and studied point of view (In Chinese) [J]. CCCF, 9th, Vol. 10, 2013, pp.51–53.

Bilingual Teaching Efficiency of Prosthodontics in Different Teaching Methods

Bin Deng Department of Stomatology, The General Hospital of Chinese People's Liberation Army (301 Hospital), Beijing 100853, China †E-mail: dengbin301@139. com

To compare bilingual teaching efficiency of expository teaching method and PBL teaching method in Prosthodontics. Methods: 120 students were randomly divided into 2 groups (n=60), one was taught by expository teaching method and the other was taught by PBL teaching method. The t-test was used to deal with the final scores and chi-square test was used to deal with the questionnaires. Results: The average score of expository teaching group was 110.22±10.82, with statistical differences in the score of PBL teaching group, which was 121.88±13.12 (P<0.05). There was no significant difference in passing rate and learning interest between two groups (P>0.05). There were significant differences in excellent rate, comprehension degree, satisfaction degree and learning difficulty between two groups (P<0.05). Score of PBL group was higher than that of expository teaching group in clinical case analysis question, and had no significant difference in choice question and short answer question (P>0.05). Conclusion: Comparing with expository teaching method, although learning difficulty is higher, PBL teaching method is more efficiency. PBL teaching method deserves popularization in bilingual class of prosthodontics. Keywords: Prosthodontics; Bilingual Teaching; PBL Teaching Method; Expository Teaching Method.

1. Introduction Prosthodontics is a subject which study oral and maxillofacial defects with the accordant methods of oral physiology and biomechanics, it’s also a major branch and component of stomatology. Prosthodontics research the reason, clinical features, treatment and prevention of tooth and dentition defects, edentulous dentition and maxillofacial defects, research how to design and manufacture prosthesis reasonably, so it can recover and improve function and structure, to maintain oral and general health. Prosthodontics not only involves in complicated details but also has the features of interdisciplinary and fast- updated. Both of them will be a challenge to comprehend and master. Recently, to achieve international teaching and increase the efficiency of teaching, many

Chinese colleges had used bilingual teaching (Chinese and English). Bilingual teaching aims at imparting professional knowledge, developing learning ability and opening students’ mind. Expository teaching and PBL teaching is extensive and regular used in Chinese model of teaching, but both of the teaching efficiency in Prosthodontics is rarely known. So, this study aims at contrasting and analyzing the difference of this two methods efficiency in bilingual teaching, provides a reference for further reform in education.

2. Materials and Methods

2.1. Experimental subject 120 students included, inclusion criteria: senior students in oral medicine from Southern Medical University, including 45 boys and 75 girls, age from 21 to 23, their average age is 22.32±0.83.

2.2. Methods 120 students were randomly divided into 2 groups (n=60), one group was taught by expository teaching method and the other group was taught by PBL teaching method. Single blind was applied, two group students are taught by one group of teachers with different teaching methods. Expository teaching group was mainly taught by English with Chinese complementary, simultaneous multimedia PowerPoint (PPT) and blackboard-writing help students understand. PBL teaching group is based on solving questions, they search the answer independently and later discuss in group. They are required to express their opinion with English, and further discussion will be conducting in class, finally teachers will give a simple comment. After theory courses finished, two groups of students will receive a final test and questionnaires for comparing teaching efficiency. The exam has 50 choice questions and 5 short answer questions to examine the memory of basic knowledge, 5 clinical case analysis questions to examine the ability of integrating theory and practice. Make sure the scores between the proportion of 1:1. The total point is 150, the exam time is 2.5 hours. After the exam, a questionnaire will be given united, including comprehension degree, satisfaction degree, learning difficulty and interest. Each of them will be given three varying degrees, the definition of affirmative results are interested, easy etc., the opposed results are dislike, difficult etc., the neutral results are between positive and negative. Use the methods of asking, answering and taking back immediately. Upon strict inspection, all 60 papers are valid questionnaires.

2.3. Paper inspection and statistical standard of questionnaire The choice questions are evaluated by machine, the same teacher evaluate the short answer questions and clinical case analysis questions blindly, to ensure the reliability and fairness. Calculate total average score, below 90 is defined as fail, above 120 is defined as excellence. Calculate the numbers of pass/passing rates and excellence/excellent rates. Distinguish the three types, calculate their average score respectively. Unite the number of affirmative and neutral as positive results, the number of opposed as negative results.

2.4. Statistical analysis Spss13.0 was used to analyse the results. The t-test was used to deal with the final scores and different question types’ scores, and chi-square test was used to deal with the questionnaires. α=0.05.

3. Results Two groups of subjects’ final score are listed in Table 1. There are significant differences in excellent rate and final average scores (P<0.05).There is no significant difference in passing rate between two groups (P>0.05). Two groups’ questionnaires are listed in Table 2. There are significant differences in comprehension degree, satisfaction degree and learning difficulty between two groups (P<0.05). There is no significance in learning interest. Different question types’ score are listed in Figure1, the score of PBL group was higher than that of expository teaching group in clinical case analysis question, and no significant difference in choice question and short answer question (P>0.05).

Table 1. Two group students’ final scores[`x±s, n(%), n=60]

Schedule Expository PBL teaching t or χ2 P teaching Final average score 110.22±10.82 121.88±13.12 5.3109 0.0000 Passing rate 58 (96.7%) 59 (98.3%) 0.0000 1.0000 Excellent rate 23 (38.3%) 35 (58.3%) 4.8053 0.0284 Note: Hypothesis testing (t-test) was used to deal with total average score; fourfold table data’s correlation analysis of chi-square (Yates correction) was used to deal with passing rate and excellent rate; fourfold table data’s correlation analysis of chi-square (Pearson non-correction) was used to deal with excellent rate.

Table 2. Two group students’ questionnaires [n(%), n=120]

Expository PBL teaching χ2 P teaching Comprehension degree 27 (45.0%) 48 (80.0%) 15.6800 0.0000 Satisfaction degree 29 (48.3%) 45 (75.0%) 9.0247 0.0027 Learning difficulty 21 (35.0%) 43 (71.7%) 16.2054 0.0001 Learning interests 44 (73.3%) 51 (85.0%) 2.4758 0.1156 Note: Fourfold table data’s correlation analysis of chi-square (Pearson non- correction) was used to deal with comprehension degree and satisfaction degree.

Fig. 1. This is different question types’ scores. Hypothesis testing (t-test) was used to deal with score of different question types: simple choice question, short answer question, clinical case analysis question.

4. Discussion Bilingual teaching is an inexorable trend of the reform of higher education, it helps cultivate internationalized and competitive talents [1]. Prosthodontics is a major branch of stomatology. Unlike mother tongue teaching, how to improve teaching efficiency is worth discussing. Expository teaching and PBL teaching

are the most commonly used approach in bilingual teaching. However there are few reports about which teaching method is more efficient. The content of examination includes the mastery of professional concepts and knowledge, and the usage of professional knowledge to analysis clinical cases. Table 1 has shown that PBL teaching group get higher scores than expository teaching group, and the possible reasons are: firstly, students require knowledge passively in expository teaching, it is difficult for them to concentrate too long, and it fails to inspire students to explore. Secondly, the expansion of knowledge is limited, they can only acquire limited knowledge in books and classes. On the contrary, students in PBL teaching group can access knowledge in various ways. Thirdly, the content of prosthodontics is complicated, some knowledge is difficult for students who are lack of clinical perceptual knowledge to master. Only teaching knowledge point can't inspire thinking, which means it will be less comprehensive. This can explain why the comprehension degree, satisfaction degree is lower in Table 2. Finally, the lack of flexible use in new knowledge makes students fail to get higher scores in case analysis which account for a high proportion. The score has no difference in choice question and short answer question, which means both groups will get a satisfied teaching efficiency on the knowledge only need to memorize. In PBL teaching, teacher will give the questions first, and students use various ways to search answer, like internet, library, books and teaching materials etc., then a discussion will be hold according to respective comprehension. Those questions will be discussed again in class, teachers will give professional comment. Because each students must express their own opinions, so during their searching, collecting more information and thinking careful are unescapable. The discussion can also improve the ability of information processing and expression. This method can stimulate learning enthusiasm. Discuss in group and in class can develop composited analysis ability and thinking ability, and increase speed of understanding. So students in PBL teaching can get a higher score. Nan. Wang [2] found, PBL in bilingual teaching can not only stimulate students’ learning interests, but can also increase the ability of composited analysis which can strengthen comprehension. So PBL can achieve a better teaching effect than expository teaching. However PBL also increase students’ burden, they not only need study in class but need to search different professional resources in spare time, they will feel more difficulty in learning. So, how to balance teaching effect and learning difficulty is worth further exploring. Teaching method is a way to transfer information, it can directly affect teaching efficiency and students’ satisfaction degree [3]. There are many

100

specialized vocabulary and abbreviation in prosthodontics, which is too difficult to understand. PBL teaching is a gradual positive thinking processes, which helps students to master teaching content more effectively [4]. Students first master specialized vocabulary and general information, which can help them get a better understanding. Second, students discuss in group, and were asked to express themselves with professional words, which can contribute students to think and analysis. Third, discuss in class, further explore the questions. So questionnaires have shown that the comprehension degree in PBL teaching in higher than expository teaching (P<0.05). The results show that using bilingual teaching in PBL can help students comprehend and master information. But in bilingual teaching, non-mother-tongue makes a high proportion in class hour, which is totally different with all-in-English teaching in foreign students [5], they are difficult to get the same efficiency as mother tongue. So despite a better comprehension degree and satisfaction degree have got, PBL teaching still have large room to improve.

5. Conclusion In most investigation items, PBL teaching has a better teaching efficiency than expository teaching, however, about how to decrease difficulty, increase comprehension degree and satisfaction degree need a further exploration.

References 1. C.D. Liu, X.H. Cai. Difficulties and resolutions in performing bilingual teaching in dental science. Southern Medical Education19, 16 (2010). 2. N. Wang, X.L. He, J.G. Lu, et al. Application of PBL teaching combined in bilingual teaching to 8-years program medical students in general surgery. Hospital Administration Journal of Chinese People's Liberation Army11, 184 (2012). 3. Y.K. Zhang, T. Sun, Q. Liu, et al. Evaluation on teaching effect of interactive teaching in prosthodontics course. Chinese Journal of Medical Education Research12, 719 (2013). 4. D.J. Qi, S. Wang, Y.N. He, et al. Application of problem-based learning model in general practice teaching. Chinese Journal of General Practice10, 312 (2012). 5. L.Q. Shao, T. Sun, D.H. Liu, et al. Research of stomatology teaching for international medical students. Chinese Journal of Medical Education Research10, 858 (2011).

101

Research and Discussion on the Cultivation of Interdisciplinary Doctoral Students

Kan Li and He-Yan Huang School of Computer Science and Technology, Beijing Institute of Technology, Beijing 10081, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

This paper researches on the development of interdisciplinary doctoral students. It proposes a specific training program and model for interdisciplinary doctoral students through the improvement of the international education curriculum of interdisciplinary doctoral students and the establishment of an inter-doctoral students’ education evaluation system. This reinforces international interdisciplinary collaboration and the reform of interdisciplinary doctoral education methods and curriculum.

Keywords: Interdiscipline; Cultivation of Doctoral Students; Training Mode; Course Setting; Social Practice.

1. Introduction Interdisciplinary is a concrete manifestation of the scientific development law, of which the curriculum structure and training mode is a cross among science, engineering and liberal arts, facilitating the formation of effective and reasonable knowledge structure, and favoring the improvement of the scientific research. As the highest level of formal education, doctoral education bears the responsibility of cultivating the main force of future research. Doctoral students should have not only the expertise, but also some interdisciplinary basis, for the adaption to the new requirements of social development on high-level compound talents. To implement interdisciplinary oriented doctoral education, for training high-level innovative talents and improving the national technological innovation, has important theoretical value and strategic significance. From a global perspective, world-renowned universities universally attach importance on and promote the cross-integration and development of multidisciplinary, regarding training interdisciplinary doctoral students as an important measure to enhance the training level of talent and the scientific and technological innovation strength. Since the U.S. Massachusetts Institute of Technology built the first interdisciplinary Radiation Research Center, other

102

research universities, such as Harvard University, Stanford University, etc., have invested heavily in the establishment of cross-scientific institutes or research centers to promote research and innovation, and to culture innovative talents. According to the specialty catalog of the US National Center for Education Statistics, the number of interdisciplinary doctoral grants increases every year in the United States from 1970–1971 to 2011–2012 [1]. Interdisciplinary doctoral program in American research universities are mainly divided into two categories: one is the university campus interdisciplinary joint doctoral student program, such as the Cancer Biology PhD program at Stanford University, which is a fusion of physiology, medicine, chemistry, engineering, physics, mathematics and other subjects; another is the funded interdisciplinary doctoral program, such as the nonlinear systems graduate interdisciplinary training project at Cornell University funded by the US National Science Foundation. Since Xuesen Qian created the first interdisciplinary research organization – Operations Research Group, domestic interdisciplinary has made considerable progress. Many universities are also active in the training of interdisciplinary doctoral students. Peking University carried out a cross-disciplinary graduate training mode. Beijing Institute of Technology implemented a joint interdisciplinary doctoral training project, exploring the new doctoral graduate training mode of "Polytechnic Cross, international training" to promote the training of doctoral top-notch innovative talents. Zhejiang University proposed interdisciplinary doctoral culture in the enrollment management and the guidance of all aspects. Domestic scholars also actively study the training of interdisciplinary graduates, such as Gang He et al. "Understanding and Thinking for the Training of Interdisciplinary Graduate Students" [2], Zewen Wang et al. "The Probe of Interdisciplinary Doctoral Training Promoting Discipline Crossing" [3], Guoyu Liu "Discuss the Interdisciplinary and Graduate Education" [4], Fei Tao et al. "Comprehensive Evaluation Method for Interdisciplinary Graduate Innovation and Practical Ability" [5], Xuefei Li “Three Models of Interdisciplinary Graduate Training and Analysis" [6]. This paper discusses the cultivation of interdisciplinary skills in doctoral students.

2. Construction of a Characteristic Training Scheme and Model for Interdisciplinary Doctoral Students Unlike training one-disciplinary doctors, training interdisciplinary doctors need to break the barriers of disciplines and resources and make suitable training scheme for interdisciplinary doctor according to the disciplinary that is related to the interdisciplinary. On the one hand, interdisciplinary doctor training scheme should combine the character of different disciplines and the mixture of different

103

disciplines. On the other hand, the research and education of interdisciplinary should be guided by the interdisciplinary to train the doctors who can solve the major issues both in technology and society. The training scheme for interdisciplinary doctor should train doctors’ ability to master the knowledge systems of interdisciplinary and do their best to apply kinds of methods in interdisciplinary. For example, training the doctors both in computer science and management science should try to solve problems in management science using the knowledge in computer science and inspire the ideas in computer science using the skills in management science, thus making better effect by mixture the different disciplines. The goal of training interdisciplinary doctors is to make doctors master the basic theories and professional knowledge in interdisciplinary, the advanced experiments skills and foreign language to do the international academic communication. What’s more, they should be able to do the creative research on their own, cooperate with others well and make creative achievements in research or technology. So the training scheme of interdisciplinary doctor is guided by the training gold and build the new suitable training mode according to the character of interdisciplinary doctors. By providing opportunities to study and communicate in many disciplines, introducing policies of training doctors in screening, organization, management and construction, investing sustainable special funds, the goal of training innovative doctors will be achieved.

3. Upgrading the International Education Course of Interdisciplinary Doctoral Students with Multidiscipline Background Modern society is more emphasis on cooperation and communication among researchers in different countries with different backgrounds, so doctors should actively strengthen international cooperation. In the international background, doctors should carry out interdisciplinary doctor international education research, participate in international cooperation projects, strengthen international disciplines collaborate, publish research results, share the knowledge and data. In addition, they ought to participate in international seminars, conduct academic exchanges, invite foreign scholars to give lectures or high level of academic reports, attend more foreign language lessons, accelerate the doctor international education through visiting scholars, build a graduate student international platform, optimize students training mode, create an atmosphere of innovation, promote cooperation in scientific research, training high-level international innovative students. By defining interdisciplinary doctor education quality standards and treating quality standards as a criterion, it will gradually turn from the localization to internationalization.

104

4. Providing Multiple Researches and Practices for Interdisciplinary Doctor Students Doctor’s research level is an important symbol to represent the level of training. According to the 2007 national survey of quality of doctor students, participating in research projects have an important impact on the quality of postgraduate cultivation. Compared to students who only participate in horizontal subjects, students who only participate in vertical subjects have 8.4% higher training satisfaction, 7.2% higher ability on research methods, 6.2% higher ability on master thesis writing and 4.3% higher ability on broaden horizons [7]. Under the International context, the interdisciplinary doctoral students should be actively encouraging in research and practice, developing learning plans, enhanced interdisciplinary solid basic knowledge and expertise. Doctoral students should actively promote international cooperation, actively seek opportunities on studying abroad or participating in international conferences. Besides the integration of interdisciplinary multifaceted academic resources, resources in many national universities and research institutes should be used. The collaboration on interdisciplinary research and social activities should be encouraged, as well as large-scale research projects, to promote interdisciplinary development.

5. Reform of the Interdisciplinary Doctoral Education Methods and Curriculum Interdisciplinary doctoral curricula and education is different from the single discipline. It is necessary to explore appropriate interdisciplinary doctoral courses and education. The United States emphasizes graduate programs on interdisciplinary and related settings. For example, MIT has not only the first class professional education, but also the good foundation and cultural heritage for interdisciplinary. They emphasize fundamental education, while nurturing students with a non-quantitative analysis method to do judgment, resulting in new ideas and ways of thinking in the related subject areas. Interdisciplinary PhD needs reasonable and interdisciplinary courses content. Take Beijing Institute of technology as an example, single subject doctoral students need to take at least 19 credits at the beginning of master. Subjects basic course have at least 3 credits, which mainly focus on math-related courses. Profession courses have at least 8 credits. Interdisciplinary doctoral training needs suitable teaching plans, which builds links between each subject, and breaks the barriers between professional disciplines to avoid the narrow range of knowledge, and enhance the knowledge and professional skills of PhD

105

students. Therefore, Beijing Institute of technology interdisciplinary doctoral professional courses should take into account the interdisciplinary expertise and extending of professional course content. Interdisciplinary doctoral education must optimize the corresponding teaching system and course content should have international cutting-edge technology, so as to achieve internationalization of curriculum structure and content. Meanwhile, it should pay more attention to knowledge transfer and student participation, arousing their enthusiasm and initiative. The courses should train students with independent learning and innovation capabilities including asking questions, analyzing problems and solving problems.

6. Establishing Interdisciplinary Doctoral Training Evaluation System Interdisciplinary doctoral training evaluation system is an important guide and basis of doctoral training quality. We shall refer to domestic and abroad experience of interdisciplinary doctoral training, orienting the goal of interdisciplinary doctoral training, using interdisciplinary training mode, regarding innovative education as the core, according to interdisciplinary doctoral characteristics, formulating corresponding talent training standards, establishing interdisciplinary doctoral training quality evaluation system, developing detailed evaluation criterion, fully exerting the advantages of interdisciplinary, reflecting the distinctive structure of knowledge and ability of interdisciplinary doctoral students, enhancing the competitiveness of research, and ensuring the international standards in academic of interdisciplinary education and the international quality of corresponding doctoral degree.

7. Conclusion Interdisciplinary doctoral education is an important trend in the subject development. It not only cultivates innovative interdisciplinary talent, but also enhances the competitiveness of national science and technology. The training of interdisciplinary doctoral students should formulate targeted measures on aspects as training programs, international education route, scientific research and social practice, teaching methods and curriculum settings, training evaluation system, etc., to expand academic horizons of interdisciplinary doctoral students, enhance doctoral research level and innovative ability, integrate multi-faceted interdisciplinary academic resources, and improve their knowledge level and comprehensive skills.

106

References 1. http://nces.ed.gov/programs/digest/d13/tables/dt13_324.10.asp. 2. Gang He, Xiaoyang Chen. Understanding and Thinking for the Training of Interdisciplinary Graduate Students [J]. Degrees and Graduate Education, 2005(12): 72–73. 3. Zewen Wang, Jun Zhang, Zhifeng Chen, et al. The Probe of Interdisciplinary Doctoral Training Promoting Discipline Crossing [J]. China Higher Education Research, 2003(8):39–47. 4. Guoyu Liu. Discuss the Interdisciplinary and Graduate Education [J]. China Higher Education Research, 2006(11):35–37. 5. Fei Tao, Ying Cheng, Jianxin Li, et al. Comprehensive Evaluation Method for Interdisciplinary Graduate Innovation and Practical Ability [J]. Computer Education, 2013,6:80–84,90. 6. Xuefei Li, Yongbo Cheng. Three Models of Interdisciplinary Graduate Training and Analysis [J]. Degrees and Graduate Education, 2011,8:10–15. 7. Shikui Zhao, Shuai Zhang, Wenqin Shen. Current Situation of Graduate Students Research and Its Impact on the Culture Quality [J]. Degrees and Graduate Education, 2014,257:49–53.

107

Stakeholders Analysis of the Driving Force for Integrated Optimization of Teaching Resources of Higher Vocational Colleges

Si-Bao Wang and Qiao-Ying Wang Department of Economy and Trade, Anqing Vocational and Technical College School of Foreign Languages, Anqing Normal University Anqing, Anhui, 246133, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper analyzes the allocation of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges using the theory of stakeholders. The analysis revealed that different stakeholders have both common interest goals and various individual interest goals in the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges. The differences of interest goals result in the driving power differences for the integrated optimization of teaching resources. Consequently, the integrated optimization of teaching resources must take into account the driving power and interest goals of the stakeholders simultaneously.

Keywords: Stakeholders; Driving Power; Teaching Resources; Integrated Optimization; Higher Vocational Colleges.

1. Introduction Freeman proposes that “stakeholders are those individuals or groups who can affect or be affected by the attainment of a company's goal” [1]. This definition is generally adopted in the present academic community. Further, Mitchell points out stakeholders' three necessary characteristics: 1. Power, namely the status, capacity and corresponding means that a certain group possesses to affect a company's decision; 2. Legitimacy, namely the legal and moral claims to a company that a certain group has been granted with; 3. Urgency, namely the requirements of a certain group that cause immediate attention of corporate management. Based on the scores of the three characteristics, Mitchell classifies the stakeholders into three categories: 1.Those who possess the power, legitimacy and urgency of the enterprise at the same time are definitive stakeholders, including shareholders, managers with human capital, etc.; 2. Those who possess two of the three characteristics are expectant stakeholders,

108

including investors, employees and government departments; 3. Those who possess one of the three characteristics are latent stakeholders with dormant relevant interests.[2] As to the exploration of the driving power of the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges, the core issue that must be solved first is to determine the stakeholders of integrated optimization of teaching resources. Therefore, the stakeholders must be defined and classified to find the reasonable ways of integrated optimization through the motivation analysis of the related parties in the optimization process. According to the definition of stakeholders, it is believed that the stakeholders, those who can affect the attainment of the goal of the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges and be affected by, include the higher vocational colleges, agencies for resource integration, guidance and coordination, the government, competent administrative departments, running enterprises, students, teachers, college administrators, industries, enterprises, students' families, media and social public, etc. But these stakeholders have different characteristics in the integrated optimization of teaching resources, i.e., they have different power, legitimacy and urgency. And these differences result in different driving powers of the integrated optimization of teaching resources, and then affect the progress of the integrated optimization. In this paper, the stakeholders of the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges are classified with the aid of Mitchell's scoring method. As the main body of resources optimization, higher vocational colleges enjoy the decision right on the allocation of the teaching resources, play their own roles in the integrated optimization according to the situation of their teaching resources and benefit from the optimization. And agencies for resource integration, guidance and coordination in different levels undertake the overall planning for the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges, play a leading role in the resource allocation optimization, coordinate stakeholders' cooperation motive and value orientation, carry on the resource allocation optimization orderly and help the involved parties gain corresponding benefit. Therefore, higher vocational colleges and agencies for resource integration, guidance and coordination in different levels, which possess triple characteristics of stakeholders, form definitive stakeholders. As the organizer and coordinator of resources integrated optimization, the government, competent administrative departments and running enterprises undertake the job of planning, coordination, guidance, supervision and service of resource intimated optimization, and create a good environment. Students,

109

teachers, college administrators, industries and enterprises are the beneficiaries of resource intimated optimization, whose requirements will affect management decisions. Therefore, the government, competent administrative departments, running enterprises, students, teachers, college administrators, industries and enterprises etc., constitute the expectant stakeholders. And the groups such as students' families, media and social public etc. are latent stakeholders who affect resource intimated optimization of higher vocational colleges through a variety of ways.

2. Stakeholders' Interest Goal of Integrated Optimization of Teaching Resources

2.1. Common interest goal From the point of stakeholders, different higher vocational colleges have different goals of integrated optimization of teaching resources. However, the integration is based on the idea of "mutual benefit, complementary advantages and common development", and aims at setting up cross-school integrated optimization model of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges through effective ways. Therefore, all of the stakeholders have a common interest goal which is embodied in the following aspects.

2.1.1. The pursuit of win-win cooperation in higher vocational colleges Due to different management systems in higher vocational colleges and imbalanced allocation of teaching resources, the break of intercollegiate boundaries and the full play of the overall effectiveness of teaching resources are conducive to the overall development of higher education. If the teaching resources are integrated and shared cross-school, the utilization ratio of resources can be improved, and the long-standing laboratories and equipment in some colleges are no longer idle. Meanwhile, low level repeated construction in some colleges can be avoided. Undoubtedly, the full integrated optimization of teaching resources in colleges and the maximum share of the teaching resources will effectively improve the teaching efficiency of higher vocational colleges.

2.1.2. The realization of sustainable development of higher vocational colleges Under the background of education popularization, the integration and further improvement of higher vocational colleges not only optimize the development

110

environment of teaching resources and effectively broaden the development space of colleges, but also promote the improvement of the resource sharing and teaching efficiency and is conducive to the formation of scale. Consequently, the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges can be a good initiative to enhance the core competitiveness and to cope with the negative effects of students decline, and be conducive to the sustainable development of higher vocational colleges.

2.1.3. The solution of the problem of the co-existing shortage and waste of education resources Due to the objective causes such as insufficient general investment of higher vocational education, rapid development of higher vocational colleges and high running cost of higher vocational education, the shortage of funds, especially the serious shortage of practice education funds, has become a common problem in higher vocational colleges. On the one hand, some higher vocational colleges are short of teaching resources of which the distribution is uneven. On the other hand, the rare use and low utilization ratio of some teaching equipment in other higher vocational colleges lead to poor investment benefit and waste of of high quality resources sharing system in higher vocational colleges can realize the optimization of resource benefits with the least amount of inputs, reduce the total investment of college education resources and solve the problem of the co- existing shortage and waste of resources caused by insufficient general investment of education or imbalanced professional development. Furthermore, the rational use of the human, material and financial resources in these colleges and the avoidance of the repeated investment can ease the current situation of insufficient education resources.

2.1.4. The improvement of students' learning effect and learning interest Obviously, the integration of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges and the full play of the advantage of software resource can effectively display the advantages of the eminent colleges, teachers and courses, and improve students' comprehensive quality and ability. So students can study in different colleges, feel different academic atmosphere and enjoy the teachings of high level experts and teachers to improve their qualities and abilities. And more favorable conditions can be created for students to improve their innovative thinking ability and market competitiveness by expanding the range of interdisciplinary and cross-school study, offering students a chance to go out of school, choosing the learning content according to their personal abilities,

111

optimizing their knowledge structure, experiencing different campus culture, and expanding horizons and scope of knowledge. These measures will improve the whole teaching quality of higher vocational colleges.

2.1.5. The promotion of intercollegiate cooperation and exchange and the enhancement of core competitiveness The integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges and the sharing of high quality teaching resources can promote the intercollegiate cooperation of teaching management. The teaching management departments can make multi-angle research and consultation in formulating the talent training scheme, course setting and form of course selection, etc. Based on contrastive analysis of talent training scheme, course index system etc., the teaching documents with referential nature, the blindness and fortuity of college teaching management can be overcome. While the student management department of each college gives full play to the advantage of the school management, they should explore and develop a new method of student management to make student management work systematic and targeted. Also, the integrated optimization of teaching resources can construct a platform of mutual observation learning and competition for teachers from different colleges, improving their overall academic level and enhancing the core competitiveness of the higher vocational colleges.

2.2. Individual interest goal Although three types of stakeholders have a common interest goal, they also present different characteristics on their individual interest goal.

2.2.1. The interest goal of definitive stakeholders From the perspective of definitive stakeholders, agencies for resource integration, guidance and coordination, of higher vocational colleges and the government, through the integrated optimization of teaching resources, can help the colleges make more scientific use of teaching resources, perfect conditions for running colleges, better the quality of education, justify the education structure, advance the higher vocational education comprehensively and build up the higher vocational education cluster adapting to social and economic development, so as to really achieve the goal of making full use of teaching resources, avoiding repeated construction, complementing each other,

112

improving teaching quality and training qualified vocational talents to make the biggest contribution to the development of higher vocational education. [3]

2.2.2. The interest goal of expectant stakeholders From the perspective of the expectant stakeholders, the government and the administrative department hope, through the integrated optimization of teaching resources, to realize fully rational use of resources, promote equity, guarantee employment and achieve the leaping development of vocational education. As the investment subject of private higher vocational colleges, running enterprises try to realize the rational use of resources, build brands, improve schooling quality and maximize the input and output through the integrated optimization of teaching resources. As the beneficiaries of the integrated optimization of resources, students, teachers, college administrators, industries and enterprises also reflects a certain differences in their benefit goal. Students hope to enjoy the high quality education, the best teachers, practice bases and curriculum resources, improve their technical skills, apply their learning into real use and become the social needed talents. Teachers hope to have orderly flow, improve their working efficiency, display their teacher talents and improve their happiness and job satisfaction. As for industries and enterprises, on the one hand, they hope the colleges can improve the teaching quality, cultivate the needed technical skill talents, improve the practice conditions and reduce the talent training cost of enterprises, but they are not concerned about whether to integrate and optimize the resources or not. On the other hand, some enterprises, as practice bases of some higher vocational colleges, hope to improve their corporate reputation and increase the attraction to talents by sharing practice resources with higher vocational colleges.

2.2.3. The interest goal of latent stakeholders As latent stakeholders, students' families, media and the public have vague interest goals. Students' families hope their children can get good education, enjoy high quality teaching resources and apply their learning, while the media and the public want to develop the higher vocational education, build brand colleges and serve the regional economic development.

113

3. Driving Power Analysis of the Stakeholders of the Integrated Optimization of Teaching Resources As mentioned, the interest goals of the stakeholders of the integrated optimization of resources consist of common interest goals as well as individual interest goals. It is these differences in interest goals that determine the driving power difference in the realization.

3.1. The driving power of the common interest goal With the idea of "mutual benefit, complementary advantages and common development", the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges is expected, through effective ways, to set up a cross-school integrated optimization model of teaching resources of higher vocational colleges, to realize the win-win cooperation, solve the problem of the co- existing shortage and waste of education resources, improve the students' learning effect and learning interest, enhance the core competitiveness and achieve sustainable development of higher vocational colleges. Consequently, the realization of the common interest goal must be planned as a whole, through the establishment of guidance and coordination agencies of the provincial and municipal level, to give play to the role of government guidance, improve the service mechanism, establish the teaching resource database, integrate and optimize teacher resources, curriculum resources and practice resources, set up a vocational education group, encourage group education and develop intensively.

3.2. The driving power of the individual interest goal

3.2.1. The driving power of the definitive stakeholders If the definitive stakeholders want to achieve their interest goals, they must give full play to the leading role of the guidance and coordination agencies of provincial and municipal level, draw up an overall planning for the integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges and coordinate their cooperation motives and value orientations of interest subjects. Therefore, the higher vocational colleges should participate actively, find out the actual situation of their teaching resources, get to know their advantages and deficiencies, complement each other, take what each needs, promote the balanced development and reasonable utilization of resources and achieve better economic and social benefits.

114

3.2.2. The driving power of the expectant stakeholders The driving power of the expectant stakeholders is revealed in the following aspects. To implement the leaping development of vocational education, the government and the administrative departments carry out the top design, provide policies and regulations guarantee, make overall planning, promote the full and reasonable use of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges, push on "municipal planning", optimize the resource structure to achieve resource sharing, guarantee fairness, promote entrepreneurship employment and improve people's livelihood. To maximize efficiency, the running enterprises, as the investment subject of private higher vocational colleges, boost investment plan, improve school management level, build close longitudinal relation with the same industry and enterprise, strengthen the horizontal cooperation with higher vocational colleges in the area, build school brand and improve teaching quality. To become the social needed talents, students learn professional knowledge, find their own professional interests, take part in contests actively, make full use of the integrated resources and realize zero docking with employing units. To realize the mutual promotion of their scientific research level, teachers improve their scientific research ability, practical teaching ability and level of skill, develop high quality teaching resources, share information resources, improve work efficiency and make teachers of high quality orderly flow in the colleges. To increase management efficiency, management personnel improve their work efficiency, serve educating and teaching and strengthen the peer exchange. To lower the training cost of enterprise talents and get the needed technical skill talents, the industries and enterprises represent their driving power in undertaking social responsibility, strengthening cooperation with higher vocational colleges and, participating in the formulation of talent training plan, implementing the order cultivation and cooperation cultivation, providing practice training places, carrying out industry schooling and releasing talent demand information. 3.2.3. The driving power of the latent stakeholders Due to the vague interest goal, the driving power of the latent stakeholders is revealed unclearly. The integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges will reinforce the cooperation among higher vocational colleges and improve their schooling level. Students' families, the media and the public will support the development of higher vocational education, create a good environment, build college brands and actively support higher vocational colleges to serve regional economic development.

115

4. Conclusion From the above expounded, it can be concluded that the effective integration of optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges must revolve around stakeholders' interest goal of integrated optimization of resources and analyzes different driving powers of different types of stakeholders. Only by doing so can the targets be aimed to take corresponding strategies and measures, to actually make reasonable use of higher vocational teaching resources and to make contributions to the development of vocational education.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by 2013 Research Project on Teaching Reform of Revitalization and Planning of Anhui Province “Research on Cross-school Integrated Optimization of Teaching Resources of Higher Vocational Colleges in Wan Jiang City Belt Under the theory of Pareto Improvement”, project number: 2013zdjy161.

References 1. Yue-Fei Luo, Evaluation of the main points in different stages of the stakeholder theory, J. A View of Labor Unions.2009, (7). 2. Sheng-Hua Jia, Hong-Hui Chen, Review of stakeholders characterization, J. Foreign economics and management, 2002, (5). 3. Xiao-Feng Sun, Si-Bao Wang, Study of cross-school integrated optimization of teaching resources in higher vocational colleges, J. China Higher Education Research, 2015, (3).

116

Implementation of Modern Apprenticeship in “HNA-Class” in Sanya Aviation and Tourism College

Xu Zhang1*, Hong Chen1, Shu-Jiao Yin2, Qing-Qing Guo1 and Bin-Bin Ren1

1Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Department, Sanya Aviation and Tourism College, 2Department of Foreign Languages, Sanya Aviation and Tourism College, Sanya 572000, Hainan, China *E-mail: [email protected]

This paper applies the modern apprenticeship in the teaching of higher vocational education to development highly-skilled talents that are required by enterprises. Firstly, Sanya Aviation and Tourism College and HNA Technik Co., Ltd. cooperated through the signing of a training contract. The college then constructs a teaching plan according to the enterprise’s needs. After graduating from the college, students are assigned certain positions during the internship to learn techniques and skills from qualified supervisors and becoming regular staff after the internship ends. The students are competent in their jobs despite having a shorter learning period than other methods. The training method of modern apprenticeship is suitable to the national industrial conditions in China. However, there are several problems regarding the implementation process and thus future work need to be done for the long-term implementation of modern apprenticeship. Keywords: Higher Vocational Education; Modern Apprenticeship; College-enterprise Cooperation.

1. Introduction Since the 1970s, by observing the actual economic activity, many countries have gradually realized that technology is not only commanded by knowledge, thus, the importance of practical education and experiential learning was emphasized since then. However, this kind of practice is hard to be carried out in college, especially in the modern production conditions which was dominated by large mechanical productions. As a result, students must go to the job site to receive actual training. At present, all countries had formed a new recognition toward the traditional apprenticeship system. In order to solve the problem, what we can do is to adapt to the new form of industry and restore the apprenticeship rather than abolish the former apprenticeship system [1], and then develop it into a modern one, with reforms taken. In 1996, the educational committee for “Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development, OECD” organized its 14 members doing research on the project of “A Review of Steering from Elementary Education to Career”, with two research objectives to achieve; Firstly, to discuss the steering of job change of young people during the 1990s,

117

which is under the framework of lifelong learning. Secondly, the committee is aimed to study and discuss education, labor and social policies as well as the mutual effect between these three aspects which could lead the young people to have a successful steering. All the participating countries submitted a background report on their national young people’s employment situation and the key policy points, in which the function of modern apprenticeship in the young people’s successful entering into the labor market has been involved. These countries include the United States, Britain, Japan, Australia, and so on [2–5]. With 30 years of reform and opening-up, our national economy developed rapidly and obtained remarkable achievements. At present, China's economy is in a transformation period, changing from mainly relying on the increase in capital and resources to increase the number of products. Nowadays, China is trying to convert the extensive mode of economic growth into a labor-based one, which means, China plans to increase the number of products and improve the quality of the products by relying on the scientific and technological progress and improving the quality of its laborers. Thus, the intensive economic growth mode of economic growth is promoted. Economic transformation puts forward high demands for education, especially for vocational education. It requires education to provide a large number of high-level technical personnel for the development of the national economy. Therefore, the training mode of modern apprenticeship will be a good choice for higher vocational education on a trial basis [6]. Our current vocational education pattern is the product of the industrial revolution. It is now systematic and standardized with developing up to now. Each school has formed similar period of schooling, training program, teaching mode, etc. Although this system has been regarded as a common method for training the young, it also showed the biggest deficiency in practice, that is, knowledge and ability is separated, which can not meet the needs of the transformation period in our country, in which high-quality technical personnel is in need. However, modern apprenticeship emphasizes that students should learn in a real working environment, stressing the importance of experience activities in learning. As learners are in production groups, they not only need to learn skills but also learn to cooperate with others, and then learn how to participate in the modern social production. Although modern apprenticeship plays a very important role in the vocational education in western developed countries, specific methods should be taken in different countries according to various actual situations. In other words, we must try the modern apprenticeship

118

out according to our actual situation and never copy the western mode completely. The purpose of this research topic is to try the modern apprenticeship out in the teaching of higher vocational education by integrating the actual situation and demand of our country, and thus, cultivate high-quality and skilled talents for the enterprise.

2. Methods College and enterprise cooperate and set up the “HNA-Class”. Since the year of 2012, Sanya Aviation and Tourism College, cooperated with HNA Technik Co., Ltd., has set up the “Civil Aircraft Maintenance Personnel Training Class” (hereinafter referred to as the “HNA-Class) to cultivate high-quality and skilled personnel to satisfy the needs of the civil aircraft maintenance. There are two steps for the implementation of the HNA-Class:

2.1. Preparation for “HNA-Class” The main jobs are as follows:

2.1.1. Signing contract In the contract, duties of college, enterprise and students (including their parents) are clarified. In this way, their responsibilities, rights and obligations are clearly defined with the use of the contract.

2.1.2. Setting up a professional apprenticeship working group In order to ensure the implementation of the project, college united with the relating enterprise and formed a professional apprenticeship working group which is consisted by college leaders, enterprise personnel and professional teachers.

2.1.3. College and enterprise making the training program together A curriculum system about modern apprenticeship is innovated, in which demand of talents training standard is confirmed, the corresponding curriculum standard, apprentice acceptance standard and management methods of the apprentice are formulated. At the same time, Students’ work performance and teachers’ evaluation are added to the academic evaluation standards.

119

2.2. Implementation period of “HNA-Class” In this period, college is trying to realize that “enrollment equals to employment; in-class equals to in-factory” and implement the modern apprenticeship from students recruitment, students cultivation and evaluation. The main jobs are as follows:

(i) The dual identity of students should be clarified, which means “being a student in college and an apprentice in enterprise”. At the same time, training in the enterprise and studying in class should be combined organically. We adopt a “1+1+0.5+0.5” personnel training mode, which means, students will spend half of their time training at enterprise and half of the time learning theoretical knowledge and professional skills at school. (ii) Recourses, including technology strengths, training equipment and training space, should be shared, especially the complementation of the well- qualified technician and the high-level professional teachers. (iii) Management of the students and the teaching process. The enterprise should trace the teaching status of the apprentice class all the way and send some technicians as the part-time teachers and appoint skillful craftsmen to be the teachers of the students. (iv) Enterprise skill evaluation is as important as school exam. In order to meet the dual demands of both the enterprise and college, a “double-score- system” is carried out, in other words, both the enterprise and college will have exams for students. 2.3. Non-“HNA-Class” students As there are also many students who are not in the “HNA-Class”, we adopt the following methods to teach them:

(i) Sum up the experiences from the “HNA-Class” and convert them into specific teaching requirements by confirming the general requirements of the industry, the basic skills required and basic requirements from higher education. (ii) Establish a “stimulated factory” and implement “in-school apprenticeship” by. The school training center and experienced teachers or technicians from both parties (college and enterprise) play the role of “the enterprise”; and the department leaders and professional teachers work as “the college”.

120

(iii) Cultivate high-skilled talents that meet the needs of the enterprise according to the dual standards from both enterprise and college, which is to inspect the cultivation quality. Meanwhile, skill assessment and school examination should be equally important and stressed.

3. Results By the end of 2014, “HNA-class” has been carried out for 3 years; they were Grade 2011 (which means students enrolled in 2011), Grade 2012 and Grade 2013 respectively. Both the college and the enterprise were very satisfied and the effect was good. Students from Grade 2011 and 2012 have all graduated and began to work. Among that, 29 out of 32 students in Grade 2011 worked in the cooperative enterprise, with 90% of employment rate. Meanwhile, 35 out of 45 students worked in the cooperative enterprise, with 78% of employment rate. For students in the “HNA-class”, they received further professional training and worked in very important positions, and thus, got affirmation from their leaders and earned a good salary of about 5000 yuan per month. While for those who were not employed by the cooperative enterprise, the reason is because of their poor English. In order to cultivate more talents, college learned from “HNA- class” experience and broadened the internship channels with some other Airline Companies so that more students could find suitable jobs. In this way, the students' employment rate was increased effectively.

4. Discussion There are lots of problems in the trial implementation of the modern apprenticeship, some of which can’t be solved only by school.

4.1. Contradiction with the interests of the enterprise As a partner in the trial implementation of the modern apprenticeship, the enterprise is in a dominant position, which means that the enterprise is to maximize the interests as its goal. In the cooperation process, all the considerations of the enterprise are basing on interests. As a result, they may have contradictions with school, whose main purpose is to cultivate talents. In this way, school tends to be passive, which affects the teaching effect. For example, students are often assigned to do some low-technical jobs, or even do some jobs which have nothing to do with technique. What’s more, students are employed as coolies to solve the problem of labor shortage of the enterprise. Meanwhile, enterprise is unwilling to pay the students by saying that they are

121

under the requiring technical level and inexperienced, and they don’t even pay them. All these problems exist in national wide [7].

4.2. Contradictions with the current length of schooling The current length of schooling of higher vocational school is 3 years; there is too little time for students to have training practice after deducting the periods for public courses, professional basic courses and the professional theory courses. This reality affects the training for techniques and skills.

4.3. Funding problems of trying out the apprenticeship As we know, fund is very limited in school. However, majors like technology subject require a big investment in the experimental and training equipment. At the same time, school should pay the enterprise when trying out the apprenticeship, which greatly increases the cost for running. Since it belongs to the category of national education for school when we are trying out the modern apprenticeship, so the government should support colleges with expenditure. Nowadays, there are many countries doing like this, for example, in German, the fund for apprenticeship is mainly shared by the government and the enterprise. It is shown in a statistics that the Germany government contributed 1.97 billion Mark to develop vocational education and the Employment Department contributed 4.6 billion in the 1980s [8].

4.4. Issues related to the resources of students The enrollment mark of vocational school students is relatively low and many students make their choices of majors blindly and speculatively, which results in low interests in their future learning. The reason why this phenomenon arises is not only due to the students themselves but also because of the national policies, especially because of the unfair distribution of education resources which exists in many countries. However, for the handling of this problem, some of the foreign practices may be helpful. Let’s take Germany for example. In Germany, young people can receive "apprenticeship training" from middle school and then get employed if they don’t do well in reading, writing or calculating, after which, students can choose to go to the college or university to have further learning by enhancement. While those who do well in reading, writing and calculating can receive university education firstly, and then get "apprenticeship training" before going to work. For these two kinds of students, university and apprentice are reversible [9, 10].

122

4.5. Setting up the Associate’s Degree and getting social recognition After receiving the "apprenticeship training", students from higher vocational college possess relatively high skills and corresponding theoretical knowledge and thus welcomed by the enterprise. Nevertheless, because of the traditional concepts of our nation, there still exist discriminations for the technical personnel who are not engaged in non-academic jobs. In order to solve this problem, we can consider that whether students can get the Associate’s Degree with reference to the two-year community college in the United States. Similar degrees can be set up in higher vocational college to show respect to the skilled talents.

5. Conclusion Practice of the first contract period shows that high-level technical talent which the enterprise in need can be cultivated by the modern apprenticeship, with satisfactions from both enterprise and parents. However, school costs too much in the whole operation, which is not conducive to long-term operation. In order to carry out the modern apprenticeship, the state should have corresponding systems to guarantee the effective implementation with the legal basis and institutional guarantee.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by the Teaching Reform Project Foundation for Colleges and Universities in Hainan Province (No:Hnjg2015ZD-19).

References 1. Hosoya Toshio. Overview of Vocational Education [M], Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 1984. 2. OECD. The Thematic Review of Transition from Initial Education to Working Life [R], USA Country Note. June, 1999. 3. OECD. The Thematic Review of Transition from Initial Education to Working Life [R], United Kingdom Country Note. June, 1999. 4. OECD. The Thematic Review of Transition from Initial Education to Working Life [R], Japan Country Note. March, 2000. 5. OECD. The Thematic Review of Transition from Initial Education to Working Life [R], Australia Country Note. August, 1997.

123

6. Ouyang Qiong, Rijia Ding. The Reference Significance of Foreign Modern Apprenticeship Training Mode for China [J], Chinese Personnel, 2012, Periodical: 08, 278–279. 7. Yumei He. Theory and Practice of Modern Apprenticeships in Higher Vocational Colleges [J], China Electric Power Education, 2013, Periodical:16, 10–11. 8. Riqiang Huang. The Main Source of German Vocational Education Funds [J], Journal of World Education. 2006 (10): 37–39. 9. P. Grollmann and F. Rauner. Exploring Innovative Apprenticeship: Quality and Costs [J]. Education &Training, 2007, (49/6): 431–446. 10. M. Behrens, M. Pilz and O. Geuling. Take a Strainghtforward Detour: Learning and Labour Market Participation in the German Apprenticeship System [J]. Vocational Education and Training, 2007(60/1): 93–104.

124

Effects of CBL Mode to Residency Training Doctor of Prosthodontics for Making Diagnosis and Treatment Plan

Bin Deng Department of Stomatology, The General Hospital of Chinese People's Liberation Army (301 Hospital), Beijing 100853, China E-mail:dengbin301@139. com

This paper studies the effect of CBL learning on the residency training doctors of prosthodontics’ ability to make diagnosis and treatment plans. In a randomized controlled trial experiment, 62 resident doctors were divided into two groups, which were taught with CBL and traditional teaching method respectively, with an examination paper test and questionnaire survey distributed after the teaching session. The experiment data was analyzed with the t-test and chi-square test. The scores, diagnostic accuracy and rationality of treatment plan of the experimental group were higher than that of control group (P<0.05). The questionnaire showed that CBL mode was positively evaluated by students of experimental group, but at the same time, it also increased the burden of course learning. CBL teaching is advantageous to increase the diagnostic accuracy and rationality of treatment plan, and improve the students’ competency of case analysis. CBL method should be selectively applied in the teaching process and applied depending on specific situations. Meanwhile, its limitations need to be recognized, to avoid excessive burden on the students and consequently reducing the students' interest in learning. Keywords: Prosthodontics; Case Based Learning; Treatment Plans. 1. Introduction In recent years, Case-Based learning (CBL) was widely used in oral medical education [1].Compared with the traditional classroom teaching, CBL can greatly improve students' initiative to obtain knowledge, provide a good clinical simulation environment, expand its knowledge point and cultivate creative ability, more and more educators were strongly advocated in the use of prosthodontics. However, some scholars believed that there was no sufficient evidence that CBL can improve the clinical ability of students, the teaching method is complex and time-consuming, and the application of CBL was limited by the teaching design and the requirements of the teachers [2]. In China, as a clinical practical discipline, prosthodontics only can be get some basic theory at the undergraduate stage learning, and the real meaning of clinical and in-depth

125

learning is in the graduate phase. After nearly 2 years of exploration, it is found that CBL does help to speed up the students to adapt to the clinical operation, improve the correct rate, but the problem cannot be ignored in the course of CBL teaching. In this paper, the relationship between CBL and the treatment plan of oral rehabilitation program was introduced, and the effectiveness of the training process of the resident specialist training was discussed.

2. Materials and Methods 2.1. Research object From 2010 to 2015, 62 resident doctors were randomly divided into experimental group (CBL Group) and control group (Traditional teaching group).

2.2. Research methods Six related clinical data were sent to all resident in one week before the course commencement date, the data included the patient's clinical examination results and intraoral photographs and dentition model. Students would be asked a series of questions, including the diagnosis and the possible causes of those disease, and proposed the corresponding treatment scheme. The control group: the teacher explained the basic knowledge and the way to analyze the case, each group of students answered the question, the teacher should detail note the answers and the correct rates, and announced the answer after class. Experimental group: teachers for students to provide list of reference books, and guidance on how to use search tools, such as the use of campus network of digital library materials, reference books or literature. Students used spare time to search for information and issues related to the discussion. When in the class, one of those students explained the results of the discussion, including diagnosis, etiology and treatment design scheme and prognosis estimation, the other students can supplement at any time. After that the teacher summaries and evaluate the students’ discussion. After learning, the students of the experimental group and the control group were treated with closed book exam[3].And the rationality of the treatment plan was evaluated by the same professor. 2.3. Statistical analysis Using SPSS 13 software for statistical analysis, including the t-test and χ2-test analysis of two groups of samples, the level of α=0.05.

126

3. Results Table 1 shows two groups of students’ examination results, diagnosis rate and rationality evaluation of the treatment plan; Table 2 shows the results of the questionnaire survey. Test scores using two sample mean comparison of hypothesis test (t test), the test pass rate by Yates correction χ2-test, Pearson χ2- test was used to correct diagnosis rate and evaluation of the rationality of the treatment.

Table 1. Statistical Analysis of [n=31, n (%)].

Experimental Control group t / F P

group Examination performance 86.17±7.41 77.03±6.57 5.1387 0.0000 Examination pass rate 27 (87.10) 28 (90.32) 0.0000 1.0000 Correct rate of diagnosis 28 (90.32) 21 (67.74) 4.7692 0.0290 Rationality evaluation 25 (80.65) 17 (54.84) 4.7238 0.0297 of the treatment plan Note: Two groups of students’ examination results, diagnosis rate and rationality evaluation of the treatment plan. Table notes.

Table 2. The evaluation of the students in the experimental group CBL[n=31, n(%)].

survey items YES NO Whether it helps to enhance the self-learning ability 28 (90.32) 3 (9.60) Whether it can help improve the theory test scores 14 (45.16) 17 (54.84) Whether it is helpful to cultivate the ability of 19 (61.29) 12 (38.71) division of labor Whether to increase the course burden 26 (83.87) 5(16.13) Whether to improve the ability to improve the 25 (80.65) 6 (19.35) analysis problem Whether to shorten the adaptation period of clinical work 20 (64.52) 11 (35.48) Note: The results of the questionnaire survey.

4. Discussion Prosthodontics is a practical and theoretical discipline, it is difficult for the residents who does never been trained in clinical practice to understand and the specific circumstances of each patient are very different, Prosthodontics also had different clinical cases, specific circumstances of each patient, its design program, treatment and prognosis in clinical work, so students should be flexible to use the theory knowledge. So, students should be flexible to use the theory knowledge. As shown in Table 1, with the completion of the teaching, the two groups of students have a better understanding and grasp of the clinical cases of

127

oral rehabilitation, the rate of diagnosis has reached the expected target. But the students in the experimental group showed better flexibility, the correct rate diagnosis and the rationality of the treatment plan were significantly higher than the control group, the difference between the two groups was statistically significant. The study results suggest that the CBL can provide students with more closely real clinical scene, arouse the students' interest in learning, so the method in developing treatment has obvious advantage [4,5], application of CBL can effectively cultivate students to develop a reasonable treatment plan quality, improve students' analysis and problem solving ability. Help students to make their theoretical knowledge and practical combination and express them more better. Traditional education makes students have to pay attention to exam results, some students worried that although the CBL teaching method has invested a lot of time and energy, but may fail to get good grades in the exam. So, it is necessary to carry out simple training to students, and let them know the use of CBL is helping students to self-learning, deep learning and master the skills of lifelong learning. Table 1 results show that the application of CBL significantly improved the students' average score and pass rate. Through the survey (Table 2), 90.32% students believed that CBL teaching can enhance students' self-learning ability. All students can make full use of network, reference books and other learning resources to access to their own needs, so that students can grasp the effective learning methods, and cultivate students' self-learning ability. 45.16% of the students thought that CBL is helpful to improve the learning performance. The use of CBL teaching can give students a full preview of the time, so that students can deeply understand the learning content and focus on the problem of thinking, but this has a clear understanding of the proportion of students need to be improved. 61.29% students believed CBL is helpful for cultivating the ability of division of labor, students need to cooperate in group discussions and students' team spirit and cooperation ability get exercised in the collaborative learning process. 80.65% students admitted that CBL teaching with typical clinical cases for breakthrough point can guide them to a comprehensive analysis of disease etiology, clinical manifestation, diagnosis, treatment and prognosis, enable students to a deeper and more comprehensive understanding of the disease. 64.52% of the students believe that the CBL teaches students to learn the theoretical knowledge and practical application of the organic combination to complete the transformation from theory to clinical application ability, which can help to shorten the clinical adaptation period. 83.87% of the students believe that although CBL teaching improve their learning interest, stimulate their enthusiasm and initiative, it needs

128

to be invested a lot of time and energy to search a lot of information for further reorganizing and making courseware.

5. Conclusion In short, CBL teaching had its theoretical basis, it is widely used in the domestic and international teaching[6–8]. CBL teaching should be used purposively and alternatively by combining with the actual situation of students, we should fully understand its limitations to avoid giving students the burden of excessive learning which may reduce students' learning interest.

References 1. S.Y. Zhang, J.W. Zheng, C Yang, et al. Case-based learning in clinical courses in a Chinese college of stomatology. J Dent Educ 76, 1389(2012). 2. S.E. Park, H.K. Susarla, R Nalliah, et al. Does a case completion curriculum influence dental students' clinical productivity. J Dent Educ 76, 602(2012). 3. L.J Chen, T Sun, H Fan, et al. Bilingual teaching efficiency of prosthodontics in different teaching methods. Frontier and Future Development of Information Technology in Medicine and Education, Lecture Notes in Electrical Engineering 269, 1487(2014). 4. L.J Staton, C Estrada, M Panda, et al. A multimethod approach for cross- cultural training in an internal medicine residency program. Med Educ Online 18, 20352(2013). 5. M Cahill, M O'Donnell, A Warren, et al. Enhancing interprofessional student practice through a case-based model. J Interpr of Care 27, 333(2013). 6. M Kalwitzki, C Beyer, C Meller. Differences in the perception of seven behavior modifying techniques in pediatric dentistry by undergraduate students using lecturing and video sequences for teaching. Eur J Dent Educ14, 247(2010). 7. Engel FE, Hendricson WD. A case based learning model in orthodontics. J Dent Educ 58, 762 (1994). 8. D Adolfi, de Freitas AJ, M Groisman. Achieving aesthetic success with an immediate function implant and customized abutment and coping. Pract Proced Aesthet Dent 17, 649(2005).

129

Analysis of the Significance of Skills Competition Based on Civil Engineering Specialty Group at Vocational Colleges for Training Highly-Skilled Individuals

Cheng-Bin Liu, Xiu-Qing Gao, Hong-Xiao Gao, Min-Qi Han, Dun Zhang and Hao Zhang

Department of Hydraulic and Architectural Engineering, Beijing Vocational College of Agriculture Beijing, 102442, China E-mail: [email protected]

The National Vocational Student Skills Competition has become a significant institutional design and innovation in China’s vocational education progress and it is an important platform for the selection and training of skilled individuals. This paper analyzes the significance of skills competition based on civil engineering specialty group in vocational colleges, developed by Hydraulic and Architectural Engineering Department of Beijing Vocational College of Agriculture during the construction of the civil engineering specialty group. It is a win-win situation for both students and teachers as teachers can upgrade their professional competence and enhance their teaching qualities, and students can demonstrate their professional skills and strengthen their all- round qualities. This platform provides a sound foundation for the nurturing of highly qualified and skilled individuals which can meet the demands of modern society.

Keywords: Vocational Colleges; Civil Engineering Specialty Group; Skills Competition; Win-Win Situation.

1. Introduction In order to cultivate more highly qualified and skilled personnel, China’s government spends great effort and money to organize National Vocational Student Skills Competition every year. This competition has become a significant institutional design and innovation in China’s vocational education progress and an important platform for training and selection of skilled personnel. This platform requires vocational colleges to shift their focus from passing on knowledge to cultivating skills and requires students to convert subject knowledge to vocational skills. Chinese experts have conducted a lot of investigations and research on this topic and their research results have been effectively applied in practice [1–3]. During the construction of the civil engineering specialty group, Hydraulic and Architectural Engineering Department of Beijing Vocational College of Agriculture emphasized that member specialties of this group should establish their own special interest groups in the light of results of enterprise survey and

130

organize skills training activities, with an aim to foster students’ professional skills. Training activities should concentrate on skills which our students are seriously poor at as pointed out by surveyed enterprises. To this end, all the specialties have visited many enterprises to carry out an in-depth survey during the summer holidays. Based on the survey results, each specialty set up a special interest group and carried out some skills training activities among students. Later, skills competitions were held to examine the performance of the students. The four competition events included the fourth-order leveling organized by the specialty of hydraulic construction technology, manual counting of architectural engineering budget organized by the specialty of architectural engineering technology, interior decoration design organized by the specialty of architectural decoration technology, and joint checking of construction drawings organized by the specialty of engineering supervision. This paper analyzes the significance of skills competition based on civil engineering specialty group in vocational colleges.

2. Establishment and Implementation of Skills Competition Rules The rules of the professional skills competitions are as follows:

(1) Competition scope and qualifications for participation. (2) Content and mode of competition. (3) Equipment and tools. (4) Competition rules and considerations. (5) Evaluation of results. After setting detailed competition rules according to the general rules, each specialty organized a special interest group and introduced the students to the competition rules for better results.

3. Significance of Skills Competitions 3.1. Help to reduce vocational college teachers’ prejudice against students It is undeniable that vocational colleges’ student pools are inferior to universities’. As students at vocational colleges usually do poorly at school, with little inclination to do self-study, and have bad study habits, teachers find it very difficult to teach theoretical courses and are likely to show pessimism about their work. As a result, they often have low expectations on students and believe it’s very hard for students at vocational colleges to succeed [4]. In effect,

131

however, these students also have many good qualities, such as activeness and good manual dexterity. By allowing the students to demonstrate their operational skills to teachers, the competition platform based on civil engineering specialty group has aroused their interest in learning and raised their confidence. In return, the teachers of our department gradually change their prejudice and take a new look at the students. During the skills competitions, teachers often surprisingly find that their students had such good manual dexterity.

3.2. Enable teachers to enhance their practical teaching skills To satisfy vocational colleges’ demand for “dual-qualification” teachers, teachers must have the ability to improve students’ professional skills, in addition to professional knowledge. Now all the teachers of our department meet the standard of “dual-qualification” teachers, but in reality they still need to strengthen their teaching skills as most of them have no experience in working on the front line. In hope of organizing these competitions successfully, the faculty of the department has conducted frequent exchanges with enterprises’ engineers and even invited some experienced ones to provide guidance to our teachers and students. Before competitions, the specialties have established assessment criteria and meticulously designed every operation in partnership with the engineers in order to make manipulations correct and standard. In this process, the teachers are able not only to gain a full knowledge of enterprises’ demand for highly qualified and skilled talent as well as skill requirements for related jobs, but also to upgrade their own professional and practical abilities, qualities as “dual- qualification” teachers, course content, and teaching skills for better teaching quality. In this way, a dynamic educational model featuring competition and progress among both teachers and students was formed[5].

3.3. Encourage students to improve their professional competence After years of teaching reform, the ratio of the credit hours of practical courses to those of theoretical courses has generally reached 1: 1 in the Hydraulic and Architectural Engineering Department. But many students have reflected that the practical courses are still inadequate and some skills practiced in the courses are not desired by enterprises. Therefore, the skills competitions based on the civil engineering specialty group were expected to help the students improve their professional competence. As the competition events were determined

132

according to the results of enterprise survey, they were closely integrated with various engineering practices to meet enterprises’ needs. Preliminary competitions and training organized among different majors in the specialty group have significantly aroused their interest in learning. The students actively refer to study materials after class. They not only review the professional knowledge they have learned but also hunger for new knowledge. The specialty group will invite engineers from enterprises to give lectures to our teachers and students during training and the students show great interest in the lectures because they know that technical ability is the foundation of their future career. Therefore, the competitions stimulate them to learn from each other and enhance their professional competence.

3.4. Help to strengthen the students’ spirit of teamwork As a result of fast scientific and technological development, knowledge and information are exploding on a scale and at a speed that are far beyond the ability of people to absorb. Against this backdrop, learning to effectively share information becomes a required course and basic ability for us. Harriet Zuckerman, an American sociologist, found that 185 out of the 286 people who received a Nobel Prize between 1901 and 1972 had undertaken their research in cooperation with others. Over the first 25-year-period after the Nobel Prize was established, the Nobel Prize winners engaged in cooperative research accounted for 41% of the total number of winners; this proportion rose to 65% and 79% respectively over the second and third 25-year-period. These figures demonstrate that cooperative research has become an inevitable trend of scientific research [6]. Therefore, besides teaching professional knowledge and skills, vocational colleges also need to foster students’ vocational qualities, such as learning to be, learning to do, professional ethics, teamwork, etc. Most of the skills competitions require teamwork, and entrants in other competitions also have to communicate with and learn from other members of their interest groups for improvement. In its report to UNESCO titled “Learning, the treasure within”, the International Commission on Education for the Twenty-first Century pointed out that cultivation of students’ spirit of teamwork is to teach them how to coexist with others, which is one of the four pillars of education. Vocational college students typically stay at schools for two and a half years or even less after deducting the period of graduation practice. Due to the lack of collective living experience, these students have poor spirit of teamwork. This skills competition platform based on civil engineering specialty group promotes their mutual

133

understanding and complementation and thus enhances the comprehensive ability of the whole group. After participating in these skills competitions, the students become more able to communicate and more willing to organize a team. skills competitions provide an opportunity for participants to demonstrate their own achievement and the spirit of teamwork of their groups, especially the latter.

3.5. Cultivate students’ psychological qualities As vocational college students leave schools relatively early, it is especially important and urgent to cultivate their psychological qualities. Any competition is intended to test not only participants’ knowledge and skills, but also their psychological qualities [7]. This skills competition platform based on civil engineering specialty group can just provide an opportunity for the students to strengthen their psychological qualities. Good psychological qualities are an important condition for success in competitions. Some introverted students may meet some psychological problems in competitions in regardless of their good command of theoretical knowledge and practical skills. Through the preliminary competitions and training, these students will become livelier and psychologically stronger to avoid stage fright. There is a saying that three minutes of stage performance require ten years of hard work. Intense training and practice before competition can toughen the students; tremendous and difficult work during competition is a test of their precision and efficiency. Good psychological qualities, such as correct attitude, concentration, and composure, are the key to succeeding in competitions. Therefore, skills competitions can not only strengthen students’ professional skills but also foster their psychological qualities. 3.6. Facilitate communication and cooperation between teachers and students The increasing tense relationship between teachers and students of vocational colleges has been frequently reported. Students complain that their course content is too insipid to comprehend, while teachers criticize students’ passive attitude to learning. In the long term, this situation will develop into a vicious circle where teachers muddle along and students play truant from school and indulge in online games. Consequently, the quality of students from vocational colleges gradually goes downhill. The lack of communication and mutual understanding between teachers and students is one cause of this phenomenon. Skills competitions can just serve as a platform for communication and cooperation between them. The establishment of competition rules, preliminary

134

competition, and training relied on the concerted and tireless efforts of the teachers and students. In daily life, interaction between teachers and students generally takes place only in classes and only in relation to course content. After class, teachers seldom communicate with students, resulting in serious estrangement between them. Skills competitions can promote close contact and cooperation between teachers and students, which will not only improve their relationship and professional competence, but also strengthen their ability to cooperate. In this way, students can learn from teachers about how to harmoniously coexist, and teachers can regain a sense of achievement from students.

4. Conclusion The skills competition platform based on civil engineering specialty group not only provides an opportunity for teachers to upgrade professional competence and enhance their qualities as “dual-qualification” teachers, but also enables students to demonstrate their professional skills and strengthen their all-round qualities. A win-win for both teachers and students was achieved though more communication and cooperation between them. More importantly, in the context of National Vocational Student Skills Competition, this skills competition platform can provide not only a reference and intellectual support for organization of competitions at a provincial and national scale, but also a sound foundation for cultivation of highly qualified and skilled personnel that meets the demand of modern society.

Acknowledgments All of the authors are financially supported by Beijing 2013 higher teaching reform project: the Practical Teaching System Innovation Research and Practice of Higher Vocational Civil Engineering Professional Group(Project host: Xiu- Qing Gao) and the Civil Engineering Professional Group Construction Project of Beijing Vocational College of Agriculture (2013) (Project host: Xiu-Qing Gao).

References 1. Shu-Guang Wu, Xin-Sheng Li. Construction of Teaching Mode of Higher Vocational Schools Based on “Knowledge + Skills”. Vocational and Technical Education, 2013, 34(5): 29–31.

135

2. Zhi-Chao Yang. Teaching Design Model of Vocational Skills Training. Career Horizon, 2008(6): 34–37. 3. Yan-lin Wang. Analysis on Market Malfunction, Government Malfunction and the Problem of Skills Shortage. Vocational and Technical Education, 2013, 34(10): 17-22. 4. Lu-yan Fang, Yu-qin Pan. Primary research into effect of skills competition towards vocational college development. China Higher Medical Education, 2012(5): 59-60. 5. Wen Li, Jian Gao. Inspiration of Vocational Skills Competition to Higher Vocational Education. Career Horizon, 2010(4): 48-49. 6. Shu-man He. Successful Psychology and Talent Development. Beijing: World Book Inc, 1999. 7. Jing-gui Cui, Liang Huang. Psychological Analysis on Vocational School Students Participating in Skills Competition and the Strategy. Vocational and Technical Education, 2013, 35(17): 73-78.

136

The Analysis and Research on Incentive Mechanism and its Application in Network Education

Min Hou1, Jun Han2, Jing Liu and Jia-Sha Zhang Department of Educational Technology, Capital Normal University, Beijing, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

An effective incentive mechanism can improve the efficiency of study and work. Despite the rapid development of network education, there are still several problems regarding the incentive mechanism. This paper firstly explains the concept of incentive and the classification of motivation. Secondly, the incentive mechanism in the four fields of enterprise management, sale, game design and social network platform is classified and analyzed. Lastly, possible methods of applying and implementing these incentive mechanisms in the network education are proposed.

Keywords: Incentive mechanism; Spiritual motivation; Material motivation; Network education.

1. Introduction In recent years, network education has developed rapidly. But there are some general problems. The root cause of these problems lies in the problem of the incentive measures in the website. Motivation plays a very important role in all aspects of life. The existing incentive measures in various fields will be discussed, and the incentive measures with reference value are sought to promote the further development of network education. This paper analyzes the incentive mechanism and its possible application in network education.

2. Concept and Classification of Motivation 2.1. Concept of motivation In the field of psychology, the action of man's will is to begin with the need. “Incentive is to make people's behavior to obey the organization's goal, it is one of the important functions of management”.[1] In the field of education, Dan Cao (2007), an education expert, says that: "Incentive refers to stimulate learners' motivation, namely means that people use

137

all kinds of effective methods to mobilize the learner's enthusiasm and creativity, make learners to complete the task, while the incentive mechanism is an ordered set of these effective methods ".[2] Xuemei Xu says that: "Incentive is a series of psychological process: with the effect of external incentives, through the individual effective self-regulation, so as to stimulate, guide, maintain and adjust individual toward a given target and work hard to achieve the established goals ".[3] Based on the above definitions, it can be concluded that incentive means that managers can synthetically utilize effective incentive measures, to stimulate people's inner psychological needs, make employees to strive to achieve the goal, and then get a reinforce, so as to further motivate people's behavior.

2.2. Classification of motivation According to different standards, incentives have different classification methods. As shown in Table1:

Table 1. Classification of incentives.

Criteria First kind Second kind Incentive content Material motivation Spiritual motivation Incentive object Inspiration from others Self motivation Form of production External motivation Internal motivation The role of incentives Positive excitation Negative excitation

3. Analysis of Incentive Mechanisms in All Areas In the organizational system, “Incentive mechanism" refers to incentive subjects use many kinds of incentive methods and then make the incentive methods standardized, make mutual restriction and interaction with the incentive object on the structure, the way, the relationship and evolution.[4]The incentive measures in each field can be summarized as two aspects of spiritual and material.

3.1. Enterprise managements Three aspects of the material incentive in the enterprise management are included: the salary system, the employee stock ownership and the position promotion. Spiritual motivation is relatively diverse, it is divided into five areas: trust incentives, work motivation, honor incentives, emotional incentives and corporate culture incentives. As shown in Table 2.

138

Table 2. Incentive mechanism in the field of enterprise management.

Spiritual motivation Trust Right authorization Work motivation Planning career incentive Democratic management Good working environment Suggestions and criticism Job rotation Give employees positive Train expectations Entrusted with the appropriate work Honor Praise Corporate culture Shaping corporate culture personality incentive punishment incentive Develop team spirit, emphasize mechanism collaboration Example Human resource management based on enterprise culture Collective sense of honor Various media forms Personal sense of honor Set up the good social image of the enterprise Material motivation Salary Incentive pay Employee stock ownership Additional salary Promotion Welfare salary Basic salary 3.2. Sales area Take the largest online shopping platform Taobao as an example to study the incentive measures in sales area. Two aspects of the spirit incentives in Taobao are included: the quality of construction of the site and the provision of services. Material incentives refer to promotional tools in Taobao. As shown in Table 3.

Table 3. Incentive mechanism in sales area. Spiritual motivation Material motivation :Promotion means Website Website design Taobao integration construction quality Customer service center Gold coin Service Rental, login, service charge, shop creation Red packets guarantee and so on are free Customer service is in place Luck draw New merchant shop guide Qintao, mobile phones and other Poly cost-effective communication tools Advertising sales Test center Product supervision policy Holiday Sale Credit evaluation system A low price every day Strong logistics support The whole point spike

139

3.3. Game field Take the "hero alliance" as an example to study the motivation mechanism in the game field. Its spiritual motivation, including the rich audience, wonderful visual perception and operation mode[5], material incentives refer to its various promotional tools. As shown in Table 4.

Table 4. The incentive mechanism in the game field.

Spiritual motivation Material motivation :Promotion activity Rich Free, easy to operate, more entertaining and popular Various ways of communication audience Enhance visual perception, to attract female players Holiday promotions or novice gifts Star effect Professional league Visual Add culture, art, literature and other elements Universal gaming program aesthetics The original background story, with a sense of immersion in Cosplay the game Many characters, personalized design Additional product Operation Props charges, but does not affect the game fair Gold coin, game currency mode Electronic athletics, up to the international competition Equipment, props Constantly developing new game modes 3.4. Social networking service platform SNS is a kind of Internet online services, this service allows users to log on a restricted system which is provided by online social networking sites. [6] In the case of micro-blog to study the incentive mechanism of social network service platform. Five aspects of spiritual motivations in micro-blog are included: service quality, meet the user's own motivation, social capital, media richness and environmental factors. As shown in Table 5.

Table 5. The spiritual motivation mechanism of social network service platform

140

4. Analysis on the Application of Incentive Mechanism in Online Education In this paper, it classifies and analyzes the incentive mechanism in the four fields of enterprise management, sales, game design, social network platform. And divide the incentive mechanism into two categories: material motivation and spiritual motivation. We can apply these theories to the network education. Material incentives including integral, coins, coupons, sweepstakes, holiday promotions, specials, test center, additional products, novice gift, send small gifts of various promotions and bonuses (basic salary, allowances, subsidies and bonuses),welfare housing subsidies, medical treatment insurance, social insurance, solve the entrance education for children), job promotion, team building, project fund, perfect protection of intellectual property rights, employee stock ownership and so on. Spiritual motivation can be divided into two aspects of instructor and management. The instructor should fully trust the learner's ability, give them some freedom and rights, and fully tap the potential of every student; The instructor should provide students with a variety of staff training, academic exchanges and other opportunities to improve their ability; The instructor should pay attention to the feedback, and make appropriate praise or criticism to the students; The instructor should develop the collective sense of honor and personal honor of the students; For different levels of students, the instructor should set the target with different difficulty and distinction; In the whole process of teaching, The instructor should pay more attention to fairness; The instructor should pay attention to every student's development prospects and future career planning. In the process of management of the site, the website should pay attention to shape their own unique culture; The website should establish a good social image and reputation effect; A compelling site must first have a wonderful design; The website should also set up customer service center, to deal with all kinds of questions; The interest of website should be reduced to a minimum; The website should have professional communication tools; The website needs to perfect evaluation system and supervision system; The website should add a facilitator image to be responsible for communication between teachers and students or responsible to solve the students' pressure, interpersonal conflicts and other issues; The website should focus on the individualization on the design; The content is continuously improved and updated in a timely manner; The website should protect users personal privacy; The website should meet the users’ social intercourse, attribution, interest and other needs.

141

5. Conclusion Through the summary of incentive mechanism in four fields, the inspiration mechanism in online education can be concluded. Problems in incentive can be solved through the improvement and realization of the above incentive measures. And so that we can make better use of network education resources. According to the present work, the future research work can be focused on the following two aspects: First, based on all kinds of theories related to motivation, and combining with the summary of the incentive measures in each field, to put forward the model of the incentive mechanism in network education; Second, using the above theory to guide the construction of the actual network education platform, to improve the user's enthusiasm.

Acknowledgments The key project of ministry of education for the planning of the national education science, "Learning assistant research based on affective computing ( DAC140239 ) ".

References 1. Qinyong Liu, Research on the incentive mechanism of University Science and technology innovation, Xi’an University of Science And Technology,Vol.4, 2004. 2. Dan Cao, From the knowledge motivation mechanism to the learning motivation mechanism: the new development of the knowledge management incentive mechanism, Science and Management, Vol.6, 2007. 3. Xuehai Xu, Donghai Ji and Fangwei Xu, Review and Prospect of Research on Motivation, Economic Research Guide, Vol.59, pp.116, 2009. 4. Guoping Cheng, Managers incentive theory, scheme and mechanism, Economic Management Agency, Vol.45, 2002. 5. Aihua Zhang and Di Zhu, The diversified mode of "Heroes union" and the prospect of the development of online games, Digital media and animation and game art education, Vol.1, pp.158, 2014. 6. Nan Kou, Research on improving the incentive mechanism of scientific research in Colleges and Universities, Northwestern University, Vol.8, pp. 8, 2008.

142

Analysis of Psychological Problems and Possible Solutions Among Postgraduate Students in China

Da-Peng Zou, Xin Wang, Si-Yuan Cheng and Zhong-Ning Guo School of Electromechanical Engineering, Guangdong University of Technology, Guangzhou, 510006, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper analyzes the existing psychological, interpersonal, moral and network entertainment problems of postgraduate students, using Guangdong University of Technology (GDUT) as an example. Several education countermeasures are proposed such as promoting the humanities; applying enterprise management methods and promoting self-restriction are discussed to improve the quality of postgraduate education and to promote the sustainable development of social science and technology.

Keywords: Postgraduate; Education; Management; Humanities.

1. Introduction As early as Twentieth Century, China put forward the "science and technology is the first productive force" and developed a "science and education" policy. As the source and motive force, education plays the key role. Inside, university postgraduate education is in a top heavy position. In recent years, postgraduate education in China has made a great leap forward. Taking Guangdong University of Technology (GDUT) as an example, the number of postgraduate students awarded from 2003 to 2014 is as follows, Table 1. The number of postgraduate students awarded in GDUT from 2003 to 2014 [1]

Years (three years) 2003-2005 2006-2008 2009-2011 2012-2014 Number(people in three years) 906 2554 3229 3735 Average (people / year) 302 851 1076 1245

In 2015, the postgraduate in GDUT has reached 4400 people [2]. Postgraduate education has already walked from elite education to mass education. As a result, a series of social problems of graduate quality and psychological aspects significantly exposed [3, 4]. This paper aims to study the existing problems and explore solutions, expecting to improve the quality of

143

postgraduate education and to promote the sustainable development of social science and technology.

2. Problems of Postgraduate Students in Universities Problems of education are usually reflected through knowledge level, ideological and moral standard, scientific and technological innovation ability, and social behavior of students. With the practice of the master's degree education in GDUT, some problems are summarized as follows.

2.1. Psychological problems According to individual purposes for master degree education, the postgraduate can be divided into three categories: class A who pursue advanced study, class B who pursue a transition in career, and class C who study with no aims. The A class dedicates to have a breakthrough in scientific research with persistent determination. The B class hopes a good job hopping through a three-year professional education with strong personal aim and selection of what it learns and concerns. The C class continues its study with no clear purpose just closely following its undergraduate education as a buffer to enter society. The psychologies of above three classes directly link to active, speculative and passive motivation. With the active state of mind, the postgraduate achieve self-reliance and independence through their efforts. While, to the others, the great differences between individual psychologies lead to a wide variety of problems, i.e. some students in GDUT told their advisors that they wanted an easy way to obtain the certificate of the master degree and asked for the easiest research thesis topic to realize their above purposes. 2.2. Interpersonal problems Postgraduate students are composed of two parts: with no working experience and with working experience. Those with varied working experience are full of social characteristics. Meanwhile, scientific research projects usually are carried out in production-study-research cooperation and by teams. Thus conflicts on interpersonal communication appear in the research teams. First conflict is the role conflict with different working experience. They are greatly different with the economic basis, social practice, social circle, and so on, which inevitably produces problems of exchange and integration. Second conflict is the relationship conflict between student and mentor. It is similar to the relationship between apprentice and boss, which involves the interest conflict. Mentors expect students to study independently and to be

144

responsible for certain project, but some postgraduate students can't do it. As a result, the problems such as self-denial or complaining about each other appear. Some students in GDUT often compared the allowance and the strictness of different mentors and complained about their advisors. Advisors also criticized their students against their attitudes and their dependence. Desire for communication is essential and inevitable to human kinds. The above conflicts combat the desire for effective interpersonal communication, which may lead to a passive, inactive and thus vicious circle. Interpersonal communication is important in constructing a good scientific research environment. Without a good cultural environment and a good way to inter- communication, psychology, academic and scientific research will be exhausted.

2.3. Moral problems Postgraduate will involve issue of academic ethics since they are required to publish an independent research report (including journal paper and dissertation). The strict sense of innovation and independent research is greatly difficult. So we require the postgraduates to improve or create something with their own unique insights and their independent endeavor based on reasonable reference to others' achievement. While some students are with bad attitude and laziness, the ethics becomes a problem. In GDUT, some postgraduates were found with some ambiguous interpretations in their papers, which meant that even they gave a result of what they researched but they didn’t understand what they published. Most postgraduates have already had preliminary outlook on lives and values at undergraduate stage. In present stage, the aim is to create concepts of innovation, pragmatic and contribution. However, the phenomenon of social economy determination for value has a great impact on graduate students’ thought and shakes the basis of moral, which seems that everything begins with the interests. So they seem eager to obtain the master degree as early as possible to earn money and enjoy high quality live in the society.

2.4. Network entertainment problems Network has a double-edged sword. The most important role and purpose of access to internet is for effective information and academic exchange. But some students are in addiction to online games, movies, chat and news. According to our survey in small range in GDUT, the graduates in Grade Two used computers for average 10-12 hours a day, in which the use of non-working hours was about

145

4-6 hours and the working hours occupied 40%-70%. This directly caused a sharp conflict between network entertainment and academic study. The network based entertainment is called as virtual entertainment. It can produce serious psychological problems that the individual loses the actual group communication ability and fun, and becomes more and more lonely, withdrawn, and addicted. Excessive entertainment erodes the positive psychology, life attitude and social interaction, and then the academic study.

3. Educational Countermeasures against Problems of Postgraduate Students in Universities The direct aim of higher education is to provide the society with persons owning basic professional ability and basic moral quality. The above problems in psychology, interpersonal communication, ethics and internet entertainment are expected to be solved mostly by education.

3.1. Education countermeasures of deepening the humanities Create a good social environment for postgraduate education. Spread humanistic ideas, contribution ideas and the spirit of sacrifice, and shape postgraduates with contribution spirit and personnel noble sense of scientific research; create good innovation atmosphere for scientific research, and lead them to the will of scientist; establish effective research funding system, encourage extensive industry-university-research, create a clean, efficient, and free environment for scientific research; establish a transparent and reasonable social system for career competition mechanism and distribution system, and improve income and social status of scientific researchers to provide direction for the postgraduates. Establish the third party organizations to supervise and evaluate the quality of postgraduate education in colleges and universities. Completely separate the existing training system away from supervision system, give the right to the third party to evaluate education efficiency of each university, quality of advisors and postgraduates, and give advises of encouragement or punishment to each educational group in the postgraduate education system. Develop the model and pioneer education. Extensively advocate genius persons in the fields of social and scientific research, and set good examples in various fields of research; promote moral education for both postgraduate students and their advisors, especially strengthen the effect of the latter. Sing high praise for the models, the pioneers and the examples, and respect them. Enhance support for academic education and fundamental research. Application education and research are for the present. But the academic

146

education and fundamental research is the foundation of future science and technology. They lead to innovation, discovery, and breakthrough. Carry out the contribution education. Only with contribution and dedication in the mind, people will engage in scientific research without fear of hardship, fatigue and fickleness, and thus have responsibility for society. The society must feedback to support, respect and love the persons with the contributors.

3.2. Education countermeasures of applying enterprise management methods Postgraduate education is in the process of great expansion, so it is necessary to introduce the concept and the methods of systematic management, which is mature in enterprise management with a lot of achievements and successful cases. We expect to establish fair, open, just and people-oriented educational teams to obtain the dual benefits of social resources and human resources. Promote team-managed methods and concepts. A mentor guiding a number of graduate students and a number of mentors grouping teams have been the need of current project research, so the team management must be introduced for so many people to work together with high efficiency. Cooperate with each other, cultivate the independent research ability, and strengthen the teamwork. Strengthen project management mechanism. Graduate research is based on projects, so it is necessary to develop the ability for graduate students to work for certain projects. Carry out regular academic reporting mechanism, guide students to make self-plan, and introduce examination, encouragement, criticism and punishment. The project management in this stage is a win-win process which benefits them easily adapt to the work both in school and into society. Establish school humanistic culture. The reason of a school with a good reputation and in a stable development is based on its good inheritance. Good inheritance is original from its humanities culture. A university with no culture is a common school and no bright future. All that a school is with good academic atmosphere and its postgraduate student is with definite life goal and proud of the school and its research, rise from the gradual influence of the school humanities culture.

3.3. Educational countermeasures of promoting self-restriction Even if anything is provided, individuals do not seek to change, and the result is still unchanged. Like with a table full of dishes, if one doesn’t eat, he has nothing. Personal problems are the key ones to be solved.

147

Strengthen self-control. An adult is responsible for his actions. Graduate students’ self-control is very important in resistance against entertainment and money tide. They should hold their own responsibility to learn more, to set example for low grades and dedicate to research. Enhance initiative. The right to be fair is not to own, but to take the initiative to use. Person who wastes the right of initiative use is no qualification to complain about other people and society. Take the initiative to learn, to undertake research projects, and to think. As long as the attitude and action is initiative, people's ideology will be active and the plentiful harvest is expected. Set up step-by-step and down-to-earth style of scientific research. Postgraduate students should apply target management. Carry out a circle of making plan, acting and examining. With the finish of a stage, a further circle is beginning. A circle connects a circle to construct the success to the final goal.

4. Conclusion In GDUT, a series of activities such as Top-notch Salon (TNS), Research Forum, GDUT Top Innovation Graduate Student Cultivation Project, are being held to promote graduate education. Team management methods are accepted and applied by many tutors to provide postgraduates practices to work for their future careers. All the efforts and strategies expect to realize that: with the solution of problems, a self-new, self-confidence and self-improvement education system will be established; with the improvement in educational quality, postgraduate students realize effort, self-reliance and independence.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by grant 2015SFKC23 of the Postgraduate Education Innovation Plan Project of Guangdong Province.

References 1. Statistics of Academic Degree and Graduate Education, Jan. 7th, 2015, http://yjs.gdut.edu.cn/upload/2015010705094015490.htm. 2. Key Facts of Guangdong University of Technology, Nov. 2015, http://www.gdut.edu.cn/xxgk1/jbsj.htm.

148

3. J. Hu, H. Jin, and Y.D. Fang. Characteristics, problems and countermeasures of cultivation of graduate students for full-time professional degree. Education and Vocation, 35, 165(2011). 4. Y.P. Li and Y.P. Zheng. Exploration of full-time professional degree graduation in the new period. Education and Teaching Research, 9, 83 (2014).

149

The Path of China Higher Education Governance Reform Based on Comparative Study on the Governance Pattern of Higher Education in the United States and Japan

Wei-Hua Zhang Law School, Jiangxi Science & Technology Normal University, Nan Chang, Jiangxi province, China E-mail: [email protected]

The higher education (HE) system of China bears great resemblance to the system employed by the former Soviet Union between 1951 and 1977. However the large-scale expansion of college enrollment in 1999 resulted in the original elite HE massification. Thus the existing education system, especially with regards to the governance pattern, cannot satisfy current social requirements for developed talents and leads to several problems. This paper utilizes comparative analysis of the governance pattern in China with other systems used abroad based on the examination interactive mechanism of major players such as the government, colleges, marketing and the third parties that influence governance pattern of higher education. Keywords: HE System; Governance Pattern; Massification of Higher Education. 1. Introduction Since 1999, the scale of higher education has been expanded rapidly. The gross enrollment rate of HE rose to nearly 37.5% in 2014 from 8% in 1998.1 According to the America scholar Martin Trow’s theory about the transition of HE development, with the enrollment increasing and the expansion of HE scale, the quantitative change will cause qualitative change, That is, the main elements of the HE system including the hierarchical structure, section structure, quality distribution, social evaluation and governance pattern and so on will undergo qualitative changes. The elite education is flat and linear system, which mainly training theory knowledge talents; the enrollment experienced a rigorous selection test. The mass HE is a multi-level, three-dimensional architecture, which satisfy the diverse requirement of society for the talent. In order to adapt to new circumstance, china has carried out a series of reforms to adjust HE system. The Higher Education Act was enacted in 1998, 91

150

universities affiliated with 9 abolished ministries such as Ministry of Machinery Industry is adjusted to joint management by central and local government. Adjustment of 25 colleges and universities which belong to 5 military-industrial systems were completed in 1999, 161 universities that belong to 49 departments including railways department are adjusted and merge.2 After three major adjustments, governance of most of the universities was transfer to local government from the central department. This marks that two levels University macro management system is established in China. After entering twenty-first century, the government began to vigorously promote social forces running school, foreign famous universities are allowed to set up branches in China, industry departments, leading enterprises are encouraged to participate in the construction of colleges and universities. Up to 2013, there are 802 nongovernment education institutions, account for about 20% of all HE institutions. So, government and HE system are highly coupled. The administrative management system of HE is difficult to satisfy the requirements of social and economic development, China's HE is still one face one thousand schools, the homogenization is very serious, and it can’t solve the problem of education diversification very well. Many domestic scholars argue that it is time to eliminate the administration of the HE to adapt to the new form; other scholars believe that things are not so simple. This paper aims to discuss these themes and put forward some proposals on the HE reform.

2. Major Problems Faced by the HE System at Present

2.1. Unreasonable structure Ideal structure of HE system is described by most scholars, the lateral division including several sorts, such as: the academic research HE, the professional application HE and adult HE; vertical division maybe include some basic levels, such as: Associate, bachelors, master and doctoral.3 From quantity ratio of different sorts and levels of HE, its ideal structure is a flat diamond.4 From the sorts angle, The student number of academic research HE and adult HE are relatively small, and the student number of professional application HE are relatively more. In the vertical angle, the number of medium degree should be accounted for the relative majority. This can be matched well with the distribution structure of the students. But in china, more and more institutions try to become academic research universities which can get more resources from government. The proportion of the Undergraduate, master and doctoral accounted for the whole number is too

151

much. And the proportion of applied talents is too low. The enrollment number of Junior college and secondary specialized school is even lower than the number of Undergraduate since 2009. This stems from the government's absolute control over social resources, Lead to diversification society power shortage, fatherly, it lead to the deformity of the governance pattern (GP).

2.2. The rigid HE system Unlike Japan and other countries, China’s Massification of HE was completed mainly through expansion of the existing systems. The nongovernment education institutions accounted for a very small part, so, in the whole, the HE system is strictly regulated by the government. The various educational institutions have developed a habit which excessively depends on instructions from Government, to avoid making mistakes and influence the promotion prospects of the administrators. However, facing those huge number education institutions, Governance efficiency of the government is very low, the agency costs is too much. Market power deficiencies led to lack of the objective evaluation criteria of the HE system, non-competitive resource allocation resulting in inefficient governance. All this has led to a rigid HE system.

2.3. Governance dilemma Tripartite status of governments, universities and markets is unequal, as the recipient of universities supplies, market and third-party power is weak. Compared to American full liberalization of the market structure, China's market-oriented is insufficient, state-owned enterprises accounted for half of country, like the universities, the state-owned enterprises strictly controlled and managed by the government as well. The government can influence socialization evaluation of universities through numerous state-owned enterprises because State-owned enterprises have absolute influence on the labor market, that means that the government can control the university's main elements input and output environment, while the private industries and private institutions have the limited influence in the evaluation and supervision of universities, and moreover many private enterprises are relying on large state-owned enterprises to survive, so, at present, for the market and third party power which composed of private enterprises, nongovernment institutions, the supervision and evaluation of the universities is still a myth.

152

3. The Experiences Come from the United States and Japan

3.1. The United States In the United States, the elite HE institutions account for 3%-6% of all over the state, accepting about 1/4 of all students. Unlike most other countries, most of the American elite HE are completed by the nongovernment institutions. State Universities undertakes Popular Education in the United States. 5 The GP of American HE System is a Power Division and Balance Management model. Government provides a guiding framework. Board of Directors established in Main education institutions can make decisions for the major management issues. Pay attention to the supervision and coordination functions of social intermediary organizations. Wherein board of directors system is the core of the system, its status explicitly guaranteed by law, its members are mainly non-school education from the eminent personalities and other wide range of sources, generation process follows strict regulations, Board of Directors can make decisions for significant management issues in accordance with the purview stipulated by the law, meanwhile, the law provides that Board of Directors do not participate in most of the academic affairs management activities and part of the personnel right in education institutions. Teachers can participate in academic affairs management activities by the committee under the Board, Social organizations and intermediary organizations can coordinate the relations between government, education institutions and public. Precisely because of this Power Division and Balance governance pattern, the flexibility and diversity of public education institutions are instead stronger than nongovernment education institutions, and more suitable for the implementation of Popular Education in Unite State. The private institutions perform the elite HE.

3.2. Japan Differ from American’s HE system, the Japanese HE system massification is accomplished by the private institutions. Japanese HE system includes three type institutions: national universities which established by central government, Local universities by local governments and private institutions by private and nongovernment organization. Compared to American’s about 80% the total number of undergraduate students ware enrolled in public universities in 1999, about 74% of Japanese students attended private universities in 2010.6 The Japanese HE system was established through imitating the system of American in early stage. But differ from American’s distribution governance

153

pattern, Japan's decision-making and management of the higher education system is still concentrated in the congress and Ministry of Education. 80% HE expenditures was allocated to the national University, and nearly 60% expenditure of national universities came from public fund, just more than 8% total income of the private education institutions came from government.7 Review Conference system is a feature of Japanese HE governance pattern. Advisory council departments affiliated to the Japanese central education administration bear the intermediary coordination and supervision functions of government, universities and society. However, before 1990s, the Japanese economy is under the magical aura, enterprises generally adopt lifetime employment system, emphasize seniority rather than ability, like obedient, conformist staff. A student, without paying too much effort in order to enter the top university, only need to enter a regular university, do not need good grades, just a diploma would be satisfied. There are no pressures for education institutions to worry about the problem of lack of students. At that stage, societies’ evaluate for HE is distorted, GP mainly depend on government oversight and management. But with the Japan's economic bubble burst, the economic globalization, demographic aging, Japan's enterprises lifetime employment system come to an end. Industries no longer need only obedient and conformist staff, but need creativity, autonomy, international vision talents to satisfy the competition in the global context.8 In order to obtain better employment prospects, students need to experience intense competition for entry into public universities and the National University. Many of the private education institutions face insufficient enrollments. Private sector faces increasing pressure to survival. In this case, the market began to play its governance power.

4. Conclusion Based on the above analysis, some conclusions can be derived as follows:

• For China, a large population country, elite HE and Mass HE should be strictly separated to two different subsystems, developing different GP, conducive to the rational allocation of limited social resources. The elite HE can strength governance efficiency through internationalization. Massively compress the enrollment scale of undergraduate, postgraduates to more reasonable proportion; meanwhile it will reduce social and family expenditure in the HE. • Establish a combination assessment system of transverse assessment and top-down assessment. For discipline approximate universities, randomly

154

form a committee with members from approximate professional experts that come from another group universities and industries. Meanwhile, set up Network Assessment Platform for ordinary people’s assessment and monitoring. This is so called “transverse Assessment”, which mainly provides open reports to public. The top-down assessment means that an assessment institution is established by central government, which mainly Provide the basis for the government to develop the fund plan and related policies. • Attach importance to the role of teacher-workers' congress in University governance. In China, Professor Committee does not represent the majority of the faculty, for it remains an administrative product. University legal persons should be produced through election by the staff and appointed by the government.

References

1. Information on website of China Ministry of Education: http://www. moe.gov.cn/. 2. Zhou yuanqing. The great development and raise major reform - Chinese higher education 30 years Review and Outlook [J]. Journal of Higher Education. 2008(1) 3. Pan Maoyuan, Chen Hou Feng. Methodological issues in Higher Education Classification [J]. Journal of Higher Education. 2006.27(3) 4. Zou Xiaoping. Elite higher education and mass higher education: Interpretation of the two systems [J]. Journal of Higher Education. 2005.26(7) 5. Hanmeng Jie, Zhang Dexiang. The market mechanisms of American higher education Structural Transformation[J]. Educational Research. 2014(1):124–131. 6. Paul Doyon. A review of higher education reform in modern Japan [J]. Higher Education .2001.41:443–470. 7. Akihiro Asonuma. Finance reform in Japanese higher education [J]. Higher Education. 2002.43:109–126. 8. Akiyoshi Yonezawa • Yukiko Shimmi. Transformation of university governance through internationalization: challenges for top universities and government policies in Japan [J]. High Education (2015) 70:173–186.

155

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch23

Study of Computer-Aided Training on the Executive Functions of Autistic Children

Han-Xue Xu, Xiao-Wei Chen and Yun Xu

College of Education & Technology, Zhejiang University of Technology, Hangzhou, China E-mail: [email protected]

In order to verify the effect of computer assisted training on the executive functions of autistic children, this study selected five autistic children as study subjects and used the computer aided training system to train them. The Trailing Making test, Stroop Fruit test and Self-Ordered Pointing test were used to assess the executive functions of the autistic children before and after training. Statistical analysis demonstrated the executive function of autistic children had improved significantly after six weeks of training and well- retained even after the end of the training sessions.

Keywords: Autistic Children; Executive Function; Computer Aided Training.

1. Introduction In recent years, the population of autistic is growing rapidly. Autism has influence on working memory, mental flexibility, and control, etc., which has serious impact on autistic learning and life. However, there are no specific medicine and feasible training methods to autistic treatment. Reviewing domestic and foreign research status, cognitive ability would be improved in many areas by computer aided training. But there are few researches in computer aided training on autistic executive function, especially in domestic. Executive function is one of important basis of cognitive development, however, computer aided training didn't applied to rehabilitation training for executive dysfunction. So it has great significance to design a set of effective methods for executive function training. In order to verify the effect of this system, this research has used the existing computer aided training system, combining with characters of autistic children, to create a system fit to autistic children, and selected autistic children as subjects.

2. The Design and Development of Computer Aided Training System

2.1. Concepts and analysis Autism is a serious physical and mental developmental disorder, a pervasive developmental disorder caused by lesions of brain and nervous system,

156

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch23

involving sensory perception, emotion, language, thought, action, behavior and other aspects of neurodevelopment disorders, whose symptoms mainly includes social communication obstacles, speech communication obstacles, narrow interests and stereotyped repetitive behavior [1] . Autism not only has no social interaction skills, but also has no interest in communicating with others. With increase of age, symptoms of speech problem will be more obvious. Almost all patients with autism have speech disorders, which are comprehensive and lifelong. Autistic children's speech problems are usually manifested in following points: developmental retardation or loss of speech; poor verbal comprehension ability; stereotyped imitation of language; poor nonverbal communication ability. Autistic children have unusual and narrow interests. Once they have a crush on some items, they will have a strong sense of dependence. They work in a stereotyped way, do not allow change. Damasio and Maurer first put forward the theory of executive dysfunction in 1978 [2]. Executive dysfunction theory can explain three key obstacles of autism. Between humans’ social interaction and verbal communication have many executive function involved in, including target setting, planning and organization; self monitoring; result evaluation.

2.2. Contents and methods Our research was meant to design and develop the computer aided training system through the research on the executive dysfunction of autistic children and computer technology. The research mainly used the method combining qualitative research with quantitative research, including literature survey method, interview method, questionnaire method and single subject experiment method. Cognitive training is an approach to increase the cognitive disorder’s ability of problem solving and information processing. Principle of neural plasticity: nervous system has ability to change its structure to adapt to the changing of external environment [3]. The principle of this system is “applied behavior analysis” (ABA) proposed by professor Lovas. In addition, we added two factors: cognition and emotion. Cognition makes the training contents more contextualized to come over mechanical response and improve cognition, and reaches the level of understanding. Emotion emphasizes that training should not only have education effect but also give happiness. The training method of this model is decomposition operation teaching. It has three parts: instruction, response and result.

157

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch23

Realization of cognitive elements: adding cognitive scenario as much as possible and switching to multiple scenarios to let the child respond in different scenarios. Realization of emotional elements: system should possess high-quality human-computer interaction, and the scenarios should include both sounds and pictures; design scenarios reasonably according to the cognitive characteristics of autistic children; after training, the system will send out encouraging words, and give the right reinforcement.

2.3. The structuring of computer aided training system This system is based on an American patent Cognitive Training Using A Continuous Performance Adaptive Procedure and existing cognitive training system. The integrated framework (two parts, four systems) is showed in Figure 1.

Fig. 1. System structure diagram

There are four task modules in computer aided training system, including connection, classification, and memory and match task module. In connection task module, autistic children need to draw the best roadmap between two places quickly avoiding the obstacles, which can improve their ability of notice, visual search, hand-eye coordination and space perception.

158

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch23

In classification task module, autistic children need to know the function of those offered items and classify them correctly, which can improve their ability of perception, abstract conceptualization and compare. After entering the interface, the system will give orders to lead autistic children to reply. And the page will show whether their answers are right or wrong. In memory task module, autistic children need to memorize where items came out and point them out. After entering the interface, autistic children should choose pictures they memorized five seconds before until right, which can enhance their memory about things in daily life. In match task module, autistic children should match things offered correctly. This task is divided to free mode and questioning mode, both of which have three degrees of difficulty and three units. After entering the interface, the system will give orders to lead autistic children to find out the matching picture in ten seconds. If they fail, the system will show the result and explanation on the empty space. There are mainly three tests in computer aided training system, including module testing, integration testing and system practice test. Module testing is meant to test these four task modules to make sure that every practice can be smooth as we expect. And integration testing is meant to test every button in the selection module to ensure the link among modules.

2.4. Experiment design The five research objects are from Hangzhou Hushu School. They are all diagnosed as autistic children. Table 1 showed their basic situation.

159

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch23

Table 1. Basic situation of subjects.

Category Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 3 Subject 4 Subject 5 Sex male male male female male Age 10 13 11 12 11 Intelligence 47 <45 50 <45 47 quotient Action ability normal normal normal normal normal Vision ability normal normal normal normal normal Hearing normal normal normal normal normal ability Cognition ability bad bad okay bad bad Language ability okay bad okay bad bad Stereotyped serious serious not serious very serious serious behavior

Subject 1 always uses body language to express himself instead of words. His memory is bad, and he is interested in computer games. Subject 2 is similar to the first one. He is irritable sometimes, even maims himself. Subject 3 has better abilities in all aspects. He has strong desire of communication with people. And he can focus on computer for long time. Subject 4 is the most serious of all. When she’s in her own world, she won’t react. Subject 5 has high requirements of environment. His symptom is more serious at home. This experiment adopted the single subject experiment method. As for the assessment of this experiment, a single set of pre - and - post test method was used. And the statistical method of the experiment adopted nonparametric test in SPSS 18.0. The main research tool of the experiment was the computer aided training system aimed at autistic children. There are three kinds of evaluation tools, including Trail Making test (TMT), Stroop Fruit test and Self-Ordered Pointing test (SOPT). The training of the experiment lasted six weeks, five times every week and thirty minutes every time. The pretest was on the first day of the training, and the post test was on the second day after the training. The final test was on one and a half month after the training.

2.5. Implementation Pre experimental stage: first, let five subjects know the assessment tool; then, randomly selected a training task and started training. The time limit was twenty minutes.

160

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch23

Experimental stage: (1) Pre test. The research used the three research tools to do the pre test and recorded the result. We gave things that subjects liked as reward. (2) Training and post test. We did individualized training of computer aided training for five subjects, and used the three research tools to do post test. (3) Final test. We used the three research tools to do the final test one month and a half after the training then recorded it. The experiment place was on the personalized training room of Hushu School.

3. Results This experiment used SPSS18.0 to analyze the results. The results showed in Table 2.

Table 2. General results of three experiments.

Those tests showed that 5 subjects didn’t have significant difference in executive function, and the three trainings all improve their executive function significantly. Also, after stopping the training, their executive function still kept higher than before. That computer aided training focus on different important parts of executive function. From the results and analysis we can see that all three trainings improved 5 subjects’ executive function significantly and had good retention after stopping the training, which means computer aided training is helpful to autistic children’s executive function.

4. Conclusion By training by the computer aided training system, we could draw these conclusions: During training time, subjects were actively involved in the training. It showed that the training way of using computers as carriers and vivid

161

Proceedings of 2016 International Conference on ICHSS2016 9in x 6in b2768-ch23

training contents could attract autistic children’s attention more easily; computer aided training is effective and feasible for autistic children's executive function improvement.

Acknowledgement The research was under the support of China National Social Science Fund Special Project: “The interdisciplinary research of early detection, Intervention and education for children with Autism (12&ZD229)” and the Public Welfare Technology Application Research Project of Zhejiang Province (2014C31049).

References 1. Yun Xu, Qiang Chen. Assessment technology of autistic children. (Beijing: Science Press, 2011). 2. A.R. Damasio, R.G. Maurer. A neurological model for childhood autism. Archives of Neurology, 35:777–786 (1978). 3. D.O. Frost. Neuroplasticity and schizophrenia Bio Psychiatry.56:540– 543(2004).

162

The Strengthening of Expressive Skills in Modern Chinese Classes

Duan Zhang Civil Aviation Flight University of China, Guanghan, Sichuan, E-mail:[email protected]

In the modern Chinese teaching process, the expressive skills of students are the comprehensive reflection of their knowledge of the language theory and their ability to communicate effectively. Improving the expressive skills of college students is currently one of the most urgent problems in the teaching of modern Chinese. In this paper, the connotation of the college students’ expressive skills is briefly introduced. We conducted analysis of the factors that affect the expressive skills of college students is conducted and proposed several methods to strengthen their expressive abilities.

Keywords: Modern Chinese Teaching; College Students; Expressive Skills; Strengthening.

1. Introduction

With the rapid development of social economy and modern science, the society and needs normalized and standardized general language to realize smooth communication in all walks of life. At the same time, it also needs talents with better expressive skills to promote the development of the industries. And modern Chinese language course is a professional course to teach formal and systematic language. In order to make the students better adapt to social development needs, as a important talent culturing base, colleges and universities should not only strengthen students' theoretical knowledge learning, but also provide more opportunities for language application, thus to help them realize self-worth better while improving college students expressive skills. In this paper, analysis of the factors that affect the expressive skills of college students is conducted and several methods are proposed to strengthen their expressive skills.

163

2. The Connotation of College Students' Expressive Skills

The connotation of college students' expressive skills is mainly composed of two parts: one is “speak”, which means to express one’s own ideas accurately through mandarin. The whole process of the “speak” mainly consists of speech capacity and debate ability. Speech capacity includes prepared speeches and impromptu speeches, and in both kinds of the speeches, one should clearly expound his views. The other is "write", which means to express one’s own ideas and thoughts through words. Writing ability mainly reflects in three aspects, namely common article writing, practical article writing and computer writing. The clear center, substantial content and coherent ideas should be guaranteed in common article writing. And for the practical writing, one should take the actual situation into consideration to record some conclusions, investigations, reports and other practical writings. Computer writing is directly related with network information transmission, personal opinion publication and communication. Only by expertly grasping the “speak” and “write” abilities could the college students better adapt to social development needs, and adequately show, improve and perfect their own qualities.

3. The Lack of Expressive Skills among College Students

3.1. The influence of traditional culture In Chinese traditional concept of Confucian culture, the implicative speech is a virtue, and the eloquence articulate is considered to be foxy. And there were cases about “disasters emanate from careless talks” in the history, which makes people to be silent while there are a lot of problems. These cultural ideas, to certain extent, influence students’ mind-set about “speak”. The above leads to the situation that college students, in daily life, rarely took the initiative to start a conversation with people, therefore, have missed many practicing opportunities.

3.2. The lack of related courses In the modern Chinese teaching, the cultivation of students' expressive skills, in addition to test the language level of students and logic thinking, it also involves logic, psychology, sociology and other disciplines. Teaching is one of the important links to cultivate and improve students' expressive skills, but in Chinese colleges and universities, the curriculum setting aiming at cultivating students’ expressive skills hasn’t yet formed a professional perfect system, which leads the learning deficiency in this aspect. [1]

164

3.3. The deviation of teaching mode Under the background of exam-oriented education in our country, most of the students put the emphasis on test scores, and they ignore the learning of basic knowledge and basic abilities. Especially the skills training in extracurricular life, most of the students lag far behind the foreign students of their own age. In such an environment, the students’ expressive skills can’t be nurtured and trained, as time passes, studying in this environment would lead to the lack of expressive ability among college students. In addition, in modern Chinese teaching, teachers tend to focus on students’ ability of the “writing”, and despise the ability of “speaking”, which has greatly reduced the effectiveness of modern Chinese teaching. All the above has a negative impact on students' individual development.

3.4. The influence of the absence standardized expressive skills among students Influenced by the local language and culture, there is a common phenomenon that most college students’ expressive skills are not standard and accurate. Especially in the aspect of oral expression, some students speak with a strong local accent. Besides, the distribution of education resources in our country is uneven, which leads to the result that, in some remote areas or economic underdeveloped regions, the mandarin level teachers is not standard, and the use of dialect in teaching is a common phenomenon. For the students from these areas, there would be language barriers waited for them while they entering the university.

4. The Method of Strengthening College Students’ Expressive Skills

4.1. Improve college students’ ideological understanding College students, as successors of the construction of society, for them, the good language expressive ability has a positive role in promoting them to achieve their life value.[2] In modern Chinese language teaching, if we want to strengthen the cultivation of college students’ expressive skills, the basic premise we should take into consideration is that teachers could fully understand the status, role and value of expressive skills in talent quality and quality education. And the teachers base on the above to cultivate college students' expressive skills into the standards and specifications of cultivating talented person, and make out the scientific and perfect talent training scheme. Apart

165

from that, the teachers should, in daily teaching, guide students to fully recognize the importance of expressive skills, thus to associate the expressive skills with the students' future employment and social interactions, and to make them consciously and purposefully strengthen their own cultivation and training of expressive skills.

4.2. Improve the curriculum setting For college students can’t ignore good expressive ability, whether in study or in daily life. And in these two conditions, most college students have very strong subjective desire of seeking knowledge, and with the rapid development of social culture, this subjective desire of knowledge presents diversified development trends gradually. Therefore, the modern Chinese language teaching in colleges and universities, they should base on their own abundant education resources with students' needs to develop a set of perfect expressive skills training course. [3] In the training courses’ setup, we should take the modern Chinese teaching material into consideration and put the phonics class, language arts and practical oral class into it. Specifically, the setting of phonics class curriculum is aimed at solving the problem of students’ mandarin pronunciation. And the language arts include lecturing, recitation and other classes. Finally, in the content setting of the practical oral classes, the teachers should conduct it with students’ major and the practical need of society.

4.3. Reform the teaching mode In modern Chinese teaching, as planners and organizers of all teaching activities, teachers are the main body of teaching students’ knowledge, strengthening their expressive consciousness, and training their expressive ability. Therefore, teachers play a decisive role in the whole teaching activities. And in the training of students' expressive skills, to create equal and democrat learning environment for students, teachers should break the traditional “moralizing” mode and renew education idea in time. Besides, the teachers should think from the perspective of students and strengthen the two-way communication while teaching, in this way to let the student participate in classroom teaching. The teachers should create more opportunities for students to speak by increasing students’ activity time in the classroom. In addition, in the process of reforming the teaching mode, teachers should also change the traditional examination “answer on paper” way into combining written examination and oral examination. In this way, the teachers could improve the

166

student's expressive ability while testing students’ modern Chinese theoretical knowledge. [4]

4.4. Strengthen practical practice and improve expressive skills To strengthen students’ language ability in modern Chinese language teaching needs the practical activities to develop and improve, only in this way can the teachers help students to transfer language knowledge and skills into personal ability and quality. In the process of strengthening students’ practical exercise and improving college students' expressive skills, the teacher can start from the following aspects: first, the teachers can make use of campus cultural activities together with the modern Chinese language teaching to build a practice environment for the students to give out speeches boldly. And the teachers should set particular point for students to utter their views freely. Second, the teachers should organize and carry out all kinds of forms of prize essay activities to cultivate the students’ writing ability. At the same time the teachers should carry out some speeches, reading and debating activities to enlarge the students' participation aspects. Finally, the teachers should combine the social development needs to guide students to use library resources in a reasonable way, and increase their reading and accumulation amount of outstanding literary works. In this way to ensure that the students, through long-term accumulation of language materials, effectively improve their expressive skills while enriching their own language materials. [5]

5. Conclusion

To sum up, in modern Chinese language teaching, if the teachers want to fundamentally enhance the expressive skills of students, they need to change their own teaching methods, improve the students' learning interest, and strengthen the communication among students. Besides, the teachers should, on the basis of in-depth understanding of students’ practical learning situation, make out a targeted curriculum plan arrangement, and ensure that the students' subjectivity to be fully performed.

167

References

1. Wang Yaling. The Analysis and Countermeasures of the Present College Students' Expressive Skills Situation[J]. Journal of Zhejiang Wanli College, 2006 (04). 2. Yu YunHai. The Present Situation of Contemporary College Students' Language Application Ability and Its Countermeasures [J]. Journal of Huzhou Teachers College, 2006 (6). 3. Jiang Lei. The Analysis of College Students' Language Application Status and Its Countermeasures [J]. Journal of Huaihua University, 2007 (11). 4. Shang XiaoWei. Language is the Only Way by Which Human Beings Live in the World — on the Research of Modern Chinese Teaching Theory [J]. Fortune World, 2008 (11).

5. Song Peijie. The Analysis of “Four-step Teaching Method ” in Modern Chinese Course[J]. Journal of Henan Vocational Technical Teachers College (Vocational Education Edition), 2009 (03).

168

Experimental Teaching for Training of Quality Control in Textile and Clothing Material Science Courses

Peng-Peng Cheng, Dao-Ling Chen, Ying-Jin Gan and Dong-Sheng Chen

Department of Garment and Art Engineering, Minjiang University, Fuzhou 350108, China Email:[email protected]

As an important experimental course, clothing material course aims to cultivate applied skills and exercise the students’ practice abilities. This paper analyzes the teaching contents and methods, training objectives and assessment of clothing material course. Optimization of the teaching contents and methods, and specific training objects improves the quality of teaching and cultivate professional talents. In addition, performance appraisal helps to promote the students’ learning enthusiasm.

Keywords: Clothing Materials; Practice; Applied Talents; Quality of Teaching; Cultivate Professional Talents.

1. Introduction Textile and garment material science as one of the specialized clothing courses is a practical stronger foundation course, so the textile and clothing materials science experiment and construction will become the top priority for textile and garment material practice teaching. Textile and clothing material mainly involves fiber, yarn, fabric structure and the performance test. This course combines the theoretical knowledge of clothing material and serve the theory courses to train applied talents. This paper analyzes and discusses how to develop detection technology for materials science experiment course teaching system to cultivate the practical talents.

2. The Research Background Internationally, since our country joins the WTO, our textile foreign trade increased year by year. At the same time, the international demand for textile inspection is also more and more strict, a variety of technical barriers to trade restrictions to promote Chinese textile industry needs to adjust to upgrade, the enterprise has boosted demand for textile inspection personnel. In the recent years in China, the related events of clothing quality repeatedly happened, such as "poison uniform event", "false and inferior military training uniform", and so on. These bad products brought a variety of hidden danger to people's life, which also gives domestic textile and garment quality inspection a

169

wake-up call. However, our country existing detection institutions lack of a large number of professional and technical personnel familiar with textile inspection, fabric inspection technology talent shortage is common inspection institutions. In addition, in our country textile testing market, Chinese quality inspection institutions account for 45%, foreign examination organization has accounted for half of testing industry.

In terms of related domestic colleges and universities, there are more than 30 textile and garment colleges in China, every year there are about 10,000 textile clothing specialized graduate, but detection technology applied talents is still in short supply. For example, in our college, according to the feedback of graduates, in recent years, our textile and garment major undergraduate course graduate are rarely in the testing work [1]. The main problem (according to the reflex degree graduates from high to low): (1) although major in textile and garment testing experiment course, still not understand, can't engaged in testing industry; (2) can carry out simple operation, not familiar with inspection work actual content; (3) not interested.

3. The Present Situation of Experiment Teaching As a provincial experimental teaching demonstration center of experiment teaching, we have good textile material testing equipment foundation, the main task is divided into two large pieces of teaching and scientific research, in addition, we also provide foreign testing services. 3.1. The teaching content In our college, the material inspection experiment is divided into textile materials science experiment and detection of clothing material, mainly including verification, comprehensive, design, but in these three experiments, mainly the verification experiment teaching, the relatively small number of comprehensive and designing experiments. As a professional basic experiment, confirmatory experiments is raw material identification of yarn and fabric structure analysis mainly includes the basic experiment, these experiments mainly make the students confirm and experience the experiment of first-hand observation according to the textbook of relevant knowledge [2]; comprehensive experiment makes use of comprehensive knowledge or the knowledge of related course experiment, including fabric tensile properties, wear resistant, breathable, color fastness and other physical and chemical performance test; design experiment is a student in a given

170

objective requirements and experiment conditions to design experiment scheme and implementation by themselves, such as the structure of the new type of fabric (or fiber) or other new type of performance testing. In short, our materials science experiment teaching content exists following deficiencies: less experimental classes, less species and confirmatory experiments in the majority; detection course has not yet been on each link to form a systematic experimental process; out of the actual demand, just pure classroom teaching; the dispersion and relatively independent of the course, students cannot fully understand correlation detection; without considering the diversification of social demand and student's individualized requirements.

3.2. Scientific research For undergraduate students, this is a weakness, relatively few students involved in scientific research training and engaged in textile testing projects [3]. Our country holds around 80% of the undergraduate students, it is necessary for colleges and universities to incorporate more scientific research training, to improve their practice ability to innovate, to cultivate the practical talents, to promote the overall quality of citizens, to promote countries even improve the scientific and technological innovation ability and construct innovative country. It has extremely important significance.

4. Training Practical Detection Technology Talents Oriented to Explore and Reform the Textile and Clothing Materials Science Experiment Teaching 4.1. The teaching contents design For training comprehensive apparel outstanding talents, we should reduce the verification experiment, increase more comprehensive and design experiment content. At the same time, according to the experimental research, we appropriately increased innovation to improve students' learning enthusiasm and enhance students' experimental ability and innovation ability of scientific research. In addition, we should also arrange extracurricular learning, such as visiting institutions of scientific research institutes, garment enterprises and other relevant units to learn the new advanced equipment instrument. 4.2. The teaching method design Experimental teaching is the embodiment of theoretical knowledge [4]. The students can combine the classroom knowledge with practice ability through the

171

experiment to learn more profound understanding of theoretical knowledge. Experiment teaching is mainly composed of actual operation, which requires the experiment teachers to be focus on new national testing standards, industry standards and international standards of updates [5]. Experimental teachers and students must do experiments strictly in accordance with the corresponding standards, the teaching content, teachers should also constantly update perfect experiment instruction. In addition, we still use the multimedia teaching courseware to demonstrate experiment operation, or hire a testing industry experts, professors, to teach related knowledge of lectures. We should advocate students to apply for research projects, academic competitions, students are encouraged to write related theses, in order to mobilize their enthusiasm, these contents should be taken as the basis for the grades of this course. For creating students a chance to exercise and widening students' view, we promote "out of the campus" learning mode to create a line of work practice experience [6]. The laboratory can be open to the outside garment enterprises or research institutes, providing them with testing or research platform; open special studio to cooperate with the garment enterprises or research institutes [7]; according to the laboratory conditions, we can application it to be the textile and garment quality third party inspection agencies, service garment enterprises [8]. During the period of school, encouraging students to pass the experiment test related qualification certificates, such as the national import and export commodity inspection appraisal personnel, inspection personnel qualifications, and detection of merchandiser qualification certificate. In addition, the classroom teaching is very important [9]. Our advice is to maximize as much as possible to launch the students' practical operation during class time, optimize teaching methods, as effectively as possible imparts knowledge to the students. First of all, arousing students' interest and attention in learning, the teacher provides this section of the course content linked to daily life. second, to better supervise the students completing test fast and well, experiment carried out in accordance with the free group, the team should be controlled for three or four people, so as to better ensure that all team members can participate in the experiment. Team members are doing things according to the division of labor in the experimental process, cooperate with each other, becoming the main body in the experiment to initiative thinking and solve the problems in the experiment, the experiment teachers can appropriate guidance. We can take competition each experiment, results at the scene on the basis of experimental; In order to improve the students' motivation to experiments, we can reward the outstanding group. I think that grouping experiment can develop

172

the students' team spirit of cooperation and cultivate the students' ability of organization [10]. To strengthen the quality of the experiment report, we should make the students finish lab assignments at a time by thinking combined with experiment, summarize the experimental defects and evaluate the experimental data to find the key to the success of the experiment and the reasons for failure. Listen to the feedback after class. Students should be required to write their feelings of the lesson, writing a "the testing experiment in my mind " on how to improve the course.

5. Teaching Training Mode and Goal The experimental teaching goal is to develop and improve students' professional knowledge, which is one of the important guarantee for training applied talents. For the purpose of comprehensive training students, we ensure that students become the "subject" role in the teaching activities, stimulate students' creative thinking, cultivate the students' cooperative ability. Narrow experiment teaching target mainly develops the students' practical ability and other application knowledge. Ensure the goal of the teaching innovation to meet the current needs of society for detection talents to adapt market changes, breaking the same training goal for a few years in universities. For relevant professional work, we draw up teaching materials detection and target, cultivating talents. Cultivate students according to the requirements of these enterprises or institution for testing personnel, we can also add the testing certificate examination scope as the usual test content. Our government put forward apprenticeship training mode and the enterprise personnel training classes in recent years. In our college, we launched "clothing outstanding talent of Jinjiang class with Jinjiang government. We also set up a class for Fujian Soundpond company, opening the course according to the actual demand of the enterprise, the teachers are first-line employees from the enterprise.

6. The Experimental Teaching Evaluation Performance appraisal is an important part for course construction, it not only reflects the students' learning situation, and is a kind of teaching feedback. The content and the form of result directly influences student's learning attitude and direction. Our evaluation methods are divided into the usual grades and final experiment exam. The usual grades are divided into preparation, operation situation and data processing. We also can regard the research or writing papers, subject contest and extracurricular experiment as grades examination content to

173

improve the students' knowledge, comprehensive application ability, practical ability and innovative thinking ability.

7. Conclusion The experimental teaching is an important practical course, which can cultivate students' practical ability. Students must grasp the theoretical knowledge to do experiments, they can also indirectly supervise that students are familiar with the understanding of theoretical knowledge. The most important part of experimental teaching is the correct guidance and demonstration of experimental teachers. Experiment teachers must be familiar with operating standards knowledge and experiment content, mastering the inspection technology and all kinds of inspection instruments. We constantly update the teaching contents and expand the scope of students' learning, so that the students can master new knowledge; we innovative teaching methods to improve teaching quality and strive to cultivate excellent talents for garment industry.

Acknowledgments

Fund project: The reform of higher school teaching research project in Fujian province in 2014 - Minjiang College curriculum system construction and reform research(Project number: JAS14750); Minjiang College teaching reform research project (MJU2015B030) in 2015.

References 1. Wang Jiangang, Gan Yingjin, Chen Dongsheng. Textile and garment construction and practice of experimental teaching demonstration center[J]. Textile and Apparel Education, 2009.Vol.24 (No.6):36. 2. Zhang Ruixin. Teaching Research and Practice of Clothing Materials[J]. Science & Technology Information, 2013(No.10):315. 3. Li Jianqiang, Xu Weilin. "Textile materials" high-quality goods of practice in the construction of resource sharing[J]. Textile and Apparel Education, 2013.Vol.28(NO.2):115–118. 4. Tang Baolian, Xu Yuan, Zhu Jing. "Textile material and testing project" teaching reform and practice[J]. Shandong Textile Economy, 2015(NO.3): 42–45. 5. Li Shouzhen. Practice and exploration of clothing material[J]. Light and Textile Industry and Technology, 2014.Vol.43(NO.4):85–86.

174

6. Liu Qian. Construction of clothing material experiments[J]. Theory and Practice of Contemporary Education, 2011.Vol.3(NO.10):84–85. 7. Zhu Jinzhong, Mao Huixian. The reform of textile materials science experiment teaching in colleges and universities[J]. Textile Education, 2010.Vol.25(NO.4):56–59. 8. Wang Hongbo. Construction and innovation of practical teaching system in textile engineering[J]. Textile and Apparel Education, 2012.Vol.27 (NO.5):450–452. 9. Tan Yanling. Course teaching reform and the implementation of textile material and detection based on project teaching[J]. Vocational Education Research, 2014(NO.12):86–88. 10. Xu Yingqi. The application of practical teaching in clothing material[J]. Examinations, 2012(NO.11):5.

175

The Potential Marker Role of Salivary Cortisol for Personality Trait in Acute Stress

Chen Li1, Yu-Qin Ma1, Li-Qin Chen1, Jin Yang1, Kang-Wei Shen1, Yuan Song2, b, Xue-Jun Kang1, a 1Key Laboratory of Child Development and Learning Science, Ministry of Education, School of Public Health, Southeast University, Nanjing, China, 210096 2Division of Child Care, Suzhou Municipal Hospital, Suzhou, China, 215002 E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

This paper investigated the relationship between salivary cortisol response and personality traits under an accurate naturalistic stressor. The subjects were 30 graduate students who would give a 20 minutes academic speech at the Graduate Academic Report. Their salivary samples were collected at three time points: 20 minutes pre-speech (A), post-speech (B) and 30 minutes post-speech (C). Salivary cortisol was determined by HPLC-FLU, and the personality traits were measured using Eysenck Personality Questionnaire (EPQ). Both the detection data and questionnaires data were analyzed in SPSS 13.0 and the relationship between neuroticism and the alteration rate of salivary cortisol were discovered. The alteration rate was computed by the cortisol level at point C minus A over A and defined as R value. The experiment results demonstrated that high R group had a significantly higher neuroticism score than the low R group. Therefore, a potential marker role of salivary cortisol for personality trait under acute stress was suggested. Keywords: Personality Trait; Cortisol; Acute Stress.

1. Introduction Personality trait refers to enduring personal characteristics that are revealed in a particular pattern of behavior in various situations. With the development of neurosciences and molecular biotechnologies, physiologists and psychologists proposed that personality traits had intrinsic biological bases [1]. Several attempts have been made to discover reliable and objective biomarkers associated with personality traits. Since Buchsbaum et al. [2] found the associations between platelet monoamine oxidase activity and personality traits, now low levels of platelet MAO activity are proved to be the marker of impulsiveness, sensation-seeking and aggressiveness [3]. In addition, higher

176

ERP amplitudes over the frontal cortex are confirmed to be related to high extraversion [4], and increased posterior activity was related to higher neuroticism [5]. The motivation of the present study was to test whether there were novel biological variables which might serve as biomarkers for personality traits. Salivary cortisol is a valid and reliable index for free serum cortisol which is considered to be the biologically active hormone [6], and saliva is a non-invasive sample. The association between personality traits and salivary cortisol response has existing evidences. Studies have found that cortisol response is related to personality traits such as self-esteem and locus of control [7], as well as openness, neuroticism and extraversion [8], conflicting results are also reported [7]. The disparities in results may due to different personality measurement tools, sampling approaches, and research methodologies employed in these studies. The present experiment investigated salivary cortisol response under an acute naturalistic stress situation, and discussed the relationship between cortisol and personality traits.

2. Method

2.1. Participants

Thirty healthy graduate students (aged 23–30 years old, 50% male) were recruited. Each one was to give a 20 min speech for the Graduate Academic Report. Every participant signed an informed consent for the participation in the research. The experiment was approved by the ethics committee of Southeast University affiliated Zhongda Hospital. 2.2. Procedures

In order to study the response of salivary cortisol in the speech situation, three time points were selected for sample collection, i.e. 20 min pre-speech, post-speech and 30 min post-speech. Afterwards, participants were to take a personality questionnaire a week after the speech. Then, the samples were assayed for their cortisol concentrations. Finally, the cortisol data and personality data were analyzed. 2.3. Samples

The operation of saliva collection is to spit saliva to an aseptic polypropylene tube. Before collection, all participants were required to rinse the mouth and not

177

intake anything except water. At least 2 ml of saliva for each sample was collected. Samples were stored at – 80℃ till determination.

2.4. Cortisol determination

The determination method was quoted from an earlier work [9]. The limit of detection (LOD) of the assay was 0.2 nmol/L; inter-assay and intra-assay coefficients of variation were less than 10%. 2.5. Personality traits measurement

The Chinese version — Gong’s revision of Eysenck Personality Questionnaires (Gong’s EPQ-R) (1983, adult) was used for the measurement of personality traits, and the Cronbach’s Alpha of the total questionnaire and three sub-scales of Extraversion, Neuroticism and Psychoticism was 0.696, 0.783, 0.923, 0.679, respectively. 2.6. Data analysis

The statistical analysis was performed using SPSS 13.0, and an alpha level of 0.05 was set to be statistically significant. 3. Results Typical chromatograms obtained from water spiked with standard and saliva sample were shown in Figure 1. No chromatographic interferences from the saliva were observed. An internal standard was used for quantifying cortisol.

Fig. 1. Typical HPLC separations of cortisol in saliva: (A) Blank water spiked with cortisol standard; (B) Saliva sample; 1) Internal standard peak; 2) cortisol derivative peak.

178

Table 1 and Fig. 2 demonstrated the statistical data of salivary cortisol concentrations at three time points: A. 20min before speech; B. just after speech; C. 30 min after speech.

Table 1. Salivary cortisol concentrations at three time points (nmol/L)

Time point Concentration p1 (compared with A) p2 (compared with B) A 4.51±1.73 - 0.031* B 8.32±2.24* 0.031* - C 5.99±1.98 0.217 0.217 Notes: “*” represented a significant difference

Fig. 2. Variation of mean salivary cortisol levels.

As it was shown in Table 1, the cortisol level at point B was significantly higher than A (p<0.05), C had no significant differences with neither A (p = 0.162) nor B (p = 0.217). Point A was the baseline cortisol level, point B post-stress cortisol level and point C recovery cortisol level. Although salivary cortisol levels performed a raise-back from A to C, the alteration modes might differ between subjects. Thus, the rate of change was computed by C minus A over A and defined as R value. Then subjects were divided to high R group and low R group cutting by the mean value. Lastly, the EPQ data were compared between high and low R groups. The results were displayed in Table 2.

179

Table 2. EPQ sub-scales scores in high R and low R groups

EPQ High R group (n=11) Low R group (n=19) p sub-scales Extraversion 56.3 ± 12.1 54.7 ± 8.3 0.68 (E) Neuroticism 51.3± 14.3 39.2 ± 12.6 0.02* (N) Psychoticism 48.6± 7.1 51.9±10.0 0.349 (P) Notes: High-R group and low-R group was divided by the mean R value). “*”represented a significant difference.

Table 2 illustrated a significant difference on N-scale scores between the two groups. The high R group had notably higher neuroticism scores. However, no differences were found on E-scale and P-scale.

4. Discussion The results indicated the increase of salivary cortisol level in acute stress and decrease after rest, which was in accordance with a previous study [10]. Since cortisol was a hormone regulating the action of HPA-axis, this arouse and regression is meaningful for individuals to face with a stressor, as well as individuals’ physical and mental health [11]. In the present study, the association between N-scale score and R value was confirmed. The difference of N-scale score between the high and low R group showed the role of personality traits in stress response. In Eysenck's theory, high neuroticism means the inclination to anxiety, which influenced social and behavioral performances. On the contrary, low neuroticism subjects seemed calmer in stress and recovered more quickly after rest.

5. Conclusion The experiment demonstrated that the alteration rate of salivary cortisol could serve as a potential marker for personality trait under an acute stressor, and the detection of salivary cortisol could be applied in the assessment of neuroticism.

Acknowledgement This study is supported by the Open Project Program of Key Laboratory of Child Development and Learning Science of Ministry of Education, Southeast University (No. CDLS-2015-02), Maternal and Child Health Research Project in

180

Jiangsu Province (F201303), Heshengyuan Maternal and Child Nutrition and Health Research Project (2014FYH022), the Fundamental Research Funds for the Central Universities, Colleges and Universities in Jiangsu Province Plans to Graduate Research and Innovation Projects (SJZZ_0026, KYZZ_0070).

References 1. H.M. Chipuer, Robert Plomin, Nancy L. Pedersen, Gerald E. McClearn and John R. Nesselroade. Genetic Influence on Family Environment: The Role of Personality. Psychology. Volume 29(1), January 1993, Pages 110–118 2. Buchsbaum. M.S., Coursey, R.D. and Murphy. D.L. (1976) The biochemical high-risk paradigm: behavioral and familial correlates of low platelet monoamine oxidase activity. Science 194, 339–341. 3. Zuckerman, M. (1984) Sensation seeking: A comparative approach to a human trait. Behau Brain Sci 7, 413–471. 4. Bartussek D, Becker G, Diedrich O, et al. Extraversion, neuroticism, and event-related brain potentials in response to emotional stimuli[J]. Personality and individual Differences, 1996, 20(3): 301–312. 5. Jennifer Isom Schmidtke, Wendy Heller. Personality, affect and EEG: predicting patterns of regional brain activity related to extraversion and neuroticism. Personality and Individual Differences 36 (2004) 717–732. 6. N. Jacobs, I. Myin-Germeys, C. Derom, et al. A momentary assessment study of the relationship between affective and adrenocortical stress responses in daily life, Biological Psychology, 2007, (74): 60–66. 7. Kirschbaum, C., Prussner, J.C., Stone, A.A., Federenko, I., Gaab, J., Lintz, D., et al., 1995. 8. Phillips, A.C., Carroll, D., Burns, V.E., Drayson, M., 2005. Neuroticism, cortisol reactivity, and antibody response to vaccination. Psychophysiology 42, 232–238. 9. Chen L Q, Kang X J, Sun J, et al. Application of nanofiber-packed SPE for determination of salivary-free cortisol using fluorescence precolumn derivatization and HPLC detection[J]. Journal of separation science, 2010, 33(15): 2369–2375.

181

10. Oswald L M, Zandi P, Nestadt G, et al. Relationship between cortisol responses to stress and personality[J]. Neuropsychopharmacology, 2006, 31(7): 1583–1591. 11. Staufenbiel S M, Penninx B W J H, Spijker A T, et al. Hair cortisol, stress exposure, and mental health in humans: a systematic review[J]. Psychoneuroendocrinology, 2013, 38(8): 1220–1235.

182

Review for Interorganizational Learning

Min Qi and Lu Ma School of Management, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Liuzhou, 545006, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

With the increasing popularity of industry-university-research cooperation, interorganizational learning (IOL) has gained much attention. Despite providing numerous advantages with regards to both enterprise and society, there are still several obstacles to overcome before IOL can be implemented effectively to facilitate the development of companies. This paper reviews the theoretical basis, function mechanism and influencing factors of IOL and provides a brief analysis of IOL’s obstacles for future research.

Keywords: Interorganizational Learning; Absorptive Ability; Organizational Trust.

1. Introduction Organizational Learning is one of the most important part in Management which has earned numerous attention from researchers and entrepreneurs. The focus on Organizational Learning (OL) has undergone changes from organizational learning to Learning-type Organization to interorganizational learning(IOL) with the changes in the business environment. While compared to the OL, it is lack of research on the IOL. Extant studies on IOL are not one size fits all and relevant expositions of IOL are scattered and messy. Myers points out that it is expensive and difficult if you want to develop all the knowledge and ability you need just depends on your own. Traditional competitive mode which mainly relies on individual is instead by group competition mode which is characterized by inter-organizational cooperation, which reinforces the importance of IOL among companies. The paper will review the theoretical basis, function mechanism, influencing factors and make a brief analysis of IOL’s barriers.

183

2. Theoretical Basis Most of the extant literatures on IOL are based on different theories which can be summarized in cooperation-competition theory and commercial ecosystem theory.

2.1. Cooperation-competition theory Competition can offer continuous power for the enterprise to achieve its development goals and promote mutual support between staff which contributed to raising labor productivity. However, the enterprise may choose myopic behavior in order to gain interest during current competition that can prejudice the development of the company even the whole industry in the long run. At the same time it can cause cold relationship between companies easily which impairs the establishment of harmonious relationship with other companies. Cooperation moderates relationship between corporations sufficiently and exploit mutual resources effectively to realize complement of resources, reduce waste of resources which used to enterprise repetitive construction and improve the efficiency of resource allocation. Everything has two sides and cooperation is not an exception. Companies has only cooperative relationship tend to slack off, lack of the incentive to create and optimize continuously that is not conducive to long-term healthy growth of enterprises. Barry J. Nalebuff and Adam M. Brandenburger stated that contemporary business management activities is not a zero sum game in the traditional sense rather than a win-win special game in their book named Co-Opetition in 1996 [1]. The era contains pure competition or cooperation has been replaced by age of competition and cooperation coexisted. After them, Joel Bleeke and David Ernst said that traditional power for driving corporation to competition couldn’t guarantee the competitive advantage in Darwin game. If companies intend to gain competitive advantage, they have to cooperate. Only co-opetition can help companies create high value for their customers and shareholders [2]. Neil Rackham summarized three essential factors for co-opetition: contribution, intimation and vision through abundant empirical research [3]. Commercial game is not just finite static game but infinite dynamic game. It varies over time and affects the result of game. Co-opetition Strategy looks at future dynamic state which can bring about scale effect, cost effect, synergistic effect and innovation effect among companies. Corporations based on the strategy should pay more attention on the future game rather than treat it as makeshift if they want to win a priority in the future.

184

2.2. Commercial ecosystem theory Commercial Ecosystem Theory originated from the biological concept, that is, ecosystem. Recently, with deeper study, scholars find the similarity between ecosystem and social organization relationship then introduce the biological concept into Social Science. Commercial Ecosystem Theory, which was put forward by James F. Moore in 1993 in the Harvard Business Review [4]. He clarified Commercial Ecosystem Theory clearly and completely in his book [5]. Cooperation-competition Theory concentrates more on the interorganizational relationships from the perspective of similar enterprises. While Commercial Ecosystem Theory pays more attention to the whole business environment aggregated by enterprises from different industry. Business ecosystem theory refers to the economic union what is based on the interaction of organizations and individuals (organisms in business world). Enterprises in business ecosystem are like the species in nature who are no longer responsible for their own profits and losses, but interdependent sharing the fate of the part. Once business ecosystem balance is broken, then its advantages will cease to exist. Commercial ecosystem is a complex adaptive system. Member companies are diverse, breaking the boundaries of traditional industries. So business ecosystem can coordinate and aggregate resources between enterprise, interact with the outside world, resulting incremental effect (1+1>2). So as to achieve a win-win situation of the business ecosystem, enhance the system stability and ensure the healthy development of the system [6].

3. Mechanism Scholars share different opinions on the mechanism of IOL, but we can summarize three aspects-strategy, cost and innovation-to elaborate on the mechanism and influence factors of IOL from relevant research results.

3.1. Strategic perspective Enterprise strategy is mainly decided by the comprehensive consideration of the enterprise’s own condition and market developmental prospects. The core elements of the strategy include: investigation and analysis, guidelines and coherent activity. Investigation and analysis is the basic to formulate a correct strategy. Only the effective investigation and analysis can guide strategists to define proper enterprise service objectives and achieve the goal. Nanette S. Levinson Minoru and Asahi show that organizational learning is a new way to

185

change a organization focused on learning individually to observe the development of organization boundary conditions justly [7]. Peter M. Senge who is the father of the learning organization has pointed out that IOL can enhance the flexibility of corporate strategy. Strategic flexibility enables enterprises to identify the variations from environment and put into the new environment quickly.

3.2. Innovation perspective Before the 80's of last century, most enterprises adopt the closed innovation model to innovate which is not influenced by and does not interact with the environment. The requirements of closed enterprise innovation are higher that enterprises must possess sufficient financial and personnel strength. Accordingly, the advantages of the closed innovation are obvious that the innovative product can ensure confidentiality in order to obtain competitive advantage, realize the monopoly of the field and access to the commodity price skimming. As the change of economic environment, enterprises closed innovation model has been hard to meet the demand of rapidly changing marketplace. After 1980s, the open innovation is favored by enterprises that is similar to the open system in thermodynamic that refers to material and energy exchange with the outside world in different degree. The enterprise is no longer limited innovation within the enterprise but also opened to external enterprises. Anat Drach-Zahavy has indicated that IOL is a common behavior of knowledge acquisition in enterprise and an important way of acquiring diversity and additional links to teams [8]. Stephen S. Cohena and Cinzia Dal Zottob demonstrate the interorganizational knowledge transfer is the source of innovation [9]. Powell and other scholars believe that IOL rather than learning inner-enterprise will explore innovative ideas [10]. Liu Xia discusses the IOL can disperse innovation risks and promote cluster innovation empirically [11].

3.3. Cost perspective Cost is the indispensible resources for enterprise to obtain benefits. Reducing cost under the premise of ensuring product quality is still the diligently pursuit of enterprises today. To reduce the various costs is not only to adopt low-cost strategy or to obtain greater profits, but also save money to support other activities and promote the development of other sectors. Judy E. Scott considers that enterprises are improving internal processes and strategies to shorten R&D-sales circulation period and balance the

186

effectiveness of channel from the aspects of vertical and virtualization. This kind of complementary business poses a challenge to traditional trading partnership, so more enterprises find a way out through IOL [12]. Liu Xia and other scholars discussed the IOL significantly enhance the collective efficiency empirically [13]. To sum up, from the strategic consideration, IOL can enhance corporate strategic flexibility which can guarantee the enterprises to adjust their own development strategy, so as to enhance their market power and strengthen the competitive position; from the cost perspective, IOL can make the knowledge and skills acquired from high potential enterprises with low cost, thus enhance the production efficiency and optimize the allocation of resources; to consider from the perspective of innovation, learning technology, knowledge and ability from interorganizational members will obtain important heterogeneous resources to save time of exploring new knowledge and new technology, accelerate the speed of business development and enhance the enterprise innovation ability.

4. Influencing Factors The motivations for enterprise to IOL are various, but more and more enterprises have recognized the importance of IOL for the development in the present and future. IOL is mainly a process of transferring knowledge and information and integration which demands strong motivation and ability of the IOL. Learning motivation is influenced by internal and external factors, especially when competition in external business environment is becoming more and more fiercely, enterprise need to get a place in the competition through IOL and improving themselves. There are most knowledge-based employees who have strong desires to realize their self-worth, so they are keen on IOL to obtain more knowledge and ability to enhance their own values. Learning motivation is not the constraints of IOL, so enterprises need to pay more attention to their own organizational learning capability. Organizational learning ability is mainly embodied in the enterprise’s knowledge absorption ability and integration ability. Absorptive capacity refers to the organizational ability to assess, apply and develop knowledge and learn from cooperators according to the enterprise’s learning motivation. The integration ability refers to the ability that enterprises arrange to use the knowledge in line with their own development needs, which determines the level that enterprise acquire the knowledge for the enterprise service. The

187

enterprise integration ability is decided by the internal capability, so only the absorption capacity are analyzed below. Stephen S. Cohena has stated the prerequisites to enhance the absorptive capacity include: similar knowledge base, experience in related fields and the trust in information exchange partners [9]. Davenport T H. Prusak L believed that the knowledge flow between different subjects needs overlapped knowledge as the basis to obtain the high knowledge transfer efficiency [14]. Dierkes M. pointed out that trust is the primary problem IOL faced and mutual trust is only the most basic the main conditions of the efficient IOL in his writings “Organizational Learning and Knowledge Creation” [15]. Sujeong Choi demonstrated the specific memory organization among companies is a excellent knowledge basis to acquire, master and absorb new knowledge and incorporate them in existing knowledge [16].

5. IOL Disabilities Accessing to heterogeneous resources in the IOL process can not only promote the internal innovation to enhance the core competitiveness of enterprises, but also enhance the whole industry technical level to promote national industrial upgrading. Although the advantages of IOL for society and enterprise is far outweigh the disadvantages in the long term, there are barriers to affect effective IOL in the short term. The understanding of IOL focuses mainly on how to become a good learning partner or expect to win in the competition among IOL partner. After all, the purpose of existence of the business is to earn profits, while IOL relationships need long time to maintain and the investment results are uncertain. Hence, there appear long-term IOL obstacles: maximize its income distribution and concern in competition in joint learning [17]. Hamel in the study of international strategic alliance between the internal cooperation found that good cooperative enterprises are more transparent and aimed to cooperation, but they are more likely to be exploited by low transparency and selfish cooperative enterprise whose purposes is just competing. IOL is an activity that the organizations cooperate mutually; paying excessively attention to competition resulted in opportunism. Enterprises in IOL network supply their own knowledge and resources for selective sharing, retained the tacit knowledge transfer, reduce the collection of heterogeneous resources, lower the probability of the innovation. The significance of IOL disappears instead IOL become a way to confuse other enterprises.

188

6. Conclusion What is elaborated above both cause unsustainable consequences of IOL. To all the enterprises involved in IOL, in case of the occurrence of the consequences above the enterprise network should be improved, the management mechanism of IOL perfected, member enterprises screened and managed, the join the threshold promoted, the degrees of punishment of opportunism varied, a trust and cooperation learning atmosphere created and then long-term IOL will be achieved.

Acknowledgments

Work partially supported by grant 2013J040404.

References 1. Barry Nalebuff, Adam M. Brandenburger. Co-opetition[M]. Knopf Doubleday Publishing Group, 1996. 2. Joel Bleeke, David Emst. Collaborating to Compete[M]. Beijing: Encyclopedia of China Publishing House, 2000. 3. Neil Rackham. Getting Partnering Right[M]. Beijing: Economic Management Publishing House, 1998. 4. Moore J. F. The Rise of a New Corporate Form[J]. Washington Quarterly. 1998, Vol. 21(1): 167–181. 5. Moore J. F. The death of competition: Leadership and strategy in the age of Business Ecosystems [M]. Bejing: Beijing Publishing House, 1999. 6. Zhong Gengshen, Cui Zhenzhen. The theory and the development direction of business ecosystem[J]. Dong Yue Tribune, 2009, Vol(30): 27–33. 7. Nanette S. Levinson, Asahi. Cross-National Alliances and Interorganiza- tional Learning[J]. Organizational Dynamics, 1995, Vol(24): 50–63. 8. Anat Drach-Zahavy. Interorganizational learning system[J]. Human Syetems Management, 1999, Vol. 18: 23–33. 9. Stephen S. Cohena, Cinzia Dal Zottob. Managing in the Information Economy[M]. Springer US, 2007. 10. Powell W, Peter B. Competitive cooperation in biotechnology: Learning through networks?[M]Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 1992: 57–110. 11. Liu Xia. Network ties, IOL and the improvement of ability to industrial cluster[J]. Studies in Science of Science, 2011, Vol. 9(11): 1676–1684.

189

12. Judy E. Scott. Facilitating Interorganizational Learning with Information Technology. [J]. Journal of Management Information System. 2000, Vol. 17(2): 81–113. 13. Liu Xia. The effect of inter-organizational learning on the growth of industry cluster [J]. The management of scientific research. 2012, Vol. 33(4): 28–35. 14. Davenport T H. Prusak L. Working Knowledge: How Organizations Manage What They Know[ M]. Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 1998. 15. Dierkes M. Organizational Learning and Knowledge Creation. [M]. Shanghai: Shanghai People's Publishing House, 2001. 16. Sujeong Choi. Developing relationship-speciﬁc memory and absorptive capacity[J]. Inf Technolo Manag. 2014, Vol(15): 223–238. 17. Rikard Larsson. The Interorganizational Learning Dilemma-Collective Knowledge Development[J]. Organization Science. 1998, Vol. 9(3): 285–305.

190

Research-Oriented Teaching Means and Measures to Improve Students' Innovating Ability

Shu-Qin Wang and Zhi-Hui Du School of Environmental Science and Engineering, North China Electric Power University, Hebei, Baoding 071003 E-mail: [email protected]

This paper proposes improvements and learning reforms through research-orientated teaching based on the characteristics of the "water pollution control engineering" course. Through a series of hierarchical teaching measures, optimizing teaching contents, improving teaching methods and strengthening practice steps, the teaching characteristics were formed. In order to accomplish the goal of “student-centered”, several methods have been proposed which includes stimulating students' learning motivation, cultivating students' ability in research learning and arousing students' interests in the scientific experiments. The results demonstrate that the implementation of both reformed teaching and learning of the research-oriented teaching practice concurrently, is beneficial to the improvement of the comprehensive ability of students.

Keywords: Research-oriented Teaching; Innovation Ability; Teaching Methods.

1. Introduction Research-oriented teaching methods have implemented new education ideas [1,2], broken the traditional teaching mode that teachers monopolize the scientific research, open to the students in scientific research, pay attentions to give play to the role of learning subject's move. During the process of learning students blend in with the research composition and with the guidance of teachers, they can achieve the purpose of grasping the knowledge, skills and improving quality in exploring and solving problems in the science in a similar scientific way. What`s more, research-oriented teaching concerns the teaching of "practice" and it is important to improve the "interaction" between teachers and students [3,4]. Water pollution control engineering is one of the core professional courses of the environmental engineering which has strong practicalities. The course involves a wide range of contents, and what’s more, it attaches importance to the

191

engineering education and practice training to develop students’ ability of innovation and engineering application. The application of this course in the practice of the research-oriented teaching has become the focus of various universities [5,6]. This course is the core course of the environmental engineering, North China Electric Power University, and it's also the pilot course of the research-oriented teaching in 2013.To reflect the characteristics-"research, internationalization"-of the North China Electric Power University, on the one hand we renewed the teaching contents of the water pollution control engineering, strengthened the engineering application and practice ability training through the case teaching [7];On the other hand we improved the teaching methods and measures to improve students' innovative ability which has been achieved good teaching results. It is mainly reflected in the following two aspects:

2. Pay Attention to Students' Learning Initiative The main purpose of the research-oriented teaching is to cultivate students' innovation ability and autonomous learning ability which depends on students' active participation.

2.1. Take the hierarchical teaching Problems can reflect differences according to the different levels of students when they were proposed and decorated. On the other hand, they can be done by the individual or by the team cooperation so as to stimulate students' interest in learning and realize hierarchical teaching. For students with good basis, the teaching requirement can be raised appropriately to improve the proportion of the individual or group cooperative learning and give full play to the potential of students. Besides, some more difficult issues can be raised for them. For example, we can require students to contrast and analyze the differences and similarities of the sedimentation tank and the separation tank, etc. But for the students of weak foundation, some difficult contents are given mostly by teaching. Some relatively simple contents can be chosen (such as some knowledge that can be mastered through looking up some information, etc.) to encourage students to learn independently. For example, we can require students to analysis what are the factors affecting the coagulation, etc. In addition, we can put forward some problems about the current hot spots, focal points and difficult points of the water treatment. For example, we can require students to check data to show what is the treatment process of landfill

192

leachate, etc. Let students check data after class and then discuss the conclusions and recommendations they get. Thus students' consciousness of independent learning and learning interests are inspired, their innovative thinking are cultivated, reading quantity and knowledge are expanded and their ability to analyze and solve problems are improved. What's more, it enlightens students' innovation ability to focus on books and transcend books.

2.2. Enrich and optimize the teaching content By optimizing the course contents, introducing in the latest water treatment technology, increasing engineering examples and new technological processes, analyzing experimental teaching aids in case study, and introducing in the basic knowledge of water pollution and the commonly used methods to control it. Considering the waste water quality index, the sewage treatment theory and technology as closely an integrated system[8] to let students have a comprehensive and systematic understanding about the water treatment and recycling process of different water quality. Some more research contents should be prepared and closely integrated with the actual problem. According to students' interest, choose some contents that have certain research value and significance so students' explore consciousness are stimulated, and their autonomous learning can be promoted. For example, we can ask students to answer what are the characteristic of the power plant waste water, coal washing waste water and coking waste water. In addition, the organization of the teaching content should more emphasis on the process related to the theory. Starting from the problem scenario to cause students' interest and passion, guide students to understand the formation and development process of knowledge. Besides, the intensity of interpretation about the questions' putting forward, background and progress should be increase to cultivate students' innovative thinking and innovative ability. In addition, students are to have access to different research topics and choose freely those in accordance with their interests. Thus, students' learning enthusiasm will be highly provoked.

2.3. Combine multimedia teaching with blackboard writing teaching We can also use multimedia technology to integrate the texts, images, sounds and animations, so that the teaching contents become more attractive and students' learning interest and learning effect are greatly improved[9].Pay attention to play to the advantages of multimedia such as its large amount of information, vividness and intuition; take full use of its lively forms, bright

193

colors and dynamic pictures, so students' minds were stimulated, their understanding and memory for the knowledge were deepened, which will receive good teaching effects. For example, when using Flash to solve some difficulties in the course, some of the animations in the course ware can make the complex operating state about the water treatment equipment more vivid and easier to understand and resolve the difficulty of the problem[10]. Although the multimedia teaching, on the other hand, saved the teachers' blackboard writing time and picked up the speed, students' attention has shifted from teachers to projection. When teachers were teaching, students were busy taking notes, so the interaction between teachers and students became less and less. Moreover, the decrease of blackboard writing made students confused what is the important content or comprehension content, which always contributes to the visual fatigue. Therefore we need to pay attention to the teaching schedule, coordinate the switching speed for the slides and the lecture slides and rhythm, so that students' thinking rhythm is consistent with the class schedule. At the same time we need use a certain amount of blackboard writing to highlight the emphases and difficulties of this lecture, increase the interaction between the students, and encourage students to consolidate and master the knowledge through the network resources after their classes.

3. Improve the Teaching Methods

3.1. Use means of comparative interpretation and comparison analysis Moreover, the means of comparative interpretation and comparison analysis can be used to improve students' ability of expressing after looking at the pictures and the ability to analysis problems. In the teaching process, much attention should be paid to compare things or processes that have similar structure, function, nature or others. In this way, students can find the characteristics and differences between them and find out the similarities and differences. Therefore, students' ability to analyze problems and express problems are improved. For this, many related explorations in the teaching process have been carried on. For instance, through comparing bio-carriers presented in the figure, students are asked to observe the characteristics of the carriers, analyze the processing efficiency and the system resistance difference under the condition of application according to the characteristics of the carriers.

194

3.2. Reform the experimental project, carry out experiments teaching which have exploratory, comprehensiveness and designability On the arrangement of experimental contents, we change the previous practice that give priority to the verification experiments and set up a large number of comprehensive and designing experimental projects. The grouping of practice can avoid repetition and reduce plagiarism. Observing the experiments by the teaching method of facing the models to quiz-discuss-summarize to encourage students to think actively about the specific design capabilities of each valve and pipe for the engineering field. Try experimenting with combinations of theory and the engineering consciousness to cultivate students' engineering quality. Designing experiments require students to design independently and complete the experiment contents, thus the students' interest in active learning and ability to apply the theory and technology of water pollution control engineering comprehensively are improved. At the same time, we give full play to the flexible characteristics of "university students' innovative undertaking experimental plan" in our university, encourage teachers who have the strong research ability and undertake more projects to take time out to guide students to explore innovative experiments. They includes, for example, some have established state-level projects: the research of polymer flocculant to the desulfurization waste-water treatment, the synthesis of the new water treatment reagent-itaconic acid homopolymer-under microwave radiation; the provincial projects: the experiment research of TiO2- loaded photocatalysis synergy phosphorus absorption, and the field project: the experiment research of the modified titanium column brace clay to treatment the mercury waste-water under the visible light catalytic conditions. Let students design and improve the experimental contents boldly to stimulate students' interest in learning new knowledge and skills actively. Closely combining the study of this course and the solution of practical problems to inspire students' interest in scientific research and experiment.

4. Conclusion In short, after the research-oriented teaching is carried out, students' practical ability and innovation ability are strengthened, and their knowledge transfer and application ability, innovative thinking ability and the ability to solve the actual problems of environmental engineering are cultivated and trained. Some of the students in grade 2011, 2012 and 2013 participate in the national innovation projects, the key innovation projects of provincial level or university level are all good accepted. Otherwise, some students take part in lots entrepreneurship

195

competitions at the provincial level and many energy conservation and emission reduction competitions at the university level and both of them are achieved good place. What's more, we obtained 2 utility model patent licenses and 2 college students' entrepreneurial projects. All of these showed that students' innovation ability are actually exercised and improved.

Acknowledgements This work was financially supported by North China Electric Power University Fund (No. 13001404).

References 1. Pei-Yong Duan, Research-oriented teaching mode analysis of applied innovative talents training (Journal of Shandong Constructional University, 2012), pp.440–443. 2. Feng Lu, Juan Hao. Research-based teaching and the cultivation of innovative talents in colleges and universities (Education science, 2011), pp.50–53. 3. Gu-Qing Xiao, Jiao-liang Wang, Dan Xie, Juan-juan Song, Environmental engineering experiment research teaching (Power Education in China, 2013), pp.130–131. 4. Su-Juan Chen, Xiao-Zhi Wang, The Research-oriented teaching discussion of environmental science and engineer (China Education Innovation Herald, 2011), pp.65–66. 5. Gui-Zhen Hao, Guo-Li Yang, Introduction to the reform of the teaching mode of water pollution control engineering (Journal of Lanzhou Petrochemical Vocational and Technical College, 2014), pp.41–43. 6. Lan-He Zhang, Yan-Ping Jia, Ying-Jie Zhang, The teaching reform and practice of water pollution control engineering courses (Journal of Northeast electric power university, 2013), pp.82–84. 7. Xiang-Yin Li, Mei Xu, The practice and thinking of the training mode of innovative college students (Journal of education teaching, 2010), pp.66. 8. Shu-Qin Wang, Ya-Na Feng. The practice teaching reform and innovation ability training of water pollution control engineering (Journal of Education Teaching BBS, 2012), pp.55–56.

196

9. Xin Qi, Jia-Fu Liu, Huan-Chun Ma, etc, Application of multimedia teaching in the teaching of water pollution control engineering (Chinese Education Technology and Equipment, 2014), pp.53–54. 10. Wang Shu-Qin, Chao Li, Xue-Juan Zhao, The application of computer technology in water pollution control engineering teaching (Journal of experimental technology and management, 2014), pp.105–108.

197

A Tentative Discussion on the Teaching Reform of the “Book Design” Course

Li-Li Zhang School of Arts, Jiangsu University, Zhenjiang, Jiangsu Province, 212013, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper elaborates on the teaching goal and course nature of the Book Design course, and analyzes the major existing problems of teaching the course in China. Starting from the training of students’ practical ability, the paper expounds the direction and method of book design teaching reform in terms of the optimization of course system, adoption of diversified teaching methods, construction of multi-level talent training platform, etc.

Keywords: Book Design; Teaching Reform; Practical Ability; Innovation.

1. Introduction Books are the carrier of information storage and transfer, and in today’s digital era, the paper reading is more and more affected by the diversified cultural transmission, and also encounters the challenge of the new media. The book design is facing the change from static state to dynamic state, from three dimensions to multi-dimension; its design form and meaning also have been refreshed. In the new era, the past single teaching mode cannot meet the needs of society, and Chinese design educational circle has paid more and more attention to the discussion about book design teaching. How to update the course content, establish the reasonable and distinctive teaching mode, build a more scientific book design curriculum system and to have become important topics in today’s book design teaching.

2. Overview of the Book Design Course

2.1. Course nature Book Design is a comprehensive course integrated with the theory study, creativity promotion and practice performance. Book Design is mainly set for professional posts related to print median design in publishing and printing

198

companies. For the need of training for professional ability, the knowledge system of the course teaching corresponds to the needs of post division and working process in the publishing and printing industry, and covers the training of creativity, planning, layout, pre-printing process, and other design ability.

2.2. Teaching goal By learning this course, students can have a systematic understanding about the particularity and commonality of book design, and master the basic rule and expression method of book design. To train students’ ability in application and control of the text, graphics, makeup, bookbinding, printing and other different design elements in books. Let students be able to conduct deeply study on their own based on the mastery of relevant theoretical knowledge.

3. Existing Problems in Current Teaching of the Book Design Course First, the structure design of the course is unreasonable, bringing certain learning disabilities to students. Traditional book design teaching is primarily the classroom teaching, interspersed with different experiments and practice. Under the conditions of sufficient class hours and less teaching objects, it can meet the needs of the normal teaching. However, once the quantity of class hours cannot meet the requirements, or the number of teaching objects exceeds the standard, teaching effect will be greatly reduced. Based on collecting and organizing the syllabuses of the Book Design course revised recently in China’s 49 universities, the author arranges and contrasts the quantity of class hours various schools set for the course, and it can be found that there exists a large gap. As shown in Figure 1, the most quantity is more than 200 classes, the least is between 25–50 classes, and the quantity of class hours for most universities focuses on 50–75 classes. If the type of school is also analyzed, more questions can be found from the interactive distribution. The schools with the most class hours are mostly independent art universities, whose design for teaching contents of the Book Design course is relatively systematic and complete. However, in some non-art universities, due to limitations of less total class hours and lack of professional teachers, some prior courses related to book design are lacked, or the mutual continuous relations between courses are disrupted. Therefore courses need to be integrated.

199

Fig. 1. A bar chart of class-hour distribution for the Book Design course in China’s 49 universities

Table 1. The interactive table of class-hour arrangement and school type for the Book Design course in China’s 49 universities

Note: The professional university listed in the table refers to financial and forestry university. Second, the teaching form is relatively single, and neglects the training of students’ comprehensive quality. This kind of teaching method makes students tend to overly dependent on computer graphics, causing the similar work expression; in the limited time of classroom teaching, students are conducting the partial practice in most of the time, and cannot understand the integrity of the book design broadly. Third, teaching is detached from the market. Breaking away from the publishing industry, printing factory and cultural market, teaching lacks

200

guidance to students in aspects of practical skills such as the publishing process, production technology, and so on, which lead to the emergence of two situations: on the one hand, students will be not familiar with materials or the complete design process, lack the comprehensive use of materials, printing technology, and be deficient in organism and systematicness in design, leaving hidden troubles for their employment in the future; on the other hand, due to not paying attention to book marketing environment and the overall demand of development of cultural industry, always students’ design projects cannot get recognition from the market, and then lose the market value.

4. Exploration on the Teaching Reform of Book Design

4.1. Scientific optimization of the related course system A complete course structure design is the important premise and guarantee for smooth development of teaching activities of the Book Design course. Teaching activities of the Book Design need to conduct the design education and training to students in binding technology, layout design and editorial design. Among them, the teaching in editorial design mainly trains students to learn linear logical thinking related to control of book visual information transmission, master the methodology of deconstruction and recombination of information, complete the process of text reconstruction, and achieve the best relationship between reading and being read. Layout design mainly trains students to master the concept of reading for information and the corresponding design thinking, and learn the information integration and expression method of visual information’s graphic design. Binding process is an interesting and effective way connecting book reading and materialized design, and aims to solve problems of material experience, binding process and printing technology. For now, relying only on inherent teaching class hours of the Book Design course, the above teaching processes cannot be fully realized, and need the help of a series of prior course. Therefore, the arrangement of closely linked prior course with priority is the first step for the teaching reform of book design. The prior courses of Book Design include three types such as the basic course in discipline, compulsory course of major and elective course of major. Among them, the basic course in discipline is primarily aimed at training the students’ modeling ability, and has certain universality in the whole field of design teaching, which conforms to the law of design education. However, because of the difference in training goals and professional skill requirements, the arrangement of major compulsory courses and elective courses decides

201

whether the book design teaching system is complete and coherent. Each of them contains several course modules set according to different design skills training, and on the specific process of class arrangement, the time and sequence arrangements need to consider the logicality and continuity among different course modules. In addition, there are inevitably differences for different universities in course and time arrangements, so we can arouse the activity of elective courses according to actual situations of the school to ensure the final teaching effect.

4.2. Reasonable reform of the teaching method In teaching activities of the Book Design course, in addition to the common teaching method of instruction, different teaching methods can also be adopted according to the teaching progress and actual circumstance of teaching in segments; a variety of means such as copying teaching method, interest-drive method and project teaching method are comprehensively applied in the practical teaching; the difficulty of the course will gradually increase; much attention should be paid to the practicalness of teaching cases, teaching processes and learning processes, finally achieving the purpose of strengthening students’ professional skills.

4.2.1. Copying teaching method In the early stage of the course, the teacher can organize students to copy, classify, induce and sort a large number of excellent book design works at home and abroad, and divide them in groups according to different discriminating categories such as the book theme, technique of expression, and material technology; let students experience the original designers’ design creativity and performance skills by heart in the process of copying; with the gradual development of learning, students’ understanding of the excellent works will be more and more profound, from the superficial understanding in the beginning todeep understanding later, laying the foundation for their independent creation in future.

4.2.2. Interest-drive method The three-dimensional space form of books bears the visual expression of books and comfort degree of reading. Text, graphics, colors, materials and technology act as important elements of its form expression. In the teaching process, the teacher should encourage students to start from their own interests and talents,

202

and express contents and thoughts of written works by virtue of various means such as photography, graph, illustration, comprehensive materials. With the advancement of course schedule, the teacher should guide students to be not constrained by one form or style, and advocate various expression forms of book design. While entering the late stage of the course, the teacher should make students realize the effectiveness and limitations of various means of visual expression, and learn to choose different expression forms and materials suitable to different book connotation through the collective review and discussion on the class works, which can effectively avoid the beginners from the limitations and monotonicity in the design expression of book forms.

4.2.3. Project teaching method Introduce the real project of publishing companies to the course training, and conduct practical training in the form of solution by students themselves, solution by students themselves again, and project cooperation; it can break the traditional model using virtual subject in the conventional teaching design; increase students’ practical experience through the import of all kinds of real projects, and make students produce subjective learning needs to solve the problem, which are conducive to deep memory and comprehension by analogy of learning contents.

4.3. Construction of multi-level talent training platform The teaching activities of book design are multi-directional, and cover the classroom teaching, experiment teaching and practice teaching. Under ideal conditions, all these three teaching should be carried out around the established teaching contents, and connect with and support each other, construct the carrier of book design teaching with the help of studio, laboratory, training room and other teaching platforms together, and form the teaching mode integrating the theory study and practical activities.

4.3.1. Teaching project studio The teaching project studio consists of silk-screen printing laboratory, composite material technology training room, photographic laboratory, etc. The teaching project studio mainly conducts the printing principle, application and development of materials, photography technology training and other teaching activities related to book design. Students can operate all kinds of professional equipment related to book design activities personally, master all kinds of

203

technology and skill under the guidance of teachers in the laboratory, and experience how their own design changes from the concept to a finished product.

4.3.2. Enterprise project studio Cooperate with enterprises related to book issue, such as printing factories, press, culture companies, set up project studios named after the enterprise, and carry out the practice teaching links of order cultivation and project cooperation jointly with the enterprise. By participating in all kinds of binding design project cooperated by the university and enterprise, students can truly understand the whole process of a book design work developing from the concept, production, prepress processing, post-press processing and the completion of the finished product, and learn to develop book design forms adapted to the needs of publishing market and social mainstream aesthetic appreciation.

4.3.3. Entrepreneurship studio Under the guidance of teachers, students can undertake the book design project from the society, carry out the project design in teams, play their expertise and learn from each other. The studio should be self-managed and self-financed by students, which can strengthen the students’ self-management ability and the team consciousness. In the experience process of entrepreneurship, the students’ practical ability and market adaptability will get great improvement.

5. Conclusion At present, what the publishing industry and printing agency need the most is the professional skill applying talent related to book design, and it directly determines that the reform direction of the Book Design teaching should attach great importance to strengthening the creative ability, executive ability and market adaptability of students. And the reasonably conducting the overall, syncretic and related adjustment among the related prior courses can lay the necessary foundation for the systematic learning of the course. At the same time, under the relatively open experience mode, it is very important to highlight the teaching practice’s effect on the effective development of the whole teaching activity. In addition to the professional teachers, technicians and publishing editors can also be properly incorporated into design educators, and instruct the various kinds of mutual infiltrated and crossed professional knowledge to

204

students through various channels, making students have the professional skills and professional quality required for participating into the design positions.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by the educational reform program of Jiangsu University——“Book Design Course Teaching Idea and Classroom Teaching Practice Reform”. (project number: 2013JGYB041).

References 1. Lei Jiang, On the Teaching Reform of Book Design under the New Age, J. Popular Literature, 2013 (3)pp. 239–240. 2. Bolin Xiao, Cultivation of Students’ Innovative Thinking Ability in the Book Design Teaching, J. Hundred Schools in Arts, 2012 (7)pp. 412–413. 3. Jiale Zhou and Cheng Cheng, Design Teaching Thinking Transformation from Form to Connotation, J. Decoration, 2011 (3)pp. 88–89. 4. Jingren Lv, Book Design Courses by Jingren Lv, M. (Hubei Fine Arts Press, Wuhan, 2005).

205

Construction and Practice of Medicine Massive Open Online Courses of Obstetrics and Gynecology Ultrasound

Guo-Rong Lv1, Zhen-Hua Wang2 and Jia-Xiang Wu1 1Quanzhou Medical College, Quanzhou, Fujian 362000, China 2Department of Cardiology, Second Affiliated Hospital of Fujian Medical University E-mail: [email protected]

This paper summarizes the experience in Medicine Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) construction and explores the value of applying MOOCs in the teaching of obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound. A randomized controlled trial to test MOOCs Flipped Classroom teaching method’s effectiveness against the traditional teaching method was conducted with twenty medical interns for 6 weeks. The diagnosis skills in obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound of the interns were assessed by the same attending physician using an assessment scale of Objective Structured Assessment of Ultrasound Skills (OSAUS) at the start of the experiment and every weekend. The experiment results demonstrate that the MOOCs Flipped Classroom teaching group has higher satisfaction and is more familiar with scanning technology and diagnostic skills of obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound compared with the traditional teaching group. Therefore MOOCs may be an effective method for the specialist training of ultrasound physicians.

Keywords: Medicine MOOCs; Teaching; Obstetrics and Gynecology Ultrasound; Objective Structured Assessment of Ultrasound Skills.

1. Introduction

Diagnostic ultrasound is a practical branch of medical imaging. It is an important issue to make medical students to master the skills of medical diagnostic ultrasound at a level of clinical application of ultrasonic medical education in a short period of time. To date, however, there are still no reports of a reliable and stable method for systematic study of medical students’ learning curve in ultrasound internship. Assessment scales are widely used in the evaluation of teaching quality [1–3]. The assessment scale of Objective Structured Assessment of Ultrasound Skills (OSAUS) is recommended to assess the diagnosis skills in ultrasound [4–6]. In the present study, the experience in Medicine Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) construction was

206

summarized, and the value of MOOCs in the teaching of obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound was assessed by an assessment scale of OSAUS.

2. Methods

Ten courses of medicine MOOCs were constructed in Quanzhou Medical College. The courses include Internal Medicine Nursing, Nursing Technique, Children’s Nursing, Eugenics, Maternal-Child Nursing, Basic Practical Pharmacology, Pharmaceutical Preparation Technology, Biopharmaceutical Technology, Drug Quality Inspection Technology, and Obstetrics & Gynecology Ultrasound. All of the courses are offered in the School of Continuing Education, School of Nursing or Department of Medical Imaging Technology for a trial run. Twenty medical interns from a higher vocational and specialized college were randomly divided into two groups (each 10 interns), the MOOCs Flipping Classroom teaching group and the traditional teaching group. Several teaching methods of Obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound video and courseware, group discussion, analog scanning and guidance or instruction by teachers were performed in the MOOCs group for 6 weeks. While in traditional teaching group, the interns were undergoing an obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound practice under the guidance of tutor physician in the Ultrasound Division during the same period of time. The diagnosis skills in obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound of the interns were assessed by the same attending physician using an assessment scale of Objective Structured Assessment of Ultrasound Skills (OSAUS) at the beginning, and in each weekend during the whole 6-weeks practice programe.

3. Results

Ten courses of medicine MOOCs were constructed and applied to the curriculum reform of adult education college and nursing department in Quanzhou Medical College. Compared with the traditional teaching group without MOOCs curriculum reform, satisfaction of the students were obviously improved in MOOCs Flipping Classroom teaching group (75.2% VS 90.2%, p <0.01). Interns from MOOCs group were more familiar with scanning technology and diagnostic skills of obstetrics and gynecology ultrasound compared with the traditional teaching group. OSAUS scores of MOOCs group were significantly higher than those of traditional teaching group (Table 1).

207

Table 1. OSAUS scores of MOOCs group and traditional teaching group

Group n Week 0 Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 MOOCs 10 6.1±0.3 13.2±1.2 16.9±.9 18.6±1.8 21.6±1.4 23.9±1.6 27.5±1.5 control 10 6.2±0.4 12.5±1.3 15.1±1.5 18.0±1.3 19.8±0.6 21.6±1.0 23.4±0.7 P 0.591 0.007 0.002 0.239 0.001 0.002 0.001

The learning curve of MOOCs group rose more early and steeper than traditional teaching group.

Fig. 1. OSAUS scores curves of MOOCs group and traditional group

4. Discussion

We proposed a classification method of three types of MOOCs, namely MOOCs, LOOCs and SPOCs, and analyzed the existing problems of them. Against the defects of Behavioral learning theory, Cognition and Construction learning theory, Connectivism learning theory, we further developed a new viewpoint of Physiological-Psychological-Socialized learning theory. Then, based on this perspective, we advocated that SPOCs enable to solve many defects of MOOCs (such as inhibiting discrepancy development of Universities) by combining online and offline teaching mode. SPOCs curriculum should be diversely constructed according to undergraduate or higher vocational medical colleges. SPOCs curriculum construction should be combined with primary textbooks and training teaching

208

materials to a form a three-dimensional construction program involved paper primary textbooks, characteristic training materials and SPOCs video teaching materials in higher vocational and specialized colleges. SPOCs teaching materials construction should reflect its own characteristics of individual college [7]. More attention should be paid to explore ways to combine SPOCs and virtual medicine, clinical objective structured ratio evaluation (OSAC), hospital PACS systems, digital hospitals to form complete SPOCs with their own characteristics. Given that the clinical MOOCs construction is still blank, we advocated an implementation procedure of medical SPOCs in a combined points-lines-planes, complementary and progressive way according to the experience in the construction of SPOCs in our college. For the clinical medicine courses, a certain chapter or section is chosen as a breakthrough of SPOCs to develop students' ability of autonomous and independent learning. For the general education curriculum, disciplines lack of qualified teachers, continuing education, new courses and special education, SPOCs are advocated (shallow breakthrough). With the accumulation of experience and the development of information technology, SPOCs are gradually advance to a extensive audience disciplines, such as clinical nursing or clinical medicine (planes break). After a selection of distinctive SPOCs, SPOCs is able to promote to LOOCs or MOOCs.

5. Conclusion

This study demonstrates that MOOCs Flipping Classroom teaching is superior to the traditional practice in the field of gynecological ultrasound teaching. Self-learning, lots of thinking, and sufficient communication between students and teachers are required in the MOOCs Flipping Classroom, therefore it exhibits an exceeding effects of teaching [8]. The significance of this study is that this new method may be used in the specialist training of ultrasound physician. Along with the widely clinical application of ultrasound and the appearance of new pocket-sized ultrasound instruments (ultrasound stethoscope) [9], clinicians including gynecologists, emergency physicians and cardiologists are required to master the skills of point of care ultrasonography or echocardiography [10]. Our experience will be worth referring and extending the application in the specialist training program of these clinicians.

209

References

1. Guorong Lv, Zhenhua Wang, Jiaxiang Wu. Construction and Explore of Medical Massive Open Online Course, based on Physiological- Psychological-Socialized Learning Theory Perspective. China Higher Medical Education. 2015;8: 15–16. 2. Parsons, Michael H. Changing practices in evaluating teaching: A practical guide to improved faculty performance and promotion tenure decisions. Community College Journal of Research&Practice. 2000; 6: 516. 3. Patrick G, Hamish C. The development of an extended course experience questionnaire. Quality in Higher Education. 2003; 3: 259–267. 4. Tolsgaard MG, Ringsted C, Dreisler E, et al. Reliable and valid assessment of ultrasound operator competence in obstetrics and gynecology. Ultrasound Obstet Gynecol. 2014;4: 437–443. 5. Tolsgaard MG, Todsen T, Sorensen JL, et al. International multispecialty consensus on how to evaluate ultrasound competence: a delphi consensus survey. PLoS One. 2013; 8: 657–687. 6. Salvesen KA, Lees C, Tutschek B. Basic European ultrasound training in obstetrics and gynecology: where are we and where do we go from here? Ultrasound Obstet Gynecol. 2010; 36:525–529. 7. Yanchun Zhao, Guorong Lv, Min Li, et al. Four-dimensional spatio-temporal image correlation technology in detection of fetal heart malformation at early-second trimester. Chinese Journal of Medical Imaging Technology. 2013;2: 260-263. 8. Katie Ash. Educators Evaluate 'Flipped Classrooms' Benefits and drawbacks seen in replacing lectures with on-demand video. Education Week. 2012;10: 6–8. 9. Sippel S, Muruganandan K, Levine A, et al. Review article: Use of ultrasound in the developing world. Int J Emerg Med. 2011; 4: 72. 10. Moore CL, Copel JA. Point-of-care ultrasonography. N Engl J Med. 2011; 8: 749–757.

210

Differences in Student Satisfaction as a Function of Instruction Method

Xiao-Hong Li Higher Education Leadership, Sam Houston State University Huntsville, Texas 77341, U.S.A E-mail: [email protected]

This paper investigates the differences in student satisfaction between face-to-face and online instruction methods based on their learning experiences. Archival data from Office of Institutional Research (OIR) at a Texas Public University were obtained for Improving Learning in Higher Education (IDEA) Student Ratings of Instruction end of semester survey for this investigation. The three student satisfaction variables of interest were the quality of the course, positive feelings towards the field of study and teaching ability of the instructor. Statistical analysis yielded statistically significant results for students rating higher for face-to-face courses than for online courses. The implications of the findings were discussed and several suggestions for the direction of future research were provided. Keywords: IDEA. Fact-to-face Class; Traditional Learning; Distance Education; Online Class; Student satisfaction variables.

1. Introduction In fall 2013, about 5.3 million students took at least one online course (Haynie, 2015). The U. S. Department of Education (2011) released found that the percentage enrolled in a distance education degree program increased from two percent to four percent in less than ten years. As such, in recent years, an increased emphasis has been placed in examining the quality of student learning in distance education. More researches have been done in exploring the strengths and weaknesses of the class formats available to our instructors and students today. In addition to the concern that the quality of distance learning, online courses physically distance students from the college community is also a factor of disadvantage of promoting distance education. However, due to the fact that distance learning environment is student learning preference because online classes are more convenience and flexibility to fit their personal schedules,

211

especially for non-traditional female students who are struggle in balancing school, work, and family obligations (Sussman & Dutter, 2010). It is necessary to compare face-to-face learning vs online learning from students’ perspective in an effort to better understand how instructors can strengthen their teaching in different learning environment for enhancing student effectiveness in different learning environments. Of interest to this study was the influence of instruction method in student satisfaction. The debate on whether courses delivered online promote student satisfaction of the course and instruction better than courses delivered face-to- face is ongoing. Many researchers have concluded that students who viewed interacting with their instructor as an important part of being successful in a course tended to do worse for taking online class (Driscoll, Jicha, Hunt, Tichavsky, & Thompson, 2012), whereas other researchers (Fortune, Spielman, & Pangelina, 2011) found there was no significate difference in student satisfaction in the two different learning formats.

2. Significance of the Study An excellent indictor to evaluate the quality of course delivered online is student satisfaction (Sampson, Leonard, Ballenger, & Coleman, 2010). According to Keller (1983), student satisfaction is an important factor for the perceptions of being able to achieve success. Although the enrollment of distance learning programs keeps increasing in decade, less research has approached the satisfaction of students from the types of courses to which students have been exposed. For the purpose of this study, the primary focus was a comparison of student satisfaction between course delivered online and face-to-faced. As the interest in online education rises, improving online learning to better prepare students is a big issue facing all educators.

3. Statement of the Problem Of concern is the satisfactions of the courses for students who took the courses online at a Texas public university. Additionally, student satisfaction for instructors who taught online. As a result, face-to-face learners had stronger positive feelings toward the courses and the field of study comparing to the online learners.

212

4. Purpose of the Study The purpose of this study was to examine the extent to which differences might be present in student satisfaction of study as a function of instruction methods. Examined in this study were the rating of higher education courses for students who took the courses online vs students who took the courses face-to-face as well as the rating of instructors for students who took the course online vs face- to-face.

5. Research Questions The following research question was addressed in this investigation: What is the difference in student satisfaction as a function of instruction methods?

6. Method

6.1. Research design This research design utilized in this study was causal-comparative (Johnson & Christensen, 2014) because both the independent variable of instruction methods and the three dependent variables had already occurred. Students whose data were analyzed in this investigation had already taken the courses from a Texas public university. Furthermore, they had already completed the IDEA end of semester survey anonymous no matter they had passed the courses or not. As such, no manipulation was possible of either the independent variable or the two dependent variables. The codes presented for describing student attitudes and behavior in the survey were one for Definitely False; two for More False Than True; Three for In Between; Four for More True Than False; and Five for Definitely True. The three dependent variables analyzed in this investigation are defined as follows: As a result of taking this course, I have more positive feelings toward this field of study. This phrase refers to student satisfaction of the course promoting them to be interested in the field of study. Overall, I rate this instructor an excellent teacher. This phrase refers to student satisfaction of the instructors who taught the courses. Overall, I rate this course as excellent. This phrase stands for student satisfaction of the courses in terms of their learning experience.

213

6.2. Participants For the purpose of this study, archival data from the OIR at a Texas public university were obtained for IDEA survey for fall 2011 to spring 2015. All students who took the courses during fall 2011 to spring 2015 except summer terms in the survey university were asked to voluntarily participate and complete the IDEA survey at the end of semesters. There were total 14482 courses participated in the surveys with total enrollment of 418179, and the average responsible rate of the survey was 67.9%.

6.3. Instrumentation and procedures IDEA data from fall 2011-spring 2015 except summer terms were used in this investigation. Labels were then assigned to relevant variables for the purpose of better reading the results. Because the survey data were collected from students’ voluntarily basis, minimal errors in the data were assumed present. For more information regarding IDEA survey, readers are directed to the IDEA website.

7. Results Prior to conducting inferential statistics procedures, the normality of the three dependent variables were examined using standardized skewness coefficients (i.e., skewness divided by standard error of skewness) and the standardized kurtosis coefficients (i.e., kurtosis divided by the standard error of kurtosis). All coefficients were calculated to be outside of the boundaries of normality (i.e., +/– 3, Onwuegbuzie & Daniel, 2002). Although the assumptions of multivariate normality for these three dependent variables were not met, Field (2009) contends that this statistical procedure is sufficiently robust to withstand these violations. Therefore, the Multivariate Analysis of Variance (MANOVA) procedure was appropriate to use on the data in this study. With respect to research question, the MANOVA revealed a statistically significant overall difference, Wilks’ Λ = .92, p < .001, partial η2 = .08, a moderate effect size (Cohen, 1988), in student satisfaction by course deliver method. Univariate follow-up analysis of variance procedures revealed statistically significant differences in Raw Mean – Overall, I rate this instructor an excellent teacher, F(1, 14415) = 216.50, p < .001, partial η2 = .02, a small effect size; in Raw Mean – Overall, I rate this course as excellent, F(1, 14415) = 18.22, p < .001, partial η2 = .001, a small effect size; in Raw Mean As a result of taking this course, I have more positive feelings toward this field of study, F(1, 14415) = 8.02, p < .005, partial η2 = .001, a small effect size. Due to fewer

214

than three groups, Scheffe` post hoc procedures was not appropriate to use for comparing differences between the two means. Therefore, Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) procedure was used in this analysis to investigate the differences in the means of student satisfaction between online class vs face-to-face class. Based on the result of ANOVA procedure, there was a statistically significant overall difference in student satisfaction on all three dependent variables as function of class delivered methods without exception. Overall, students gave higher satisfaction rating of courses, instructors and field of studies toward to taking face-to-face class than taking online classes. Readers are directed to Table 1 for the descriptive statistics for this analysis.

Table 1 Descriptive statistics for means of student satisfaction rating by instruction method.

Online Class Face-to-Face Class Student Satisfaction M SD M SD Overall, I rate this instructor an 4.20 0.66 4.37 0.55 excellent teacher Overall, I rate this course as 4.11 0.62 4.16 0.56 excellent As a result of taking this course, I 4.03 0.63 4.06 0.59 have more positive feelings toward this field of study

8. Discussion In this study, differences in student satisfaction were examined as a function of instruction method. Statistically significant differences in the means of student satisfaction ratings as function of instruction method were present. Overall, the higher rating was given to traditional face-to-face courses comparing to online courses. A mean difference of over 0.1 was recorded indicating that different instruction method clearly had an influence on student satisfaction of the course, instructor and the field of study in a Texas public university. This result reaffirms the concern of the quality and student satisfaction of distance learning education (Summers, Waigandt, & Whittaker, 2005). The results of this analyses indicated that the preference of learning environment for students in a Texas public university is still traditional face-to-face learning environment. This disparity between rising demand for distance learning and weak student satisfaction of online instruction method has important implications for faculty improving instruction of online courses. Further research could provide valuable data to institutions for developing distant learning education.

215

Other questions that could be addressed in future research include: (a) What differences existed in distance learners by student characteristics?; (b) What were the reasons for students taking online classes rather than face-to-face classes?; and (c) What differences existed in student satisfaction as a function of instruction method for faculty tenure status, faculty ethnicity, and course level?

9. Conclusion Distance learning has become a new focus now include indicators that go beyond student satisfaction and student outcome. With an emphasis on rising demand for distance learning, it is essential that legislature of higher education evaluates the quality of distance learning provided to students in relation to student satisfaction of courses delivered.

References 1. J. Cohen (1988). Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences (2nd ed.). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. 2. A. Driscoll, K. Jicha, A. N. Hunt, L. Tichavsky and G.Thompson (2012). Can online courses deliver in-class results? A comparison of student performance and satisfaction in an online versus a face-to-face introductory sociology course. Teaching Sociology, 16, 312-331. doi: 10.1177/0092055 X12446624 3. A. Field (2009). Discovering statistics using SPSS (3rd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. 4. M. F. Fortune, M. Spielman and D. T. Pangelinan (2011). Students’ perceptions of online or face-to-face learning and social media in hospitality, recreation and tourism. Journal of Online Learning and Teaching. 7(1), Retrieved from http://jolt.merlot.org/vol7 no1/fortune_0311.pdf 5. D. Haynie (2015). Study shows sluggish online learning growth for second year: Annual report finds online enrollment shrank for the first time at for- profit institutions, but grew overall. U.S. News & World Report. Retrieved from http://www.usnews.com/education/online-educati on/articles/2015/02/05/study-shows-sluggish-online- learning-growth-for-second-year 6. B. Johnson and L.B. Christensen (2012). Educational research: Quantitative, qualitative, and mixed approaches (4th ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

216

7. J. Keller (1983). Motivational design of instruction. In C. Reigeluth (Ed.), Instructional design theories and models: An overview of their current status, Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. 8. A. J. Onwuegbuzie and L. G. Daniel (2002). Uses and misuses of the correlation coefficient. Research in the Schools, 9(1), 73–90. 9. Sampson, P. M., Leonard, J., Ballenger, J. W., & Coleman, C. J. (2010). Student satisfaction of online courses for educational leadership. Online Journal of Distance Learning Administration, 13(3). 10. Sussman, S., & Dutter, L. (2010). Comparing student learning outcomes in face-to-face and online course delivery. Online Journal of Distance Learning Administration, v13 n4 Win 2010. 11. Summers, J. J., Waigandt, A., & Whittaker T. A. (2005). A comparison of student achievement and satisfaction in an online versus a traditional face- to-face statistics class. Innovative Higher Education, 29(3).

217

Segmentations and Distributaries Cultivation Reform of Vehicle Service Specialties Based on “Platforms + Developments" Model

Liang-Rong Zhu, Zhuang-Wen Wu Zhejiang Industry Polytechnic College, Shaoxing, Zhejiang 312000, P. R. China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper analyzes the implementation of the “platform curriculum” and “development curriculum” of Vehicle Service Specialties, based on analysis of the current vehicle industrial talent demands in China. The segmentations and distributaries cultivation reform of vehicle service specialties based on “platforms + developments” model was consequently constructed.

Keywords: Vehicle Service Specialties; Platforms; Segmentations and Distributaries; Cultivation Reform.

1. Introduction You Vehicle industry chains are so long that employees can find a job not only in the design and manufacture factories, vehicle and accessories sale and maintenance shops, but also in vehicle beauty shops and vehicle credit, insurance, and rental enterprises, used car evaluation companies. In recent years, China's vehicle production and sales volume (as shown in Figure 1) increased. And it makes new automotive-related industry employment stations nearly 8 million, 5 million of whom are technical services talents of aftermarket [1]. Contradicts with the current development of the vehicle industry are the lower quality and less quantity of the practitioners. Especially, the professional and technical workers in modern vehicle management, maintenance, sales and after-sales service companies are particularly fewer. Statistics show that, although the amount of employees in vehicle related companies are large, the general cultural level is too low to meet the companies’ need. 38.5% of the 5 million workers, most of them lack advanced theoretical knowledge, graduated from junior middle school or lower schools, 51.5% of them graduated from senior middle school, only 10% of them graduated from colleges or universities,

218

so the literacy degree ratio is 4:5:1 [2]. But the ratio in western developed countries as high as 2:4:4 [3]. That the lack of higher level talents in vehicle service, vehicle electric technology or new energy vehicle industries cannot meet the fast-growing industries demands in China.

VSV- vehicle sales volume, VSVGR- vehicle sales volume growth rate

Fig. 1. China's vehicle sales volume and its growth rate (2000-2013)

At present, China is facing an important historical period of adjusting industry structure, transferring manufacture mode and stabilizing growth speed. If there is no talent cultivation reform of "segmentations and distributaries" on vehicle specialties, the students are difficult to choose curriculum, draw up the study learning plans and career development plans, according to their characteristics and interests. Therefore, it's hard to provide enough qualified talents for China's economy development.

2. Vehicle Specialties Reform Requirements To further implement National Medium and Long-term Plan for Education Reform and Development (2010-2020) [4] and Several Opinions of Ministry of Education on Comprehensively Improving the Quality of Higher Education [5], accelerate the implementation of the Innovation Plan for Classroom Teaching in Colleges and Universities in Zhejiang Province (2014-2016) [6], our school is currently carrying out teaching innovation actions, namely “Yuanpei Plan”, to provide students the "three-stage" segmentation options, which aims to create more growth opportunities for different students so that they will obtain the competences as shown in Table 1.

219

Table 1. General required competences of vehicle service specialties’ students

Professional Competence Methods Competence Social Competence 1. Vehicle testing and 1. Able to judge and troubleshooting; solve vehicle failure; 1. Communication skills; 2. Sheet metal painting; 2. Sheet metal painted 2. Teamwork skills; 3. New energy vehicle solutions according to 3. Basic entrepreneurial troubleshooting; the damage; skills; 4. Innovation on vehicle 3. Vehicle electronics electronics innovation

3. The Implementation of Cultivation Reform Based on "Platform + Development"

3.1. Developing the "platform" curriculum after enrolling We develop "platform" curriculum of vehicle service specialties, according to teaching situation and enterprises’ demands. Currently, students enrolled in our college are the senior high school students who passed the National University Entrance Examination and they also had potential interests in vehicle service specialties. Making full use of educational resources, we have constructed the talents cultivating program framework, as shown in Figure 2, to train high quality talents with senior skills in vehicle service specialties.

Fig. 2. Talents cultivating program framework of vehicle service specialties

3.2. Developing the "development" curriculum after distributing After learning the "platform" courses, students better understand the basis of the specialties. Then, developing the "development" curriculum used for distributing. According to the station skill requirements analysis on vehicle technology and service jobs, tasks, and capabilities, some specific modules, "vehicle

220

mechanical and electrical maintenance", "vehicle sheet metal painting", "vehicle electronics innovation" or "new energy vehicle technologies", will be "embed" into a specific specialty (as shown in Table 2). In these modules, some considerations, such as “progressive segmentation” and “gradient ability", have been added to promote the teaching reform of "integrating theory and practice, combining knowing and doing ".

Table 2. Teaching progress with embedded modules

No. Embedded Modules Teaching Progress Vehicle structures; working principle; fault Vehicle mechanical and 1 diagnosis with instruments; troubleshooting ideas electrical maintenance and methods. Vehicle sheet metal Sheet-metal working process; painting procedure; 2 painting instrument and equipment. Vehicle electronics Vehicle electronic technology; vehicle electronics 3 innovation module design; teamwork. New energy vehicle New energy vehicle structure; new energy vehicle 4 technologies fault diagnosis.

3.3. Constructing the cultivation reform model As shown in Figure 3, according to the teaching practices, some optional courses and development courses, which will be used in cooperating enterprises or in competition, are added into the cultivation training system to form "platform + development" cultivation model of vehicle service specialties.

Fig. 3. "Platform + development" cultivation system of vehicle service specialties

4. Conclusion “Progressive segmentation” was used in curriculum system. Public basic courses were learned in term I when students enrolled as vehicle service specialties. And then, the students began studying "platform" courses in term II.

221

When they came to the second school year, they began studying “development” courses. Based on jobs station requirements and graduate’s career development needs, hooking up the national vocational qualification standards and professional qualification requirements of cooperative enterprise, some enterprise-related resources were embedded into the cultivation system to construct "platform + development" curriculum. Relying on deeply cooperation with some famous vehicle companies, some courses were divided into a and b two different types and levels, which provided the option for students to self selection the courses depend on their own competence.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by the Humanities and Social Science Planning Fund of Ministry of Education of P.R. China (Grant No. 12YJAZH224). And it was also supported by Teaching Reform Emphasis Project of Zhejiang Industry Polytechnic College (Grant No. 111000210720114001).

References 1. Ying Han, Exploration and research on outstanding engineers cultivation in vehicle engineering specialties of colleges and universities, Education Teaching Forum (in Chinese) 8, (2015). 2. Pu Wang, Talent requirements research on vehicle service engineering specialties, Enterprise Reform and Management (in Chinese)24, (2014). 3. Jianhua Wang and Min Wang, A comparative study on employment promotion between China and USA in assembled automobile industry, Productivity Research (in Chinese),3, (2011). 4. National Medium and Long-term Plan for Education Reform and Development (2010-2020), http://www.china.com.cn/policy/ txt/2010-03/01/content_19492625_3.htm. 5. Several Opinions of Ministry of Education on Comprehensively Improving the Quality of Higher Education, http://www.gov.cn/gongbao/ content/2012/content_2199085.htm. 6. The Innovation Plan for Classroom Teaching in Colleges and Universities in Zhejiang Province (2014-2016), http://www.btdcw.com/btd- 214c612631b765ce050814b9-1.html.

222

University Towns’ Strategic Options for Sharing Sports Resources

Yang Zhao College of management, Shenzhen University Shenzhen, Guangdong, P.R.China E-mail: [email protected]

Yue-Yue Zhang Dongfang College, Zhejiang University of Finance & Economics Haining, Zhejiang, P.R.China Email: [email protected]

Xiao-Ping Wang Hangzhou College of Commerce, Zhejiang Gongshang University Hangzhou, Zhejiang, P.R.China Email: [email protected]

The sharing of resources enables a university town to maximize its environment and thereby achieve mutual benefits for all stakeholders. Resource sharing is a precondition for university towns to achieve positive development. This paper analyzes the implementation of the cooperative sharing of sports-related resources so that universities can integrate self-improvement and joint development. Therefore, effective action should be taken towards building a mechanism for the sharing of sports resources and achieving the objectives of resource sharing in university towns.

Keywords: University Town; Sports Resources; Sharing Mechanism; Collaboration Effect.

1. Introduction The Dictionary of Education defines ‘university town’ as a community established around a university. With a population generally between 50,000 and 100,000, university towns provide tertiary students with a high-quality study environment, including convenient catering, residential, transportation and communications facilities. A common characteristic is the absence of a clear demarcation within a university town between the campus and the blocks of streets around it: the town is the campus and the campus is the town. The

223

university occupies a pivotal position, influencing the town’s capabilities and constituent population [1]. A phenomenon in the field of higher education, the university town made its first appearance in countries with highly developed higher education sectors, such as the UK and US. The majority of typical university towns can be found in Germany, the UK and the US. The rise of university towns follows two main avenues. The first is natural causation (i.e. produced progressively and naturally based on market laws and higher education development rules), such as Harvard University in the US and the universities of Oxford and Cambridge in the UK. These towns took shape naturally over periods of historical change. The second is through initiative (established proactively by the government and school based on the market and educational development planning), as in Japan’s Tsukuba University town. The building of Chinese university towns in the 1990s following the merge and expansion of universities represented another major approach. The launch of construction in 1999 (and first utilisation in September 2000) of Hebei’s Langfang Oriental University town paved the way for the building of university towns in China. Subsequently, a succession of university towns arose throughout the country. The on-going surge in the construction of university towns shows no signs of ceasing in the short term. For example, Zhejiang Province’s Hangzhou City has three large-scale university towns: Xiasha University town, Xiaoheshan University town and Binjiang University town. The construction of the university town coincides with that of the modern school system. Initial tasks towards these goals include the use of innovations in building the material, institutional, spiritual and cultural environment. The outcomes are institutions that can respond to the requirement for transformations in tertiary education concepts, development of a mass orientation for higher education, implementation of comprehensive academic development and invigoration of a prosperous local economy. These in turn form a globally competitive Chinese university system and method of operation. Furthermore, all of these represent the requirements of the modern era and a realistic mission. The majority of China’s university towns were built as a result of an initiative, predominantly under government leadership using integrated modes of programming, construction and management. This type of overarching project encompasses unified planning, construction and management. Moreover, it has established a foundation for the high demand, high starting point and high standards in relation to university towns, as well as the ability to effectively guarantee a full sharing of resources in terms of hardware and facilities. In theoretical terms and from a material perspective, the entire university town is a

224

complete zone in itself: the universities are harmoniously integrated, and the absence of perimeter walls inhibits compartmentalization. These attributes combine to produce the particular characteristic of resource sharing. This paper analyzes the strategic options for sharing sports resources that university towns can implement.

2. Necessity for University Towns to Enable the Sharing of Sports Resources The term ‘sports resources’ refers primarily to the sum of key components developed under the circumstances of a particular social history available to different communities. They take all forms of sports-related material, non- material products and tangible and intangible assets that play an important role within the sphere of social sporting activities. At present, Chinese university sports resources comprise three elements: program, technology and branding resources. The sharing of university town sports resources refers to the mutual exchange, intermixing and common development of sporting course, technology and branding resources within the university town [2]. Relations between universities and between university and society are expected to usher genuine and advantageous complementarity and strong alliance. The larger goal is to achieve large-scale harmonization and sharing in terms of sporting infrastructure, educational and research capabilities and physical exercise capabilities. Sporting resources, as a core constituent of the university town, play an extremely important role in the development of the university, particularly in enriching sporting culture, strengthening student physique, promoting students’ overall development and promoting physical exercise for the entire population. Most universities in a university town have either moved in from the location of their respective old schools or have been established as school sub- campuses [3]. They vary in terms of school management approach, size and educational categories. They have distinct specialized fields, and the teaching methods in each unit reflect distinct differences from those of their original school, whereas the form of teaching also differs. Each university hopes that sharing university town resources can develop and improve school operations and offer structural advantage from complementarity. However competition and conflict over individual interests on the basis of complementary sharing create the factors that affect the sharing of resources. Examples include limitations with respect to school management concepts, educational systems, administrative structures, conflicts over traditional sporting culture, allocation of sports hardware resources and suboptimal teaming up of talented athletes.

225

Consequently university towns fail to achieve coordinated sharing of sports resources. Cooperating to share sports resources is not only a way for universities to collaborate on self-improvement but is also a vivid reflection of the rules of higher education development. Compared with ‘rigid’ university mergers, this is a flexible form of combination; its operability is stronger and its costs lower. The sharing of sports resources is thus a core problem in the construction of a university town, as well as a precondition and guarantee for its development.

3. Strategic Options for University Towns in Achieving the Sharing of Sports Resources

3.1. Each internal member of a university town should establish a view to sharing sports resources The university town is a ‘university without a perimeter wall’; it is not the sum of several universities but rather an organic entity composed of several universities, and the ultimate result obtained by combining them should be 1+1+•••1>N. As there is no ready-made experience that can be used as a reference in resource sharing, and indeed, concepts of running a school in the information age differ completely from traditional administrative systems and operating mechanisms, one can only rely on putting bold innovation into practice. Universities within a university town must focus on mutual complementarity and cultural identity with respect to sports resources, strengthening the transformation of educational thought and concepts without the restrictions of a fixed framework as well as eliminating old and restrictive ideologies. In addition they need to fully recognize the importance of cooperatively running a school and necessity of sharing resources, along with renewing and transforming concepts so compel stakeholders to make it their business to share resources. The ultimate objective is to develop the universities’ respective sporting edge and special strengths, bring about the integrated and optimal deployment of sports resources and avoid the duplicated construction of sporting venues and squandering of sports resources.

3.2. The university town has to establish coordinating mechanisms for the sharing of sports resources Universities within a university town have many administrative levels and different classifications, each with its own distinctive characteristics. Each university’s resources in terms of instructors, sporting venues and equipment

226

and sports teaching data will have their particular merits, and although located within the same university town, they represent different approaches to running a school. To enable the sharing of sports resources, universities undoubtedly require policies for sharing sports resources. Contingencies for expected problems, specific operational issues, rational sharing and evaluation measures need to be agreed upon at the policy level.

3.3. Network connections for the sports systems of the various schools within a university town are to be implemented Following the swift development of information technology and continuous improvements in the standards of building network installations, society has ever-increasing demands for information services. The sharing of information resources aids the popular demand to acquire and use knowledge. How society shares information resources determines the degree to which people acquire information capabilities and utilize information. Thus it is essential to establish local area networks within the university town so that sports information from each campus is imported into the information system, empowering each school’s staff and students with knowledge and choice related to available sports resources. In particular, the class times, locations, staff composition of each school, special skills, distribution of sports venues and status of construction activities should be clearly set out on the network. Students may thus conveniently select according to their preferences. Meanwhile, schools can announce news on sports teaching, offer sports courses and conduct online Q&A and tutoring. Hence, local area networks help maximize the sharing of sports teaching resources.

3.4. The universities should optimize the integration and deployment of staff resources and the mutual recognition of course credits The characteristics of each university’s staff members can be used to optimize and deploy teaching resources and make use of complementary advantages [4]. The students should progressively implement the integration of major and minor subjects, and select inter-school sports course options and mutually recognized course credits. In turn, sports staff should increase inter-school exchanges and complementary advantages to form a kind of competition through mutual motivation. Implementing mutual recognition of course credits can strongly increase the use of the school’s programmes and the complementary advantages of sports staff resources, motivating students’ eagerness to participate in sporting activities.

227

3.5. The rational layout of sports venues within university towns increases collaboration and reduces waste when utilized

The resources of university sports venues, as sports programme resources, are important for ensuring that schools launch sports course teaching and students take up extracurricular sporting activities. They also figure in the consideration by schools when setting up sporting events. The organization of sports events directly affects the full utilization of a school’s sporting facilities, providing a positive boost to student extracurricular sports training, and is therefore indispensable. The theory of economies of scale and scope shows that, for universities with inadequate sports resources, operating on an excessive scale will result in reduced effectiveness. If the university town wishes to improve the coordination of each individual university’s sports resources and integrate allocations for basic, public and major sporting events on the basis of its own development location, it should seek integrated construction following consultations with individual universities. These facilities should be utilized jointly by each university within the university town to avoid duplicated construction of public sporting resources. University towns should decrease the development of standardized scaling of sporting facilities and venues; development plans and the layout of sporting venues should be rationally worked out. When university towns develop the resources of sporting facilities and venues, they should focus on utility rather than value to spectators, by transforming existing views of sporting venues and building more sporting venues that are widely used and liked by students [5]. As student training occurs at different universities, university town sporting facilities should be arranged with considerable distance from one another to accommodate intermediate interfaces in the different university teaching or living areas.

3.6. University towns should organize regular sporting exchanges and competitions Such events can stimulate inter-school fellowship and promote training through competition. To raise the standard of sporting competition amongst the schools on site, different programmes of sports instructor alliances help achieve the objective of resource sharing [6]. They can lead joint research into the organization and operation of competitions. When conditions are ripe, a variety of scattered and fragmentary competitive events can be effectively integrated while still being arranged in different campuses at different times. Through

228

competitions, a sustained, repeated and comprehensive sports education can be provided to university students.

4. Conclusion The backdrop of an expansion in university enrolment, the major premise of national invigoration through science and education as well as the great opportunity provided by accelerated urbanization all represent the source of motive for the rapid emergence of the university town in China. At its current stage, the university town is categorized in China as a novel ‘foreign import’, and it suffers from a comparative lack of both theoretical research and practical experience. Consequently, the running of university towns has been beset with difficulties. An extremely important issue faced by today’s university towns is that the comprehensive sharing of resources, which can help in the full utilization of environment-related advantages, has not been fully achieved. The achievement of mutual benefits amongst constituent universities is a precondition necessary for the development of the university town. Stakeholders should proactively seek more effective methods of organizing and operating the universities while promoting the emergence of new forms of university towns. Therefore building a mechanism for sharing sports resources and advancing the sharing of university town sporting resources should receive more attention and ultimately considered for implementation.

References 1. X.M. Chen, Theoretical Study on Realizing System of Optimization of Sport Resource Distribution. In Sports Science Research, Vol.15, Iss.3, May 2011, pp.11-13. 2. C.Q. Ding, A study on the Establishment of Spots Resource Sharing Mechanism, in Zhejiang Sport Science, Vol.36, Iss.5, September 2014, pp.70-78. 3. Dimitrov, George, Sports Resource Management in Bulgarian Seaside Resorts, in Activities in Physical Education & Sport, Vol.2, Iss.2, pp.181- 185. 4. M. Keith, etc., High School Sports Programs Differentially Impact Participation by Sex, in Journal of Sport and Health Science, Vol 4, Iss.3, September 2015, pp. 282-288.

229

5. A.M. Lidia, etc., Assessing the Efficiency of Sports in Using Financial Resources with DEA Models, in Procedia Computer Science, Vol 55, 2015, pp. 1151-1159. 6. Kim, Kyungsik, Dynamics of Cyber Sports Community's Network and Resource Exchange, in Korean Society for the Sociology of Sport, Vol.25, Iss.2, 2012, pp.1-25.

230

Implementation of Olympic Education in Higher Education Institutions

Yang Zhao

College of Management, Shenzhen University Shenzhen, Guangdong, P.R.China E-mail: [email protected]

Yue-Yue Zhang

Dongfang College, Zhejiang University of Finance & Economics Haining, Zhejiang, P.R.China E-mail:[email protected]

Xiao-Ping Wang

Hangzhou College of Commerce, Zhejiang Gongshang University Hangzhou, Zhejiang, P.R.China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper proposes the implementation of Olympic education in China by integrating the Olympic educational elements into China’s higher education system. This can energize the nation’s higher education system to gradually improve upon the current constrained, rigid and utilitarian education. However, the challenge lies in promoting the inheritance of the Olympic spirit among university students and the inherent spiritual wealth of the Olympics to be applied to other components of society. Keywords: Olympics Movement; Higher Education; University Students; Volunteers.

1. Introduction The Olympic Games originated in ancient Greece. A total of 293 Olympic Games were held over a period of 1, 169 years, from the first instance of the games recorded in writing in 776 BC until its abolition by Roman Emperor Theodosius I in 393 AD. Ancient Greeks deferred to sacred truces during the Olympic Games, demonstrating a desire for peace, as well as expressing their respect towards the Gods and nature. Ancient Greeks not only held various game events regularly, they also stipulated gaming rules to promote fair

231

competition. Participants were required to fully exhibit their personal physical strength, perseverance, and wisdom [1]. In observing the cultural background of ancient Olympic Games, it can be seen that great value is placed upon perseverance, individuals’ values, and defending individuals’ independence. These attributes highlight an individual’s status, gradually creating a social norm where good physical health and mental-physical coordination was encouraged. Education in ancient Greece focused on sports and music as its basis [2]. It holistically integrates cultural learning and sports education, with the aim of training its citizens to possess both intellectual and physical beauty. At the time, Greece treated students’ sports competency and degree of physical fitness as indicators for their education level, thus forming the ancient Greek pedagogy for sports education. The ancient Greek philosophers also saw the importance of sports. Socrates believed that the inability to express the strength and beauty of our physical body is an insult to nature. Plato reasoned that perfect individuals can be nurtured through education and training. Furthermore, Aristotle discussed that in sports teaching, it is not necessary for students to go through harsh or painful training; instead, simple gymnastics and agile fighting skills should be taught to emphasize the natural development of physical bodies. Considered to be a paragon of ancient Greek culture, sports training had always been an important facet of city life and a basic foundation for education. This paper proposes the implementation of Olympic education in China by integrating the Olympic educational elements into China’s higher education system

2. All Activities in Modern Olympic Games Have an Education Element At the end of the 19th century, Pierre de Coubertin drew insight from the Grecian Olympic Games as he lit the torch signaling the beginning of the modern Olympics. De Coubertin was a great thinker and educator, and he dedicated his time to reviving the Olympic Games for the purpose of promoting education. In other words, the core of de Coubertin’s sports advocacy is education, and he illustrates this point explicitly in his open letter titled “To young athletes from various countries” from 1927. Here, he claimed that “In today’s world, there are many possibilities for development, but there are also dangers for moral decline, Olympism can build a school nurturing lofty sentiments and pure hearts, as well as developing physical tolerance and strength. However, these can only be achieved with training offered to

232

strengthen our physical body, and simultaneously consolidating the idea of honor continuously and developing athletes’ spirit of treating everyone equally.” Furthermore, he wished to contribute to the harmonious development of young people’s physical body and mental health by educating them with a new perspective and method. With this goal in mind, de Coubertin did not intend to use the Olympic Games to promote athletic competition, but instead wanted to integrate athletic activities into education to more fully include education in society and daily life. De Coubertin initially intended to use the modern Olympic Games to educate demotivated and disenfranchised French youth in the wake of France’s defeat in the Franco-Prussian War. After studying the history of the ancient Olympics and the British educational system, de Coubertin broadened his educational horizon to the entire world. He was determined to apply the Olympic Games as a special educational format to educate youth globally. While organizing their participation in athletic activities, young people can be trained; the quality of the physical bodies and spirit of the youth, as well as the quality of a society as a whole can be improved. This laid the groundwork for subsequent integration of the Olympic Games with education. The ‘Olympic Charter’ is the highest legal document promulgated by the International Olympic Committee (IOC). This legal document contains the fundamental criteria regulating participants’ behavior in all Olympic activities and is the basis for co-operation between different nations. The first ‘Olympic Charter’ was personally drafted and constituted by de Coubertin, the founder of the modern Olympic Games, at the International Athletic Congress held in Paris in 1894. The charter reflected de Coubertin’s sports thinking and the ideals of the Olympic Games. By developing and evolving the Olympic Games, the IOC revised the Olympic Charter a number of times, all while adhering to the basic principles and spirit of Olympism. The current and latest Olympic Charter was approved and passed in the 112nd International Olympic Congress Session held in Moscow in July 2001. The Olympic Charter stipulates that “The goal of the Olympic Movement is to contribute to building a peaceful and better world by educating youth through sport practiced without discrimination of any kind and in the Olympic spirit– which requires mutual understanding with a spirit of friendship, solidarity and fair play.” The most important point here is to educate youth through athletics with the Olympic spirit, so young people can contribute to a peaceful and better world. This earnest reminder precisely illustrates de Coubertin’s vision when he revived the Olympic Games. When Olympic

233

education is integrated into the Olympic Games, it also means that all Olympic activities should contain elements of education [3]. Modern Olympic Games have been constantly developing for over a century, and cities holding the Games have respected the Charter’s requirements for developing rich Olympic education, promoting knowledge about the Olympics, and spreading the Olympic spirit. All these factors contributed to the increasing influence of the Olympic movement’s cultural and education values worldwide.

3. Having Olympic Education as Part of Sports Education Among Chinese University Students is Essential Olympism stresses the property of macroculture in sports, where it creates a form of lifestyle based on integrating sports, culture, and education. This type of lifestyle must be based on educational values and basic civism. The duty of Olympism is to ask everyone to aspire to this lofty lifestyle [4]. The educational function of the Olympic movement is all-encompassing; it has been widely accepted and recognized internationally as an ideal conviction, a worthy pursuit of values, and a viable life philosophy [5]. The Olympics always view education as part of its work, as expressed by Rogge, the Chairperson of the IOC in his inauguration speech: the unique power of the Olympic movement is that it is spreading a dream among the younger generations, where an Olympic champion generates unlimited power as a role model. He also noted that the youth’s dream of participating in the Olympic Games brings them into the world of sports, and sports subsequently becomes a highly effective educational tool. According to the 1973 mass higher education theory proposed by Martin Trow, a renowned American Sociology of Education Professor, when the proportion of young people attainting higher education in a specific age group is below 15%, the country enters the phase of elite higher education. The country enters the mass higher education phase when this number falls between 15-50% and when the figure is 50% or above, it is in the universal higher education phase. Since the 1970s Open Door Policy and Reform, by increasing input, the Chinese government promoted a system for operating higher education, the system of investment and the socialization reform of rear services in higher education. This laid a solid foundation for a sustainable and healthy development of higher education. Higher education in China has entered a phase of mass education that is internationally recognized [6]. However, amid the rapid expansion of higher education, certain contradictions and problems

234

continue to persist in education input and systems, which includes key societal concerns like education quality and graduates’ employment prospects [7]. Nurturing individuals with strong physiques, brave character, harmonious physical and mental health, and fostering progress in human civilizations through athletic activity would always be the penultimate goals of the modern Olympic Games. The Olympics’ cultural education goal and the realization of higher education goals share similarities. Furthermore, Olympic education is an effective way and carrier for implementing higher education. Most university students are in their early 20s, have an elevated cultural understanding, and can accept new things more easily; these traits make them the most sensitive generation to social change. Nevertheless, contemporary university students are situated in a more complex international and domestic environment, and they are in a critical phase where their values can be easily changed and shaped. Thus, they are easily influenced by various types of complex and objective factors as well as social trends in thinking. Therefore, increasing university students’ understanding of the Olympic spirit has significant implications for the real world. The values and significance of integrating Olympic education in China’s higher education can make the nation’s education system more energetic. The current rigid and utilitarian state of education can be improved by such integration. Conducting cultural education about the Olympic spirit in Chinese university students’ sports education can greatly strengthen humanities and philosophy of life education [8]. It can also affect how students face the world, their future, and modernization. Olympic education and Chinese university students’ personal qualities education are mutually influenced, and they can contribute to the wholesome development of university students. 4. Means to Strengthen Olympic Education for University Students Higher education institutions need to focus on university students’ characteristics, and should actively expand the Olympic spirit education through various means to contribute to the students’ holistic development. The following subsections provide suggestions on how this can be done.

4.1. To develop diverse sports activities extensively, and to make Olympic education more accessible and universal Within sports education activities in higher education institutions, different kinds of group activities and competition events of Olympic gaming and sports

235

activities items should be expanded proactively. University students can be guided to participate actively in the Olympic movement, in order to acquire first-hand knowledge of Olympic values. Olympic education not only relies on lecturing and advocacy; taking actions is very important, and university students’ feelings should be noted genuinely. Through practice, university students may eventually achieve the objective, which is to develop a strong and good physique, as well as to develop their physical and mental strength harmoniously. Instructors (especially notable professors) should become role models of active sporting, and they can participate in sports activities actively with university students; this would have an immense impact on university students.

4.2. To improve the Olympic cultural qualities and manners among sports instructors in higher education, and to include Olympic education as part of universities’ sports classes Currently, there is limited faculty in Chinese higher education who work specifically on Olympic education, as only a few focus on Olympic education and research. In order to guarantee the expansion of this task, we should first strengthen the training of sports instructors, while simultaneously researching the Olympics actively. This would guarantee a supply of education personnel who can provide long-term Olympic movement education. Selective courses on Olympic movement should be provided as part of higher education sports curriculum in the long run (and to guarantee a certain amount of credits), because this can help university students to have a more in-depth understanding about the Olympic movement’s values, thus further motivating them to participate actively in Olympic-related affairs. At the same time, education on the Olympic spirit can be performed among university students, fostering their comprehensive and harmonious development.

4.3. To demonstrate the function of mass media in higher education institutions, and to spread Olympic culture and values extensively, as well as forming a high-quality campus atmosphere The higher education campus culture is a vital component of the entire social culture; it shares significant similarities with the aspects of the Olympic spirit like the ideal of the pursuit of harmony, emphasis on the socialization functions,

236

and admiration towards the self-strengthening spirit. Harmony causes the core content of the two items to be consistent, utilizing higher education as a platform fully, extensively developing an in-depth Olympic education, promoting the Olympic sports spirit. These facets can help construct a campus culture among higher education in the new phase. Higher education institutions can utilize the media and the school’s cultural networks fully (e.g., TV, broadcasts, promotional boards, school magazines, and newspapers, launching an Olympic salon, holding events such as competitions on knowledge about the Olympics, the Olympic cultural festival, seminars of Olympic champions and others, making use of these methods to implement Olympic education among university students). This would undoubtedly win the approval of university students and be accepted by them more easily. In the process of watching interesting matches and following sports events, university students will be nurtured and educated passively.

4.4. To continue the strong tradition of university volunteers at the Beijing Olympics in higher education institutions In the 29th Beijing Olympic Games, 53,000 university students participated as volunteers, and they experienced personally the atmosphere of Olympic. Through the recruitment, selection, training and hiring of Olympic volunteers, Olympic education became more universal, thus spreading the Olympic spirit and advocating the concept of voluntary services. Through voluntary services activities, university students gained rich experiences, equipped themselves with new skills, expanded their social connections, learned about social norms, internalized the values and concepts, experienced the Olympic spirit and exhibited the cultural heritage of Chinese; all these experiences contribute to a harmonious society. The Beijing Olympic gave university volunteers an opportunity to work hard, and they can experience joy and passion, leading to personal growth. The Olympic Games have been integrated in the lives of university volunteers, as they realized their potential and continued to persevere, starting and completing a task well. They learned to treat service as part of their lives and lifestyle, as they enriched their lives through service, and they also enjoyed the pleasure of the service and the essence of giving. The Olympic Games have ended and the university volunteers will soon graduate, thus higher education institutions need to transform, retain, and document the university volunteers’ experiences and to generate a complete set of summary reports on

237

work and documented information. The goals are to enable the volunteer service work among university students of Chinese higher education to be set upon a new starting point, and to continue expanding the scale of university volunteer teams, establishing a mechanism for university students to participate in voluntary services in their daily lives, thus volunteer services among university students can become a universal lifestyle, which can in turn promote the construction of a harmonious society and social development.

5. Conclusion By 2016, it will have been 8 years since the Beijing games concluded. Ensuring that this massive amount of spiritual wealth is bequeathed to university students and transferring it to other areas in society are very challenging tasks. University students in the contemporary world not only have to adapt to environmental changes, maintain physical and mental health, they also have to proactively seek development. How to better understand oneself, develop our potentials, raise the quality of life, contribute to better personality, through the ‘faster, better, stronger’ Olympic education, students have to gain victory by continuing to pursue, continuing to improve oneself, continuing to challenge oneself and continuing to overcome obstacles. Therefore, compared to other methods, Olympic education has irreplaceable and unique educational functions in terms of spreading the world’s excellent culture, and performing moral and social norms education among the young generation.

References 1. Z. Wei, A Study on Construction of and Practical Approaches to Olympic Education System to College Students, in Journal of Shanxi Normal University (Social Science Edition), Vol.42, Iss.2, March 2015, pp.139-142.

2. J.M. Yang, L.Y. Pan, H. Chang, On the Logic Structure of Olympic Ideological System, in Journal of Sports and Science, Vol.33, Iss.4, July 2012, pp.19-21.

3. B. Susan, Beijing's Olympic Education Programme: Re-Thinking Suzhi Education, in Re-Imagining an International China, in The China Quarterly, Vol.197, March 2009, pp.44-63.

238

4. Hsu, Li-Hong Leo, Kohe, Z. Geoffer, Ligning Olympic Education with the Liberal Arts: a Curriculum Blueprint from Taiwan, in Physical Education and Sport Pedagogy, Vol.20, Iss.5, September 2015, pp.474-489.

5. Sukys, Saulius, Majauskiene, Daiva, Effects of an Integrated Olympic Education Program on Adolescent Athletes' Values and Sport Behavior. in Social Behavior and Personality, Vol.42, Iss.5, 2014, pp.811-821.

6. H. Reng. The Research on the Evolution of Olympic Education, PhD thesis, Beijing Sport University(2010).

7. Chatziefstathiou, Dikaia, Olympic Education and Beyond: Olympism and Value Legacies from the Olympic and Paralympic Games, in Educational Review, Vol.64, Iss.3, 2012, pp.384-399.

8. W. Zhou, The Effects of Olympic Education on Shaping Youth’s Character, in Journal of Beijing Sport University, Vol. 30, Iss.5, May 2007, pp. 600- 604.

239

Flipped Classroom in Computer Networks

Yin Tian1, Ke Yao1, Pei-Qi Wang1 and Bao Ge2 1Department of Communication & Command, Xi’an Communications Institute, Xi’an, Shaanxi, China; 2Key Laboratory of Modern Teaching Technology, School of Physics & Information Technology, Shaanxi Normal University, Xi’an, Shaanxi, China E-mail: [email protected]

Flipped classroom reverses the teaching content and environment by providing instructional content outside of the classroom and having activities in the classroom. This paper implements flipped classroom in a computer networks course, combined with problem based learning (PBL). The results demonstrate a high degree of acceptance by the students and a better educational outcome with respect to the methodology of the flipped class.

Keywords: Flipped Classroom; Problem Based Learning.

1. Introduction Flipped classroom is an teaching strategy that reverses the traditional educational arrangement. It moves activities, including those that may have traditionally been considered homework, into the classroom but moves instructional content outside of the classroom. In the flipped classroom, students learn by watching online lectures, collaborate in online discussions, or carry out research at home, and use class time for active learning exercises with the guidance of the instructor [1]. Flipped classrooms are a form of blended learning, a term that refers to any form of education that combines face-to-face instruction with computer-mediated activities. The concept of flipped classroom can be traced back to a Harvard professor, Rahul Singh, developed an instructional strategy called as peer instruction [2, 3]. The flipped classroom was first put into practice by chemistry teachers Jonathan Bergmann and Aaron Sams of Woodland Park High School in 2007 [4]. Now Khan Academy has become synonymous with the flipped classroom [5] , these videos are only one form of the flipped classroom strategy [6]. This paper implements the flipped classroom in a computer networks course, combined with problem based learning (PBL).

240

Fig. 1 The model of flipped classroom

With the development of information technology such as Blackboard[7], Coursera, the flipped classroom have been applied to practical teaching more and more. Derek Bruff from Vanderbilt contributed his own flipped overview to the Coursera Partners’ Portal forums along with the flipped classroom model (shown in Fig.1) [8]. In flipped classrooms, instructors are able to more deeply engage with students in class by assigning lectures and other passive learning activities as homework and using in-class time for more active learning activities. This strategy yields a number of benefits to both students and instructors [9], e.g., the flipped class produces deeper and more active learning. Students in the flipped class engaged more, thus their abilities of commutation, corporation and leadership can be improved much. Furthermore, the flipped class lets students learn at their own pace, and provides the full freedom for them to learn. However, there still exists some arguments about flipped classroom, teachers may have to creating high quality videos requires and learn how to manage online learning system [10], and all the students and families have the facilities to access Internet [11].

2. PBL-based Flipped Classroom for Computer Networks Course The computer networks is very suitable as flipped course due to its characteristics, in this section, we would combine the teaching method of Problem Based Learning (PBL) with flipped classroom to discuss how we perform the course of computer networks.

2.1. Introduction to computer networks The computer networks is a principal course in many major such as computer science, and electronic engineering etc. In the era of information technology, every things are related to Internet which was made of computer networks, so this course is more oriented and related to practical applications. This makes it is very appropriate to be taught via the form of flipped classroom.

241

Meanwhile, the computer networks can be thought as one final question, that is, how is one e-mail transferred from your outlook to your friend’s outlook. As long as one can answer this question, he/she have grasped the course of computer networks. In fact, this question about computer networks course can be divided into many sub-questions. We need to solve every sub-questions in order to answer the final question, meanwhile we must think and put forward the final one firstly and provide the initial answer for it, then resulting in a complete solution gradually. In one word, PBL teaching strategy is well suited for the computer networks course. So in the following section, we would discuss our model that combine flipped classroom with PBL to improve the teaching effectiveness for computer networks course.

2.2. PBL-based flipped classroom model Our flipped classroom model is divided into the three sorts of activities, students, teacher and parents. The activities of teacher and students can be categorized as outside and in class activities, the study outside class is mainly a style of face to computer, students learn from computer and need to think by self, accept knowledge passively from teacher or computer. While the activity in class is more a interactive process, students and teachers can discuss the problems face to face, this make them think the problem more actively. Here, we assigned each online lecture in purpose according to the problem we would discuss, then students watched the video at home, analyzed and thought so as to reach a solution, which was presented and discussed within group inside class, finally teacher gathered the all solutions among groups, and discussed with students about what was a better solution and what else questions still exist, thus threw up the next question as the next homework. As described above, computer networks course can be described as one final question, and many sub-questions, we can carry on this course via flipped classroom combined with PBL. Obviously, parents can also participate in the progress of students’ study at home, they can monitor and know the status of study online so as to adopt corresponding steps.

3. Result and Discussion In order to inspect the effectiveness of this PBL-based flipped classroom, we divided all students into two groups, one is the experimental group which

242

studied the computer networks course via this proposed teaching model, and another is the control group which studied the course by the traditional teaching. Then we compared their performance including the score, other skills abilities after a quizzes and questionnaires.

3.1. The increase scores compared to control group After quizzes, the experimental group got an average score of 84/100 points and the control group got 80 points, obviously, the experimental group got a higher scores when compared to the control group. When we compared two groups’ examination papers, found that the experimental group performed better on some synthesized questions which differentiated two groups. It shows that student’s ability of synthesized application was improved much by our PBL- based model, they can put the learned knowledge into practice.

3.2. The other improved abilities On the other side, we evaluated the changes of cognition abilities, and attitudes, emotion, etc. by designing a questionnaire as described in Table 1, the answers for each question have five options, from 1 to 5, which represents the level or degree of satisfaction, like, and so on. Most of students reported that their abilities of finding and resolving a new problem had been dramatically improved, and their ability of expression, communication and cooperation had been also enhanced via engaging in the group discussion, some even increased their leadership much more since students periodically held open office hours. Almost all the students reported they had a deeper communication with teacher, therefore they thought more actively and deeply in class when compared to the traditional class, it was a more efficient classroom and learning way for them. Students in a high percentage declared that they like the style of watching video at home, because they can rewind, pause, and speed up lectures in addition to watching them with subtitles, this style gave them more control on course content. Altogether, students showed the much more interests in this teaching model, and thus like the course more and showed the much more interests in science.

243

Table 1. Questionnaire

1. How do you like this teaching model? 2. How do you like this course? 3. How do you evaluate your courage facing to a new question? 4. Can you point out key points of a new problem? 5. Evaluate your abilities to solve a new question by yourselves. 6. Evaluate your organizing ability in group discussion. 7. Evaluate your communication ability. 8. Do you think if you have understood the statement of teacher?

4. Conclusion In this paper, we discussed the flipped classroom for computer networks course, combined with PBL, the course can taught one problem by one problem. We proposed the our PBL based clipped course model, and applied it to teaching practice, the experience showed a high degree of students’ acceptance with respect to the methodology of the flipped class, the quiz and questionnaire demonstrated students have better educational outcome than traditional classroom. In future, we plan to carry on a longer classroom, and evaluate its effect more objectively.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by Interdisciplinary Incubation Project of Learning Science of Shaanxi Normal University.

References 1. L. Abeysekera and P. Dawson, Motivation and cognitive load in the flipped classroom: definition, rationale and a call for research, Higher Education Research & Development, 34(1): pp. 1–14(2015). 2. C. Crouch and E. Mazur, Peer Instruction: Ten Years of Experience and Results. Am. J. Phys., 69: pp. 970–977(2001). 3. E. Mazu, Peer Instruction: A User's Manual Series in Educational Innovation. (Prentice Hall,1997). 4. J. Bergmann and A. Sams, Flip your classroom: Reach every student in every class every day, International Society for Technology in Education(2012). 5. C. Thompson, How Khan Academy is Changing the Rules of Education,(2011), http://www.wired.com/2011/07/ff_khan/.

244

6. Aaron, S. The Flipped Class: Shedding Light on the Confusion, Critique, and Hype, http://www.thedailyriff.com/articles/the- flipped-class-shedding-light-on-the-confusion-crit ique-and-hype-801.php. 7. http://www.blackboard.com/. 8. http://www.cvm.umn.edu/facstaff/prod/groups/cvm/@p ub/@cvm/@facstaff/documents/content/cvm_content_45 4476.pdf. 9. M. Caligaris, G. Rodríguez, and L. Laugero, A first experience of flipped classroom in numerical analysis. Procedia – Social and Behavioral Sciences, 217: pp. 835–845(2016). 10. J. Bergmann and A. Sams, Flip your classroom: reach every student in every class every day. Washington, DC: International Society for Technology in Education (2012). 11. Nielsen, L., Five reasons I'm not flipping over the flipped classroom, (2012) http://theinnovativeeducator.blogspot.ca/2011/10/f ive-reasons-im-not-flipping-over.html.

245

The Application of Flipped Classroom Model Based on MOOC in "Hydraulic and Pneumatic Transmission" Courses

Xiao-Ming Shenga and Xue-Wu Hub School of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, Soochow University, Suzhou, Jiangsu, China, 215021 E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

This paper studies the application of flipped classroom model based on MOOC in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" courses through an example of the analysis of the movable platform hydraulic system of modular machine tools. In the flipped classroom model, the advantages of both internet teaching and traditional teaching are integrated. The main features of this new teaching model are students’ self-learning and the teacher’s guidance and assistance. This model overcomes the problem of students lacking learning initiative, encountered when the MOOC interactive network teaching system is used alone. The student's enthusiasm, initiative, and creativity are improved in flipped classroom model because the students are the main subjects of learning. Therefore the efficiency of teaching is increased and teaching tasks can be completed more effectively. Keywords: Teaching Reform; Flipped Classroom; Interactive Network Teaching; Hydraulic and Pneumatic Transmission.

1. Introduction MOOC is a mass open online course and a product of information technology development. Compared to traditional teaching model, it has the advantages of providing high quality professional instruction videos and adequate learning resources. Students can embrace a more personalized learning approach. But it has shortcomings. The study completion rate is low and the learning relies solely on students’ own initiatives. There is a lack of communication between the students and the teachers. The main problem of traditional teaching in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" is: a wide coverage of contents but with limited time. Teachers’ teaching emphasis imparts knowledge and students don’t discover the truth actively. Independent study ability, creative spirit and the cooperative consciousness of students are not cultivated well.

246

Due to the above question, teaching reform and education innovation are carried out for the course of the "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" in this paper. The advantages of the internet teaching are combined with the advantages of traditional teaching in a flipped classroom model of this course. Teacher plays a primary role of a promoter and guides students learning. Students are the protagonists of learning. This paper studies the application of flipped classroom model based on MOOC in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" courses.

2. The Conflicts in the Traditional Teaching of the "Hydraulic and Pneumatic Transmission" Course Hydraulic and pneumatic transmission is an important professional course in mechanical engineering. The structure and operating principles of hydraulic and pneumatic elements are complicated and the basic circuits are abstract. The effect of traditional teaching cannot get the desired results because it is more difficult for students to understand. The traditional teaching model of “hydraulic and pneumatic transmission” appears to have many disadvantages. Traditional teaching model focuses on teacher's teaching instead of students’ learning. The student's problem-analysis and problem-solving ability as well as self-study ability cannot be effectively raised. The content richness, complexity and the rapid development of "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" have caused the teaching-learning time to be insufficient. Teachers are rushed and students cannot understand learned information. The learning assessment system and evaluation benchmarks are simple and cannot comprehensively estimate students learning results.

3. The Design of Flipped Classroom Model Based on MOOC

3.1. The instruction design of interactive network teaching system The interactive network teaching system of "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" course includes two aspects: the process of teaching and resources. It is composed primarily of course project, course learning, Web test and reviews, dialogues between teacher and students, etc. The course project tells students the study requirements. Through detailing the contents of textbook chapters, teachers break down the key contents into smaller knowledge points (micro-lectures), and set it up to record video clips to provide students with course learning. At the end of each video-lecture there are corresponding exercises exploring learner's cognitive styles. Each chapter ends with a review of the materials covered and self-assessment quizzes - including

247

answers - at the end of each chapter to help the teacher monitor progress and evaluate knowledge. The interchange between teacher and students can stimulate interest in learning, inspire students thinking, and help them express. The main issues of only using interactive network teaching system in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" course are as follows. Due to the influence of traditional passive learning culture, student's initiative of studying is not enough and it is difficult to complete all the learning tasks. Students are easily distracted in the internet world and there is a lack of face-to-face communication between teacher and students or among students. Since teachers break down the key contents into smaller knowledge points (micro-lectures), "fragmented knowledge" inevitably occurs. It is difficult to cultivate student's research and creative ability.

3.2. The flipped classroom model based on MOOC in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" course Table 1 lists a brief comparative analysis between the traditional class and the flipped class based on MOOC in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" course.

Table 1. The comparative analysis between the traditional class and the flipped class based on MOOC in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" course.

Traditional Class Flipped Class teacher’s role dominator guide, promoter students' role passive recipient active and inquiring study teaching form explain, homework learning before class and explore in class time distribution teacher's explanation inquiry learning among teachers and students method applied present content inquiry learning and actively cooperating teaching valuations paper examination multidimensional evaluation

To set the stage for interactive network teaching system of "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" course, the flipped classroom model based on MOOC re-plans in class and before class time. Teacher returns the initiative and control power of study to students and establishes the learner's subjected position and entrusts the learners with their learning rights. In this model, precious classroom time is used in highly motivated project-based learning and the students can understand the subject content more clearly. Before class the students complete their learning tasks of knowledge points with interactive network teaching system. This overturns the traditional teaching form and sets up

248

students-centered learning environment. It is proved that the flipped classroom model improves student's practical ability and trains students the awareness of innovation. It is better in favor of realizing development of individualized study methods and the autonomous learning ability of students and better complete task of teaching. The problems of not enough study initiative from only using MOOC interactive network teaching system are solved. 4. The Application Example of Flipped Classroom Model The process of the flipped classroom model in "hydraulic and pneumatic Transmission" courses is shown in Figure 1. Take the knowledge points of analyzing movable platform hydraulic system of modular machine tools as an example. The application of flipped classroom model in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" courses is discussed.

Fig. 1. The process of the flipped classroom model in "hydraulic and pneumatic Transmission" courses.

The teacher sets the learning goals and requirements of this knowledge point before class. By analyzing movable platform hydraulic system of modular

249

machine tools the students are required to know well the operating principles and functions, to grasp the basic circuit nature of hydraulic system, thereby to master the methods and procedures for reading and analyzing hydraulic system diagram. The knowledge points of analyzing movable platform hydraulic system of modular machine tools are recorded in videos as shown in Figure 2. First the video emphasizes the engineering background and introduces automatic manufacturing cell composed of modular machine tools as shown in Figure 2(a). Introduce the composition and working principle of modular machine tool as shown in Figure 2(b). It is a focus that analyzes movable platform hydraulic system of modular machine tools as shown in Figure 2(c). The teaching content of analyzing hydraulic system is studied and crafted for its importance. The exercises are given requiring students to read and analyze the pneumatic system of cutting machine with the same methods and steps. The running state of the pneumatic system of cutting machine is shown using beautiful animations in the video as shown in Figure 2(d). At the same time the learning resources of research and test contents are provided in interactive network teaching system.

Fig. 2. The knowledge points of analyzing movable platform hydraulic system of modular machine tools are recorded to video.

250

Through interactive network teaching system of "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" course the students complete the learning tasks before class. The students may learn individuality according to their own learning habits and then complete on-line testing and record issues so that they can be discussed in forum. There are three stages in class and teacher will organize, instruct and promote learning activities. The first stage is where teacher will explain doubts and strengthen the students' knowledge. Through interactive network teaching system the teacher collects the problem from students in the learning process before class and follows the principles to make interconnectivity in a specified order, and isolated knowledge points can be systematic. The second stage is the discussions of teachers' guiding subjects and of students' proposed interested topics. According to the practice situation about students learning the highlighted strengthened content will be presented for discussion by teacher. The students put forward the interesting problems such as robot driven by hydraulic system for discussing under teachers' instructions. The third stage features displays of students' achievement for learning and research.

5. Conclusion The traditional teaching model is reformed by the flipped classroom model in "hydraulic and pneumatic transmission" courses. It has provided the learners with individualistic learning environment. The teachers' primary role is a promoter and director of students' learning and students are the learning protagonists. The teaching task is performed well and the learning process of students can be evaluated very well. The collaborative inquiry in groups and communication among groups can raise students' potential and the teamwork spirit and the high responsibility end owed in the flipped classroom model.

Acknowledgments This work is supported by “twelfth five-year plan key major” of Jiangsu Province.

References 1. Pedro J. Muñoz-Merino, Precise Effectiveness Strategy for analyzing the effectiveness of students with educational resources and activities in MOOCs, Computers in Human Behavior 47 (2015) pp.108–118.

251

2. Catalina Ulrich, Anca Nedelcu, MOOCs in Our University: Hopes and Worries, Procedia - Social and Behavioral Sciences 180 (2015) pp.1541 – 1547 3. Min Kyu Kim, So Mi Kim, The experience of three flipped classrooms in an urban university: an exploration of design principles, Internet and Higher Education 22 (2014) pp. 37–50

252

Research on the Integration of Campus Sports Culture in the Merged Multi-Campus Colleges

Yang Zhao College of management, Shenzhen University Shenzhen, Guangdong, P.R.China Email:[email protected]

Tao Guan Business School, East China Normal University Shanghai, P.R.China Email:[email protected]

Yue-Yue Zhang Dongfang College, Zhejiang University of Finance & Economics Haining, Zhejiang, P.R.China Email:[email protected]

Merged multi-campus universities are a common occurrence in most parts of China and multi-campus education is now an important method for the development of modern universities for the country. Practice has proven that merge and multi-campus education allows for colleges to expand new education development space and also improves the college education capabilities and condition. However, there are several challenges with regards to the integration of campus sports culture in merged multi-campus colleges. Therefore, the colleges should undergo reforms to adapt to the development of new conditions and ensure that the “one big family” notion is rooted deeply in people’s hearts. Keywords: Merged Multi-campus Colleges; Merger; Sports Culture; Modern University.

1. Introduction As one type of the social culture, the campus sports culture plays a special position and role in improving the students’ intellectual structure, strengthening the communication between school and society, learning the human society’s civilization, improving the students’ passion and innovation, as well as advancing the deep development of the education reform. As the special phenomenon of the social sub-culture, the college campus sports culture is one

253

part of the material and spiritual wealth created by people in practice within the specific scope, campus, including all the material and spiritual wealth formed and owned by the campus in the activities of sports education, exercise and entertainment, sports competition, sports facilities, sports environmental construction, etc. The sports culture is an important part of the campus culture and has special position and role. First, the campus sports culture may cultivate the communication ability of the teachers and students. Through rich and colorful forms, the sports expand the communication space of the teachers and students, increase the communication channels, enhance the contact opportunities, open many closed obstacles to in turn increase the communication frequency, improve the non-harmonious relationship to form the cohesive force and centripetal force. Second, the good college sports culture environment is helpful to cultivate the psychological quality that can adapt to the society. With the development of the times and the progress of the society, the spiritual pressure from the society on the teachers and students in college is larger and larger. The long term spiritual pressure may cause various psychological illnesses. The motto of the Olympics is “participation more important than success”. The exciting in the competition ground can always bring people much happiness and enjoy and produce inexhaustible power. In the fair competition environment, the teachers and students in college equally participate and fully give play to their ability to achieve “survival of the fittest”, which can cultivate the psychological quality necessary for talents. Especially the competitive activities can encourage the teachers and students to carry on the fighting spirit, and arouse their potential and the enthusiasm to compete for the collective. Therefore, the combating culture activities can not only cultivate the students’ struggling and competing sense, but also forge their ability to bear setbacks and failures to make the teachers and students grow in various failures. Third, the good college sports culture environment can provide people with the intangible force and activate people’s desire for sports. This environment is a good sports biology environment, which can feel the inside belief and activate the students and teachers’ interest for the sports. Under the intangible effect of this environment, the students will have the exercise habit and form the harmonious campus sports. In the good campus sports culture atmosphere, the teachers and students can feel the spirit, atmosphere and status of the campus sports culture and obtain special experience. When it is transferred into the belief, it will make the teachers and students have interests in exercises and sports. For example, as the national ball, ping pang is popular all the time. Since the condition for such sport is not

254

demanding and many people may participate, it is very popular in colleges [1]. For a long time, the popularity for the ping pang sport is maintained, which promotes the development of the exercises of the teachers and students in college and other sports activities. Lastly, the good college sports culture environment can shape the values of the teachers and students in college, enrich their life and promote their full development. By taking part in the campus sports and cultural activities, and watching the sports competition, the teachers and students are able to shape the values, pursue health, strength and beauty to satisfy the spiritual life needs and achieve the harmonious development and improvement of the body and the heart.

2. Challenges for the Integration of the Sports Culture in the Merged Multi-Campus Colleges With the rapid enlargement of the scale of high education and the deepening of the reform in the management system of high education, there are more and more multi-campus colleges. The multi-campus is not only the new thing emerging in the reform and development of high education, but also the common thorny issue for their management [2]. The multi-campus college can be formed by merger on basis of more than one individual college; or formed by building the new campus to expand the education space, scale or function. Amongst, every campus in the multi-campus college formed by merger is independent before the merger. It has certain history and formed the campus culture with their characteristics in the long development Therefore, it is not easy to request it to abandon the original campus sports culture, and re-form and accept a brand new one. In the course of building the campus sports culture in the merged multi- campus colleges, it is necessary to properly handle the relationship between the common features and the individuality; constantly integrate; and instantly innovate to gradually build the new campus sports culture which consists with the college education notion. First, the final purpose of the campus sports activities is to publicize the human spirit of the sports, and form the humankind atmosphere in the campus to enable the students to feel the sports and the spirit in the sports activities. However, given the current multi-campus layout, the sports meeting and other important competitions in such colleges are in the form of competition, in which only a minority students can participate. This makes that the campus competition is not popular. Most students are only the audiences (even some students in many campuses do not have such chance to be the audiences). They do not have the chance to participate in the competition in

255

university and feel the competition atmosphere and the interests of the sports. In addition, most colleges only value the appearance and the course, with less attention to the real content of the sports competition. They ignore the feeling of the students, and only cares the surface imagination and ignores the culture content of the sports competition itself. Second, in the merged multi-campus universities, various campuses have special campus sports culture after many years’ running. The campus sports culture is the combination of the school characterized values, behavior mode, campus appearance, campus spirit, ethnics and regulation, development target and the thoughts, which is created by the interaction of the college teachers and students in the school environment. Therefore, it is the reflection of the spirit and cannot be forced. When the teachers and students in each campus realize that the campus sports culture which they struggled for is changed, they will lose the spiritual sustenance and resist the integration of the campus sports culture, which will in turn increase the difficulties for the teachers and students to find the spiritual belong from the campus sports culture. In the short term, it is difficult to form the new united campus sports culture while the original ones are different, which will inevitably produce strike and conflicts. Third, because the campus are diverted in geography positions and the scale is enlarged, the merged multi-campus colleges always control the whole work more in a macro way in the management, which inevitably increase the operation cost. Due to the historic reason, there are more or less differences in different campus in respect of the sports resources, the teachers and the equipment and the sports teaching level, etc., which leads to the inequality in the sports culture environment among campus. If the sharing degree is not high, such inequality inevitably leads to that the teachers and students enjoy unequal sports resources in different campus. In the meantime, the multi-campus universities mainly rely on the self-management of various campus and the basic departments, which will form more than one power centers. Although such target management focused model removes some complex course management and reduces the time and cost in coming back and to various campuses, and improves the managing efficiency, it may cause that the sports management information among the high level of the college, campus and the basic departments could not be communicated in time; the high level is unable to fully understand the status and actual needs of the sports activities in various campuses, which in turn affects the reasonableness of their decision. Forth, for the merged multi-campus universities formed by many colleges, although it is only one legal person in the sense of law, the original history and tradition as well as the different survival psychologies of every campus requires the integration to become a whole and face the society in a whole spirit style and

256

bearing. Many colleges in the merged multi-campus colleges generally all have certain education history before forming, and gradually shaped the special campus sports culture in the course of setting up a school [3]. The more campus sports culture, the stronger of the psychology and the more stable. The large strength formed by the rich content enable it to be certain conservative and have strong inertia. The original education spirit, style and management method of different campus in the merged multi-campus colleges should be integrated to achieve the integration of the campus sports culture. Lastly, in the knowledge economy, the high education goes closer and closer to the center of the society production, life and work, and becomes the necessary bridge for various countries especially the developing countries to overcome the increasing gap in respect of the knowledge, technology and education and development. The multi-campus school running enables one university to obtain resources that never occur before, especially the use of new building, equipment and facilities rapidly enlarge the space. The students’ study environment and the teachers’ scientific and research conditions have been obviously improved, which provides material conditions for the scale enlargement and the school running quality. However, because almost all universities enters the multi-campus era from the single campus era within a short time, some challenging issues become to emerge. To satisfy the basic school running requirements after the scale enlargement and ensure the education quality, most of the colleges adopt the positive fiscal policies and raise money from many channels. With the support of local government in providing preferential land resource, colleges purchase hundreds of hectares land and grasp the time to conduct large scale basic construction, which rapidly expands the school running space. With the rapid development of high education, many campuses are in construction at the same time. Large input causes that many colleges are in heavy debts. In the campus construction, the facilities such as teaching buildings, dormitories and dinning halls are the priority of colleges while the facilities for the campus sports culture ranks in the behind. If the colleges do not have good fiscal status, many places necessary for the sports culture activities in construction, such as the track and filled playground, gymnasium, swimming pool, basketball playground, volleyball playground, tennis playground, badminton playground, gym, chess room, sports showing room, sports display window, campus sports internet, etc., are suspended due to the lack of money. The original plan cannot be implemented. The completed projects are unable to give play to the role due to the incomplete corresponding facilities, which causes the structural waste [4]. The payment for the completed projects cannot be paid in full, which causes social conflicts.

257

3. The Specific Measures for the Integration of the Sports Culture in the Merged Multi-Campus Colleges The integration of the campus sports culture in multi-campus cannot be ignored to improve and innovate the sports culture in multi- campus colleges. First, the merged multi-campus universities need to reasonably plan the college sports culture environment construction in multi-campus. The college sports culture environment is an important link of the college sports culture. It directly affects the students’ sports sense, attitude, values as well as the motion, interests and wish in the sports; and the sports aesthetic and habit. The good college sports culture environment will provide people with intangible strength and activate people’s desire for sports activities. The college books, broadcast, display window, basketball playground, and soccer playground constitute the sport culture environment. The sports activities organized by college or voluntarily initiated by teachers and students jointly constitute a kind of sports culture affect, which becomes objectively the society’s method in judging the constant adjustment and correction of individual’s sports culture notion in the development [5]. By good sports culture environment, college may change the students’ living method in an intangible way and promote the change of the students’ sports notion. In the meantime, it is helpful for enhancing the traditional national sports culture and promoting the patriotism spirit. Second, the merged multi-campus universities need to regularly hold the sports culture festival. As one part of the sports activities in college, the sports festival is important to advance the college sports work, cultivate the students’ awareness to have sports and build the campus sports culture [6]. In order to promote the communication between teachers and students and integrate the sports culture in multi- campus, it is necessary to hold the sports culture festival and motivate all positive factors to utmost attract people in various campus to pay attention to, support and participate in the sports activities; try to build the campus sports culture atmosphere that everybody participates to enable the teachers and students feel the cohesive and encourage strength of the sports culture in the course of participation. Third, it is necessary for the multi-campus universities to promote the ‘one big family’ notion. For the harmonious development, the colleges should cultivate the campus sports culture with cohesive force, and enable every teacher and every student to have sense of identification, and in turn find sense of belong and produce sense of responsibility. Thereafter, they should make effort to study and exercise to have a good career, unite together, be harmonious and win the good development environment in harmony and pursue the scientific development. Lastly, the merged multi-campus universities need to shape the campus spirit. The campus spirit is a relatively stable common

258

pursuit, ideal and belief chosen and developed by long period by all the teachers, students and staff. It is the essence of the thought accumulated by generations of the teachers, students and staff in the teaching and living practice, as well as the source of the survival of the students in college. The shape of good campus spirit is the core of the construction of the campus sports culture and plays an important role in the healthy development of college. The role of the campus spirit is intangible. It directly affects the teachers, students, the college and even the quality of talents. Therefore, while recognizing its importance, all teachers and students should make joint effort to shape a good campus atmosphere.

4. Conclusion In 2015, the number of the college graduates in the whole country is 7.49 million. Nowadays, when the high education is transferred from elites to popularity, the openness of the multi-campus university is gradually enhanced. In the education development in future, how to build more reasonable and effective management system in the merged multi-campus university to achieve the optimal integration of the sports resources and give play to the utmost benefits of the sports, is the issue which requires the joint research of colleges.

References 1. Ellis Cashmore, Sports Culture: An A-Z Guide (New York: Routledge, 2003) 2. T Schirato ,Understanding sports culture (Athenaeum Press,2007) 3. Q.M. Feng, On Predicament and Countermeasures for Campus Sports Culture Construction in Multi-campus of Colleges and Universities, in Journal of Chongqing Technology and Business University(Natural Science Edition), Vol. 29, Iss 1, January 2012, pp.95-98. 4. Taylor, etc., Sports coaches as 'dangerous individuals'-practice as governmentality, in Sport Education and Society, Vol.21, Iss.2, February 2016, pp.183-199. 5. Diamond, etc., Qualitative review of hazing in collegiate and school sports: consequences from a lack of culture, knowledge and responsiveness, in British Journal of Sports medicine,Vol.50,Iss.3, February 2016,pp.149-153 6. Wei Xu, College Campus Sports Culture Construction, Education and Their Internal Mechanisms, in Journal of Beijing Sport University, Vol.38, Iss.1, January 2015,pp.94-99.

259

PBL-Based Course Design and Practice of Introduction to Digital Media

Shu-Xia Dong and Bai-Hui Yin School of Information Technology, Shandong Women’s University, Ji'nan City , Distict of Lixia, China E-mail: [email protected]

Due to the lack of confidence exhibited by students in the learning of theory knowledge in digital media art, this paper proposes the adopting of PBL teaching method in the Introduction to Digital Media, based on the practice of digital media courses. The proposed method improves the students’ ability to learn theory knowledge, the ability to discover problems, collaborate in teams, think comprehensively and develop problem- solving skill; taking into account digital media’s difficult theoretical characteristics, large quantity of information and the constant and rapid updating of knowledge regarding this field of study.

Keywords: PBL Teaching Method; Introduction to Digital Media; Teaching Evaluation.

1. Introduction As one of the elementary courses of digital media art with strong theoretical property, Introduction to Digital Media is not only a course to help students understand the nature of digital media art, but also the preliminary course of technical base and image processing. With the proposal of “wide-caliber, thick- foundation, strong-capacity, and high-quality” personnel training objectives [1], the teaching of Introduction to Digital Media encounters huge challenges, mainly reflected in the following aspects. First of all, subject to the development of social science and technology as well as the digital media art, the Introduction to Digital Media incorporates more knowledge points and information. In this case, the simple lecturing with textbooks in the traditional teaching mode can no longer satisfy the students’ desire to obtain knowledge or the cultivation of the talents in the information society. Therefore, it shall be firstly considered in the curriculum reform that how to improve teaching efficiency and effectiveness in the limited classroom teaching, and thus the autonomous learning ability of art students.

260

Secondly, Introduction to Digital Media is geared to the specialty of digital media, but the demands for such course vary with the different performances of students, different teaching requirements and different learning abilities of students. Therefore, it shall also be considered in curriculum reform how to achieve the “high-quality, thick-foundation, and strong-capacity” practical personnel training objectives under the different student performances, student capacities and teaching requirements [2]. Finally, it is explicitly pointed out in the National Outline for Medium and Long Term Education Reform and Development (2010-2020) that “attention shall be paid to the combination of learning and thinking, and the unity of moral knowledge and practice; the concept of lifelong learning shall be established to lay a foundation for the sustainable development” [3]. Subject to the development of science and technology and the social progress, the traditional educational mode can no longer satisfy the national and social demands. Therefore, it shall be also considered in curriculum reform the cultivation of specialized talents with ability of autonomous and lifelong learning. Aiming to cultivate students' subjective initiative of learning, and to improve their autonomous learning ability and the team cooperation ability, the problem based learning (PBL) is incorporated into the Introduction to Digital Media. In addition, it is expected to improve the students' lifelong learning ability by mainly cultivating students' ability to learn the theory knowledge, to discover and finally solve the problems.

2. PBL-based Course Design of Introduction to Digital Media Centered on students, the teaching mode of problem based learning (PBL) emphasizes the students' autonomous learning, and places learning into the problem situation. The students may acquire the problem-solving ability by solving problems through collaboration, thus improving the autonomous learning ability and cultivating the teamwork spirit [4]. In order to mobilize students' learning initiative and enthusiasm, as well as the students' participation in curriculum learning, the PBL teaching mode is adopted in Introduction to Digital Media to fully mobilize students' learning initiative, allow students to actively select the problem and solve such problem through collaboration. The overall design of this course mainly includes: determination of teaching goal, task decomposition, topic identification, selection of group or topic, determination of topic learning plan, group learning, topic report, and topic evaluation. Teachers play a leading and controlling role in the whole process. The teaching process is shown as follows:

261

Fig. 1. The figure of teaching process for PBL teaching mode.

3. PBL Teaching Practice Teachers play an indispensable leading role in the process of PBL practice. Teachers shall monitor and direct the students in each process as per the actual situation.

3.1. Determination of teaching goal Introduction to Digital Media is a professional basic course, which requires the students to not only master the basic knowledge of the course and establish the contents required to be learnt and studies for digital media art, but also learn how to master the problem-solving ability by searching the materials, analyzing and summarizing the problems. In order to determine the teaching goals and contents of this course as per the talent training target, teachers shall decompose the contents of such course to identify the problems required to be learnt and mastered by students.

Fig. 2. The figure of the teaching goal for PBL teaching mode.

3.2. Task decomposition and topic identification Teachers shall firstly determine the problems to be solved according to the teaching goal and content (i.e., the syllabus). Topic shall be preset for different

262

theoretical knowledge points according to such problems. For instance, in order to help students to better grasp the curriculum knowledge and use such theories and principles to analyze the practical problems, a total of eight topics are designed in the basic theory of digital media in the principle to help the students master not only the basic contents but also the extended ones. The former shall include the development of China digital media and its development trend, difference and connection between digital media and traditional media, difference and connection between traditional media and new media, research content and trend of digital media; by extending the former, the latter shall include the setting of China digital media (technology) and its development trend, future development direction of traditional media, difference and connection between traditional media and Weibo, difference between Weibo and WeChat in transmission mechanism. Such topics above not only help the students to master the basic knowledge in textbooks or broaden the knowledge level, but also enable the student to analyze the problems in reality by combining the textbook knowledge with practice.

Table 1. The table of topic identification.

Course Basic problem Extended topic knowledge Development of China digital Setting of China digital media media and its development trend (technology) and its development trend Basic Difference and connection between Future development direction of theories of digital media and traditional media traditional media digital Difference and connection between Difference and connection between media traditional media and new media traditional media and Weibo Research content and trend of Difference between Weibo and WeChat digital media in transmission mechanism

3.3. Selection of group and team leader In the teaching process of this course, group learning is quite important from the topic selection to topic report, so how to group and members of each group are quite vital. In general, a group shall consist of five members, all familiar with each other and complementary in characters. The male and female members shall be equal as far as possible, and a team leader may be selected to play the core leading role, thus fully mobilizing the enthusiasm of team members and making the group learning conducted effectively. There are several principles in

263

the grouping process, such as each group with over two female members and with at least one class cadre. The students may voluntarily form a group on the basis of such rules. In this way, both the proportionality and emotion of team members are considered, thus arousing the learning enthusiasm of students at the greatest extent and ensuring the successful group learning.

Fig. 3. The figure of Selection of group and team leader.

3.4. Determination of topic learning plan The group shall analyze the topic and prepare a learning plan to facilitate the problem solving. In this process, teachers shall give full play to teachers' leading role, and interact with topic head and team members, thus helping the topic head to formulate the learning plan.

3.5. Group learning Group learning is centered on the topic issues.

Fig. 4. The figure of Group Learning in the PBL Learning Mode.

3.6. Topic report In the group learning, topic head is required to report the topic to make those not participating in such topic also familiar with it, thus systematically mastering the Introduction to Digital Media. In order to arouse the enthusiasm of the other

264

teams to study this topic, teachers shall give full pay to the leading role, and summarize and supplement the topic after the presentation of the topic head, thus making the knowledge points more comprehensive; on the other hand, the members of other teams may question this topic for a better understanding.

3.7. Topic evaluation

Table 2. The Table of Hundred-mark System Table of Teaching Evaluation.

No. Item Grades Remarks Topic head rates other team members from the Rated by 1 15 perspective of topic participation, usefulness and topic head cooperative ability. Rated by Team members rate the topic head from the perspective of 2 team 15 organization, leadership and coordination abilities. members

Other students rate the topic from the perspective of problem analysis, problem solving and team unity; topic 3 Topic grade 20 grade is the total marks of five topics each group and attributed to each team member in a certain proportion.

Rated by Teachers give a certain score and its basis subject to the 4 50 teachers students’ performance.

In the traditional teaching mode, teachers decide everything. However, in the learning process of this course, students shall also participate in the teaching evaluation, so as to improve the students' participation in class and stimulate the students' learning interest and initiative. As the topic head and leader, students shall have the right to grade the performance and contribution of other team members; as the audience, students shall have the right to grade the presentation and achievements of this topic. The grade may include the following aspects.

4. Conclusion PBL teaching mode is combined with team teaching in the whole course teaching process, so as to cultivate the problem-solving ability and promote the collaboration ability of students. After the open learning of this course, various academic papers are published, and the students’ abilities to discover, solve and summarize problems are promoted. However, teachers are required to have strong course grasping ability and management ability in the teaching process, so as to play a proper role in terms of not only the cooperation and competition between the students but also the improvement of students' initiative and

265

enthusiasm. In the teaching process, teachers shall participate in the whole curriculum practice, and guide to solve the discovered problems in a timely manner.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by female university students' employment subject of Shandong Women’s University Innovation Study on the University-Enterprise Cooperation Based on the Cultivation of Graduate Employability (Project No.2014NJ14); "Twelfth Five-year" Plan key subject of National teachers' scientific research fund Research and Practice of PBL-based Teaching Method for College Theoretical Courses (Project No.CTFD1501381); Humanities and social sciences research project of Shandong universities 4D-based Feixiang Cinema system and its Influence on the Construction of Theme Park: in Shandong (Project No.J14WJ02).

References 1. Hou PeiYong. Wide-caliber, Thick-foundation, Strong-capacity and High-quality Trans-century Talent Training Objectives [J]. Scientech Talent Market, 1997(1). 2. Zhou Jing, Hou Shiying & Sun Tao. Exploration of PBL-based "Electrotechnics" Teaching Mode [J]. China Power Education, 2013(8). 3. National Outline for Medium and Long Term Education Reform and Development (2010-2020) by the Ministry of Education. 4. Yang Guijuan. Application of Problem-based Learning (PBL) in After Effects. Education Forum, 2014(6). 5. Gong Yanhua,Sun Zhonghong. Application of LBL and PBL double track teaching model in access database course[J],Computer Education, 2013(13). 6. Liu Jingyu. Factors influencing the conversion of teachers' role in the PBL teaching mode and the intervention strategies[J],Future and development 2013(2). 7. Zhou Jing, Hou Shiying, Sun Tao. Research on teaching mode of electrical engineering course based on PBL[J], China Electric Power Education 2013(8). 8. Lv Chao, Liu Shuang, Zhang Lizhen, Wang Shiming, Li Juntao, Research on Undergraduate Practice Teaching Reform Based on the Cultivation of College Students' innovation ability and PBL[J], Modern educational equipment in China 2013(5).

266

Analysis of Psychological Health among Grade 2015 College Students

Sheng-Lin Zhang, Xu-Long Wang and Hong-Chao Liu Department of PE, Lanzhou University of Technology, Lanzhou, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper analyzes the current situation of psychological health among college students, to understand their existing health statuses. This can set the basis for improved development and teaching of content for the sports curriculum for future reference. 600 male and 400 female grade 2015 college students from Lanzhou University of Technology were randomly selected to take part in the study. The study demonstrated that the students passed national standards of 4 index tests: Body mass index, vital capacity, sit and reach, 1000 meters (800 meters). However, the test results for the remaining 2 index tests of standing long jump and pull ups were lower than the national standards.

Keywords: College Students; Physical Health; Present Situation.

1. Introduction

In recent years, there is an ongoing trend of declining physical health standards among college students. This study analyzes the current situation of college students’ psychological health to understand the current health statuses in order to optimize sports curriculum.

2. Research Objects and Method

2.1. Object of study In grade 2015 of Lanzhou University of Technology students as the research object, the test data of 1000 college students were randomly selected for analysis.

2.2. Research methods  Literature data method  Test method 267

 Statistical analysis  Comparative study

3. Results and Analysis 3.1. Test results and analysis of height and weight Height and weight are important indexes reflecting the external appearance of the human body [1]. 1000 male and female college students' height and weight test results see Table 1.

Table 1. Height and weight test results

Sex N Height ( X ±s) Weight ( X ±s) Male 600 171.916±13.801 64.321±11.427

male 400 164.576±7.362 56.286±10.353

600 male students height was 171.916±13.801cm, 64.321±11.427kg weight; 400 female college students height 164.576 weight 56.286 + 10.353kg + 7.362cm. Male and female students' height and weight are approximately normal distribution. Among male college students height concentrated trend in 175cm, weight of central tendency in 65kg; female college students height of central tendency in 165cm, weight of central tendency in 55kg. At the same time, from the weight of male and female test result: the weights of male and female students are relatively thin should be pay attention to strengthening nutrition dietary supplement. 3.2. Test results and analysis of vital capacity index Lung capacity test reflects the body's lung ventilation function [2]. The test results of the vital capacity index of male and female college students and the excellent value and good value and test values given by the national physical health standard were tested by single sample T. The results are shown in Table 2.

Table 2. Vital capacity test results and single sample T test

268

The national physical fitness and health standards provisions: freshman, sophomore male college students' vital capacity more than 4800 for outstanding, more than 4300 is good, more than 3000 pass; vital capacity of female college students in more than 3300 as excellent, more than 3000 is good, more than 2000 to pass. Table 5 data show: 600 male students vital capacity mean for 3824.67 ±596.136, with good value and good value, there is very significant difference (P < 0.001) compared with; 400 female college students' vital capacity mean 2793.84 ± 736.441, and good value and good value comparison there were very significant difference (P < 0.001); that students' vital capacity index relatively poor.

3.3. Test results and analysis of endurance indexes 1000m run (male)/800 m run (female) mainly reflects the human cardiovascular function and the ability to work long lasting [3]. At the same time, it also reflects the level of the heart and lung function of the human body. According to the college student physical health standard, male students 1000 meters running performance at 3:27 above is excellent, above 3:42 as well. More than 4:32 pass, female college students 800 meters run score at 3:30 or more outstanding, more than 3:44 good and more than 4:34 pass.

Table 3. Endurance test results and single sample T test

Table 3 data showed that male students 1000 meters run test results Mean value is 3:59 ± 0.429, compared with the provisions of the standard 74 points; female college students 800 meters run test results mean 3:58 ± 0.371, compared with the provisions of the standard basically reached 74 points,there were significant differences between male and female students in 1000 (800) m running average and the value and good value (P < 0.001) compared with, but as freshmen, and compared to the standard value, the results of the basic quality of endurance quality.

269

3.4. Test results and analysis of zuoweiti proneness index Body anteflexion in sitting position is the torso, waist, hip and other joints may reach the range of activities, mainly reflect these parts of the joints, ligaments and muscle stretching and elastic body and pliable and tough quality development level. Male and female college students' body antexion statistics are shown in table 4.

Table 4. Sit and reach test results and single sample T test

Table 4 data showed that male students sitting body flexion for 12.724 + 7.438cm, female college students sitting body flexion for 13.465 + 6.264 cm, male and female college students' body antexion mean and provisions of the outstanding value and good value comparison had significant difference (P < 0.001), the students' flexibility is generally poor, should in the future teaching and training to strengthen flexibility exercises.

3.5. Analysis of results of 50 meters index test result 50 meters running is a measure of the body's ability to run fast, reflecting the speed, sensitivity, coordination and flexibility of the nervous system of the development level of college students [4]. According to the college student physical health standard, the university level male students 50 meters of achievement in more than 6.9s is excellent, above 7.1S good, 9.1s pass over; female college students more than 50 meters of achievement 7.7s for excellent, 8.3s above is good, more than 10.3s to pass. Male and female college students 50 meters run test results statistics see table 5.

Table 5. 50 meter run test results and single sample T test

270

Table 5 data showed that male students 50 meters run test results mean for 7.406 +.517s, female college students 50 meters running test results mean 9.206 + 1.183s, male and female students 50 meters run mean and the provisions of the outstanding value and good value, there is very significant difference (P < 0.001) compared with that speed quality of university students also needs to be improved.

3.6. Pull-up (male) and sit ups (female) and analysis of test results Chin up development level mainly test the muscle strength of upper limbs, is their own strength to overcome the gravity of the drape strength exercises. Sit ups test waist and abdomen muscle strength. According to the college student physical health standard, university level male students pull up to 17 above as excellent, in more than 15 for good, pass more than 10; female college students sit ups more than 52 as excellent, more than 46 is good, more than 26 pass. Male and female college students’ pull-up (sit ups) test result statistics in Table 6.

Table 6. Pull ups, sit ups test results and single sample T test

Sex N Comparison with the passing value X ±s t Sig.

Male 600 7.10±4.386 -9.105 .000 Female 400 30.79±8.231 5.520 .000

In recent years, in the test process of College Students' physical health commonly found in male college students in upper limb strength is poor, the performance in chin to the index, some students even a cannot do, sit ups results deviation of female college students is also more prominent, from table 6 results seen male students pull ups to mean to 7.10 + 4.386, amounting to less than the passing standard as the provisions of the state; female college students sit ups mean 30.79 + 8.231, just to get a pass, male and female students pull ups and sit ups mean and regulations of the state, pass the standard to between exist very significant difference (P < 0.001).

3.7. Analysis of the standing long jump test results The project is the development of human movement, standing long jump and jump of the explosive force of the lower limbs. Male and female students standing long jump test results are shown in Table 7.

271

Table 7. Men and women standing long jump test results and single sample T test

Sex N Comparison with the passing value X ±s t Sig.

Male 600 2.071±0.192 2.931 .051

Female 400 1.650±0.235 6.583 .000

Lower extremity strength of college students poor in the standing long jump test is also outstanding, Table 7 results showed that male students standing long jump mean for 2.071±0.192m, just reached the passing standard as the provisions of the state; female students standing long jump mean for 165±0.235m, also only is failed to reach the standard, the male students standing long jump mean and the provisions of the state failed there was no significant difference (P=0.051>0.05) between the standard. Among female students standing long jump mean and regulations of the state, pass the standard although there are significant differences (P < 0.001).

4. Conclusion In recent years, the physical health of college students is still in a state of decline, The main reason is lacking of exercise, students sit for a long time, fear of hardship, afraid of fatigue, do not love to participate in physical exercise, resulting in students' physical decline, the 1000 students of this test of the 6 indicators : body mass index, vital capacity, sit and reach, 1000 meters (800 meters) 4 indicators result and the national health standard of excellent value and good value there is a significant difference in the test results, the basic passing range, standing long jump and pull ups (UPS) are lower than the national standard, proposed to strengthen the endurance and strength in practice physical education classes, and students should be fully aware of their health problems, strengthen the inside and outside class physical exercise.

References 1. Qingzhu Lv, Shengchao Wang. The national student physical health standard and practical materials [M]. Communication University of China press, 2008.10:20–29. 2. Ministry of Education State Students Health Standards (The 2014 revision).

272

3. Shenglin Zhang. Comparative analysis of physical health status of college students of Han and Mongolia nationality, Sichuan Sports Science 2012.5 No.5, 76–80. 4. The Ministry of Education of the People's Republic of China, the State Sports General Administration. Students' physical health standard (Trial Scheme) and students' physical health standard (Trial Implementation) [J]. Chinese school physical education, 2002, (5): 5. 5. Junrong Zhu. 2008 level survey cyit female college students physical health status analysis [J] Journal of Sports & Science 2011.1, 78–79.

273

Exploration and Practice on the Development of Creativity among College Students

Li-Zhen Yang, Bo-Wen Liu and Fu-Yun Li Beijing Institute of Graphic Communication, Beijing, China, 102600 E-mail: [email protected]

In this paper, the cultivation of creative ability in college students is explored and practiced using actual conditions in the Beijing Institute of Graphic Communication. A scientific and technological innovation and teaching system is established. Thereafter an innovative practice plan is implemented and academic competitions are held. Good practical results have been achieved via this cultivation method, which improved the practical ability and the scientific and technological innovation ability of the students.

Keywords: Practice; Scientific and technological innovation; Cultivation of creative ability.

1. Introduction

Science and technology are primary productive forces and innovation is the direct driving force to promote the development of science and technology. The innovation ability of science and technology is directly related to the survival of the nation and the rise and fall of nations. Current international competition is often reflected in the high quality talent with a competitive technological innovation. Therefore, the overall quality of education of today's college students has been the strategy theme of reform and development of higher education. How to realize the goal of talent cultivation with the time significance, how to improve the training quality of talents, how to strengthen college students' sense of social responsibility of serving nation and serving the people of the country, the courage to explore the spirit of innovation and good practice problem-solving ability has been diligently explored by the higher education workers [1, 2]. This paper establishes a scientific and technological innovation and teaching system to cultivate the creative ability of college students.

274

2. Situation Analysis

In theory, many education experts proposed deep understanding, incisive analysis and insights on higher education, innovation ability and practice ability of college students, and gave forward the direction and measures of reform. For example, to cultivate practical ability and innovative spirit of college students, the single teaching mode must be changed analyzed by Luan XiaoJuan et al [3]. The sustainable development of students’ science and technology innovation team model was studied by Xi Ying [4]. Based on the reform practice of college students practice and innovation base in China University of Mining and Technology, the innovative talents training system of the "three-integration" and "two-composition" was been discussed by Wang Jun [5], summarizing the base condition of teachers and students and proposing innovative training - science and technology competition - perfect training system to practice the base construction and innovative talent cultivation. In practice, mainly focused on the practice of innovative talent training mode, classroom teaching, second class, social practice, science and technology competitions, experimental teaching, education management, innovation management system and other practices, for example: Tian Long [6] proposed to strengthen the experiment teaching, reasonably arrange the teaching content, establish an open laboratory platform and carry out discipline contest to improve students' innovative ability. Currently, cultivating innovation ability of students is still in the exploratory stage in China. For the domestic ordinary colleges and universities, the teaching and scientific research mode is that the research work is supplemented to the teaching work for a long time. In terms of talent training, there are common problems including weak running school hardware condition, low level of scientific research, less combination with enterprise and less participation into practice innovation activities. In terms of the cultivation of college students' practical innovation ability, there are also common problems including that the atmosphere of scientific and technological innovation is not strong enough, the students' innovative consciousness and innovative spirit is not strong, the teaching system of science and technology innovation practice and the management mechanism is not perfect and the effect for the practice innovation is not obvious [7].

275

3. Measures

For many years, the university education in our country still adopts the traditional teaching mode. Many students mainly spend time learning book knowledge. How to guide students to carry out scientific and technological innovation to adapt to social development and become innovative and creative talents is an important research topic in front of the University. To solve these problems, combining with the actual situation of our school, exploration and practice on how to cultivate college students' scientific and technological innovation ability have been carried out from establishing a perfect scientific and technological innovation training system, teaching system and cooperation system with enterprises. Students' initiative was cultivated via many practical activities, such as scientific research program for college students, second class and subject competition to guide students to develop themselves and improve themselves, which laid a solid foundation for cultivating students with a certain professional skills and strong ability to innovate.

3.1. Improve the teaching conditions and provide the basis for the training of innovation

(1) Platform construction In order to promote the teaching and scientific research ability of the basic course teachers, and improve the comprehensive quality of students, under the supports of leaders at all levels, in June 2011, the establishment of “science innovation practice base”, provided the material guarantee for college students scientific research projects in and outside the school, graduation design, based course contests and other activities, and also gives scientific research stage for the basic course teachers. (2) The construction of the teaching staff The formation of the teachers' team is reasonable. Teachers organize and guide the student team to carry out innovation activities using their own advantages. Guiding teachers engaged in the teaching of physics and chemistry of public basic courses for a long period of time, including 1 professor, 2 associate professors, 2 lecturers and 1 laboratory assistant.

3.2. Focus on the changes between teachers and students, and mobilize the students to learn independently

There are two subjects of education in the teaching process, one teacher and one student. The common phenomenon existing in current education similar to

276

traditional communication process, the teacher is the source, responsible for sending out information; while the students are only responsible for receiving information passively. In this dissemination process of knowledge, it is only one-way transmission of knowledge as well as lack of feedback and active involvement of students. In fact, in the teaching process, students are the direct participants and beneficiaries of the study. The key is how to make students initiatively participate, and the answer to this question is seizing the interest of students. Fully mobilizing the enthusiasm of the students enable students to turn "want me to learn" into "I want to learn" and become the true masters of planning and organization of their own learning [8].

3.3. Carry out innovative practice plan to strengthen students' practical and innovative quality

(1) Scientific research activities of students A group of 2-3 persons began to exercise from college students' scientific research activities. The basic qualities were firstly cultivated, for example, the basic operation of instruments, the review of literature, improving experimental program, the implementation of the experiment activities and group discussion. After having certain foundation of scientific research, students were guided to apply for Beijing scientific research project of college students. Good scientific qualities were finally formed through literature review, experimental process, experimental training, implementation of the scheme and continuously straightening errors, and finally forming the research report or thesis etc. Student teams reported work every two weeks, communicating with each other and learning between different groups. Through these activities, students' experiment data analysis capabilities, practice ability, innovative spirit and sense of teamwork have been improved obviously. (2) Students’ "mentoring" In this platform, "mentoring" among students is a very good form. The students having certain scientific research ability can give some guidance to the students just joining to the innovation base in terms of how to operate the instruments and how to review literature. The new members are growing up in the process of team reports in front of all the teachers and students. After a year of hard work, new members can become the main force of innovation base. Not only their own capacity was improved, but also they played an important role in the team in innovative activities.

277

(3) Students participate in academic exchanges To broaden their horizon, undergraduate students with good performance in the research activities are encouraged to participate in international academic conferences, present papers, communicate with participants and enhance scientific research.

3.4. Establish competition mechanism of technological innovation and excavate innovative ability of outstanding students

In order to promote scientific and technological innovation activities carried out extensively and cultivate the creative and practical ability of college students, it is necessary to provide students with opportunities and platforms to show themselves and exchange their research results. Physics and chemistry experiment competitions were regularly organized to develop students' scientific and technological innovation capability, stimulate their learning enthusiasm, improve the teaching quality of public basic course, and promote the reform of basic education courses.

4. Achievements

Through the practice of college students' scientific research plan and subject contest training, students' initiative has been cultivated, guiding students to self-development and self-improvement, which laid a solid foundation for training students with professional skills and strong innovation ability, as well as the teaching and scientific research ability of teachers were also improved at the same time. Since 2011, students completed a total of 33 scientific research projects (national: 3; Beijing: 12; college: 18) on the basis of physical and chemical research and innovation base. After a series of innovative activities, gratifying achievements have been achieved for five years including 2 patents and 26 papers published with students as the first author (4 SCI, 9 EI and 5 core). Over the years, about 1000 persons were guided to the university physics competition in and outside school. In part of the National University Physics Competition, one person received first prize, five persons received second prize and 19 persons received third prize. In physics competition of Beijing Institute of Graphic Communication, 9 persons received first prize, 23 persons received second prize and 32 persons received third prize. 2014, the first prize in part of the National University Physics Competition achieved the first prize zero

278

breakthrough since 2007. On the other hand, about 100 persons were guided to the university chemistry competition in and outside school. 6 persons received first prize, 9 persons received second prize and 12 persons received third prize. In Beijing chemistry competition, 9 persons received third prize and 6 persons received excellence prize.

5. Conclusion

With the rapid development of knowledge, it is significantly important to cultivate the ability of science and technology innovation of college students. Cultivating scientific and technological innovation ability is a high-level, open, student-oriented and forward-looking education, which has far-reaching significance to promote social progress and deepen the reform of education. Establishing scientific innovation ability system as well as creating a strong scientific and technological innovation atmosphere and environment is of great practical importance to train creative talents adapting to the development of economy and society.

Acknowledgement

This results supported by scientific research and teaching team training funding method of Beijing Institute of Graphic Communication (22150116006/013) and education reform project (22150115130) of Beijing Institute of Graphic Communication (Discussion on Multiple Teaching Strategies in Class).

References

1. Zhang Chunhua, Meng Linghui, Xu Huifang, The Practice for Capacity-Building of College Students in Science and Technology Innovation, Education Forums, 2011 (23): 7–8 (In Chinese). 2. Zhou Zhuying, Fu Shen, Cultivate College Students' Science and Technology Innovation Ability through Scientific and Technological Innovation Projects, Science Guide, 2012 (30): 1–2 (In Chinese). 3. Luan Xiaojuan, Chen Yanping, Zhang Ying, the Training Strategies for the Promotion of College Students' Practical and Innovative Capabilities, Academy, 2013,12, 58. (In Chinese). 4. Xi Ying, Li Yong, Studies on the Sustainable Development of Science, Technology, Practice and Innovative Team Mode, Jilin Normal University (Humanities and Social Sciences), 2013, 3, 69–71. (In Chinese). 279

5. Wang Jun, Li Ming, Niu Xiaoling, Mao Huiqiong, The Construction of Practice Innovation Base and the Cultivation of Innovative Talents, China Electric Power Education, 2013, 10, 198–200. (In Chinese). 6. Tian Weilong, on Experimental Education and Practice Innovation Ability, China Adult Education, 2013, 2, 140–141. (In Chinese). 7. Xu Hongzhen, Exploration and Practice of Cultivating College Students’ Innovation Ability, Journal of East China University of Technology, 2009, 3. (In Chinese). 8. Jia Jingming, Wang Haixia, Research and Exploration on the Cultivation of Creative Practice Ability of Students. Pharmaceutical Education, 2014, 4. (In Chinese).

280

A Comparison of First and Second Language Acquisition

Xin-Yan Gao Foreign Languages School, Linyi University, Linyi, China E-mail: [email protected]

First language is known as the native language or the mother tongue while a second language is any language acquired at a later stage in life by the native speakers or learners. This paper conducts a comparative analysis on several differences and similarities between first language and second language acquisition, and proposes several methods to improve our English teaching.

Keywords: First Language Acquisition; Second Language Acquisition; English Teaching.

1. Introduction Every aspect of language is extremely complex. Yet very young children–before the age of five–already know most of the intricate system we have been calling the grammar of a language. Before they can add 2+2, children are conjoining sentences, asking questions, using appropriate pronouns, negating sentences, forming relative clauses, and using the syntactic, phonological, morphological, and semantic rules of the grammar. How do they acquire such an intricate system so quickly and effortlessly? Is the process similar to or completely different from adults’ second language acquisition? What ideas can we get to guide and improve our English teaching by analyzing and comparing these two kinds of acquisitions?

2. Literature Review

2.1. First language acquisition Language development proceeds in stages. Some studies have proved after a silent period all children pass through the same stage in acquiring their language. During the first year of life, children develop the sounds of their language. They begin by producing and perceiving many sounds that do not exist in their language input. Gradually, their production and perceptions are fine-tuned to the

281

environment. Children’s late babbling has all the phonological characteristics of the input language. Children’s first utterances are one- word “sentences”, gradually they will put two or more words together. This is the first major stage, which is described as “telegraphic speech”, due to its lack of inflections (such as -ing) and many of the small function word (such as the and is). The second stage is the “development of inflectional morphemes and function words”. In this stage, we find longer utterances, but still telegraphic. In the third stage, children advance to a complex grammatical development of transformations. They are able to produce more complex utterances from incorrect to correct ones. Then, how do children develop their mother tongue? Many psycholinguists have carried out a lot of experiments. In the 1950s, the prevalent psychology was behaviorism. It focused on people’s behaviors, which are directly observable, rather than on the mental system underlying these behaviors. Language was viewed as a kind of verbal behavior and it was proposed that children learn language through imitation, reinforcement, analogy, and similar processes. In recent years, it has become clear that this principle will not explain all the facts of language development. Children do imitate a great deal, especially in learning sounds and vocabulary; but little of their grammatical ability can be explained in this way. Thus, another theory, cognitive approach arose. Interest is drawn towards the internal mental processes, or cognitive activity. It emphasizes that language is a rule-governed system; underlying the actual behavior there is a complex system of rules, and these enables children to create and understand a lot of sentences which they never heard. Linguistic structures will emerge only if there is an already-established cognitive foundation— for example, before children can use structures of comparison (e.g. This car is bigger than that), they need first to have developed the conceptual ability to make relative judgments of size. Now, language acquisition is known to be an interaction between the child’s innate mental structure and the language environment, a “creative construction” process. The two factors are combined to shape the mother tongue acquisition.

2.2. Second language acquisition (SLA) An “L2” is a language acquired by a person in addition to his mother tongue. “Acquisition” can be broadly defined as the internalization of rules and formulas, which are then used to communicate in the L2. “Second Language Acquisition (SLA)” then refers to the subconscious or conscious processes by which a language other than mother tongue is learnt in a natural or a tutored or a classroom setting. It covers the development of phonology, lexis, grammar, and

282

pragmatic knowledge. Thus, in this paper, the second language acquisition is used in a broad sense, which includes foreign language and second language learning.

3. Differences between L1 Acquisition and SLA

3.1. The differences in age and learning environment Age is a significant factor in language acquisition. People learn to speak L1 when they are very young, just about 4 months or 6 months old, the learning starts from listening and speaking. The second language learning starts from the time when people are in the primary school or in his middle school, and sometimes not from listening or speaking. The period when children acquire L1 is said to be the best time for language learning. The reason is that SLA researchers often regard puberty as the critical point for acquisition. That is, before puberty, the children may easily acquire fluent control of one or several language because of the physical advantages, while after puberty, with the accomplishment of lateralization, it is difficult for the adult to acquire native- like fluent control of a second language or at least to acquire it with “authentic” pronunciation, for they have lost physical advantages. Lenneberg (1967) notes that the age at which persistent aphasic symptoms result from left- hemisphere injury is approximately the same age, around puberty, at which “foreign accents” became likely in SLA. People learn L1 in natural learning atmosphere. Around them are native speakers. They have to keep in touch with each other. There are also news media, official documents or even advertisement, which can give them frequent stimulation. While in a foreign language acquisition, there can be two kinds of language environment. Simply saying, if a learner is exposed to a host language environment, the speed and quality of learning a new language will be enhanced. In contrast, if a learner learns the second language in a foreign language environment (not the target language environment), there would be a significantly smaller chance of success in communicating fluently and appropriately. Thus, language environment is of important to success in learning a new language.

3.2. The difference in learning motivation Language is one of the skill systems of knowledge that human being easily acquire, the man who develops normally can learn his native language or his

283

mother tongue. Otherwise, man will not choose language as his communicative tool. While foreign language is still the most difficult subject for students in many countries, it takes the students much time to learn the language, but the result is not so satisfying, especially in listening and speaking. One of the reasons is that the learning motivation is quite different. To learn the first language, the motivation is always “essential”, “instinctive”, “spontaneous”, the motivation is connected with the original need of living, the basic need of communication. While to learn the second language, the motivation is “external”, “being approved”, “being successful”, the motivation is connected with the promotion of social position, the fulfilling of one’s ambition.

3.3. The difference in cognitive development and acquisition The relationship between the cognitive development and language acquisition is one of the linguists’ concerns. Adults are much superior to children in cognitive capacity, but why is it more difficult for them to learn a second language? People are puzzled by the problem whether the cognitive capacity benefit or hinder language acquisition. When a young child is learning L1, he is highly egocentric, so he is not affected by emotional factors. He is generally not “aware” that he is acquiring a language. It is the very “unconsciousness” that makes children a language easily and successfully. What’s more, children’s cognitive capacity usually develops at the same space as their language ability does. Language interacts with cognition to achieve “equilibrium”. The development of cognitive capacity helps the development of language ability and vice versa. However, adults have advantages in logic and analytic abilities. It is easier for them to summarize and grasp the rules in second language and to make good use of them to speed up second language acquisition. Thus adults are superior to children in the logic and accuracy concerning the acquisition and application of language knowledge. At the same time, with the accomplishment of adults’ cognitive capacity, the development of cognition gradually separates from the language acquisition. In a word, when adults acquire a second language, on the one hand, with the development and maturation of individual cognitive capacity and the improvement of logic and thinking ability, they get aware of the innate rules of the language more quickly and speed up the acquisition; on the other hand, because of the separation of the development of cognitive capacity from that of language, thinking ability also separates from language ability, which leads to the difficulties in language learning.

284

3.4. The difference in learning strategies In learning a second language, the learners employ two main learning strategies different from L1 learners. One is “transfer”, the other is “avoidance”. Transfer is divided into two kinds: negative transfer and positive transfer. Positive transfer is learning in one situation, which helps or facilitates learning in another later situation. And it is seen as one of the learner’s active strategies for making sense of the second language data. Negative transfer is learning in one situation, which interferes with learning in another situation. While foreign language learners use negative transfer, they make “interlingual errors”, also known as “interference”. Avoidance strategy means that when speaking or writing, a foreign language learner will often try to avoid using a difficult word or structure and will use a simpler word or structure instead. For example, in learning English, our Chinese native speakers tend to avoid using relative clauses, and use two simpler sentences instead, as in “That’s my building. I live there”. This is because Chinese sentences are usually short and simple.

4. Similarities Between L1 and L2 Acquisition

4.1. Similar acquisition stages Before starting their speech, L1 and L2 acquirers exhibit a “silent period”. As first language learners, children are observed to depend on “one-way communication” while they develop comprehension skills. This phenomenon is also found in children who are learning a second language in natural settings. This phenomenon is also found in children who are learning a second language in natural settings. This kind of silent period may be the time during which acquirers build up competence by active listening, via input. Like the L1 acquirers, L2 acquirers also have “telegraphic speech”. It was observed, especially with children acquiring a second language, when they started to produce their first words, it looked very much like “telegraphic speech” in the normal first language development, with short, simple word combinations.

4.2. The effort to gain language communicative competence The purpose of language acquisition is to communicate in real life. The ultimate aim of language learning is not the form of language, but its function. Take the following tree diagram as an example:

285

NP VP NP

D N V D N

The boy painted the wall What is interesting is that when we slot bits of vocabulary into this tree of frame, we get a sentence. By changing the bits of vocabulary we get completely different sentences, such as, “The girl loved the man”, “we ate the cake”, “The man kicked the ball”, etc. In other words the rules have not changed, but the sentence has. By using the rule as a base we can select the vocabulary to mean the things we want. In this aspect, both L1 and L2 acquisition are similar.

4.3. Similar acquisition order Both L1 and L2 acquirers learn what words mean and how they are pronounced. For speaking out sentences, both need to build up a “mental dictionary” first in the mind, which is generally a process of accumulation from single and simple words to complicated ones and to phrases. Then, they put words and phrases together according to grammatical rules and make sentences. L1 and L2 acquisition also undergo the similar process of perception, comprehension, imitation, memorization and utilization. In the early 1970s, it was discovered that English children learned grammatical morphemes in a definite sequence (Brown, 1973). Some researchers (e.g. Dulay and Burt, 1982; Hakuta, 1986) then made experiments to see what this sequence meant for L2 learning. Results showed that all L2 learners (e.g. Spanish, Japanese, Korean), children or adults, had the similar order of difficulty of eight grammatical morphemes as English children do: 1) plural ‘-s’, 2) progressive ‘-ing’, 3) copula forms of ‘be’, 4) auxiliary form of ‘be’, 5) definite and indefinite articles ‘the’ and ‘a’, 6) irregular past tense, 7) third person ‘-s’, 8) possessive ‘s’. They had the least difficulty with plural ‘-s’ and the most difficulty with possessive ‘s’. Other similar sequences of syntactic acquisition were found in L1 and L2 learning (Cook 1973; d’ Anglejan and Tucker 1975). L2 learners, like L1 learners, start by believing that “John” is the subject of “please” in both of the following sentences: a. John is easy to please. b. John is eager to please. They only go on to discover it is the object in (a) after some time. And L2 learners, like L1 children, at first lose articles and fail to use the right tense in the sentences (a) and (c), and then progress to add them in and correct the tense

286

as sentence (b) and (d): a. Mami’s talk mens. * b. Mommy talked to the men. c. Daddy go? * d. Where did Daddy go? These are called “developmental errors”, which will disappear in later language development.

5. Conclusion Briefly speaking, knowing how children acquire an L1 and what the differences and similarities between L1 and L2 will surely, to some extent, benefit SLA. It can help teachers strengthen our English teaching. First, as second language beginners will pass through “silent period”, during this period teachers had better expose them comprehensible input, until they are ready to speak spontaneously. Second, teachers should have the idea that people may learn foreign language by different methods. Interest is the best teacher. Teacher can create a kind of atmosphere, which is similar to the native one. They can use vivid pictures, beautiful reading, and fluent intonation, to move the students. As an English teacher, I have ever used recorders, VCD, DVD, slides, projectors, etc to teach college English. Also during the lessons, I try to fulfill “interactive” teaching. All this let the students excited, put them in an easy atmosphere and keep them in a happy mood. Third, our teachers should realize that making errors is an inevitable part of learning. Psychologists concluded that when man is learning language, he is likely to make some mistakes regardless of whether he is learning a native language or foreign language. The important thing is man must experience a certain period. After a certain period, they will make fewer mistakes. What a teacher should do is to encourage them to speak, especially let them learn in an easy atmosphere, humor atmosphere, forgiving atmosphere. Only in this way can students have strong enthusiasm of learning English.

References 1. Brown, H. D. (1987). Principles of Language Learning and Teaching. New York: Prentice Hall International. 2. Brown, R. (1973). A First Language. Cambridge, Mass,: Harvard University Press. 3. Cook, V. J. (1973). The comparison of language development in native children and foreign adults. International Review Applied Linguistics, 11(1): 13–28. 4. d’Anglegan, A. & Tucker G. R. (1975). The acquisition of complex English structures by adult learners. Language Learning, 15 (2).

287

5. Dulay, H., Burt, M., and Krashen, S.(1982). Language Two. New York: Oxford University Press. 6. Ellis, R. (1985). Understanding Second Language Acquisition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 7. Hakuta, K. (1986). Cognitive Development of Bilingual Children. Los Angeles: University of California, Center for Language Education and Research. 8. Krashen, S., and Terrell, T. (1988). The Natural Approach. New York: Prentice Hall International, 1988. 9. Lenneberg, E. (1967).The Biological Foundations of Language. New York: John Wiley & Sons.

288

An Analysis of Effective Interaction in the ESL Classroom

Wen-Jun Zhang Department of International Cooperation and Exchanges, Jinhua Polytechnic, Jinhua, 321007, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper analyzes effective interaction in the English as second language (ESL) classroom. Influencing factors such as teacher types, students’ consciousness of participation and design of classroom activities were discussed. Teaching strategies of optimizing group work, improving the questioning strategies, and building interactions by applying multimedia and Internet, were suggested to promote the efficiency of the available interaction and improve the learning effectiveness and language acquisition.

Keywords: Effective Interaction; ESL Classroom; Teaching Strategies.

1. Introduction The value of learning a foreign language has become generally accepted in the world, having come a long way from a time when language teachers had to justify and fight for their inclusion in the curriculum. It is a key factor in language learning to take interaction as the target of the language, the information and the learning task, which focuses on teachers and classes. In the ESL classroom, the interaction should be regarded as the input source of the target language and the way of the individual’s participation in wider range of exchange community. And the interaction itself is a learning process, because it provides learners chances to generate and test the developing language rules. The purpose of interaction is to provide communication opportunities and timely feedback. ESL teaching should attach great importance to the interaction between the individuals and the learning situations so as to improve English learning efficiency, which is analyzed in this paper.

2. Second Language Acquisition and Interaction The early theories in SLA focused predominantly on the process in which the first language was acquired and applied that to learning a second language. Those theories included the Monitor Model, the Acculturation Model and

289

Conversational Analysis. The Monitor Model sees interaction as a source of ‘intake’ which then is internalized on a subconscious level as language is acquired [1]. The Acculturation Model views interaction as the method through which learners are integrated into a language community [2]. Conversational Analysis suggests that language acquisition is essentially learning how to interact, so discourse analysis can be used to study language learning [3]. While each of the above approaches consider interaction to some extent, Cook (1982) criticized them by applying the tenets of interactional psychology[4], which draw a connection between interaction and behavior, as being “black-box” models in that you see what goes in and what comes out, but the inner workings remain hidden. The use of discourse analysis in research, coupled with the view of interaction, as input provided an important foundation for what is known as the Interaction Hypothesis [5]. Its main premise states that learning takes place during conversational interaction as a result of negotiating for meaning. This focus on interaction has also been expanded by Gass (1997) [6] and some other scholars, all of whom have made notable contributions in exploring the role of interaction as the centerpiece of the Input-Interaction-Output (IIO) model of SLA. This model and the theories surrounding it view interaction as a key element of the language learning process helping direct the learners’ attention to language elements that do not “match” the target language [7].

3. Factors Impacting on Effective Interaction

3.1. Teacher types Teachers’ personality, inclusivity, and affinity could directly influence students’ enthusiasm of participating in the class. Teachers’ quality, to a large extent, decides the efficiency of students’ brain work in the classroom. Teachers’ discourse is essential for both the organization of classroom teaching and the students’ language acquisition. The quality of teachers’ discourse often directly affects and determines the quality of classroom teaching. The teaching ideas guide the positioning and principles of the course design, the options and implementations of teaching methods and the contents and effects of the teaching interactions.

3.2. Students’ consciousness of classroom participation Drawing students’ attention, delivering teaching aims and arousing existing experience are the most important initial teaching contents of increasing

290

students’ participation in the teaching process. In order to explore the factors of students’ silence in the classroom about Hong Kong middle school, Tsui (1996) surveyed 38 teachers, and he claimed that the main factors were that the students’ English level was low, and they were afraid of making mistakes, and they were laughed by classmates, and teachers were intolerant to silence so that they couldn’t give students enough time to think over problems, and teachers did not give the equal opportunity to each student to speak, and teachers’ language input was too difficult [8]. Therefore, it is a variety of factors rather than a single factor influencing students’ classroom participation.

3.3. Design of classroom activities The quality of classroom activities greatly influences the students’ participation during the interaction process. Interactive teaching strategy requires the interaction and communication between teachers and students, students and students, teachers and teaching materials, and language and culture etc. Teachers should apply the multimedia and network properly, and consciously design interesting classroom activities, which could promote the students to learn autonomously under the guidance of teachers, so as to fully motivate the students, and truly realize the interaction between teaching and learning, and to improve the efficiency and quality of ESL teaching. The design of classroom activities also needs to fully consider the number of students, the limited teaching hours, space and other factors, which could also easily affect the interaction. 4. Building Effective Interactions in the ESL Classroom Interactive Teaching Strategies propose methods and characteristics of language teaching, which requires teachers to set up the scene according to the students’ comprehensive ability, and to complete the teaching task through interaction and communication between teachers and students, students and students. Teachers need to insist on the principle of “student-centered”, and constantly strengthen their self-cultivation, and actively build interactive teaching situation, and fully improve the awareness of students’ participation in class, and provide a lot of opportunities for students to participate in the continuous communication. Thus it can help students learn and practice the basic skills of language. 4.1. Optimizing group work Group work is a useful way of improving students’ ability to participate in classroom activities. The purpose of interaction among students is to create an exchange platform about learning groups, so that the students would learn to

291

cooperate and communicate with each other. The form of group work can be varied, but it must follow certain principles to optimize the effect of language acquisition. Group members should be flexibly distributed, based on students’ different characters, ability, background and English level etc. The division and duties of the group members must be clearly explained. The roles should include leaders, recorders, speakers, making sure that each member has work to do. Teachers should dynamically manage the group work, and the team should be recombined when a task is completed, and the duties of members should change in turns. In the design of the specific classroom activities, students can be paired or grouped to practice talking about pictures, telling stories, retelling, describing objects, reading, performing, discussing, debating and composing all kinds of situational dialogues in English. 4.2. Improving questioning strategies In designing and implementing classroom activities, questioning is an important part. Teachers’ classroom questioning can be divided into demonstration questions and reference questions. The purpose of the demonstration questions is to help students practice language and syntax. These questions are the most common in ESL class, and the disadvantages are that students always memorize answers copied from the textbook, and they do not have their own thoughts. Reference questions can significantly increase and promote learners’ language output in class and then promote second language acquisition. The language that students respond to reference questions needs to be more complex and close to the natural context. At the same time, teachers should stipulate questioning rules and actively guide, inspire and promote students to ask questions skillfully so as to arouse more effective interactions. 4.3. Applying multimedia and network to build interactions Multimedia can help people present teaching materials with diagram, voice and image, and it makes well-prepared interactive activities more specific and vivid, which is helpful to create a good classroom atmosphere, and stimulate students’ interests of learning English. 4.3.1. Bulletin boards, blogs and email system Some common problems of the ESL class are found by teachers in the teaching process can be explained via opening the bulletin board online in the classroom. Students can post confusions in the learning process, express ideas or share ideas by writing a blog or e-mails. Between students and teachers, students and

292

students, they can make a one-way connection via e-mail system. These contents constitute the Asynchronous Interaction between students and teachers, and the aim is to provide support, observations and feedback of language learning for learners.

4.3.2. Discussion board Teachers create a topic and provide specific examples of language expression and the key words before the class, which can provide the students a platform to discuss and issue opinions along this thread. The first student gives opinions and the next student can continuously discuss along this line, other students constantly circulating. In the classroom, teachers open the discussion board, and students make a prepared speech in turn. The other students take notes, review and help to improve each other, and teachers give timely evaluation and guidance. In this way, students are not nervous, and not easy to fall behind and wander. At the same time, it also reviews, practices and consolidates the key grammar and vocabularies. 4.3.3. Appointed interaction Teachers can also organize the parallel classes from the same school or different schools, or invite people from special groups in the society, or foreign teachers, or even native speakers abroad as special ‘guests’ to interact in real time through the network video conference room (high cost, good signals and effect), SKYPE software (free, good signals and effect), Tencent QQ software (free, better signals and effect for short distances) and other ways. Although teachers use technologies to assist the English classroom teaching, sometimes it is difficult because of the limitation of some objective conditions, such as, the poor hardware equipment and slow running speed of campus network, the level of operating modern educational technology by language teachers, the extent of cooperation and participation of students and so on. However, with the progress of network technology, scholars in ESL field have fully recognized its power. New teaching models will be supported by modern information technology, especially network technology. It makes ESL teaching unlimited by time and place, and develops the tendency towards personalized learning and self- learning. 5. Conclusion The study revealed that the factors such as teacher types, students’ consciousness of participation, and the design of classroom activities can

293

obviously impact on the effective interaction in the ESL classroom. It included the teachers’ use of language and skills in the classroom and how they should interact with learners to support learning as well as the interactions among non- native speakers and their contributions to the learning process. It suggests that there are features that course designers and practices that instructors should incorporate in order to maximize the effectiveness of the interactions available in a second language learning environment. As technology enters the classroom, it was more than an enabler of interaction. Cases on how it effectively supported the interactions in an ESL classroom were analyzed. Teaching strategies of optimizing the group work, improving the questioning strategies, and applying multimedia and Internet were proved to be useful in building effective available interactions so as to improve the learning effectiveness and language acquisition.

References 1. Krashen S,The Monitor Model for Second Language Acquisition. In R.Gingras (Ed.), Second Language Acquisition & Foreign Language Teaching [M].Washington, D. C.: Center for Applied Linguistics, 1978: 1-26. 2. Schumann J,The Acculturation Model for Second-Language Acquisition. In R.Gingras(Ed.), Second Language Acquisition & Foreign Language Teaching[M].Washington D.C.: Center for Applied Linguistics,1978:1–10. 3. Hatch E., Discourse Analysis and Second Language Acquisition. In E. Hatch (Ed.), Second Language Acquisition: A Book of Readings. Rowley [M].MA: Newbury House, 1978:25–30. 4. Cook G., Language Acquisition from an Interactionist Perspective [J].Inter- language Studies bulletin-Ultrect, 1982(1):93–111. 5. Mackey A., Input, Interaction, and Second Language Development[M]. Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 1999(4):557–587. 6. Gass, S. M., (1997). Input, Interaction and the Second Language Learner [M]. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc. 7. Gass S.M., Selinker L. Second Language Acquisition: An Introductory Course (2nd Ed.) [M]. Hillsdale, New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc, 2000. 8. Tsui A.B. M., Reticence and Anxiety in Second Language Learning. In K. M. Bailey & D. Nunan (Eds.). Voices from the Language Classroom [M].New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996.

294

Text Mining Method in Qualitative Research and Application on Chan Ding Testimonies: After Chan Ding Education and Citizenship Instruction

Ya-Wen Chen Biosignal Processing Lab, Asia University, Taichung, Taiwan E-mail: [email protected]

Kang-Ming Chang Department of Photonics and Communication Engineering, Asia University, Taichung, Taiwan Department of Medical Research, China Medical University Hospital, China Medical University, Taichung, Taiwan. E-mail:[email protected]

Hsiao-Ting Jannis Su Department of Educational management and law, National Taipei University of Education, Taiwan E-mail:[email protected]

Hung-Meng Liang Department of Law, National Chung Cheng University, Taiwan E-mail:[email protected]

Qualitative research is a broad approach for studying social phenomena albeit being time- consuming when used for data analysis. There has been some research work in the application of text mining in traditional Chinese textual data in recent years. This paper investigates the performance of PolyAnalyst text mining software in traditional Chinese textual data. 200 Chan Ding practitioners’ testimonies were downloaded from Shakyamuni Buddhist Foundation website and analyzed. The keywords were extracted, counted and correlated automatically by the software. The results implied that the practitioners should follow the teaching and practice diligently, so that they will gain the power to change their body and life. This result was consistent with Chan Ding practitioners’ experience and previous Chan Ding studies. Therefore, PolyAnalyst text mining software is a rapid and reliable tool for qualitative research and has the potential to be applied in various fields of social research.

Keywords: Text Mining; Chan Ding; Qualitative Research.

295

1. Introduction Qualitative research is a broad approach to study social phenomena. However, it’s messy, ambiguous, and time-consuming to generate qualitative data analysis. Typical analytic procedures fall into seven phases: organizing the data, immersing in the data, generating case summaries and possible categories, coding the data, offering interpretations through analytic memos, searching for alternative understandings, and writing the report [1]. As time goes by, researchers have developed a variety of data management software programs which can assist with textual coding, clustering, and writing analytic memos. These programs indeed enhance the speed of analysis, but researchers have to deal with coding and write memos by themselves. Text mining is one of the sub- field of big data mining, which is with ability to extract information from structured and unstructured data [2]. Text mining employs algorithms for counting words. Some researchers have applied text mining into qualitative research projects, and considered text mining as a practical qualitative research method [3-6]. Megaputer’s PolyAnalystic is a Big Data analytic tool, which supports text mining in various languages, such as traditional Chinese [7]. In this research, we collected Chan Ding practitioners' testimonies from website, and tested the text mining ability of PolyAnalyst in traditional Chinese.

2. Material and Method A total of 200 Chan Ding practitioners' testimonies were downloaded from Shakyamuni Buddhist Foundation website (www.buddhachan.org/tw/witness). After eliminating duplicates and English articles, traditional Chinese textual data (N=197) was read manually and conducted by using the text-mining method with PolyAnalyst, which performed data cleaning, keywords extraction, and providing a set of related keywords for each word. Keywords extraction was based on PolyAnalyst intrinsic dictionary which contained terms and phrases that were commonly used. Each word from input data was automatically labeled and calculated. The result of keyword extraction was visualized with keyword cloud. The greater the frequency of a word, the larger the font size of the keyword in the cloud. There is no special meaning of the positioning of the terms in the cloud either the color. The correlation between keywords was visualized with link terms analysis.

296

Fig. 1. Keyword cloud. Keywords were extracted from all text and displayed by its frequency. The font size represented the frequency of the words.

Fig. 2. Link terms analysis. Keywords were extracted from all text and integrated. Each dot represented the frequency of the keyword. The thickness of lines represented the strength of correlation between keywords.

297

3. Result The number of keywords automatically extracted from all text was 4823, and appeared a total of 68865 times. Figure 1 showed the keywords frequently appeared: “heart” mentioned in 183 articles, “Master” mentioned in 157 articles, “Body” mentioned in 103 articles, and “Buddha” mentioned in 100 articles. Figure 2 showed the correlation between keywords. According to this figure, keywords were briefly separated into two groups, one was correlated with “Master”, while the other correlated with “Chan Ding practice”. The words correlated with “Master” were “Teaching”, “Buddha”, “Dharma”, and “Attending the Chan Ding group”, implying that many testimonies related to Master’s teachings. The words correlated with “Chan Ding practice” were “power”, “Body”, and “Life”, implying that many Chan Ding practitioners received power and changed their body and life. This result was consisted with manually reading, and confirmed by several experienced Chan Ding practitioners.

4. Discussion According to the text mining result from Chan Ding practitioners’ testimonies, after Chan Ding education and citizenship instruction, practitioners should follow the teaching of the Master, Buddha, and Dharma, and practice diligently. During the practice, practitioners can feel the power of Chan Ding and change their body and life. This result was consistency with previous researches [8]. This entire process suggests that PolyAnalyst text mining software performed well in traditional Chinese textual data. Utilizing text mining technique in qualitative research has been discussed for several years [9–12]. Some researchers admit that text mining was a feasible tool for qualitative data analysis. Since reading texts and counting words, whether it was performed by a human or a computer, did not remove the qualitative nature of the texts [5] . Based on the complexity of qualitative research, many researchers deal with representative but relatively small amount of samples. With the assistance of the text mining method, dealing with massive textual data is possible. It remarkably accelerates the speed of analysis, and the result would be more objective and consistent.

5. Conclusion In conclusion, PolyAnalyst provided a rapid and reliable traditional Chinese textual data mining method. Because of the popular big data mining technology,

298

text mining is with potential to be applied in various scientific realms, such as social marketing, psychological study, clinical medicine, and policy development.

Acknowledgements This work has been supported by the Ministry of Science and Technology of Taiwan (Grants nos. MOST 103-2632-H-468-001-MY2).

References 1. Marshall, C. and G.B. Rossman, Designing qualitative research. Sixth edition ed. 2016: Sage. 2. Fan, W. and A. Bifet, Mining big data: Current status, and forecast to the future. SIGKDD Explor. Newsl., 2013. 14(2): p. 1–5. 3. Himmel, W., U. Reincke, and H.W. Michelmann, Text Mining and Natural Language Processing Approaches for Automatic Categorization of Lay Requests to Web-Based Expert Forums. Journal of Medical Internet Research, 2009. 11(3). 4. Shah, S.G.S. and I. Robinson, Patients' perspectives on self-testing of oral anticoagulation therapy: Content analysis of patients' internet blogs. Bmc Health Services Research, 2011. 11. 5. Yu, C.H., A. Jannasch-Pennell, and S. DiGangi, Compatibility between Text Mining and Qualitative Research in the Perspectives of Grounded Theory, Content Analysis, and Reliability. Qualitative Report, 2011. 16(3): p. 730– 744. 6. Ranfagni, S., S. Guercini, and B.C. Camiciottoli, An interdisciplinary method for brand association research. Management Decision, 2014. 52(4): p. 724–736. 7. Megaputer Intelligence, I., PolyAnalyst:Data Mining. Text Mining. All in a single, intuitive package 2016. 8. Lo, P.-C. and M.-L. Huang, Exploring Preventive Power of Ten-Mailuns Actuation in Chan Ding. 2015. 9. Dann, S., Redefining social marketing with contemporary commercial marketing definitions. Journal of Business Research, 2010. 63(2): p. 147– 153. 10. Janasik, N., T. Honkela, and H. Bruun, Text Mining in Qualitative Research Application of an Unsupervised Learning Method. Organizational Research Methods, 2009. 12(3): p. 436–460.

299

11. Kang, D. and S.B. Moon, A Study on Informetric Analysis for Measuring the Qualitative Research Performance. Journal of the Korean Society for Information Management, 2009. 26(3): p. 377–394. 12. Ohsumi, N. and A. Yasuda, Reviewing textual data mining in japan. Sociological Theory and Methods, 2004. 19(2): p. 135–159.

300

An Empirical Study on Rural Household Biogas Policy in China

Long Xia School of Humanities and Social Sciences, North China Electric Power University, Baoding, Hebei, China Researcher of Beijing Energy Development Research Center, Beijing, China E-mail:[email protected]

Wei Wang School of Humanities and Social Sciences, North China Electric Power University, Beijing, China Researcher of Beijing Energy Development Research Center, Beijing, China E-mail:[email protected]

Wei-Chun Cui School of Humanities and Social Sciences, North China Electric Power University, Baoding, Hebei, China E-mail: [email protected]

Ai-Xue Tang School of public administration, Zhejiang University, Hangzhou, Zhejiang, China E-mail:[email protected]

Qin Zhu School of politics and Public Affairs, Zhongshan University, Guangzhou, Guangdong, China E-mail:[email protected] The effective implementation of the biogas policy in rural areas is beneficial to improve the ecological environment in rural areas. However, some bottlenecks are encountered in the process of implementation. This paper uses Taonan, in Jilin Province as an example to conduct field research and data analysis to determine the reasons why household biogas is underutilized. These reasons include high costs and labor consumption of post- maintenance and the farmers’ lack of knowledge and training about biogas technology. We promote the implementation of household biogas policy and the government should provide increased financial support, emphasize in advocacy and training; as well as change the mindset of “emphasize on reconstruction, ignore management” to provide increased attention to post management and service.

Keywords: Rural Household Biogas; Policy Implementation; Bottlenecks.

301

1. Introduction The purpose of this paper is: taking City Taonan as an example, describing the current utility status and problems of rural household biogas digesters in China; analyzing and determining the factors that affect willingness of using biogas digesters; putting forward constructive ideas and thoughts to promote implementation of rural household biogas policies. Empirical analysis is used in the paper. Logistic regression analysis is used in four levels such as: individual case characteristics, family factors, government and social factors to analysis the main factor that influence the use willingness of farmers. Finally, on the basis of summarizing the conclusions of the study, the recommendations and thoughts are discussed.

2. Data, Variables and Assumptions

2.1. Data specification These study samples derive from the investigation of rural biogas group of North China Electric Power University in October 2013 in parts of rural area of Jilin, TaoNan. The research grant 600 questionnaires to 10 villages, effectively recycling 493 questionnaires, the ratio of effective questionnaires was 82.2%. This investigation adopts the multistage-random-sampling method, involving 3 aspects---the personal fundamental characteristics, the condition of biogas utilization and biogas use, which has a wide coverage, thus the data obtained is representative to some extent.

2.2. Establish assumptions According to the analysis above, the existing research, and the purposes of this article, we make the following assumptions: Assumption 1, whether the farmers are willing to use their household biogas or not is affected by the number of labor in the home, the larger the number of labor force is in farmer’s home, more inclined to want to their construction site to use the farmers are; Assumption 2, whether the farmers are willing to use their biogas pool are related to the height of maintenance and management costs in late period, the higher the cost of maintenance and management is, the greater the probability that rural household biogas pool are abandoned is; Assumption 3, whether the government has carried on the related training measures to farmers on using pool largely influences the will of the using of biogas, farmers who have received relevant technology and safety knowledge training tend to make full use of their biogas pool.

302

3. Regression Analysis In order to analysis the influencing factors of farmers’ attitude towards the use of biogas, this paper takes “using biogas or not” as the dependent variable, using stepwise regression method to do Logistic regression, which means controlling the independent variables by gradually adding in them. The regression results are shown in Table 1.

Table 1. Logistic stepwise regression analysis results.

Variables Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Age 0.001 0.060 0.322 -0.331** (0.010) (0.499) (0.328) (0.129)

Basic Gender 0.191 0.366** -0.543 -0.603 personal (0.240) (0.184) (0.402) (0.507) informat Education 1.178*** -0.062 0.007 0.191 ion (0.205) (0.309) (0.339) (0.406) Political Affiliation -0.606*** -0.606*** -0.633*** -0.717*** (0.080) (0.105) (0.117) (0.147) Population -0.064 -0.008 0.196 (0.164) (0.170) (0.210) The number of labor 0.991*** 0.918*** 0.999*** Family (0.233) (0.243) (0.296) factors Revenue 0.494** 0.678** 0.830** (0.246) (0.264) (0.346) The total cost -0.003*** -0.003*** -0.003*** (0.001) (0.001) (0.001) Facilities -0.226 0.318 (0.328) (0.417) Government subsidies 1.432*** 1.512*** Govern (0.347) (0.411) mental Training 1.981*** 2.383*** factors (0.610) (0.713) Trouble-shoot -0.648 -0.934 (0.532) (0.602) Treatment of biogas -3.347*** Social residue and slurry (0.497) factors

_cons -1.652** -6.315*** -7.088*** -7.014** (0.865) (1.930) (2.291) (2.955) Notes: 1. Standard error in parentheses; 2. * to express P<0.1, ** to express P<0.05, *** to express P<0.01.

303

From the basic personal information point of view, there are four variables involved in the model, namely age, gender, education and political affiliation. As we can see, the impact of education on whether farmers use biogas is very significant in model 1, however, when the family, governmental and social factors put in, the effects become insignificant. We speculate that this is due to the cultural degree of individual farmers decline along with the propaganda and training provided by government. From the perspective of family factors, the number of labor force and annual income of farmers and whether farmers use are positively correlated, and the effect is very significant, which indicates that the more labor force and income tend to result in more use of biogas, which is consistent with the results of our survey. From the regression results of the government level data, the subsidies from government has a significant positive effect on whether farmers use the biogas. This is due to the more subsidies funded by government, the less economic burden farmers should bear, which can significantly mobilize the enthusiasm of farmers to use biogas digesters. In addition, the training also has a significant positive effect. Because farmers have not received professional training of biogas technology, so do not know how to properly use the biogas digesters has been built. If the government can be distributed to relevant personnel in rural digester technology to farmers on the technology and related safety knowledge about the daily management and maintenance of digesters, then farmers will naturally be more willing to use their own digesters have been built. From the social perspective, only the variable of “Treatment of biogas residue and slurry” is added to the model, and has a significant negative impact on the use of biogas. Due to the reduction of the amount of labor, the treatment of biogas residue and slurry has become a big problem, resulting in lots of biogas pools been abandoned.

4. Recommendations

4.1. Intensify support for the development of rural biogas Government and relevant departments should put more emphasis on and support the development of rural biogas. First, it should increase financial support. On the one hand, government should appropriately increase funding in rural biogas. On the other hand, it is supposed to expand the sources of funds. The introduction of market mechanisms may encourage the relevant enterprises and social organizations to invest in the construction of rural biogas. Meanwhile, it should ensure the farmers’ self-financing. Second, it is supposed to intensify

304

policy support. Utilization of legal, economic and administrative means can promote the construction of rural biogas. Formulation of relevant laws and regulations can guide and regulate the rational and orderly planning of construction of rural biogas digesters.

4.2. Increase advocacy on the rural biogas policy and safe use of biogas The promotion of biogas in rural areas is important for the construction of a new socialist countryside. On the one hand, the government should increase advocacy. The utilization of different ways like newspapers, leaflets, television, radio, cultural events and meetings can help farmers develop a deeper understanding of biogas’ economic, ecological and social benefits, to get real support from farmers. On the other hand, the government should print and distribute the materials about safe use of biogas to digesters’ users, to promote the safe use and management of biogas.

4.3. Focus on the training about related technology and knowledge of biogas First, it is supposed to help farmers understand the specific working principles and processes of biogas through lectures, conferences, field guide and other means. Second, farmers should be trained on biogas utilization so that digesters’ products can be utilized to the maximum extent [1]. Finally, measures should be taken immediately to solve various problems and difficulties facing in the process of using biogas, such as inadequate supply, security risks.

4.4. Pay attention to the subsequent management and services Apart from the construction of rural biogas digesters, government should pay more attention to the subsequent management and services [2]. It is supposed to strictly implement the rights and obligations of the subsequent management to promote sustainable development of rural biogas. On the one hand, government should build appropriate service outlets in rural areas according to the actual situation of each countryside, which help solve various problems facing in the process of using biogas and provide appropriate services for farmers timely. On the other hand, it is supposed to take full advantage of the strong role of market and gradually establish the rural biogas services whose characters are “social services, property management, and market-oriented operation ” [3].

305

5. Conclusion This paper promoted the implementation of household biogas policy in rural areas. The government should increase financial support and put more strength in advocacy and training, as well as changing the mindset of “emphasize on reconstruction, ignore management” to pay more attention to post management and service.

Acknowledgement This research was financed by China Scholarship Council and the fundamental research funds for the central universities (grant No. 2015ZD32), and supported by Special Items Fund of Beijing Municipal Commission of Education.

References 1. Wang Xiaolin. Analysis of government support in rural biogas construction–taking Minqin County in Gansu Province for an example. 2013,11,78–80. 2. Li Zhongmei. Research on the construction of rural biogas follow-up management system–Ningguo’s biogas follow-up services system construction as an example. 2013.41(16), 7361–7362. 3. Wang Haibin, Li Bin, Lu Hai, Cai Jingxing, Wen Meiyue. Problems and countermeasures of rural biogas project development existing in Guiyang, 2012, 40(9), 222–225.

306

Discussion on Design Training Courses for Clothing Enterprises

Xu-Bing Xua and Meng-Chao Zhaob College of Fashion and Design, Donghua University, West Yan’an Road No.1882, Shanghai, China, 200051 E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

This paper discusses the development and operation characteristics of the current domestic clothing enterprises, and proposes several improvements to reform higher fashion education to cater to the needs of domestic clothing enterprises in transition. Moreover, it is imperative that the creative talents trained are able to satisfy the demands of current clothing enterprises.

Keywords: Clothing Enterprise; Fashion Design; Brand; Fashion Designers.

1. Introduction With the economic and social development of the country, changes of life style and communication means also accentuate a transform of traditional clothing enterprises. From 2014 to 2015, several Chinese clothing companies that once oriented by trade and exporting has been consequently transformed in the wake of main textile industry, more specifically, primary extensive mode gradually improved to emphasize on innovation, technology, and building individual brand culture or management. Although during early period of transition for domestic enterprises, building of brand culture is still at the exploration stage, and international luxury brands continue to occupy predominantly in the fashion industry. large numbers of famous overseas fast-fashion brands keep up occupied at the Asian middle market by a extremely sudden and swift speed. From this above, domestic clothing enterprise just faces unpredictable industry prospects in fact. Dated back to 80s of last century, professional fashion education set up formally just among few universities and colleges, and belonged to the scope of art design education. The pervasive transition in the fashion industry certainly causes changes of fashion major. Therefore, in view of specific features of Chinese clothing companies, the construction and reform of fashion design

307

specialty should accordingly change with development of the industry. This paper discusses the development and operation characteristics of the current domestic clothing enterprises, and proposes several improvements to reform higher fashion education to cater to the needs of domestic clothing enterprises in transition.

2. Analysis on Features of Domestic Clothing Enterprises In the recent past, domestic clothing enterprises has generally oriented by production and processing, while price, quality and scale are the main factors to compete. There are many fashion brands established successively, and enterprise styles are mainly classified to four types: productive type, sales type, counseling type and capital type. However, for quite such a long period, domestic fashion brands operate by imitating western brands, so lack of fundamental management theories leads to the new replacing the old frequently. Besides, for overseas brands’ impact on domestic brands, Chinese fashion brands nearly survived for a short management cycle. [1] Based on the features above in the domestic industry, fashion design specialty education between Chinese universities and colleges should also shoulder the heavy responsibilities of training creative application talents, and reform of higher education must be enforced imperatively.

2.1. Conservative corporation operation at a typical family managing mode By comparison, western countries have early formed completely matured market concept and brand notion while domestic fashion brands started relatively late over the period of 90s in the last century. Yet these clothing companies still run with early corporation operation characteristics, like family managing mode etc, to a certain extent, outdated management modes would sweepingly hamper from corporation reform and transition. In addition, traditional clothing enterprises have always adopted obsolete personnel management means by far, which obviously seems inadequate to the present management of creative talents. For example, the frequent flow of talents results that fashion brand image cannot be formed cohesively.

2.2. Obsolete design concept and worship of western fashion brands In recent years, some representative fashion brands have readjusted enterprise development strategy, with lots of manpower, material resources and capital

308

design development input, as a result, corporation culture and brand image would be greatly reformed. Several large-scale textile enterprises begin to invest and establish new brands or agent brands, therefore, many local new fashion brands have then emerged. Nevertheless, there is still a widespread phenomenon to be seen that local fashion brands lose confidence in product design development, even most enterprises of the country would imitate famous western fashion brands from the aspects of style, color, and craft details, among which exists most badly is prevalence of plagiarism. At the meantime, the fast development of online sales channel also spurs this phenomenon. It even seems very common that many plagiarized products and hot items launched both online and at physical stores. All this can be explained that enterprises only blindly pursue short-term profits instead of right corporation transition, and it then exemplifies corporation proprietors have not formed their own developed management concept.

2.3. Shallow brand culture awareness and frequent flow of designers Since a initial set of higher fashion education from 1980s, large number of professional design talents have been cultivated among different universities and colleges including some of them to attend schools abroad. From the perspective of professional competence and technical skills, some Chinese fashion designers have actually obtained good artistic accomplishments and solid basic skills, yet job hopping phenomenon exists wingspread. According to a survey feedback, domestic fashion designers often complain that Chinese fashion enterprises fail to build consolidated corporation culture system and brand notion, then their toiling costs repeatedly do not pay back, or even have trouble in communicating with managers. From the angle of enterprises, employed designers have not implemented practical values, thus strong individuality is quite out of control for them. [3] All these reasons directly lead to shallow brand awareness.

2.4. Obscure brand style and dis-unified brand image Although some fashion brands of the country have been established long, collection designs have still constant disadvantages: such as single styles, low technical content and lack of brand corporation culture. In fact, quite a portion of customers have already been aware that most local fashion brands do not form explicit brand style, especially transformed production-type enterprises still remain adrift from production and design, consequently causing a loss to both sides. However, some individual designers possess design spotlight while lack

309

of capital and manpower still hinders from competing with intentional corporations. For the reasons given above, domestic fashion brands cannot form dis-unified brand image or kind of vagueness in brand styles.

3. A Discussion on Reform of Training Creative Talents Based on Clothing Enterprises’ Basic Features Basic courses of higher fashion education in our country concentrate on garment pattern design, garment structure design and apparel techniques design, with the combination of theoretical teaching and practical teaching contents, and collection design should be attached to the scope of pattern design and development, which then classified into menswear, womenswear and creative fashion design in view of certain clothing features. Practical teaching process integrated with three parts: pattern design, structure design and techniques design. Yet with the development of fashion corporations, original design theories and skills cannot again meet the requirements of latest industry, at this time, the most important task of higher fashion education is to thoroughly instruct current fashion corporations’ operation characteristics so that fashion education can conform to the necessities of transiting domestic industry.

3.1. The reform of classroom teaching methods The present higher fashion education still adopts the traditional mode of instruction and learning which remains only applicable to theoretical teaching, however, the subject of fashion actually focuses on visual art and means traditional teaching method is not adequate indeed. Apart from case method and instruction method, suitable interactive teaching can strengthen classroom efficiency. For example, after teachers explain design concept of casual womenswear and analyze cases of successful brands, students can be divided to groups then each group should finish teaching tasks. During the design process, students can positively communicate with other members, and then teachers put forward suggestions and instruction. Meanwhile, garment pattern design cannot only constrain to drawing, hopefully relatively real design products should be accomplished. More specifically, students of the same group may vote the most creative pattern and then finish garment-making by scale down (like ratio of 1:3) after cutting and stitching. Finally visual image can be directly perceived through the sense. Secondly, after finishing each certain design task, all groups can choose the most representative design product and discuss or comment. By instruction in the classroom, interactive teaching fully arouses student's enthusiasm and initiative instead of passive acceptations on design concept. In

310

addition, at the matter of reforming classroom teaching, domestic higher education could also draw lessons from classroom modes in the western countries, however, it does not mean students’ entire acceptance. For instance, as a worldwide fashion center, Italian fashion education often concentrates on succession and development of traditional art. Local students are often encouraged to design freely, which intuitive thinking take place of regular thinking during the process of creative design. Moreover, by use of present available materials students would invert flat drawing to three-dimensional notion, so actual teaching process accentuates potentials of garment styles and image.[2] But this type of teaching thinking mode generally lacks among most specialized teachers who in turn only pay much attentions to fashion drawings from the aspect of artistic effects, and meanwhile neglect basic features of garments as a type of commodity. All this above has resulted in the gap for many fashion designers between design concept and real products.

3.2. Re-adjustment and enrichment of teaching contents Although teaching contents of higher fashion education has already readjusted with the development of domestic clothing enterprises and design agency, there still exists a wide gap between real necessities of companies. Fashion teaching content has always conformed to a mode from fashion design basics to collection design and final design practice, yet emphasized appropriately on features of practical operation, integration of theory and practice has not been totally realized. Theoretical knowledge and practical operation are not completely consolidated. The physical process of product research for clothing enterprises exist big differences on categories, positioning and style. If courses cannot be targeted to adjust catering to market diversities, these would-be designers may feel at loss when they begin practical work. In response, fashion teaching contents could be adopted an analog type.[4] Analog type means instructing students to design fashion collections based on practical characteristics of product development for clothing enterprises. In details, student are acquired to determine brand style, design theme and design with respect to stimulate brand notion, corporation culture and garments style characteristics. Moreover, courses would also relate to fashion trend, inspiration resources research, application of color and fabrics, collection style development, coloring fashion drawing and pattern drawing, sample clothing making etc., which from course learning students can feel differences between practical product development and college assignment. The discussion of design project

311

can help students solve problems on stimulating brand design, and this type of teaching mode interprets concept of practice what you learn.

3.3. The combination of school-enterprise cooperation and studio teaching method In the recent years, there are many cooperation cases between higher colleges and famous clothing companies with considerable effectiveness. This kind of cooperation mode can strengthen a closer contact of the both sides, so fashion education and enterprise demands can be both connected closely. With an aim at solving problems of practical teaching process, students can receive valuable practical experiences, to some extent, it can be called second classroom of fashion education, which is regarded as a common mode at home and abroad. Secondly, several apparel colleges begin to adopt studio teaching mode, which studio actually indicates an organization titled by cooperated clothing companies, and tutors both from enterprises and universities are appointed to organize design projects. The combination mode between school-enterprise and studio teaching mode needs meet the following prerequisites: both sides define cooperation contents and clarify responsibilities with tutors of different major made up with for smooth cooperation. Then talents evaluation criteria should be completed in the process of cooperation and all participants (including tutors) put forward clear requirements. Besides, staff management of the whole project plays a key role for all participated cooperating enterprises. Concerning tutors the participation in this type of cooperation outside classroom can improve their professional knowledge and skills, in addition, expend professional view and professional quality.

3.4. The important role of multimedia information technology and internet platform in teaching process Multimedia information technology has been widely applied in the present field of education, by multimedia presentation teachers can show more resources from different channels, such as words, images and videos, and combined presentations can leave a deeper impression compared to single static display. For students of fashion design major, acquisition of latest trend information and runaway shows treated as the first priority. Because of limited approaches, some professional websites need pay certain costs to subscribe related fashion information. Thus, a few representative fashion colleges (like Beijing Institute of Clothing Technology, Donghua University) have purchased professional services and information to support academic resources.

312

4. Conclusion In comparison with higher education of fashion design in the western developed countries, domestic fashion education certainly exits some problems no matter on the matter of teaching thinking or modes. In the recent years, for urgent requirements of domestic clothing enterprises’ transition and new brands’ building, with respect to features of cooperation managements and product design development, professional fashion system seems very imperative. Meanwhile, referring to teaching experience of famous abroad fashion colleges, professional fashion education system will be linked closely to fashion industry.

References 1. Yuying Liang, A Brief Discussion on Professional Fashion Education and Corporation Development, Art Education on Research, 2011.08. 2. Xiaogang Liu, A Comparison on Higher Fashion Design Education of China and Italy, Art of Design, 2009.09.A. 3. Yan Zhang, A Brief Discussion on Clothing Enterprises’ flexible management on Designers, Journal of Teaching and Management, 2014.1. 4. Ying Chen, Curriculum Reform on Courses of Fashion Design Based on Training Creative Talents, Textile and Apparcl Education, 2013.4. 5. Kai Liu, Ying Zhou, Curriculum Reform on Fashion and Accessories Design Under Modes of Diversified Employment, Textile and Apparcl Education, 2013.8.

313

An Empirical Study of the Effectiveness of Phonetic Teaching on Listening Ability

Cai-Xia Wang and Ning Zhang Maritime College, Shandong Jiaotong University, Weihai, Shandong, P.R.China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper analyzes the effect of phonetic teaching on students’ listening ability and determines the correlation between the level of students’ pronunciation and listening ability, with sophomores in a marine college as experimental subjects. After the conclusion of the experimental teaching phase, data is collected and input into Statistical Product and Service Solutions (SPSS) software, which carries out descriptive statistics of the data, independent samples t-test, paired samples t-test and Pearson correlation analysis. The results demonstrate that the listening ability of the students in the experimental class with phonetic training is significantly different from those in the control class, and the students’ pronunciation level and listening ability is significantly and positively correlated. Key words: SPSS; Phonetic Teaching; Listening Ability.

1. Introduction After graduation, most students in marine college work on international vessels. Using English to communicate in real time is the characteristic of working on board, so the requirement for the crew’s listening ability is becoming higher and higher. An important factor that affects listening ability is pronunciation. Fan Lianyi and Nang Honghan (2005) confirmed that the phonetic teaching was pretty helpful to the listening comprehension of non- English major college students [1]. Guo Yan (2007) analyzed the correlation between the scores of listening and pronunciation [2]. In recent years, with the rapid development of computer technology, as well as the importance of English as an international language, the second language acquisition research has developed rapidly both at home and abroad. One of the eight hot issues in the research of the second language acquisition is the second language phonetic teaching (Wang Lifei, Sun Xiaokun, 2007) [3]. Learners’ pronunciation is considered to be one of the most important factors(Chen Yan, 2014) [4].

314

The study is designed to explore the effect of phonetic teaching on the listening ability of Marine College Students. The phonetic teaching is given to the experimental group and the relevant data collected. To deal with the large amount of data is a delicate and tedious work, so a powerful software, Statistical Product and Service Solutions (SPSS) is employed in this study, which has widely applied in various fields.

2. Phonetic Teaching In this study, Thornbury’s top-down approach in phonetic teaching is adopted, which focuses on practical, simple theory. By taking this method, students’ attention is led from the correct pronunciation of a word to the coherent discourse. It puts much emphasis on liaison, loss of plosion, assimilation, stress, rhythm, pause, intonation etc.

3. Research Design

3.1. Research questions This study mainly focuses on the following three questions: (1) Is there a difference in the listening comprehension test at the end of the semester between the experimental group and the control group? (2) Is the Students' pronunciation level related to their listening ability? If so, how much are they related? (3) What is the view of the experimental group students to the phonetic teaching?

3.2. Research subjects The research subjects are male sophomores of two natural classes in a marine college. Before the experiment, the research subjects were carefully selected. There were no significant differences in average English comprehensive ability, listening ability and pronunciation level in these two classes, one as the experimental group, 38 people and the other as the control group, 39 people. The students in these two classes were given pronunciation training for a semester with same periods by the same teacher, using the same teaching materials. Due to the semi-military management in the marine college, students’ learning time after class was basically the same.

3.3. Research instruments and data collection The instruments used in this study were the first test, post test and interview. The subjects’ listening ability and pronunciation level before and after the

315

experiment were graded. All the subjects were interviewed after the experiment. The test papers for the first test and post test for the listening ability and pronunciation level came from listening comprehension test and oral part respectively of Public English Test System (PETS3). The teacher who gave the grade was experienced in PETS test. The subjects’ scores were converted into hundred mark system. After all data were entered into the computer, descriptive statistics of the data, independent samples t-test and paired samples t-test were carried out to verify the subjects’ listening ability before and after the experiment by using statistical software (SPSS 17.0). Pearson correlation analysis on the pronunciation scores and listening scores of the subjects was carried out. Then the subjects’ attitudes and opinions in the experimental group on phonetic teaching were obtained by interviews.

4. Results and Discussion

4.1. Comparison on two groups’ listening ability after the experiment

Table 1. Descriptive statistics of listening ability after the experiment Between the experimental group(EG) and control group(CG).

Group statistics

Mean Standard Standard error Subjects N Value deviation of mean value

Listening EG after the 38 78.1053 7.30712 1.18537 scores experiment CG after the 39 73.8462 6.79605 1.08824 experiment

316

Table 2. Independent samples t-test of listening ability after the experiment between EG and CG.

After a semester of teaching experiment, the subjects were tested on listening ability for the second time. The results were tested by independent samples t- test, as shown in Table 1 and Table 2. As it can be seen from Table 1, there is a certain gap on the listening scores between the experimental group and the control group. The mean value is 78.105 (SD=7.307) and 73.846 (SD=6.796) respectively. As it can be seen from Table 2, Levene test of variance equation F is .176, Sig. is 0.676, t is 2.649, mean difference is 4.259. Sig.( bilateral) is .01, which is less than significant level 0.05. It indicates that there is a significant difference between the two independent samples, in other words, about the listening scores after the experiment, there is a significant difference between the experimental group and the control group. In addition, the average difference between the 95% confidence interval does not contain 0, also indicates the difference between the two groups is significant.

4.2. The correlation between pronunciation scores and listening scores in the experimental group after the teaching experiment Correlation analysis was made on pronunciation scores and listening scores. To be concise, the results were summarized and sorted out and the correlation coefficient between pronunciation scores and listening scores was shown in Table 3.

317

Table 3. The correlation coefficient between pronunciation scores and listening scores.

A B C D Pearson correlation coefficient 0.682** 0.787** 0.677** 0.649** Sig.(bilateral) 0.002 0.000 0.000 0.001 N 38 38 39 39 ** At.01 level (bilateral) was significantly correlated A: pronunciation scores and listening scores in the experimental group before the experiment B: pronunciation scores and listening scores in the experimental group after the experiment C: pronunciation scores and listening scores in the control group before the experiment D: pronunciation scores and listening scores in the control group after the experiment

As it can be seen from Table 3, the overall trend is: whether the experimental group or the control group, whether it is the former test results or post test scores, pronunciation scores and listening scores were significantly and positively correlated. There is a high correlation between the level of students' pronunciation and their listening ability, which may be related to the students’ hometown in our college. In recent years, more and more marine students come from western region and remote mountain area. According to incomplete statistics, these students account for 1/2, who have a relatively poor command of English. What’s more, students are almost male in a marine college due to the special nature of navigation. There is a gender difference in English learning, generally speaking, female learners’ language acquisition ability is better than male learners. Another explanation is that pronunciation level has a greater impact on listening ability and the correlation between them is more significant, compared with other factors such as listening strategies and other factors affecting the level of listening when learners have a poor listening ability. 4.3. The students’ attitudes towards phonetic teaching At the end of the experiment, the subjects in the experimental group were interviewed. 94% students think that their pronunciation level has been greatly improved because of the phonetic teaching. When they were asked about the impact of the phonetic teaching on their listening ability, some students said, “My pronunciation was poor before, what the foreigners talked sounded strange to me. After the phonetic training, it’s much easier and more accurate for me to distinguish the words I heard.” 5. Conclusion According to the above quantitative and qualitative analysis, it shows that phonetic teaching plays a great role in improving the listening ability of the

318

students in the marine college. Students’ pronunciation level and listening ability are significantly and positively correlated. At present, the teaching tasks of Marine College are heavy, and students' learning pressure has been very great because of theory courses and trainings for all kinds of certificates. Owing to the close relationship between pronunciation level and listening ability, English pronunciation as a free selective course is recommended if the normal teaching plan in a marine college is not able to squeeze time for it. In this way, students with poor pronunciation may have the opportunity to improve their pronunciation, and then their listening ability can be improved at the same time. There are limitations in this study, for example, the experiment time of phonetic teaching is only one semester, and the time is relatively short; The number and the type of research subjects are limited; In this experiment, while taking all possible measures to control variables, it is very difficult to completely control all variable factors.

References 1. Fan Lianyi and Nang Honghan. A survey report on English phonetic teaching to non-English major students. Journal of Xi'an College of Foreign Languages, 2005,(12): 22–24. 2. Guo Yan. An Empirical Study on the Necessity of College English Phonetic Teaching, 2007(11): 46. 3. Wang Lifei and Sun Xiaokun. Progress in the study of second language acquisition in foreign countries. Foreign language and foreign language teaching, 2007,(4):25–29. 4. Chen Yan. A Research on the Relativity between English Phonetic Factors and English Listening Comprehension. Overseas English 2014(1).

319

Rethink the Curriculum for Furniture Design Inspired by the Teaching of Three Knowns from Mo-Tse

Ting Wang1, a, Xiao Hui Wang2, b and Xiao Jun Liu1, c 1College of Art, Xi’an University of Architecture and Technology, Xi’an, Shaanxi, 710055, China

2Xi’an Polytechnic University, Xi’an, Shaanxi, 710048, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

The rapid development of the social economy has in turn led to a rapid development of the furniture industry. This paper rereads the three knowns from Mo-tse, an ancient scholar with similar popularity to Confucius, to provide pedagogical activities of furniture design. The enlightenment of the three knowns from Mo-tse clarifies the ideology and objectives of teaching reforms. Therefore better teaching effects have been achieved to improve understanding, improve spoken knowledge by logical reasoning and achieve real personal knowledge.

Keywords: Understanding; Knowledge Derived from Logical Reasoning; With Real Personal Knowledge.

1. Introduction In the three knowns from Mo-tse, an ancient scholar, he believes that there are three ways to obtain knowledge that is understanding, knowledge derived from logical reasoning, with real personal knowledge. Understanding is to obtain knowledge from others (the ancients, the pre-ancestors, and the masses). Knowledge derived from logical reasoning is people make/draw their conclusions from what they hear, what they see and materials through thinking, deducing and imagining, coming to reasonable conclusions. With real personal knowledge is people gain the knowledge from real experience and practice. Three knowns have played very important roles for people to absorb knowledge and improve themselves. Understanding, knowledge derived from logical reasoning, with real personal knowledge, the three things indispensable and complementary to each other. As educators, it has significant meaning to reread them. How to activate ‘three knowns’ in their classroom and curriculum it has much more realistic significance. People are most familiar with furniture that is a professional industry product. It has a close relationship with every person’s life. With the development of social economy and people’s living conditions are getting better,

320

furniture has attracted more attention from common people. Consequently, furniture industry has got the attention from the market and develops rapidly. Furniture design is one of the research direction in industry design and one important course that industry design students need to learn well. Meanwhile, Furniture design is the important objective students learn, work and develop. How to make students benefit from the subject is one of the questions that teachers need to think and explore seriously. The author intends to discuss my viewpoints from my classroom teaching practice.

2. Consolidating the Understanding No man is born wise or learned. Only through learning for knowing, man can become more and more mature. From youth age to aspiring 30, we can get lot of knowledge from what you hear and what you see. It is this knowledge that directs our future and life. Understanding is one of the major forms of traditional education and classroom teaching. “The teachers teach and the students learn”. In different historical periods and different countries, from kindergarten to high education, knowing plays an important role. Furniture design, understanding mainly represents teachers’ conveying the knowledge and students receiving the knowledge. In order to enforce knowing, the author attempts to practice. The main contents are the followings.

2.1. Diversified teaching method Only a platform, a blackboard and a box of chalks of teaching conditions were very backward in the past. But now, many universities have been equipped with advanced multimedia classrooms, which provide rich teaching methods. In furniture design classroom, the author uses the traditional method of teaching as well as adds proper and appropriate high-definition pictures and videos as supplementary material. It forces the students use all the senses to learn. Diversified teaching method is able to attract students’ attention and show the teaching content vividly. It also helps students better understand the knowledge of teacher saying.

321

2.2. Rich classroom contents The students want to obtain more knowledge from their teachers, which require their teacher to enrich his/her classroom contents. The contents of furniture design includes the basic knowledge of furniture design, the development of furniture home and abroad, the future development of modern furniture, the classical design cases and students’ selected works. In order to let the students learn and understand this knowledge easily, the author design her courses carefully. Inside the classroom, we need to present the language attraction to make it sound beautifully. In addition, carefully design the reference tool- PowerPoint. Modern science indicates, in the complex and high load of information, 87% of information is obtained from people’s visual organs. Therefore, in the furniture design classroom, beautiful and well-designed PPT becomes more important. Word processing, table information and visual information all need more careful editing and design to explain each chapter well. Diversified forms of teaching and rich teaching contents can build up a full class, builds a fundamental knowledge of furniture design to consolidate understanding.

3. To Enforce Knowledge Derived from Logical Reasoning The British educator Mr. Spencer once said, “Individual development process should be encouraged during the educational process. Students are encouraged to explore, to reason, less instructions and more guidance for them to make self- exploration”.In furniture design class, to enforce knowledge derived from logical reasoning is one of the aspects the authors teaching reform attempts to do.

3.1. In-class discussion and questions raising Teachers are the classroom organizers; students are the participants, the more opportunities for students to participate, the more chances for them to arouse students' desire and passion. During the teaching process of furniture design, the author attempts to make teacher-dominated classroom into teacher student total say class. According to different chapters and teaching contents, the teachers can throw the questions anytime and students need to respond to them promptly. The teachers analyze, summarize and give his/her opinions or organize all the students to discuss together. Teachers may choose some questions to organize the students to discuss together and in groups in some classes. Special time will be set aside to ask group representatives to state their own ideas and opinions. Students will present

322

their views and opinions. They can learn from each other and supply each other’s needs. The author often encourage, prompt and remind students to voice their personal views, emphasizing not repeated ideas and flow from each other. Initially, students have to be forced into thinking, to voice their ideas individually. As time goes by, an independent thinking habit and ability has been formed.

3.2. Give full attention to market research Traditional college education is a reasonably limited, which is independent of mundane reality. But the modern education should adapt to the market demand, and conform to the social needs of talents cultivation target to improve pertinence and effectiveness of talents cultivation. So this will require us should pay attention to classroom teaching, theory research, practical productions and real market training in the process of teaching students. Furniture itself is a practical design. When we design it we should from practicality and the furniture should be some demand in the market. It isn’t a high-caliber product of imaginative creation. The author emphasized the importance of market in class. Before going on, the students should firstly do market research. Based on market investigation and analysis, the students start design work. And on the basis of the repeatedly investigation student’s design also gradually becomes mature and complete. Through market research, students learn the knowledge outside the classroom and have different thinking and reflections. These also lay a solid foundation for them to step outside the university, step into the society and integrate into the society.

4. Activating with Real Personal Knowledge Famous educator Tao Xing Zhi thinks, “being with real personal knowledge is the foundation of all knowledge,” understanding; Knowledge derived from logical reasoning must follow the being with real personal knowledge. He emphasizes the importance of real experience in students' education. In 1927, in his book, the Action is the start of knowing, he wrote “More attention has been paid to understanding; which has summarized all the knowledge. Being with real personal knowledge has been abandoned outside the door.” With the passing of time, we are filled with emotions. What Mr. Tao signed in near death today and why not? So in furniture design class, the author wants to achieve Mr. Tao’s dreams and desires and adopts the following methods to activate with real personal

323

knowledge and makes students get active learning and reach a well teaching effect.

4.1. Students make models Design is different from other majors, pure theoretical teaching can enhance students' theoretical levels, but lack of practical design, can only make "an armchair strategy, a castle in the air". The author emphasizes students practice, the training and improvement of good hands-on ability. The students conduct their design under the guidance of teachers and convert their design scheme into design paper and physical models. In this process, firstly, students have to fully blend and understand what the teacher conveys of theoretical knowledge. Then, the combination what they have learned and their ideas are conceived their design scheme. Next, the students should draw their design into the paper. At last, through the efforts of the hands make a seeable, touchable and usable physical model coming from design scheme on the paper. The majority of post-90s students have never touched the basic tools such as electric saw and planer before they made the furniture models. Due to the incidental findings of the author, the students born from one-child families not only are not afraid of different difficulties, but also conquer them by themselves. It is really beyond the author's imagination, and proves man's potentials can surpass his/her imagination. Teachers have the responsibility to activate every student's potential and let them learn more consciously.

4.2. Everyone participate in exhibition When every one sees his/her first furniture finished product, happiness is unexplainable. Apart from joy sharing, students are willing to share their products. At this time, a bigger stage should be provided to student opportunity to show them to reactivate every one's desire. After the design class is over, the students' furniture exhibition will be held. From exhibition design to poster design to the final product shows, all the specific jobs will be completed by the monitors. Every classmate will participate in it and reap the benefit from it.

4.3. Mutual competition Apart from the design model and the students' furniture exhibition, the author will organize students to participate in relevant design activities. Young students show great enthusiasm to the competition, through which they can demonstrate themselves and prove their abilities.

324

There is a famous saying in Washington library wall, “I hear and then I forget, I see and then I remember, I do then I understand”. Through students' furniture models and the homework exhibition organized by the monitor, students participate in furniture competitions and their potentials have been realized and passion to learning has been inspired. The desire has been activated.

5. Conclusion All in all, teaching is not the simple teaching and learning. Teachers are not the dominant powers. They are the organizers of teaching activities and students are the active participants of activities. In the era of creativity and innovations, it has profound realistic meaning to reread three knowns, to reinterpret “understanding; knowledge derived from logical reasoning; with real personal knowledge”.

Reference 1. Tao Xing Zhi, Famous Education Essays of Tao Xing Zhi [M].Beijing: Education Science Press, 2012.(In Chinese)

325

Response of Elementary School Students to Earthquake Disasters — A Case Study in Yushu, Qinghai Province

Ben-Yong Wei and Huan-Jie Wu Institute of Geology, China Earthquake Administration, Beijing, 100029, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper utilizes a case study of Yushu, Qinghai Province, a region affected by the Ms 7.1Yushu earthquake in 2010, to analyze the response level of elementary school students after the earthquake disaster through a questionnaire survey. The results demonstrate that the response level of elementary school students to earthquake disasters is low in the studied region, with an average response scoring rate of only 0.43. The relatively undeveloped economy and low education levels are the major limiting factors in the improvement of response capabilities in the region. Several suggestions to improve disaster awareness and response capabilities are discussed.

Keywords: Response; Questionnaire Survey; Earthquake; Qinghai.

1. Introduction Earthquakes are among the most feared and destructive of all natural disasters. The seriousness of the effects of earthquakes on human society has prompted concern from governments and natural scientists and structural engineers [1]. Understanding the public’s response to earthquake disaster is increasingly recognized as an important strategy for decreasing vulnerability and improving social safety. China is frequently affected by earthquakes, which have the potential for devastating effects across most of its territory. The damage caused by earthquakes has been considerable, both economically and in human lives lost. It is clear that in an area facing high earthquake risk, such as China, strengthening the public’s response capability to disasters, especially emergency response when a disaster occurs, by improving risk perception and adopting specific protective behaviors, is as essential as mitigating the risk through engineering or architectural works designed to make areas safe. However, studies on the Chinese public’s responses to earthquakes are less common. Because of severe impacts of huge earthquakes such as the 2008 Wenchuan earthquake, studies on risk perceptions of and responses to

326

earthquakes have gained greater attention in China[2–5]. However, with the exception of those focusing on the areas affected by the Wenchuan earthquake, studies on the Chinese public’s perception of and response to earthquakes remain limited, especially in regions dominated by national minorities. Therefore, it is essential to conduct additional empirical and theoretical research to improve understandings of the Chinese public’s disaster response behavior. Primary and middle school students are typical vulnerable groups in society and are more likely to be hurt. In view of above, this study examines the response of elementary school students to an earthquake disaster in Yushu Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture, Qinghai Province and the area worst affected by the Ms 7.1 earthquake in 2010, using a survey questionnaire.

2. Research Area This study was conducted in Yushu, the area worst affected by the Ms 7.1 Yushu earthquake in 2010. The area affected by the earthquake was as large as to 35,862 km2 and covered 27 towns in 7 counties. The earthquake caused massive losses of life and property. By May 30, 2010, the earthquake had left 2,698 people dead, 270 missing, over 10000 injured, and 246,842 affected. Large numbers of buildings were destroyed, such as private homes, schools, health facilities, and office buildings. The research area is located in southwest Qinghai, the hinterland of Qinghai-Tibet Plateau. The average altitude is over 4,000 meters, producing an alpine climate. Animal husbandry is the primary industry. The economy is relatively underdeveloped, and the infrastructure is poor. The research area is also a multi-ethnic region, with the Tibetan population accounting for 97% of the total. In addition, religion is very popular in the studied area, and the religious member accounts for 3%–5% of the total population.

3. Data and Method

3.1. Questionnaire survey The present study relies on a questionnaire-based survey conducted in Yushu in March 2011. To assess the response of elementary school students to the Yushu earthquake, a 18-question survey was administered to individuals in Yushu, the area most affected by the earthquake. The questionnaire comprises four parts (Table 1): 1) the emergency response to the Yushu earthquake; 2) post-disaster emotional regulation; 3) post-disaster information identification; 4) the personal characteristics of the respondents.

327

Table 1. Structure of the questionnaire used to survey area respondents.

Components Contents Escape measures from earthquake, self and Emergency response mutual aid Response Emotion regulation Emotion affected and recover to disaster Information Attitude and distinct capability to earthquake identification rumor Socio-demographic characteristics, such as Respondent Personal information age, gender, ethnic, education, etc.

Elementary school students (4–6 grades) were selected as the respondents in this study. The respondents were selected by a combination of cluster and random sampling methods. A total of 650 questionnaires were completed among the respondents in Yushu, and the investigation sites span 6 Counties, 15 towns and 17 schools. Because 78 respondents did not complete the questionnaire, the final sample contained information on 572 respondents. The overall response rate in this study was 88.31%. The sample size is sufficiently large to meet the requirements of a 95% confidence level and 0.05 sampling error.

3.2. Data procedures The survey responses were entered in the Epidata Management System, a piece of survey data management software, to construct a standard database on earthquake responses. Then, we estimated the response level of elementary school students using statistical analysis. This study defines response capability P as an index reflecting individuals’ overall response levels to earthquakes. The index P can be divided into three parts, emergency response Pej (j was the number of questions related to emergency response), emotion regulation Pcm (m was the number of questions regarding emotion regulation), and information identification Phn (n was the number of questions concerning information identification). Therefore, the response capability Pi of respondent i can be expressed as follows:

(1) Pi = ∑ piej + ∑ picm + ∑ pihn

Because the questions eliciting information on the response components have only one answer and the response options were based on a three-point scale, to quantitatively assess an individual’s response level to earthquakes, we assign scores to the response options according to the following criteria: 1) Response options for questions regarding attitudes are assigned scores from 0-3

328

according to the degree to which it affects the individual’s response level. 2) Where the question only has one correct answer, a score of 3 is assigned to the correct answer, 0 otherwise. Moreover, we were also able to determine the ideal scores for a respondent’s response level, had the most reasonable answers to the questions been selected. Therefore, this study defines the ratio of the fact score to the ideal score as the scoring rate, which indicates the true response capability of the participant. The larger the scoring rate, the higher the response level to earthquake disaster is.

4. Results and Discussions

4.1. Comprehensive scoring rates of response components Fig. 1 depicts the scoring rates for the local public’s response to earthquakes. Regarding the three response components, the average scoring rates are all low, at 0.35 (emergency response), 0.65 (emotion regulation) and 0.35 (information identification). If we look at the comprehensive score, the average comprehensive score for the local public’s response level is 23.37, much lower than the ideal score (54.00). And the average comprehensive scoring rate is only 0.43.

Emergency response

0.35

0.35 0.65 Information identification identification

Fig. 1. Scoring rates of earthquake response components

Table 2 presents the distribution of the comprehensive scoring rates for the local public’s response. Participants with scoring rates below 0.30 account for 14.00% of the total. The proportion of participants with scoring rates between 0.31 and 0.50, reach up to 61.00%. Participants with scoring rates between 0.51

329

and 0.70, account for 23.00% of the total. Participants with scoring rates over 0.70 (indicating a better response level to earthquakes) only account for 2.00% of all respondents. This indicates that the overall response capability of local elementary school students to an earthquake event is low.

Table 2. Comprehensive scoring rates of respondents.

Scoring rates ≤0.30 0.31-0.50 0.51-0.70 >0.70

Percentage of sample/% 14.00 61.00 23.00 2.00

4.2. The Reasons for the low response level to earthquakes Based on the results above, the overall response capability of local elementary school students to earthquake disaster in the studied area is low. The average response scoring rate is only 0.43. This earthquake response characteristic is highly related to the social, economic, cultural and political environment of the studied area. First, the local economy is relatively underdeveloped. The GDP of the Yushu is only 2.55 billion RMB in 2009, which means that it ranks 28th among the 30 autonomous prefectures in China. Due to the lower standard of living, it is difficult for individuals to take the measures necessary to cope with natural disasters. Second, although some policies have been implemented to improve education levels in minority dominated areas, the local education level remains much lower than the national average. Dropout rate is still high, which makes it difficult for the local population, especially for the elementary school students to increase their hazard knowledge or improve their response capability.

4.3. Policy implications The relatively underdeveloped economy and education level are the basic factors limiting the potential to improve the local public’s response capability in the studied area. It is necessary to improve local society’s disaster awareness and response capability by promoting the development of local economy and education level, increasing investments in public awareness campaigns and trainings about earthquake knowledge and earthquake disaster-coping skills. Moreover, elementary school students, which are in general the disadvantaged groups in society, are more vulnerable and less likely to respond effectively when faced with natural hazards. Therefore, it is also important to implement policies specifically targeting disadvantaged groups in society to improve their disaster awareness and actual response capability such as training campaigns.

330

5. Conclusion The present study aimed to investigate the response level of elementary school students to earthquake disasters using a survey questionnaire in Yushu Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture, which was the area worst affected by the Ms 7.1 earthquake in 2010. The results showed that the earthquake response capability of elementary school students in the studied area is low. The participants with scoring rates below 0.50 account for 75% of the sample. The relatively underdeveloped economy and education level are the basic factors limiting the potential to improve the local people’s response capability in the studied area. As the vulnerable groups, elementary school students are in much more vulnerable positions in society and tend to have lower response capability when facing natural hazards. It is also important to develop specific policies that target disadvantaged groups in society to improve their disaster awareness and actual response capability.

Acknowledgments This work is supported by grant No. IGCEA1406, 1108 of Institute of Geology, China Earthquake Administration.

References 1. I. Burton, R.W. Katers, G.F. White (eds.), The Environment as Hazard (Guilford Press, New York and London, 1993). 2. G.W. Su, Z.J. Ma, R.J. Wang and Y. Wang, General features and their disaster-reduction education implications of the earthquake disaster cognition and responses of the social public in Ms 8.0 Wenchuan earthquake-hit area: a case study from Deyang prefecture-level city, Sichuan Province, Seismology and Geology, 30, 877–894 (2008). (in Chinese) 3. B.Y. Wei, G.W. Su, F.G. Liu, Public response to earthquake disaster: a case study in Yushu Tibetan Autonomous Prefecture, Natural Hazards, 69, 441– 458(2013).

331

4. B.Y. Wei, G.W. Su, Q.Wu, W.H. Qi, W.J. Zhang, Features of awareness and response of rural households and their inter-household differences to earthquake disasters: a case study of the disaster area of Ms 6.4 Ning’er, Yunnan earthquake in 2007, Journal of Natural Disasters, 21, 116– 124(2012). (in Chinese) 5. Y.C. Yu, Q. Zhou, C.Y. Wang, Analysis to the characteristics of cognition and response of the public to Wenchuan Ms 8.0 earthquake disaster: a case study from Mianxian County, Shaanxi Province, Seismology and Geology, 32, 269–281(2010). (in Chinese)

332

Problem-based Learning Approach for the Teaching Microcontroller

Shu-Yan Zhang, Ji-Ya Tian and Juan Zhu Electric Information College, Changchun Guanghua University Changchun,Jilin Province, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper proposes and expounds a new reform teaching method encompassing the three aspects of teaching content, teaching method and assessment method, based on the analysis of the present teaching situation of MCU courses. This allows for the course to adapt to the current needs of training of application-oriented undergraduate talents, improving teaching qualities and arousing students’ learning interest. Practice has demonstrated that the curriculum teaching reform has achieved comparatively better teaching results and greatly improved the students’ learning, practical, problem analysis, problem solving and team cooperation abilities. Keywords: MCU; Teaching Reform; Teaching Process; Competence Cultivation.

1. Introduction Single-chip microcomputer is also known as micro controller (MCU). Because of its small size, low price, strong control ability and other advantages, it is widely used in automatic measurement, instrumentation, industrial control, household appliances and other fields. "MCU principle and application" is not only an important professional basic course of University electrical, electronics, communication and other majors, but also it is a professional, practical, application course. Through learning the course, students can master the preparation methods of the program, improve the design ability of single-chip microcomputer control system, and lay a solid foundation for the follow-up courses’ study, graduation design, employment. Therefore, this paper proposes and expounds the new reform teaching pattern covering such three aspects as teaching content, teaching method and assessment method in order to adapt to the needs of application-oriented undergraduate talents training, improve teaching qualify and arouse students’ learning interest.

333

2. Present Situation of MCU Teaching (1) Separation of the theory and practice Traditional MCU teaching is mainly based on the teaching, the experiment is supplemented. Students can learn very well on the MCU system structure, hardware interface and programming syntax, but when the system is developed by MCU, really very few students can begin. (2) The gap between teaching content and social demand In the process of teaching, often MCU curriculum syllabus cannot be updated timely and the teaching materials cannot be timely replacement, so the teaching content cannot keep up with the social demand for talents of MCU. (3) Single teaching method The teacher uses the "spoon feeding" teaching method in class, students are not allowed to participate, and this is not conducive to improve students' enthusiasm. (4) Simple experiment Many colleges and universities have increased the proportion of the experimental class. Although students can carry out some experiments in the experimental equipment, most of the experimental equipment is prepared by the manufacturer of test equipment. Moreover most programs are provided by the manufacturers, many students do the experiment just available program is downloaded to the experimental equipment, and look at the results, students' practical ability cannot be really improved. (5) Weak practical ability At present, many colleges and universities are aware of the importance of improving students’ practical ability, also encourage students to participate in a variety of electronic competition. But for most students have very few practical opportunities before, and their practical ability is not strong, and they are no courage to participate in the competition. Therefore, in the usual teaching should be more practical opportunities for students [1].

3. Construction and Practice of MCU Teaching Mode According to the characteristics of MCU course, MCU Course teaching contents, teaching methods and teaching means were researched and reformed. A set of teaching modes suitable for MCU course have been constructed, and have been carried on the practice in our department of electronic and information Engineering, and which has achieved very good teaching effect [2]. The specific contents are as follows.

334

3.1. Research and reform of teaching content

3.1.1. Textbook In the selection of textbook, textbooks of strong applicability and more case analysis are suitable for students.

3.1.2. Teaching content MCU course’ teaching content can be divided into two parts, the basic principle and the interface technology. According to the curriculum objective, highlight the practical and applied, as the basis for the selection of teaching content. The memory extension content is given, because existing chip memory resource is enough. If all are taught by textbook content order, the knowledge learning is relatively independent, so it is difficult for students to master the whole process of MCU development. With the purpose to develop application ability for the teaching goal, learn project as the carrier of teaching and action-oriented to the teaching process, break the existing textbook content system, integrate teaching content into eight study projects. These study projects are specifically motor control, keying lights, simple calculator, digital voltage meter, waveform generator, etc. These projects are from simple to complex and from single to comprehensive. Teaching objectives are specific and clear, which can stimulate the students' learning interest, and is conducive to the mastery of the student knowledge, and more conducive to the students’ practical ability and practical ability of culture.

3.2. Research and reform of teaching methods and means

3.2.1. Research and reform of teaching process The traditional teaching way is three centers theory that "teacher center, textbook center, classroom center", which emphasizes the teacher's leading role, and this kind of teaching mode is not conducive to the cultivation of students' practice ability and innovation ability. In the teaching reform, according to the teaching goal, the course system and the characteristics of the students, the teaching process is carefully constructed, in order to improve the teaching effect. The whole teaching process is divided into five stages. (1) The first stage: task arrangement

335

In a study project completion, next study project is arranged by 20 minutes. Specific operation steps are as follows: first project experimental phenomenon is demonstrated with MCU development board or experimental box, and lets the student feel control phenomenon, which can arouse students' strong study interest and improve learning efficiency. Then a project task book is issued, each project task is divided into four levels: basic task, improving task, innovation task and after-school electronic innovation, which meets the needs of different levels of students. (2) The second stage: knowledge learning Firstly, theoretical explanation: explain the project’ essential knowledge. Secondly, the sample analysis: guide the students to master involved knowledge points through an example analysis, and give prominence to the key points, break through the difficulty. Thirdly, classroom questioning: check and strengthen learning effect through random questions in the class. (3) The third stage: system design Specific implementation is divided into three steps. Firstly, group discussion: discuss and demonstrate project design in groups. Secondly, joint decision- making: the design scheme is evaluated by the teacher, teachers and students are coming together to make joint decisions and choose the best solution. Thirdly, division of labor cooperation: each grouper designs hardware circuit and program respectively according to the division of labor. (4) The fourth stage: implementation First verify the correctness of the software and hardware design with the simulation software, and debug until the success. Then debug software with the experimental box until the success. Finally students can make use of spare time to make circuit board. (5) The fifth stage: evaluation summary Firstly, teacher checks each group’ actual completion situation. Secondly, teacher scores for each group and group members according to the assessment criteria, assessment criteria are shown in Table 1. Thirdly, teacher sums up the project completion situation, and puts forward advantages and disadvantages.

Table 1. Assessment criteria

Result Process assessment(60%) assessment(40%) Item Project Homework Practical Study Team Work Project number score completion operation attitude cooperation assessment Report 20% skills20% 10% spirit 10% 25% 15%

336

3.2.2. Research and reform of teaching methods (1) Project teaching method Its key is to organize teaching closely around the eight study projects. Through this teaching method has aroused great study interest, so as to achieve a significant effect in the teaching content and practical ability. (2) Stratification teaching method Considering the difference of students' basic knowledge, for the students who are good foundation improve the learning requirements. If student’ foundation is poor, he is only required to achieve the basic goal. (3) Group teaching and role playing method When finished study project, with 3 people as a team, let each student play a corresponding role, such as project manager, software engineer or hardware engineer, this teaching method can arouse students' interest, and further develop their team cooperation ability. (4) Case teaching method Interest is the premise and foundation of learning MCU course. If we can introduce a number of interesting teaching cases, let boring knowledge become fun, which can trigger a student’ learning passion, stimulate the students' learning potential and ignite the wisdom of the students. For example, In teaching of PWM knowledge, we introduce "little star" playback control teaching case. Students have to face is no longer just register, frequency, duty ratio and some boring and abstract concept theory, and enjoy a wonderful piece of music. They immediately become interested in what they had learned, even want to try. Therefore, interest and enthusiasm of study knowledge has been aroused.

3.3. Research and reform of teaching methods In order to improve the teaching effect, this course uses a variety of teaching methods to assist teaching [3]. (1) Real object teaching In class, it is beneficial to cultivate students’ ability to use the experiment box, emulator and study board to assist teaching. (2) Virtual simulation technology Virtual simulation technology is well accepted by students. For example, the traditional MCU control traffic lights, which needs to buy components, weld and debug. I this way, the cost is higher, the time is longer, the efficiency is lower. The virtual simulation technology can effectively overcome these problems, and

337

the students want to do what experiments can be done. Therefore, virtual simulation technology can effectively stimulate students’ sense of achievement, so as to improve the students’ curiosity, and improve the efficiency of learning. (3) Skills Competition Electronic Association has been set up. Students are encouraged to actively participate in the competition, which is conducive to improve the MCU application level and the innovation ability. (4) Network technology We build MCU teaching website that provides a rich network of resources for students, such as teaching courseware, teaching plan, project task book. It is helpful for students to preview before class and review after class. The website also provides the online FAQ.

4. Conclusion According to the characteristics of MCU courses, the project-driving teaching method based on the working process is applied in the MCU teaching. And combined mode of teaching, learning and doing with integration mode of theory and practice is adopted. At the same time, according to actual needs, a variety of teaching methods and means are adopted, and which achieves the good teaching effect, and promotes the student's employment ability.

Acknowledgments The authors gratefully acknowledge the funding of this study by education and teaching research topics of Changchun Guanghua University.

References 1. S. Wan, L. Qiu and Y. Hao, Case Teaching Method Reform of Visual Basic Programming Research Based Ability Training, in Proc. IEEE Int. Workshop on Education Technology and Computer Science (ETCS), (Wuhan, China, 2010). 2. S.Y. Zhang, C.L. M a, Teaching Reform and Practice of Embedded System Course, China Education Innovation Heral, Vol.11 (China, 2012), pp. 64– 66 (In Chinese). 3. P. Li and Q. Jin, Reform and Implementation of Experimental Teaching for Demonstration Center, in Proc. IEEE Int. Workshop on Business Computing and Global Informatization (BCGIN), (Shanghai, China, 2012).

338

Fuzzy Clustering Analysis on Graduate Employment Quality and Its Application

Feng Du School of Economics & Management, Beijing University of Technology, Beijing, 100124, P.R.China E-mail: [email protected]

Due to the rapid development of China’s economy and the high popularity of higher education, the employment situation for college and university graduates is a serious problem. Therefore the improving the quality of cultivating talents and fostering high- quality talents is paramount to higher education development and improving international competitiveness. This paper establishes a set of employment evaluation infrastructure and obtains the raw data matrix from the fuzzy evaluation matrix and weight matrix of each object. The fuzzy cluster results are obtained through the procedures of further dimensional treatment, fuzzy similarity and equivalent matrix transformations, and optimization of thresholds. Through this quantitative method, the common problems of undergraduates’ employment of Beijing University of Technology have been identified.

Keywords: Employment Quality; Index System; Analytic Hierarchy Process; Fuzzy Assessment; Classification Threshold.

1. Introduction Since China’s resumption of college entrance examination in 1978, the higher education in China has experienced a geometric growth. And the booming economy of China starting from the 1990s has put forward an increasing demand of highly educated human capital, and thus incurred an assignable gap between the university scale and social talent demand. A series of measurements have been adopted, including enlarging higher education scale and increasing enrollment, have been the key points of higher education reform in China to ease the tense ill balance between talent supply and demand. One of the fundamental changes is its shift of core from the elite mode to the mass mode, corresponding to the enrollment expanding policy of universities and colleges in 1999. The most practical problem facing policy makers now is whether the balance has been maintained between the supply and demand of highly educated talents, whereas the most practical answer lies in the employment quality evaluation of undergraduates. Those undergraduates may be confronted with multi options before the year of 1999, which is the very year after which, the initial employment ratios of undergraduates dropped to 75%, with a gap of 25%reaching fully employment, which has called for wide social attentions. More seriously between 2008 and 2009, the worldwide financial crisis

339

hammered down the initial employment ratio to less than 68% [1]. All these require the universities and colleges to pay great attention to the influence of employment ratio and quality on enrollment scale and further consequences. Therefore, this paper conducts fuzzy clustering analysis on graduate employment quality and discusses its application.

2. Literature Review Available applied methods on college talents training quality focus on three aspects. First, application of statistical models and methods on survey and statistics. Liang enumerated ten items of indexes of teaching quality evaluation scientifically and systematically according to the analysis principle of the cluster and main composition analytic approach [2]. Hua introduced the basic clue of the grey relational analysis according to grey system theory, and presented a multi-indices evaluation method based on analyzing influential factors [ 3]. Wang and Zhang adopted factor analysis technique to evaluate the talents training quality from the aspect of employer demands with a combination of qualitative and quantitative analysis [4].Huang et al presented the multivariate statistical method applied in evaluating the teaching quality and adopted principal component analysis to rank the scores of different principal component and comprehensive factors [5]. Hong and He carried out the evaluation with AHP covering training conditions, process and effects [6]. Xue et al evaluated with fuzzy methods [7]. Dai et al built up a 3 dimensioned infrastructure with employer’s demand, basic skills and capabilities, and extended abilities to evaluate with fuzzy, DEA and AHP methodologies [8].Wu et al used analytic hierarchy process to design an assessment model of the employment quality of college students [9]. Second, evaluation with Delphi method according to the connotation and standard of talents training of universities and colleges. Li implemented an integrated evaluation on training conditions, activities and effects with this method [10]. Ma suggested a model to evaluate on knowledge, capabilities and diathesis [11]. Hu et al. adopted DEA/TOPSIS two-stage model to perform synthetic evaluation in using college educational resources [12]. Guided under the principle of interaction, Zhao and Hu built up a diversified expert bank and set up the evaluation group with multi participation [ 13]. Wu used PDCA looping to judge the quality of construction cost engineer training [14]. Third, some used differed methods. Uriwin et al analyzed the extent to which the quality of teaching and research inputs, as measured by quality

340

assurance agency and research assessment exercise scores [15]. Li did the same on talents qualities according to the evidence theory [16]. Tang and Guo did the evaluation grading output [17]. Wang and Shi evaluated according to input- output relationship of talent training [18].Yang et al analyzed the correspond- ence of vocational graduates’ job search approaches with their job search outcomes to identify the effect of higher vocational education on employment [19]. To evaluate with mathematical statistics could avoid subjectivity and bring about fair judgement on talents training qualities, but it is subjective to the reliability and accessibility to relevant data and also not able to be separated from the inherent subjectivity of Delphi method taking advantage of the experience and knowledge of experts. In this case, the most effective way is to use fuzzy clustering to deal with the dilemma of insufficiency of data and imperfectness of evaluating index.

3. Building up the Model

3.1. Determination of index set Influencing factors on employment quality of undergraduates are to be classified into to two groups of main factors and sub factors. The influencing factors are here actually the index set to be evaluated as U= ( uu12,,,… um ) , which include five first level indicators: satisfaction degree of employers, satisfaction degree on career guidance, personal preparation, practicability of teaching contents and satisfaction degree on teaching. This setting has taken consideration of teaching and career guidance of universities, personal motivation in employment of undergraduates, and social acceptance of the employers in three different dimensions, following the procedures of education and employment under the principles of logic and sequence, as shown in Tab.1. It also shows that each 1st level indicator is divided into several 2nd level ones for the accuracy and convenience of data collection and evaluation.

341

Table 1. Index set of employment quality of graduates.

1st level indicator 2nd level indicator Wages Welfare Working environment Satisfaction degree of employers Colleague relationship Management Promotion mechanism University level Satisfaction degree on career guidance School level Career guidance Knowing of employment policies

Personal preparation Knowing of employment services Knowing of student employment associations Credibility and integrity Knowledge structure Professional knowledge

Practicability of teaching contents Basic skills Independent working ability Inter person skills Problem analysis and solving Creativity Knowledge development Satisfaction degree on teaching Depth and breadth of professional knowledge Basic skills and practical ability Formation of values

3.2. Evaluation set

Let V= ( vv12,,,… vk ) be the evaluation set, in which k is the number of evaluations. Lester scale is adopted in this paper to have the evaluations be classified into five scales as: hazard, poor, general, good and ideal.

342

3.3. Fuzzy evaluation matrix

Let fu( i ) be the individual judgement for each factor ui , which is actually the mapping f from U to V, say fU: →℘( V) (1) and

uii fu( ) ∈℘( V) (2)

A fuzzy linear transfer Tf from U to V could be inferred from f , which could also be considered as the mathematical model from weight A to comprehensive judgement B . Thus a fuzzy relationship Rf ∈℘( UV × ) could be induced from the fuzzy mapping f , say Rf( uv i, h ) == fu( i)( v h) r ih . R f could be expressed by the fuzzy matrix R ∈ µ : mk×

rr11 12 r1k rr r R = 21 22 2k (3)   rrm12 m rmk

R is here the single factor judgement matrix, in which r is degree of ih membership of the judgement of xi being vh. Specifically, rih is the frequency distribution of the i th factor xi being the h th judgement vh. Ordinarily k speaking, it should be normalized in the way of ∑rih = 1 . So the matrix R is of h=1 no dimension and needs no further treatment [20]. An empirical analysis is provided in this paper with above method on the employment quality of graduates from Beijing University of Technology (BJUT) in the year of 2015. 1755 effective questionnaires have been obtained, among which 1104 are from graduates covering 37.31% of the total of 2959. The distribution of the samples is as follow:

343

Table 2. Distribution of effective questionnaires on graduates employment quality of BJUT in 2015.

School Copies Ratio School Copies Ratio Material Science 29 31.52% Construction 40 30.08% Electronic Control 79 23.94% Transportation 9 27.27% Economics Environment & Energy 48 34.29% 98 34.39% and Management Mechanical Engineering 55 36.91% Humanity 50 40.00% Computer Science 116 48.95% Software 30 27.27% Civil Engineering 90 34.88% Life 24 28.92% Pilot College 198 48.18% Foreign Languages 25 30.49% Mathematics and Physics 47 34.31% Art and Design 166 46.89%

The comment set consists of 5 employment quality status, with expression forms defined for explicit concrete contexts embodied in the questionnaire. All data acquired from the questionnaire are to be reduced to 5 states with grade specific gravity for the degree of membership matrix. Sufficiency and acknowledgement of questionnaire objects are guarantee of the reliability of the evaluation, while in this case, enough feedbacks are available for the questionnaire and all the graduates as the questionnaire objects are the direct carrier of employment quality. Here, graduates from the School of Material Science will be taken as an example to have single factor judgement matrix of the 2nd level indicators R as shown in Table 3.

344

Table 3. Degree of membership of employment quality of school of material science graduates of BJUT in 2015.

Degree of membership 2nd level indicator Score Ideal Good Fair Poor Hazard Wages 0.03 0.48 0.45 0.03 0.00 0.03 Welfare 0.10 0.66 0.24 0.00 0.00 0.10 Working environment 0.03 0.72 0.24 0.00 0.00 0.03 Colleague relationship 0.10 0.62 0.28 0.00 0.00 0.10 Management 0.14 0.62 0.24 0.00 0.00 0.14 Promotion mechanism 0.07 0.62 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.07 University level 0.17 0.45 0.21 0.14 0.03 0.17 School level 0.28 0.45 0.24 0.00 0.03 0.28 Career guidance 0.14 0.31 0.41 0.14 0.00 0.14 Knowing of employment 0.03 0.31 0.55 0.10 0.00 0.03 policies Knowing of employment 0.07 0.34 0.38 0.21 0.00 0.07 services Knowing of student 0.03 0.17 0.31 0.31 0.17 0.03 employment associations Credibility and integrity 0.41 0.45 0.03 0.10 0.00 0.41 Knowledge structure 0.03 0.38 0.41 0.07 0.10 0.03 Professional knowledge 0.07 0.24 0.34 0.17 0.17 0.07 Basic skills 0.14 0.41 0.41 0.00 0.03 0.14 Independent working ability 0.10 0.59 0.24 0.03 0.03 0.10 Inter person skills 0.14 0.59 0.21 0.03 0.03 0.14 Problem analysis and 0.10 0.55 0.34 0.00 0.00 0.10 solving Creativity 0.10 0.55 0.34 0.00 0.00 0.10 Knowledge development 0.10 0.59 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.10 Depth and breadth of 0.14 0.55 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.14 professional knowledge Basic skills and practical 0.10 0.55 0.34 0.00 0.00 0.10 ability Formation of values 0.14 0.52 0.34 0.00 0.00 0.14 Degree of membership 0.13 0.49 0.30 0.07 0.02

345

3.4. Raw data matrix

Let the discourse domain U= { xx12,,,… xn } be the evaluated objects of employment quality of graduates, in which each object is composed of m indicators representing different aspect of employment, say xj= ( xx j12, j ,,… x jm ) ,( jn= 1, 2,… ,) . A fuzzy matrix R ∈µmk× is built up according to the above discussed fuzzy relationship Rf ∈℘( UV × ) , with the data acquired from questionnaire on each object. Following formula is introduced to make transformation of n fuzzy matrices R :

Ax( jj) =⋅ Rx( ) F (4) in which, Rx( j ) is the fuzzy judgement matrix for the j th object. F is the score set of the transfer and comprehensive evaluation matrices, F= ( ff12,,,… fk ) which is a column vector, where k equals to the number of comment and fh indicates the score of h th comment in the form of Lester scale

F = (100,80,60,40,20) . Ax( j ), ( jn= 1, 2,… , ) is the indicator vector of the j th k im= 1, 2,… , evaluated object, and axi( j ) =⋅∑ rih( x j) f h , ( ) . The raw data matrix h=1 for graduate employment fuzzy cluster evaluation can be gained from the above mentioned fuzzy matrix data and the transform formula.

ax11( ) ax 12( ) ax1( n )  ax21( ) ax 22( ) ax 2( n ) A==[ Ax( 12) , Ax( ) ,,… Ax( m ) ]   axm( 12) ax m( ) axmn( )

The degrees of membership of graduates from each school of Beijing

University of Technology (BJUT) are to be transferred into Ax( m ) according to formula (4), so as to construct the raw data matrix A for fuzzy cluster, as shown in Table 4.

346

Table 4. Score of 2nd level indicators of graduates from different schools of BJUT in 2015 (to be continued)

347

Table 4. Score of 2nd level indicators of graduates from different schools of BJUT in 2015 (continued)

348

For the convenience of following clustering analysis, matrix A is to be transpositioned as per AA′ = T .

4. Data Processing for Fuzzy Cluster of Employment Quality Cluster analysis is method of having birds of a feather flock together in multivariate statistical analysis. In researches on scientific technology and management, fuzzy cluster is a feasible way to deal with anything of unclear boundaries.

4.1. Dimensional processing of raw data Dimensional processing is indispensable to have normalized comparison between data of various dimensions, in order to eliminate the influence of different calibers. Considering the nature of data of matrix A′ , data processing of normalization in this paper is carried out with the method of translation – range transformation, normalizing the fuzzy matrix AT of employment quality of graduates from different schools of BJUT reaching matrix A′′ . The process is

xx′′ji − min ji 1≤≤jn{ } x′′ji ==,(im 1, 2,… , ) (5) maxxx′′ji − min ji 1≤≤jn{ } 1≤≤jn{ }

where 01≤≤x′′ji , with also no influence from ununiformed dimensions. And the results are shown in Table 5.

349

Table 5. Data normalization for fuzzy cluster with translation - range transformation.

350

4.2. Fuzzy similar matrix It is hard to set up fuzzy equivalent relation or matrix in practical use, for the hardness to have the transitivity of matrices. Yet building up a reflexive symmetric fuzzy matrix, a fuzzy similar matrix, is comparatively easier. With transformation to improve its transitivity on the basis of reflexivity and symmetricity, it could be adopted for further fuzzy cluster analysis[21]. Let = domain U{} xx12,,,… xn ,and xj= { xx j12, j ,,… x jm } .Coefficient method is introduced here to determine the degree of similarity between x j and xk as rjk = Rx()j, x k . So exponential similarity coefficient method is adopted here as follow:

2 m  13()xxji− ki r =exp  −⋅ (6) jk ms∑ 4 2 i=1 i

n n 1 2 1 in which si =−∑() xxji ji , xxi = ∑ ji (im= 1, 2,… , ) . n j=1 n j=1 In the raw data matrix of this paper, different column comes from different parent, while different line comes from the same parent. rjk in this case presents the resemblances between two targets [22]., with results shown in Table 6.

Table 6. Fuzzy similarity matrix based on exponential similarity confficient (to be continued).

351

Table 6. Fuzzy similarity matrix based on exponential similarity confficient (continued).

4.3. Fuzzy equivalent matrix The fuzzy similar matrix built according to standard calibration may not have the desired transitivity, say R might not be a fuzzy equivalent matrix, which has * to be modified into one as R for the coming cataloguing. Let R ∈ µnn× be a fuzzy similar matrix, then there exists a least natural number i ()in≤ to guarantee the transitive closure tR() = Ri , to let Rli== R tR() for any natural number l larger than i . tR() is now the fuzzy equivalent matrix. The transitive closure tR() can be gained through successive square according to the above-mentioned algorithm turning a fuzzy similar matrix into an equivalent one, say calculating m RR→→→24 R R 2one by one till RR2ii= 21+ , so tR() = R2i is the desired fuzzy equivalent matrix R* , and tR() = R* . This paper employs the transitive closure algorithm to reach fuzzy equivalent matrixes to have λ varying from large to small in []0,1 , on the basis of fuzzy evaluation data of graduate employment qualities of 16 schools of BJUT.

352

5. Analysis on Fuzzy Clustering of Graduate Employment Qualities

5.1. Optimal threshold λ ∈[0,1] in fuzzy clustering decides the outcomes, and is the foundation of dynamic clustering map. Yet the threshold λ should be decided scientifically and precisely according to the research target. F statistic is adopted here to determine λ .

Let U= { xx12,,,… xn} be the sample space of n, of which each sample x j has m characteristics corresponding to the m data observed: xj= ( xx j12, j ,,… x jm ) ( jn= 1, 2,… , ) . For threshold λ, there should be r categories, in which there exist nk (kk) ( ) ( k) numbers in the k th category: xx, ,,… x, with x(k) = xx( kk) ,( ) ,,… x( k) as the 12 nk ( 12 m ) (k ) center vector, of which xi is the mean of i th eigenvalue, say

nk (kk) 1 ( ) xi ==∑ xkji ,( 1, 2,… , m) (7) n j=1 with F statistic introduced as:

r 2 (k) ∑ nxk −− x( r1) k =1 F = n (8) r k 2 (kk) ( ) ∑∑nxkj−− x( nr) kj==11

m 2 (kk) ( ) (k ) (kk) ( ) xx−= xx − in which ∑( ii) is the distance between x and x , and xxj − i=1 (k ) (k ) as the distance between the j th sample x j and its center x . Thus a larger F here means a greater distance between different categories and a better result of clustering. F> Fra ( −−1, nr) , (α = 0.05) , and it means that the clustering is notable and reasonable. If there exist more than one F> Fra ( −−1, n r) , an optimization should be made by choosing a comparatively large one.

The values of F, corresponding critical value Fα (α = 0.05) and relative difference (FF− αα) Fhave been calculated for certain categories based on A′ in the paper.

Table 7. F statistic of clustering based on exponential similarity coefficient method

Categories 10 9 8 7 6 5 2 F 25.042 20.278 17.815 15.911 14.351 9.572 5.702

Fα 2.370 2.400 2.440 2.510 2.600 2.740 4.180 (FF− αα) F 9.566 7.449 6.301 5.339 4.520 2.494 0.364

353

5.2. Clustering results With an integrated consideration of F, and classification Fα , (FF− αα) F number, 0.275 is chosen as the optimal λ and the corresponding classification number remains as 7, with the result of clustering as in Table 8.

Table 8. Clustering result based on exponential similarity coefficient method, λ = 0.275

Classification Schools of Material Science, Environment & Energy, Pilot Institute, Foreign 1st Category Languages 2nd Category Electronic Control, Computer Science 3rd Category Mechanical Engineering, Construction, Civil Engineering, Humanities 4th Category Economics & Management, Art & Design, Lives 5th Category Software Engineering 6th Category Mathematics & Physics 7th Category Transportation

The clustering results of graduate employment qualities of 16 schools of BJUT show that schools have similar graduate employment quality so long as they stay in the same category. In this case, common issues like satisfactions from employers and on employment guidance, personal preparation, practicability and satisfaction of teaching could be digested in a way of shrinking 16 schools to 7categories.

5.3. Common issues On the basis of fuzzy clustering of graduate employment quality of 16 schools of BJUT and through questionnaire, three problems have been brought about as common issues. (1) Present employment policies cause enlarging proportion of flexible employment of graduates. Most graduates tend to be employed in metropolises like Beijing, while policies of admission for residence in Beijing have been harsh and rigid in 2015. These changes of policies have hampered the employment process and degraded employment qualities. (2) Asymmetric responses between the job market and employment market. Both quantity and quality of job supply in Beijing plunged in 2015, while graduates have been hanging in conformity and fantasy letting limited opportunities drifting away. This calls for more publicity and commentaries. (3) The whole process concept of employment and entrepreneurship needs to be enhanced. 354

6. Conclusion Present higher education has granted employment and entrepreneurship to be the responsibilities of graduating and senior students, not realizing that quality of graduate employment should actually be the ultimate goal of talent training which should be carried out throughout the whole process of higher education.

References 1. Liu Yanru. The Research of Initial Employment of University Graduates in the Social Capital Perspective, PhD thesis, Wuhan: Central China Normal University, (WH, China, 2012). (in Chinese) 2. Liang Bangzhu. Application of Multivariate Statistical Analysis Approach to the Appraisal of Teaching Quality. Journal of Tianjin Polytechnic University, 2003, 22(3):87–88. (in Chinese) 3. Hua Liping. Evaluation of Teaching Quality for Universities Based on Grey Relational Analysis. Higher Education Development and Evaluation, 2007, 23(2):24–29. (in Chinese) 4. Wang Qin, Zhang Shuqin. Teaching Inspection as an Important Means of Improving the Quality of Teaching. Journal of Hebei Normal University(Educational Science Edition), 2008, 10:141–144. (in Chinese) 5. Huang Huiming, Bao Haijun, Zhao Jun. Application of Multivariate Statistical Method in Evaluating College Teaching Quality. Journal of Ningbo University (Education Edition), 2009, 31(4):76–80. (in Chinese) 6. Hong Meixiang, He Zhenrui. Construction of Tourism Personnel Training Quality Evaluation System Based on AHP. Economic Research Guide, 2011:173–174. (in Chinese) 7. Xu Wei, Xin Ying, Wang Yue. Quality Evaluation of Talent Cultivation for Forest Engineering Program Based on Fuzzy Comprehensive Analysis Method. Forest Engineering, 2012, 28:90–92. (in Chinese) 8. Dai Ying, Song Han, Li Haiyan. Evaluation of Talent Training Quality in General University Based on Fuzzy AHP Analysis. Journal of Chongqing University of Technology (Social Science), 2014, 28:127–130. (in Chinese) 9. Wu Yahua, Wang Yongbin, Shi Yazhong. The Assessment Model of the Employment Quality of College Student Based on Analytic Hierarchy Process. Journal of Bengbu College, 2014(2):24–28. (in Chinese) 10. Li Zhonghua. The Research on the Training Quality Evaluation System of High Quality and Innovate Students of Universities. PhD Thesis. Wuhan University of Technology, (WH, China, 2005). (in Chinese)

355

11. Ma Wanmin. Research on Evaluation Model of Higher Education Personnel Training Quality. China Soft Science, 2008:153–156. (in Chinese) 12. Hu Lihua, He Wenpeng, Gong Wei. Application of DEA/TOPSIS Model in Evaluating College Education Quality. Journal of Zhejiang Wanli University, 2009, 22(2):35–39. (in Chinese) 13. Zhao Peihua, Hu Bo. Analysis on the Talent Cultivation Quality Evaluation System Based on Multiple Interaction in Higher Vocational Colleges. Vocational and Technical Education, 2013, 34:74–76. (in Chinese) 14. Wu Haiying. Quality Evaluation System of Talents Training for "PDCA" Project Cost. Value Engineering, 2014:266–267. (in Chinese) 15. Peter Urwin, Giorgio Di Pietro. The Impact of Research and Teaching Quality Inputs on the Employment Outcomes of Postgraduates. Higher Education Quarterly, 2005, 59(4):275–295. (in Chinese) 16. Li Xingguo, Cui Shanshan, Gu Dongxiao, Yang Haiyan. Evidence-Based Comprehensive Evaluation of the Talent Training Quality of University. Journal of Higher Education Research, 2011, 34:32-35. DOI:doi:10.3969/ j.issn.1672-8874.2011.01.010. (in Chinese) 17. Tang Liguo, Guo Qing. Engineering Applied Talents Training Quality Evaluation System Aiming for Output of Learning. Education and Vocation, 2012:178–179. (in Chinese) 18. Wang Dongling, Shi Junxia. Study on Evaluation Index System Docking Quality of Higher Vocational Education and Social Demand Based on DEA Model. Securities & Futures of China, 2013, (4):279–280. (in Chinese) 19. Yang Po, Guo Jianru, Jin Yinan. Analysis of Employment Quality of Chinese Vocational and Technical College Graduates. Chinese Education & Society, 2015, 48(1):1–22. (in Chinese) 20. Liu Honglu, Zhou Shidong, Zhang Zhenji. How to Evaluate the Economic Benefit of Information System in Logistics Enterprises. Logistics Technology, 2007, 26:46–48. (in Chinese) 21. Li Guangyuan, Yang Bingru, Liu Yinghua, Cao Danyan. Survey of Data Mining Based on Fuzzy Set Theory. Computer Engineering and Design, 2011, 32:4064–4067. (in Chinese) 22. Niu Dongxiao. The Research on New Methods of the Planning Management of Uncertainty Engineering, PhD thesis, Beijing: North China Electric Power University, (BJ, China, 2002). (in Chinese)

356

Research on Teaching of “Advanced Mathematics” Based on Strategic Thinking

Hong-Mei Pei, Xuan-Hai Li and Jie-Lin Shang Department of basic courses, Dalian Naval Academy of the PLA, Dalian, Liaoning, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

Advanced mathematics is an important basic course for military academies and a foundation for future courses. The current challenge for mathematics teachers is to ensure that the cadets are able to comprehend the subject sufficiently without the limited credit hours allocated. This paper discusses the application of strategic thinking in the teaching of “advanced mathematics” to guide the development-orientated training process. In this method, the cadets’ ability training is established as a core component and it provides clear teaching goals and innovative teaching methods to adapt to changing conditions over time.

Keywords: Advanced Mathematics; Strategic Thinking; Cadets.

1. Introduction Advanced mathematics is a basic course in the teaching of military academies. As a science, advanced mathematics has its inherent feature, which are high abstractness, strict logicality and widely usage. Abstractness is the most basic and most obvious feature of mathematics, only with high abstractness and unity can we further reveal the essential rule, and thus to make a much more widely usage of it. Strict logicality means that inducting and collecting mathematical theory, no matter concept and theorem, or judgments and reasoning, all should be done by using logical rules and following the thinking rules. Therefore, mathematics is also a kind of thinking method, the mathematic learning process is the process of thinking training. Mathematics plays a vital role on building cadets’ logical thinking ability, analytic and problem-solving skills, broaden cadets’ thinking and enhancing their comprehensive ability. However, in order to make cadets understand strict logicality and apply it in actual life in terms of understanding the mathematics’ abstractness, what should mathematics teachers do? That is a great challenge that every math teacher is facing now.

357

2. Instructional Strategy Design and Implementation Strategy thinking means a whole, long-term and fundamental thinking. Strategy thinking ability means view the problem from a whole, long-term and fundamental point thus to research the problem, cognition the problem and resolve the problem, which is the ability to take the whole situation into account and plan accordingly and to grasp the development trend and direction [1]. The whole teaching process has a lot of links, and instructional design is the core link in which teachers play their part, it is the basic frame while teachers organize teaching. Teachers should have a meticulously design before class, make a strategic plan, clear the teaching goal, determine teaching method and train cadets’ skills [2]. It can be done by the following three links.

2.1. Make a meticulously design and clear teaching goals Teachers should design the teaching goal before teaching, and follow the teaching goals to make a teaching. While making teaching goals, they should take various problems into consideration, for example: (1) From this class, what should cadets learn? To what extent should they learn? (2) In the teaching process, what knowledge should be consolidate? And what’s the connection between this knowledge and the following courses? To get ready for which knowledge? (3) To train which skills for the cadets, which knowledge and skills’ teaching should be combined in order to train these skills? (4) Is there any typical errors appear from cadets in this class? How to correct these wrong views and wrong actions? To answer these questions, the teachers need to be familiar with the course and cadets’ knowledge level, besides, the teachers should also know the knowledge that cadets will be used in the following courses. Based on the cadets’ skills training, the teachers will make specific teaching plan and teaching measures.

2.2. To make the strategy implementation strictly, and make the teaching method clear With a clear teaching goal, the teachers need to teach cadets by using various teaching methods based on different teaching contents, and thanks for doing this, the cadets’ learning interest be stimulated, “aesthetic fatigue” not be seen, besides, it is also contribute to the mastery of knowledge and the building of

358

abilities. For example, there are many concepts in advanced mathematics, while in the process of teaching mathematics concepts, the teachers can use different teaching methods according to different concepts. (1) Create situations teaching method. This means that while teaching, the teachers create situations to make what the cadets learning now can be used in the coming real situations which are almost the same to the created situations or analogous to the created situations. As military academy’s professional knowledge has its situation dependency, so if teachers can assume the real work situations when teaching, then the cadets would have an immersed sense and their initiative and enthusiasm for learning will be stimulated. For example, by aid of 5000 meters running of joint assessment in military common basic course, the concept of the constant series can be introduced. And by aid of climbing issue the concept of directional derivatives can be introduced. By creating situations, not only the cadets’ mathematics learning interest be stimulated thus master the mathematics knowledge, but also their researching ability, identify and problem-solving ability promoted, to make them to resolve the military problems that they may face in the coming future. (2) Problem-based learning method. For a new concept, if teachers provide it to cadets directly and let them learn and use it by rote, then it is difficult for the cadets to learn them and also results in their logical thinking disorder. Of course, for each concept, firstly we may provide the real problem, and then abstract the concept from the real problem. However, for some concepts, even if abstract the concept from the real problem, the cadets still cannot understand and accept it thoroughly. For example, definition of the limit of sequence of number. Although provide cadets with the introductive example-cyclotomic method, still the cadets cannot understand the definition of the limit of sequence. While the concept of limit is one of the most important and the most fundamental concept of advanced mathematics, whether the cadets understand this concept or not will brings a direct influence on the whole advanced mathematics learning. For this kind of concepts which are hard to understand, teachers should lead cadets to ask questions and then gradually reveals the nature of the concepts. For example, when teaching the cadets the definition of the limit of sequence, the teacher may provide some specific sequence, and then combine with number axis, to let cadets to observe the variation trends of the sequence during n’s infinitely increase, then get the “descriptive definition” about number sequence limit. While how to get the accuracy definition from the

359

descriptive definition of the limit of sequence of number? Teachers can lead cadets to ask the following questions: What does “infinitely close to” mean? What does “infinitely increase” mean? Is there any other ways to describe “infinitely close to”? How to define the distance between the two real numbers?.....By using questions to drive the understanding on key words, and reveal the limit concept’s nature step by step. (3) Analogy method. Analogy method means use the similarity of two different kind of things, by comparing the two kind of things, can push those already known or already mastered knowledge to the new knowledge. If the cadets already have some knowledge about advanced mathematics, then teachers can use analogy method to provide cadets with the new concept according to the connection between the new concept and the learnt concepts when teachers teach cadets the new concept. For example, “function limit” is the extend of “sequence number limit” concept, so when teaching cadets the function limit, we need to review the concept of sequence number firstly, and then create analogy situation to let cadets to try to give the concept of function limit. Besides, “limit of one variable function” and “limit of function of several variables”, “differentiation of function of one variable” and “differentiation of function of several variables”, “definite integrals” and “multiple integrals” can also be taught by using this method. Using this method to teach cadets concepts is actually using one of the main methods when resolving mathematics problems, which is: attribute the unknown problem to already resolved problem. This kind of method not only contribute to build cadets’ solving problem ability, but also an important method that will benefit cadets for a lifetime. For other knowledge in advanced mathematics, such as theorem, formula etc., there are also a lot kind of teaching methods, in the teaching process, teachers need to select appropriate teaching method according to different content’s feature, only by doing this can prompt cadets’ mastery and application of this knowledge, build their abilities and overall qualities.

3. Fine Strategic Decision, Focus on Ability Training Traditional teaching mode usually attaches importance to the mastery and training of basic knowledge(basic concept, basic theory) and basic method and skills, which is very necessary and quite correct. However, those who the military academies training are the future officers of the country, so only basic and skills training is nowhere near enough. That’s why in military academies mathematics training not only the mastery of basic knowledge and basic skills is

360

focused on, but also the training of cadets’ many kinds of skills is focused on. Advanced mathematics is an important way for training cadets’ autonomous learning ability, innovation ability and analytical and problem-solving ability. Teachers should pay attention to train cadets’ skills, they should use various methods in the teaching process [3].

3.1. Cultivating autonomous learning ability Autonomous learning ability means cadets research problem cognition problem and resolve problem by themselves. In the process of mathematics course in military academies, it is necessary to outstand cadets' subject status, to inspire cadets' interest and enthusiasm about this course, enlighten cadets' thinking, and to train cadets' scientific exploration spirit. Specific points in the following steps to carry out: Inspire cadets' learning interest. Teachers may introduce mathematics history in the teaching process, or relate knowledge with practice to inspire cadets' learning interest. Interest is the best teacher. There is interest in learning to have the motivation to learn. Offering independent learning time and space for cadets. In teaching, teachers should boldly, give cadets plenty of time, let the cadets become the protagonist of the learning, become active explorers. Encourage cadets to dare to argue, and dare to question freely, bold their imagination. In order to build a platform for the cadets' autonomous learning ability, the teacher can stay "blank" in the teaching content and promote the cadets to take the initiative to solve the problem; While explaining the problem, the teacher should explain it in a multi angle, to cultivate cadets from a whole point of view to think about the problem, research questions, to solve the problem. Leaving questions after class, so that cadets can think about this problem from a fundamental point of thinking.

3.2. Cultivate the innovation ability of cadets The obvious characteristics of the creative ability of mathematics is: dare to think, dare to doubt, good at thinking. Therefore, the cultivation of the creative ability of cadets is to develop the cadets from the whole point, long-term, the fundamental point of view to find problems, to think, to study the problem and to solve the problems. To cultivate the innovation ability of cadets, first of all teachers themselves should have innovation consciousness, in the teaching process they should break

361

the old ideas that "supreme teacher, the book is supreme", and to encourage cadets to ask questions, to advocate cadets do "three not superstitious", "three allow", "four encourage". Namely, not superstition of the ancients, not superstitious expert, not superstition of teachers; Allow wrong, allow reservations; Encourage doubt, encourage to give opinions that different from text book, encourage to give opinions that different from teachers’, encourage different ideas and methods that different from text book.

4. Conclusion In a short word, the teacher must make a strategic planning carefully before class, clear a detailed teaching goals, in strictly accordance with the implementation of the strategy, to determine the specific teaching methods, to have a fine strategic decision-making, and focus on the training of cadets' ability. As a common basic course of military academies, advanced mathematics’ importance is self-evident. How to let the cadets to learn it well within the limited hours is every teacher's responsibility. The article is my experience sorted from my teaching practice, I write down this just in the hope of throw out a minnow to catch a whale. I believe that together with our teachers’ efforts, teaching methods of advanced mathematics will achieve a much greater development, and teaching effect will achieve a much greater improvement.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by scientific research projects on Dalian naval academy for education on teaching. Work partially supported by grant 2015 of the Dalian Naval Academy Science Foundation.

References 1. Li Jin-Kun, Wang Jian-Chuan. Strategy thinking[M]. Tianjin: Tianjin Academy of Social Sciences Press, 2003. 2. Xue Qi, Xu De-Bin. Strategy thinking: military personnel necessary professional accomplishment[J]. National Defense, 2014:73. 3. Yun Mei-Hou, Zhao Qiu-Fang. “Applied Geophysics” that based on strategy thinking teaching practice[J]. Chinese Geological Education, 2012(1): 142–145.

362

Chapter 3

Economy and Finance

Research on Financial Crises with Infectious Disease Model

Feng-Hua Fan and Yong-Chang Huang College of Applied Mathematics and Physics, Beijing University of Technology, Beijing, 100124, China E-mail: [email protected]

Unlike traditional macroeconomic analysis on financial crises, this paper investigated the relationship between the effects of propagating negative messages, which leads to deterioration of the economic situation over time. The theory of financial crises generated by the spread of investors’ panic is analogized by an infectious disease model. The basic reproduction number is thereafter calculated to determine the propagation of negative messages in a group of investors, the maximum number of investors that can be influenced by negative messages and the maximum threshold value of influenced investors before a financial crisis occurs. The calculations demonstrated that the number of investors influenced by negative messages when governments publish relevant policies, such as monetary policy, financial policy etc., to prevent financial crises is clearly lower than the number of investors influenced by negative messages when governments take no action. Therefore governments’ interference in financial uncertainty can effectively reduce the possibility of financial crises occurring.

Keywords: Financial Crises; Investors; Negative Messages; Infectious Disease Model.

1. Introduction The financial crises of spreading almost the whole world in the 1930s and subsequent a series of disasters caused by financial crises are unforgettable to humanity. After that, governments around the world and many economists, especially for macroeconomists, began to research on the problem of financial crises. Up to now, the theories about financial crises are generally divided into three classes. Firstly, the origin of financial crises is investors’ monetary shock caused by the conflict of macroeconomic deterioration or expansionary monetary policy and normal exchange rates. Secondly, due to anticipate economic variables, such as foreign exchange reserves, fiscal deficit etc, will gradually deteriorate in the future, investors withdraw large amount of capitals in advance and finally causes financial crises. Thirdly, the new generation of theory of financial crises, which is different from traditional macroeconomic viewpoints, attributes outbreak of financial crises to the existence of financial

365

agency. In which the second class theory of financial crises indicates that investors withdraw massive capitals in advance because of holding pessimistic attitude to the future economic situation and losing the confidence of investment to lead to economic growth slowdown, increase in unemployment rate, inflation aggravation etc problems is the major reason to erupt financial crises. The factors of influencing investors to anticipate future economic situation have a lot, the propagation of negative messages about future economic situation in group of investors is one of the important factors. We can regard the spread of negative messages in the group of investors as the spread of infectious disease in crowd, and thus research on the relationship between the effects of propagating negative messages and the generation of financial crises with the help of infectious disease model [1–5,8–10].

2. The Construction of Model We analogize the spread of negative messages, which are about economic situation will deteriorate step by step in the future, in the group of investors with the spread of infectious disease in crowd, and divide investors into three classes, which are St(), It() and Rt()respectively. In which St()represents the number of investors who are susceptible to the influence of negative messages at time t , that means this part of investors are not influenced by negative messages at time t , we call this part of investors susceptible people. It()represents the number of investors who are influenced by negative messages at time t , we call this part of investors infected people, who will withdraw capitals in advance. Rt() represents the number of investors who recover from being influenced by negative messages at time t , we call this part of investors recuperators. Under the suggestion of some investors who are not influenced by negative messages, recuperators believe negative messages are unreliable and will not be influenced by negative messages again through verification and study. After defining above variables, we further assume[12,13]: (1) One infected person fully contacts with βN susceptible people in unit time, in which N represents the total number of investors, and β is proportion coefficient. According to assumption (1) and propagation probability of infectious disease S equals , we can get the number of new infected people who are infected with N S I infected people equals ββN⋅ ⋅= I SI in unit time. (2) The number of new N recuperators is equal to αIt()in unit time, in which α is proportion coefficient. (3) The total number of investors is constant, namely NStItRtC=() ++ () () =.

366

According to above definitions and three assumptions, we finally obtain the model described by (1)

S =−β SI  I =−βα SI I (1)  RI= α

3. Study Financial Crises through the Model If St()and It()are determined in (1), Rt()can be naturally gotten using NStItRtC=() ++ () () =. Thus, we can remove RI = α from (1), (1) is changed to

S =−β SI  (2) I =−()βα SI 

Besides (2), we also need to consider the initial conditions SS(0) = 0 ,

II(0) = 0 and SI00+= N, in which I0 means that a small part of investors, for various reasons, believe economic situation will gradually deteriorate in the future. So whether the negative messages about future economic situation will be widely propagated in the group of investors and thus generate financial crises or not? We analyze this question as follows [11-15]. According to (2), we know α that St()decreases with time t , I > 0 if and only if St()> , I < 0 if and only if β α St()< , so It()first increases with time t to attain maximum when β α St()= and then decreases with time t . Defining basic reproduction number β βN βS H ≡≈0 , which judges whether negative messages about future 0 αα economic situation will be propagated in the group of investors or not. According to above discussion, we can get negative messages will not be α propagated in the group of investors when H <⇔1 S < , and negative 00β α messages will be propagated in the group of investors whenH >⇔1 S > . 00β

367

The integral from zero to time t with respect to S =−β SI is

S t β log0 =β Itdt () = [ N −− St () It ()] (3) St() ∫0 α

In which initial conditions and (2) are used. Rewriting (3), we get α St() It()=− N St () + log (4) β S 0 According to above discussion, we have known that negative messages will not be propagated in the group of investors when the number of susceptible α people at initial time is less than , that means financial crises will not be β occurred in economic systems; when the number of susceptible people at initial α time is greater than , negative messages will be propagated in the group of β investors and the number of infected people attains maximum αα INm =+(log − 1) when the number of susceptible people decreases with ββS0 α time t to . We definite the maximum of the number of infected people β αα INm =+(log − 1) as the possible outbreak value of financial crises ββS0 because the number of infected people attains maximum means the amount of capitals withdrawn in advance also attains maximum, and thus causes a series of problems, such as economic development slowdown, unemployed population expansion, inflation aggravation and so on, all these characteristics forecast financial crises may erupt.

4. The Prevention of Financial Crises In order to prevent the generation of financial crises, the number of infected people should be less than the possible outbreak value of financial crises. For that, governments should interference to avoid occurrence of financial crises in time. In terms of model, we need to introduceTt(), which represents the number of infected people who are remedied at time t , and relevant parameters in model (1) [11–15]. Concrete analysis as follows:

368

Assuming that γ I infected people are remedied per unit time, and ηT infected people are cured per unit time, in which γ and η are proportion coefficients. Investors who are cured means that investors will not believe negative messages about economic situation again because governments publish financial policy, monetary policy etc to deal with financial crises that may happen to make investors recover the confidence of investment. According to these assumptions, model (1) is modified as

S =−β SI  I =β SI −+() αγ I  (5) T =−γη IT  R =+αη IT

Now the investors are consist of susceptible people, infected people, people who are remedied, and recuperators, we also think that the total number of investors is constant in here, namely NStItTtRtC=() ++ () () + () =. Removing the last equation from (5) because Rt()can be determined according to NStItTtRtC=() ++ () () + () =after obtaining St(), It()andTt(), we get

S =−β SI  I =β SI −+() αγ I (6)  T=−γη IT

Integrals from zero to time t with respect to the first equation in (6), the third equation in (6) and the sum of the first two equations in (6) are

S t log0 = β I ( t ) dt . (7) St() ∫ 0 tt T() t=−γη∫∫ I () t dt T () t dt . (8) 00 t N− St() − It () =+ (αγ )∫ Itdt () . (9) 0

In above calculation, we use initial conditions SS(0) = 0 , II(0) = 0 ,T (0)= 0 and SI00+= N. According to (7)-(9), we get

S N−− St() It () log0 = β [ ] (10) St() αγ+

369

Rewriting (10) as (αγ+ )St () It()=− N St () + log (11) β S 0 St() Because St()is decreasing function, log< 0 , so S0

(αγ+ )St () α St() It()=−+ N St () log <−+N St () log (12) ββSS 00 α St() In which N−+ St( ) log is just the number of infected people at time t β S0 before the interference of governments. From (12), we can see that the number of infected people when governments adopt relevant measures to prevent financial crises is less than the number of infected people before governments interfere with financial crises, and thus the risk of eruption of financial crises is reduced. Above discussion proves the importance of governments in the process of preventing financial crises from additional viewpoint again. In 1997, facing serious Asian financial crisis, Chinese government published a series of measures and declared RMB would not depreciate to make exchange rates maintain stable and do not happen violent fluctuation, the confidence of most investors also returned to normal, so that the financial crisis did not spread further in China [6,7].

5. Discussion After the great depression caused by financial crises that spread almost the whole world in 1930s, governments around the world and many economists started to research on what reasons to generate financial crises. So far the theories about financial crises are generally divided into three classes. One of the theories indicates that investors hold pessimistic attitude to future economic situation is the major reason of generating financial crises. Due to anticipation of foreign exchange reserves, fiscal deficit, and governments’ promises to normal exchange rates, etc., economic variables will gradually deteriorate in the future, investors lose the confidence of investment and withdraw massive capitals in advance to make economic growth slowdown, unemployment rate increase and governments have to give up normal exchange rates, because of paying too much cost to maintain normal exchange rates, to lead to more serious inflation and depreciation of currencies. Having a lot of factors that influence investors’

370

anticipation, the propagation of negative messages about future economic situation in group of investors is one of the important factors.

6. Conclusion Different from traditional macroeconomic research methods on financial crises, we studied the relationship between the effects of propagating negative messages and the generation of financial crises by analogizing the propagation of negative messages in group of investors with the propagation of infectious disease in crowd in this paper, and first get the basic reproduction number that judges whether negative messages spread or not and the maximum of number of investors who are influenced by negative messages. We define the maximum as possible outbreak value of financial crises. In addition, we still discussed the role of governments in preventing financial crises. According to calculation, we get the conclusion that the number of investors who are influenced by negative messages when governments publish financial policy, monetary policy etc to prevent financial crises is obviously less than the number of investors who are influenced by negative messages when governments do not interfere with financial crises. Therefore, governments’ interference with financial crises can effectively reduce the risk of eruption of financial crises.

References 1. Kindleberger C P, Aliber R Z. “Manias, Panics and Crashes: A History of Financial Crises.” Palgrave Macmillan, 2011: 178–180. 2. Acharya V V, Richardson M. “Causes of the Financial Crisis”. Critical Review, 2009, 21(2-3): 195–210. 3. Fisher I. “The Debt-Deflation Theory of Great Depression”. Econometrica: Journal of the Econometric Society, 1933: 337–357. 4. Bernanke B S. “Non-monetary Effects of the Financial Crisis in the Propagation of the Great Depression”. The American Economic Review, 1983, 73(3): 257–275. 5. Bordo M. “Financial Crises, Banking Crises, Stock Market Crashes and the Money Supply: Some International Evidence, 1870–1933”. Financial Crises and the World Banking System, 1986: 190–248. 6. Radelet S, Sachs J D. “The Onset of the East Asian Financial Crisis.” University of Chicago Press, 2000: 105–162. 7. Furman J, Stiglitz J E, Bosworth B P. “Economic Crises: Evidence and Insights from East Asia”. Brookings papers on economic activity, 1998(2): 1–135.

371

8. Reinhart C M, Rogoff K S. “This Time Is Different: A Panoramic View of Eight Centuries of Financial Crises”. National Bureau of Economic Research, 2008. 9. Allen F, Carletti E. “Credit Risk Transfer and Contagion”. Journal of Monetary Economics, 2006, 53(1): 89–111. 10. Allen F, Gale D. “Financial Contagion”. Journal of Political Economy, 2000, 108(1): 1–33. 11. Castillo-Chavez C, Blower S, van den Driessche P, Kirschner D, Yakubu A A. “Mathematical Approaches for Emerging and Reemerging Infectious Diseases: Models, Methods and Theory”. Springer-Verlag, Berlin- Heidelberg-New York, 2002, Volume I. 12. Gumel A, Castillo-Chavez C, Clemence D F, Mickens R E. “Mathematical Studies on Human Disease Dynamics”. Am. Math. Soc, 2006, 410. 13. Hethcote H W. “The Mathematics of Infectious Diseases”. SIAM Review, 2000, 42: 599–653. 14. Hirsch M, Smale S. “Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems and Linear Algebra”. Academic Press, Orlando, FL, 1974. 15. Hurewicz W. “Lectures in Differential Equations”. MIT Press, Cambridge, 1958.

372

The Correlation between Creative Inclinations and Job Selection

M. E. Stan UCL School of Management, London, WC1E 6BT, UK E-mail: [email protected]

S. Shah University College London E-mail: [email protected]

An important concern that young graduates face today is finding a work environment matching their personality. Although research linking personality traits to individual performance in certain jobs has identified a number of robust relationships, the link between creative inclinations and career selection has remained generally less understood. This study establishes causal links between the creative inclinations of young graduates and their career self-selection, after accounting for their personality traits. Namely, positive relationships were found between creative inclinations and the pursuit of jobs in information technology (IT) and consulting; a negative relationship was found between creative inclinations and selecting a sales career. The multiple regression models employed in the analysis benefit from the triangulation of traits data collected during the students’ first undergraduate year with subsequent data collected during their graduation year. These analyses are relevant for various constituencies such as career services of business schools, educational institutions, directors and administrators of business programs, and students themselves. Keywords: Early Career Choices; Creative Personality; Openness; IT Careers.

1. Introduction

1.1. Theoretical Background Understanding what drives a higher person-environment fit has preoccupied social scientists for many decades [1]. More recently, the emphasis on technology innovation, creativity, and human skills needed to keep companies and industries in the world market has brought back into focus the antecedents and processes that enable a better matching between characteristics of the new

373

hires and the values of the organizations. While there are many approaches that could serve such an investigation, we propose to consider the links between the personalities of young graduates and their early career choices, with a specific focus on how their creative inclinations or their openness relates to the career choices made upon graduation. We begin this exploration by acknowledging Ben Schneider’s ASA model, referring to the cycle of attraction-selection- attrition of individuals into working environments that are congruent in terms of value sets, goals, and required capabilities [1]. In spite of the model’s shortcomings, we build on its tenet that “it is the people in the group that define the culture, not just the environment, structure, or rule of the game” [2]. In other words, the “attraction” component is particularly relevant to our investigation of the drivers that point young graduates into selecting their career paths, because it points to the antecedents underling the phenomenon of fresh graduates facing the vast opportunities and challenges of the job market: the graduates’ creative traits and personalities as drivers of their choices.

1.2. Creative traits and career selection Personality is a set of characteristics an individual possesses influencing their motives, goals, social interpretations, and behaviors in different situations. Costa and McCrae [3] categorized individual characteristics into five main personality traits known as the Five Factor Model (FFM): openness, conscientiousness, extraversion, agreeableness and neuroticism — with openness encompassing traits that measure the creativity of the individual. Motivated by the premise that personality traits correlate with career preferences, Holland’s theory of six interest traits (i.e., enterprising, social, artistic, investigative, conventional and realistic interests [4], exemplifies early attempts to conceptualize and personality traits relating to creativity. Research in this area has been preoccupied with the fit between individuals and different vocational interests (i.e., person-fit environment), suggesting that individuals who operate in environments that closely match their personality thrive in these settings. Several key relationships between personality and career selection have been identified. For instance, people who like values, stability in their work, who are task-oriented but prefer working alone and apply logical thinking are most likely to work in law, medicine, judges and accountants [5]. Additionally, those who demonstrate loyalty to a course of action, have strong values, and like security in their work, are likely to work in fields such as teaching, finance and sales.

374

A comprehensive review of the relationships between individual traits and vocational outcomes is beyond the scope of this study, as we set out to focus on the role creativity in the context of career selection within domains that are not typically viewed as being creative. However, a scan of the literature looking for this specific angle gives limited insights on the extent to which creative traits and inclinations influence career selection outside domains pertaining to the fine arts. Among these insights, we noted those in the practitioner literature suggesting that individuals with high openness and who enjoy non-routine work are most likely to self-select into fields such as consulting, and entrepreneurship [5–7].

1.3. Hypothesis development The focus of our investigation is to identify weather creativity traits and inclinations drive the selection of a specific career track within the sub-domains of business management. Specifically we will link individual creativity of young business graduates to their choices fo careers in information technology (IT), consulting, sales and finance. Many question the need to be creative in IT, however the IT profession requires resourcefulness and imaginative thinking. Some policy makers go as far as claiming that software development is a ‘creative industry’ because IT professionals are those who can shift economic trends by designing innovative business models with existing and new digital technologies [8]. Programming itself, as a career path within the IT domain, is perhaps wrongly perceived as only requiring writing codes. Jeremy Lwanga, a senior web developer at CBSi questioned this assumption claiming that “a good coder has to think of new ways to use old code…its like they have the same palette but each coder has the opportunity to use the colors in a different way” [6]. Subscribing to these arguments, we hypothesize that: H1: Young business graduates with creative personalities are more likely to choose an IT career over other career tracks upon graduation. Consulting careers also allow young graduates to express their creative personality by providing a context where alternate scenarios can be considered and various angles can be applied to the problem. It is thus expected to find that consulting is appealing to graduates who have strong critical thinking skills and who enjoy the challenge of finding and building solutions. Moreover, on the employer side, major consulting companies identify creativity as an essential quality required in young graduates who want to pursue a consulting career, with successful consultants having to demonstrate creativity and

375

problem-solving skills in unfamiliar situations. Therefore, our second hypothesis states that: H2: Young business graduates with creative personalities are more likely to choose a consulting career over other career tracks upon graduation. There are also professions where implicit and explicit social conventions create codes of professionalization that cannot easily allow creative individuals to express deviance. Within the field of business management, careers in banking and finance tend to require more conventional on-the-job behaviors and to discourage risk-taking attitudes associated with creative thinking. While there are niches within banking and finance where creative thinking skills are valued (e.g. derivatives research), the majority of jobs in this domain feature within vertically integrated financial institutions, which must abide by strict codes of practice and regulations. Because careers in banking and finance tend to require consistency and reliability in behaviors over flexibility and creativity, we propose the following hypothesis: H3: Young business graduates with creative personalities are less likely to choose a career in finance and banking over other career tracks upon graduation. Within the business management domain, sales careers present another context where vertical organizational structures could restrict the ability of young recruits to digress from retail or wholesale practices. As the last link in the value chain of marketable products, the sales staff is seldom allowed to deviate from the product strategy developed upstream from the point of contact with the customer. Moreover, in some sales jobs, deviation from the script is grounds for termination even if the sale was made. Therefore we propose the following hypothesis: H4: Young business graduates with creative personalities are less likely to choose a career in sales over other career tracks upon graduation.

2. Methodology and Analysis Testing our hypothesis required a research design that would allow measurements of personality profiles and creative inclinations prior to observing the first career choices. The following section describes the empirical setup of the study.

2.1. Sampling and survey items Primary data collection was conducted on a pool of business undergraduate students at university in London, soon after they began their first undergraduate

376

year. Thus, personality data was collected three years years prior to to collecting their career choices at graduation. While the first survey was completed for course credit, the second survey was completed voluntarily. Of 155 respondents who provided personality data, only 63 responded to the second stage data collection concerning career preferences, yielding a response rate of 41%. However, this relatively small sample can still be considered suitable for multiple regression analysis. Because the independent variables (i.e. individual traits) are time-lagged comparing to the dependent variables measured (i.e. career-relevant outcomes and behaviors), multiple regression models can be used to identify causal effects between personality and employability outcomes. The sample had 33% were female respondents, an average of 19.05 years of age at program entry and 22.5 years of age upon graduation. 16% of the respondents had already secured jobs from successful placements/internships during their final year, with 26% of students being engaged in short-term or part-time jobs. Moreover, our sample has taken into account the ethnic diversity of respondents: 40% of our respondents are Caucasian, followed by 25% Asian, 15% Indian, 13% Middle-Eastern, and 6% Black. An adapted online version of [9] personality survey was completed by students to obtain course credit. The personality profiles consist of scores from 1 to 5 for the established traits of openness, conscientiousness, extraversion, agreeableness, and neuroticism. To determine the extent of the student’s creative inclinations, they were also asked to report how inclined they were to express themselves in three artistic domains: performing arts (e.g., music, dance, and drama), visual arts (e.g., drawing, design, and fashion) and writing (e.g., stories, poetry, and blogging). Likert scales from 1 to 5 were used for each of the items, all three of them loading on one factor and yielding a scale reliability coefficient of 0.75. We label this factor “artistic inclinations” and, in addition to the measure of openness from the FFM personality profiles, we treat it as an additional proxy for a creative personality. To identify career preferences upon completion of their undergraduate studies, students were asked to list their first and second option for a career in management. If either of these first two options was a particular career track, we coded a binary variable for that career track as 1, and otherwise as zero. There were 6 choices that students could select: finance/banking (25 respondents chose it as a first or second option), sales/marketing (18 respondents), consulting (39 respondents), human resources (5 respondents), IT/operations (20 respondents) and other (14 respondents).

377

2.2. Data analysis Descriptive statistics and correlations are provided in Table 1 and Table 2. Consistent with our theorizing, the baseline correlations indicate that artistic inclinations correlate positively with the likelihood of choosing a career in IT and Consulting. Although it correlates positively with choosing an IT career, openness seems to correlate negatively with choosing a career in Consulting, suggesting that Openness might tap into a different antecedent of career choice than artistic inclinations. Multiple regression with a logit specification was used to model the impact of observed antecedents on four key career choices made by the respondents (see Table 3). Although our findings concerning artistic inclinations support our predictions for the positive impact on choosing a IT or consulting career (column 1), and a negative impact on choosing a sales career (column 4) the impact of openness is weak when choosing a career in finance or sales (columns 3 and 4) and negative on choosing a consulting career (column 2). Overall, the findings provide strong support for hypothesis 1 relating to choosing a career in IT, and partial support for hypotheses 2, and 4 (i.e. choosing a career in consulting and sales). No support is found for hypothesis 3, relating to choosing a finance career.

Table 1. Descriptive statistics

378

Table 2. Pairwise correlations

Table 3. Logit regressions for key dependent variables

Two-tailed tests: ∗∗∗ significant at 1%; ∗∗ significant at 5%; ∗ significant at 10%.

379

Nonetheless, these findings should be interpreted with caution given the small sample size and the pilot research design employed in the study. Further extensions of this study, currently underway, consider more fine-grained measures of a creative personality and career choice, in addition to a larger and more representative sample size.

3. Discussion Questioning how creative traits and inclinations relate to career choices and employability has been the main focus of this study. While investigating these relationships in the context of young graduates transitioning from their business studies to their first professional jobs, we found that artistic inclinations predict career choices in IT and in consulting. Moreover, the personality trait of openness indicates a higher likelihood of opting for a career in IT, although it seems to reduce the likelihood of choosing a consulting career. Although correlational and regression analyses increase our confidence for the findings, boundary conditions limit the inferences that can be made based on them. For example, the small sample size does not allow precise estimates of our predictors, or to break down our measures into finer items. Generalizability is also limited to individuals enrolled in business programs and facing a range of options that may be restricted by their area of study.

4. Conclusion

The results of this study may prove beneficial to career services departments, educational institutions, recruiters, and student sponsors when considering the influence of creative traits on potential career paths. For example, career services and educational institutions can use this information to deliver better career counseling and resources for students. Moreover, recruiters can have a better understanding of the creative traits and skills of new recruits and how they can enhance both the professional potential of the recruits and the innovativeness and competitiveness of the organizations hiring them.

References 1. B. Schneider, H. Goldstein and B. Smith, The ASA Framework: An Update, Personnel Psychology 48, 747 (1995).

380

2. J. Madigan, Picking Your Guildies: The Role of Attraction, Selection, and Attrition (2010), http://www.psychologyofgames.com/2010/ 03/picking-your-guildies-the-role-of-attraction-sel ection-and-attrition/. 3. R.R. McRae and P.T Costa Jr, Openness to experience. Perspectives in personality 1, 145 (1985). 4. J.L. Holland, Making vocational choices: A theory of vocational personalities and work environments, Psychological Assessment Resources (1997). 5. BSM Consulting, Careers for Personality Types (2014), http://www. personalitypage.com. 6. T. Bowers, Is there a Place for Creativity in IT?, Career Management (2011), http://www.techrepublic.com/blog/career-manag ement/is-there-a-place-for-creativity-in-it/. 7. C. Camden, 10 Personality Traits of a Highly Effective Independent Consultant. IT Consultant (2008), http://www.techrepublic.com/ blog/it-consultant/10-personality-traits-of-a-highly-effective-independent-consultant/212/. 8. Scottish Government, Creative Industries - Key Sector Report (2009), www.scotland.gov.uk/Resource/Doc/293235/00905 15.pdf. 9. P.T. Costa Jr, and R.R. McRae, Revised NEO Personality Inventory (NEO- PI-R) and NEO Five-Factor Inventory (NEO-FFI) professional manual, Psychological Assessment Resources (1992).

381

Research on the Effect of Landscape Pattern by Rural Land Circulation Based on GIS Analysis — A Case Study of Tongziyan Village, Wusheng County

Ya-Qiong Xu, Yong Wu1 and Lei Wang

Management College, China West Normal University, Nanchong City, Sichuan Province, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

Based on ARCGIS spatial analysis software, this paper analyzes the landscape pattern of land use before and after land circulation in Tongziyan village. The results demonstrate that Paddy and dry land are the dominant landscape types after land transfer and part of the forestland and unused land are converted into roads, construction land and pits. The number of paddy field, dry land and the density of patch have decreased by more than 20%. Although the number of patches, patch’s density, landscape shape index of roads, construction land and pits are rising, the mosaic structure of patches’ form remained relatively constant. The diversity index, shape index and evenness index are all in a decreasing trend, while the average patch fractal dimension, segmentation index shows an increasing trend, which reflects the increase of the complexity of land use landscape types in this area.

Keywords: Land Circulation; GIS; Landscape Ecology; Indicators of Landscape Effects.

1. Introduction As a core in the reform of China's rural land use system and the development of rural economy, rural land has a very practical significance on the solution to the "three rural" issues, as well as urban and rural economic development [1-3]. Land circulation is a systematic project, the flow content of it has influences the landscape effect and ecological processes inevitably, such as the change in the circulation of the object and the function in the form of the surface process. The study on the effect of land transfer of landscape theory and the practice of land transfer is of great significance. In order to promote a healthy and orderly development of land transfer, it is a urgent scientific problem to find that how to learn, integrated existing scientific and reasonable method of landscape ecology of land transfer’s ecological analysis. A case for transaction costs in Slovakia, Joshua Eleonora Metal investigated rural land reform and land privatization which adopted by Central and Eastern Europe countries generally

1Corresponding author.

382

since the 1990s, and he pointed out that the privatization of land led to a lot of land fragmentation which made it difficult to achieve the allocation of resources optimal allocation [4]. Peihua Du, Guoli Dong, Zuhui Huang had a study on the status of rural land circulation in Jiangsu Province, Zhejiang Province, who summarized and analyzed the farmers behaviors which hindered the circulation pattern of rural land[5-7]. Biliang Luo thinks that land circulation can improve the efficiency of land resources allocation effectively, and it will provide a broad space for the scale, intensive and efficient agricultural management[8-9]. Civil and foreign scholars’ study are focused on rural land transaction, rural land circulation and its achievements, and most of them are based on the overall perspective. It is lack of research to put present comprehensive and valuable information about the rural land circulation pattern from regional scale, project area and landscape index. Based on GIS and used the the principle of landscape ecology, this paper put the Tongziyan village, Wusheng county which located in region of the east Sichuan hilly as an example, and try to reveal the differentiation characteristics of overall structure and its influencing factors under the background of land circulation of rural land use landscape, remedy the lack of researches in this kind of background, it will promote the optimal allocation of agricultural resources and agricultural production factors and provide a scientific basis for regional social and economic sustainable development on the space of intensive utilization of resources, the improvement of the ecological environment as well.

2. Study Area Tongziyan village located in the north of Wusheng County, which located in E106.3, N30.8, 372.24 meters above sea level. Located in east of Sichuan province, middle and lower reaches of the Jialing river, it covers an area of 960 Square kilometers, and rule over 15 towns such as Sanxi, Feilong, Leshan, 16 townships such as Tongziyan, Shipan, Bayi. At the junction between Sichuan and Chongqing provinces, it bordering Nanchong, Suining, Hechuan three cities, which control the throat of eastern Sichuan southern Sichuan briefly. Sloping from northwest to southeast, it has a typical square hilly landscape. The county has a subtropical humid monsoon climate, which own four distinct seasons, abundant rainfall and sunshine.

383

3. Data and Methods

3.1. Data sources and data processing platform The aerial images of Tongziyan village, Wusheng County in 2000 and 2015 whose spatial resolution is 20 m×20 m are original data sources before and after the land circulation. Through radiometric and geometric correction, consult 1:10000 terrain data, we use present land-use map of Tongziyan village and forest distribution, the basic date including data from GPS and nature and social economy materials from related government departures for reference. Taking land use, distribution characteristics and use pattern as a basis for classification, establishing the land use interpreting marker based on the characteristics of the surface landscape, we have interpreted the land use distribution data in 2000 and 2015 by human computer interaction mode and vectored those classified data. We have created topological relation through editing and established the land use database of Tongziyan village. Based on the classification of landscape type in Tongziyan village, compared the present land-use maps of 2000 and 2015, combined the data from wild research, we have segmented and merged the landscape units of the 1:10000 present land-use map with MapGis, and finally transferred the data in 20m pixels to get the landscape type grid graphics before and after the land circulation of Tongziyan village.

3.2. Classification of land use and landscape With reference to the land use classification techniques (GB/T21010-2007) of the second national land survey of land classification, combined with the situation in research area, we divided the area into several types, such as farmland, forest land, water area, construction land and some other types. Due to the significant change of paddy land and dry land, the secondary land use of paddy land and dry land will be described further.

3.3. Index calculation of landscape pattern Firstly, we use the Dissolve Region function of ArcToolbox in ArcGis10.1, re-merge the landscape units according to the land use pattern, create topological relation and built links with the original attribute database, and counted the areas and distributions of all kind land-use patterns. And then we transferred the format of the landscape type map into Grid format with space

384

analyzing module of ArcView3.2, calculated the landscape index by landscape analysis software FRAGSTATS3.4, and analyzed the regional landscape spatial distribution characteristics finally.

Landscape indexes include patch level index, patch type level index and patch landscape level index. This paper analyzes the regional landscape spatial distribution pattern by the combination of patch type level index and patch landscape level index as the patch level index possesses has little value in explaining the regional landscape structure [10]. Because of the wide variety and repeatability of the landscape index, we choose ten landscape pattern index according to previous studies and our needs [11-17]. (Table 3)

4. Results and Analysis

4.1. Land circulation status of Tongziyan village

4.1.1. Forms of land circulation The land circulation which effected by the influence of geopolitical environment and economy proportional has certain amount of spatial effect between different mode of land circulation because of the difference of the local condition and natural resource.

The land circulation of Tongziyan village displayed in five forms: swap, transfer, subcontract, cultivate for others and buy a share, from a point of changes of the property rights after land circulation. The fore-four types are happened voluntarily among villagers in Tongziyan village and dominate the land circulation, and the form of buying a share depended on the drive of the town’s collective economic organizations mainly.

4.1.2. Scale of land circulation Through field survey and visit, we find that circulations happened spontaneous between neighboring farmers or farmers who know each other, they take oral agreements mostly and the circulation scales are under 20 mu. To deal with the problem that the number of villagers who are unwilling to cultivate land is increasing and most of the young farmers are working in urban areas, the collective economic organizations of Tongziyan village utilize large areas of waste land by agricultural mechanization.

385

4.1.3. Application of land circulation Labor radius of farmers had been enlarged, more farmland had been used, and the output benefits improved by concentrating farmland in several regions. At the same time, more construction land had been used by concentrating construction land in several regions. The village committee used the sparing land to construct the public infrastructure in village, which realized a win-win situation both production and life.

4.2. Changes of landscape index structure The regional water facility took a small proportion, the paddy land and dry land were scattered over the areas before the land circulation. According to the size of the area, the land-use pattern can be aligned into the order that paddy land (35.76%) > dry land (24.75%) > forest land (9.61%) > construction land (4.60%) > pond (0.005%). After the land circulation, the distribution of paddy land and dry land became concentrated and the proportions of road and water facility have been improved. According to the size of the area, the land-use pattern can be aligned into the order that paddy land (44.59%) > dry land (23.60%) > forest land (5.98%) > construction land (5.89%) > pond (0.34%), and the proportion of unused land has dropped to 16.54%. According to chart 2, farmland (paddy land, dry land) takes the largest proportion among all the land-use patterns in the research area, and it is also the most important landscape basement in Tongziyan village. Unused land and forest land trended down after the land circulation, while construction land and pond areas trended up which reflect the interactive conversion relationships between the unused land, forest land, construction land and pond to some degree. In general, the present situations of land use in Tongziyan village have been changed after the land circulation. The construction land and pond areas have a trend to increase, but the farmland (paddy land, dry land) is still a predominant landscape pattern.

386

Table 1. The changes of land use structures after land circulation

Before After

Land use types Area（hm2） Proportion（%） Area（hm2） Proportion（%）

Paddy 71.301 35.760 88.902 44.590

Dry land 49.356 24.753 47.042 23.595

Construction land 9.164 4.596 11.746 5.892

Road 2.448 1.228 6.086 3.053

Pond 0.009 0.005 0.691 0.347

Forest land 19.161 9.610 11.920 5.980

Unused land 47.950 24.049 32.987 16.545

4.3. Changes of patch pattern Features of patch changes in different land-use pattern, as listed in chart 2. The number and size of regional land use patches have been growing, the number and density of patches in unused land, pond area and road have been growing larger among them. The patch number of rice, average size and the size proportion of the largest patch in landscape area (LPI) of the paddy land patches have been decreasing. The number of patches decreases from 272 before the land circulation to 168 after the land circulation, which decreased by 54.84%; The density of the patches largely decreases from 286.57/100hm2 before the land circulation to 84.26/100hm2 after the land circulation. The number of dry land patches, density of dry land patches, density of average patch in landscape area and paddy land also have been decreasing, but the change is smaller than that in paddy land. The largest patch in landscape area grows from1.288hm2 before the land circulation to 2.740hm2, and increased 1.452 hm2. The density of dry land, paddy land and unused land are large, and

387

the fragmentation degree is lower than other landscape pattern. But the absolute predominant position of farmland (paddy land, dry land) among all the landscape patterns is invariable. The shape index of the landscape reflects the shape complexity of different types of landscape. The higher the landscape shape index means the more complex the overall boundary shape of the landscape. The patch shape indexes of the construction land, road and pond area have increased more than 10%, but the overall shape index is stable. Fractal dimension is often used to measure the complexity of the patch shape. To one kind of landscape, the size of the fractal dimension reflects the size and complexity of the landscape shape. Larger the number is, more complex the landscape patch shape will be. The fractal dimension results of all the landscape pattern patches in the research area (Table 3), the fractal dimension number below 1.5 showing that the shape and pattern complexity degrees of all the landscape are not large, and the patch patterns of all the landscape types are fairly simple. In comparison, the highest fractal dimension before the land circulation belongs to road, and the figure is 1.495, approaching 1.5, and its mosaic texture of the patch shape is in the most unstable state.

4.4. Effects on the change of landscape index by land circulation

Landscape type map before the transfer Landscape type map after the transfer of land use of land use

Fig.1. Landscape maps of land use in Tongziyan village

388

38 1.136 1.219 1. 1.143 1.157 1.121 1.292 After

FRAC

495 . 1.098 1.202 1 1.211 1.162

1.28 1.121 Before

002 .

8.293 33.791 20.044 14.66 54 110.577 18.219 After LSI

805 .455 . 1.65 29.198 43.998 16.199

109.55 16 38 Before

0.01 0.21 0.529 0.134 0.008 0.065 0.0 After MPS

3 0.005 0.173

0.192 0.223 0.0 0.029 0.067 Before

031 .

0.151 2.74 2.633 1.054 2 7.15 0.151 After LPI

404 0.002

1.288 4.287 21.838 0.38 0.678 0. Before

999 .

33.605 111.849 2011.281 90.784 44.639 639 84.26 After PD

1.003 68.709 43.131

40.624 186.57 142.936 822.506 Before

67 181 89 1276 168 223 4010 After NP

Table 2. The comparisons of characteristics of land use patches between before and after land circulation 2 137 86

81 Before 372 285 1640

Land use Land types Pond land Road Unused land Forest land Construction Construction Paddy Dry land

389

Table 3. The changes of spatial pattern of the whole landscape after land circulation

Landscape indices Before After Rate of Rate of

change change

（%）（%）

Landscape shape index 54.702 47.352 -7.350 -13.436

Most of landscape patch area ratio 21.838 7.150 -14.689 -67.261

Mean patch fractal dimension 1.256 1.295 0.039 3.122

Plaque abundance density 3.510 3.511 0.0003 0.009

Segmentation index 0.948 0.986 0.039 4.073

Aggregation 92.536 93.580 1.044 1.129

Shannon diversity index 1.477 1.460 -0.017 -1.171

Shannon evenness index 0.759 0.750 -0.009 -1.160

Simpson diversity index 0.742 0.710 -0.031 -4.235

Simpson evenness index 0.865 0.829 -0.037 -4.230

The patch’s characteristics of regional landscape change significantly after land circulation (Figure 1, Table 2, and Table 3). Firstly, the number of paddy land and dry land are reducing, while the total number of patches of landscape increased significantly; Aggregation, density and Multi-degree index of patch didn’t change significantly before and after the land circulation, it still in a relatively stable state; the growth of patches’ segmentation index makes average patch of the study area smaller, and dividing the study area into more

390

patches to meet corresponding demand shows the strengthen activities of people in the range of land development, land utilization and land classification. The average fractal dimension of landscape increased 3.1%, the patches’ shape similarity of regional landscape becomes larger, the shape becomes more and more regular. The landscape changed from small patches become a few large patches dominate in the view of space configuration, which is conducive to the efficient allocation of land resources, scale, intensive and efficient agriculture management. The largest patches accounted for the landscape area are reducing, the down index up to 67.26%, indicating that the differences about the proportion of different types of landscape components in an area is gradually narrowing, the distribution of different components in landscape becomes more uniformly, the situation that a variety of landscape or a predominant landscape dominant the landscape area continues to decrease, the influence of the landscape by human activity has increased. The diversity and uniformity index related to the number of patches’ type and uniformity degree of the distribution of different patches in the area and the relationships are proportional, the greater value means the more complex landscape spatial distribution of each composition and more homogeneous. The diversity index and uniformity index of Simpson and Shannon decreased slightly, the index decreased between 1.17% - 4.23%. On the one hand, with the widen application after land circulation, changes from different farmers planted various crops to farmers concentrated on the same type of crops makes the reduction of Bio-diversity. On the other hand, with the expansion of circulation scale, patches’ type became more concentrated in spatial distribution from original broken small patches into large patches.

5. Conclusion Combined with theory and practice research, the regional land use map, based on ARCGIS spatial analysis software, analysis the whole spatial pattern of regional land use landscape from seven types of landscape such as paddy field, dry land, construction land, pond and so on, selected relative landscape index and use FRAGSTATS3.4 landscape pattern analysis software, this paper use the analysis of landscape pattern of land use before and after the land circulation in Tongziyan Village as an example to analysis the selected landscape index. Conclusions are as follows:

391

(1) The main part land use landscapes of Tongziyan village are paddy field and dry land. The changes of land use patterns are not significant, while the biggest changes falls on the land use of road and the comprehensive land use degree index is rising.

(2) Calculations and analysis have been done to the patch number, patch density, patch shape index and some other factors based on the analysis of the best size for the various landscape types of Tongziyan village. The study found that the patch number and patch density of cultivated land (paddy fields, dry land) decreased, areas of the largest landscape patch increased, while the degree of fragmentation decreased, and the patch shapes become simplified; The number of plaques roads, construction land, pond water, patch density, the proportion accounted landscape area and the degree of fragmentation of plaque which increases the unevenness of connectivity and reduced distribution.

(3) In the evolution of the overall landscape pattern index of Tongziyan village, the diversity index of Shannon fell from 1.48 to 1.46, and the evenness index dropped to 0.75 from 0.76; the diversity index of Simpson decreased from 0.74 to 0.71, and the Simpson evenness index decreased from 0.87 to 0.83; the segmentation index rose from 0.95 to 0.95, and the area proportion of the largest patch in the whole landscape area decreased as high as 67.26 percent. The above data reflect that the overall diversity and evenness level of Tongziyan village declined, landscape heterogeneity decreased, the degree of binding reduced, and the contact rate between the different types of landscape became small.

Acknowledgments This study was supported by Research Foundation of CWNU (11B034).

References

1. Lijun Liu. A comparative study of the performance of rural land transfer mode [M]. Beijing: China Economic Press, 2011. 2. Futian Qu, et al. Rural land issues of China's industrialization and urbanization in the process of the research [M]. Beijing: Economic Science Press, 2010.

392

3. Xiaoming Guo. China's rural land system reform: Demand, difficulties and development trend [J]. Chinese Rural Economy, 2011, 04: 4-8. 4. Joshua M.Duke, Eleonora Marisova, Anna Bandlerova, et al. Price RePression in the Slovak Agricultural Land Market [J]. Land Use Policy, 2004(21):59-69. 5. Peihua Du, Minghao Ou. An empirical study of farmland transfer behavior - Based on Jiangsu Province [J]. Scientific and Technological Management Resources, 2008(1):53-56. 6. Zuhui Huang, Peng Wang. Rural Land: Status, Problems and Countermeasures - On the effect of land transfer of modern agricultural development [J]. Zhejiang University (Humanities and Social Sciences), 2008, 38(2):38-47. 7. Guoli Dong, Li Li, Jiping Ren. Land circulation mode and economic performance of property agent analysis[J]. Sociological Research,2009(l):25-63. 8. Biliang Luo,Chen Wu. Transaction efficiency:agricultural land contract management rights transfer in new perspective-A case study on Guangdong[J]. Agricultural Technology,2008(2):12-18. 9. Biliang Luo. Intensity of property rights, farmland transfer and protection of the rights and interests of farmers [M]. Beijing: Economic Science Press,2013. 10. Biliang Luo. A landscape ecology pattern, process, scale and level [M]. Beijing:Higher Education Press,2000. 11. Feddema J J，Olson K W，Bonan G B，et al．The importance of land-cover change in simulating future climates[J]. Science,2005,310: 1674-1678． 12. Mcaeely J. A.,Gadgil M.,Leveque C., et al. Human influences on biodiversity [A]. In: Heywood V. H.,Watson R. T. (Eds), Global Biodiversity Assessment[D]. Cambridge:Cambridge University Press, 2005. 13. Benyun Zhang, Huaifei Shen, Jinggang Zheng,et al. GIS-based Analysis on the Landscape Spatial patterns of Land-use in Henan Province[J]. Resources Science,2009,31(2):317-323. 14. Xing Chen．Study on the spatial pattern of regional ecological security evaluation model [J]．Journal of Beijing forestry university,2008,30(1): 21-28．

393

15. Yurong Hou, An Shazhou. Spatio-temporal Changes of Landscape Patterns in Mainstream of Tarim River[J]. Journal of Arid Land Resources and Environment,2010,24(3):44-50. 16. Zheng Duan, Xianfeng Song, Minjun Shi. Changes of Spatial Landscape Pattern and Driving Forces in Miyun County During 1992-2006[J].Research of Soil and Water Conservation, 2009,16(5): 55-60. 17. Jun Wang, Yang Qiu. et al. Land Consolidation Landscape effects analysis based on GIS [J]. Geographical Research, 2007,26(2):258-264.

394

An Empirical Study on Factors Affecting the Cash Dividends of China’s Listed Companies - Based on Year 2014 Data on Publicly Listed Construction Companies

Shan Liu and Ru-Yu Li Hohai University Changzhou, 213022, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper analyzes the cash dividend policies of 76 listed companies in China’s construction industry based on financial data obtained in 2014. The data distribution is analyzed using SAS 9.2 software and factors which influence cash dividend policies are identified. The analytical results demonstrate that that the asset-liability ratio, net assets returns ratio, net assets per share, earnings per share and net operating cash flow per share influence cash dividend policies, but the quick ratio and the growth rate of total assets do not effect cash dividend. The asset-liability ratio is negatively correlated to cash dividend, while net assets returns ratio, net assets per share, earnings per share, and net operating cash flow per share are positively correlated to cash dividend per share; but net assets returns ratio does not have any significant correlation with cash dividend per share. The findings provide empirical evidence for further research on cash dividends.

Keywords: Construction Industry; Cash Dividends; Empirical Analysis; SAS.

1. Introduction Dividend policy, investment decision and financing decision are the three core issues of financial management in a company. Listing corporation as a strong social nature of the organization, the dividend policy is an important part of financial management. The dividend distribution will cause the decrease of retained earnings, to a certain extent on the future development of enterprises caused by constraints. Since 1990, Shanghai and Shenzhen Stock Exchange began, China securities market has made great development. By the end of 2015, the Shanghai and Shenzhen stock exchanges has 2832 listing corporation, the total market value is more than 41 trillion yuan. Investors developed from single small investors to institutional investors. As of January 21, 2016, the number of investors in the market has exceeded 100 million, the general investor’s focus on the dividend policy is also more and more high. Therefore,

395

listing companies need to formulate dividend policy with the development of enterprises.

2. Empirical Research on Factors Affecting on Cash Dividend

2.1. Research hypothesis  The asset-liability ratio negatively correlated with cash dividends. The asset-liability ratio is an important index to measure the listed corporation solvency. The higher asset-liability ratio is, the greater the tendency of financial pressure and the lower cash dividend will be.  The quick ratio positively correlated with cash dividend. The quick ratio is also used to measure the enterprise's solvency, liquidity is bigger, stronger asset liquidity will more likely to pay cash dividend.  The net returns on equity positively correlated with cash dividend, also known as return on equity, which is used to measure the efficiency of using its own capital for listing Corporation. The higher net returns on equity is, the greater tendency of cash dividends will be.  The total assets growth rate positively correlated with cash dividend, which reflects the growth of assets of the listing Corporation. The asset is the resources for enterprise income, also the guarantee to repay enterprise’s debt. The growth of assets is an important aspect of the development of enterprises, enterprises which develop well can maintain assets with stable growth. The higher rate of growth of assets is, the greater tendency of corporate cash dividends will be.  Net assets per share and cash dividend are positively related. Net assets per share reflects the share of assets owned by the present value, the higher the net assets per share, indicating the development potential of the company is greater, and the ability of cash dividends is strong.  Earnings per share and cash dividend are positively related. It is one of the important indexes to value the stock investment, can directly reflect the ability of the pay cash dividend of listing company. The higher the earnings per share is, the stronger ability of cash dividend payment of listing Corporation will be.  Net operating cash flow per share and cash dividend are positively related. Net operating cash flow per share reflects the amount of cash inflows of enterprise. The listing company which has good management and strong profitability can pay cash dividend more easily.

396

2.2. Research design

2.2.1. Sample selection and data sources This article selects the 76 listed companies in construction industry as the investigation object. In the process of sample selection, eliminates the undistributed cash dividend of enterprises, as well as the ST listed company. Finally select the data about the distribution of cash dividend of 52 listed companies in 2014. In this paper, the data sample mainly comes from the ifeng website (finance.ifeng.com). With the help of SAS 9.2, analyze the data sample.

2.2.2. Basic Assumptions and Designed Variables

Table 1: Variables designed for assumptions

Variable Variable Variable Relevance to the symbol name definition dividend Y Cash dividend per share Total amount of cash dividend /total equity X1 Asset-liability ratio Total debt/total assets Negative X2 Quick ratio Quick assets/current liabilities Positive X3 Net assets returns ratio Net income/average net assets Positive X4 Growth rate of total assets Total assets at the beginning of Positive growth/total assets X5 Net assets per share Equity/total equity Positive X6 Earnings per share Net income/total equity Positive X7 Net operating cash flow per Operating activities net cash Positive share flow/total equity

3. Empirical Results and Analysis

3.1. Correlation analysis Firstly, SAS 9.2 was used for the variable correlation analysis to prevent the multicollinearity between variables from affecting the meaning of the model. From Table 2, we can see that the correlation between the variable X1 and X6 is greater than 0.8, as well as the variable X3 and X5, X3 and X7. If the correlation between the variables is greater than 0.8, the model will exist multicollinearly.

397

Table 2: Pearson correlation coefficient, N=52. When H0: Rho=0, Prob>｜r｜

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X1 1.00000 X1 X2 -0.69962 1.00000 X2 <.0001 X3 -0.15534 0.45433 1.00000 X3 0.2715 0.0007 X4 -0.20268 0.27052 0.32119 1.00000 X4 0.1496 0.0524 0.0202 X5 -0.14324 0.28932 0.03432 -0.05792 1.00000 X5 0.3111 0.0375 0.8091 0.6834 X6 -0.01841 -0.11208 0.14679 0.29012 0.12932 1.00000 X6 0.8970 0.4289 0.2991 0.0369 0.3609 X7 -0.09925 0.17310 0.02762 -0.05987 -0.20041 -0.31480 1.00000 X7 0.4839 0.2198 0.8459 0.6733 0.1543 0.0230

3.2. Regression analysis Use SAS 9.2 software to do multiple linear regression analysis, then get the following equation: Y=−0.0073 − 0.0412 XX 1 − 0.0479 2 + 0.0993 XX 3 − 0.0103 4 + 0.0309 X5

++0.1395XX 6 0.0393 7 (1)

Table 3:Multiple Regression Summary of Fit

Summary of Fit Mean of Response 0.0949 R-Square 0.4867 Root NSE 0.0712 Adj R-Sq 0.4050

The R-Square is 0.4867, that is to say, the seven variables can explain 48.67%, while the left 51.33% can be explained by other variables and random factors. This model has general explanation.

Table 4: Multiple Regression Analysis of Variance Source DF Sum of Squares Mean Square F Stat Pr>F Model 7 0.2116 0.0302 5.96 <.0001 Error 44 0.2232 0.0051 C Total 51 0.4348

The first line of each of the variables in Table 1 is the Pearson correlation coefficient, and the second line is the P value which is corresponding with the first line. As is shown from the Table 1, the Pearson correlation coefficient

398

between each variable is less than 0.8. The closer the correlation coefficient of 0, the weaker the correlation, so there is no multicollinearity relationship between variables.

Table 5: Parameter Estimates

Variable DF Estimate Std Error T Stat Pr>｜t｜ Tolerance Var Inflation Intercept 1 0.0073 0.0846 0.09 0.9312 . 0 X1 1 -0.0412 0.0914 -0.45 0.6540 0.4613 2.1679 X2 1 -0.0479 0.0393 -1.22 0.2299 0.3251 3.0762 X3 1 0.0993 0.0974 1.02 0.3137 0.6847 1.4605 X4 1 -0.0103 0.0298 -0.35 0.7317 0.7909 1.2644 X5 1 0.0309 0.0061 5.04 <.0001 0.7990 1.2516 X6 1 0.1395 0.0407 3.43 0.0013 0.8059 1.2409 X7 1 0.0393 0.0143 2.76 0.0085 0.7912 1.2640

As can be seen from Table 5, the T statistic of net assets per share, earnings per share, operating cash flow per share are 5.04, 3.43, 2.76. They pass the test of significance(P<0.05). As a result, the three variables are highly significant to cash dividends, and the regression coefficient is consistent with the hypothesis. Meanwhile, asset-liability ratio, quick ratio, net assets returns ratio and the growth rate of total assets do not pass the test of significance so that they should be got rid of the model. Variance inflation factors (VIF) are less than 10, the model do not have serious multicollinearity.

4. Advantages and Disadvantages

4.1. Advantages Based on the latest data of listed companies, do an empirical research on cash dividends. Analyze the cash dividends policy from four aspects: debt paying ability, profitability, operating capacity, and capital structure.

4.2. Disadvantages Cash dividend distribution policy does not exist continuity, and the data collected has not been tested, so that the conclusion may be not true. At the same time, the paper only analyze the internal factors affecting the cash dividends, while there exist many external factors influence the policy.

5. Conclusion (1) Net assets per share has significantly positive correlation with cash dividends.

399

(2) To some extent, the index refelects the operating capacity of a company. When a company has strong operation ability, the company will have potential to develop, which means the company have more confidence to distribute cash dividends. (3) Earnings per share is positively related to cash dividends. Earnings per share reflects the influence of profitability on the cash dividends policy. Generally, the higher the earnings per share, the more cash dividend distribution. (4) Net operating cash flow per share has positive correlation with cash dividend per share. That is to say, the basic prerequisite for cash dividends that listed companies distribute is enough cash flow. Enough cash flow ensures the company’s capacity to distribute cash dividends.

References 1. Juan Guo, A research about the influential factors of dividend distribution of listed companies in construction industry[D], Northeast Petroleum University, 2013. 2. Juan Guo, A dividend policy analysis of listed companies in construction industry in China[J], Journal of Liaoning Technical University(social science), 2013,03:242–245. 3. Yucui Wang and Juan Guo, An empirical research on the influential factors of dividend distribution of listed companies in construction industry[J], Business Accounting, 2013,09:60–62. 4. Liyun Cui, An corporate growth research on listed companies in construction industry[D], Tianjin University of Finance and Economics, 2012. 5. Juan Li and Yijing Liao, An empirical study on influence factors of cash dividend policy in listed companies—take listed company in construction industry as an example[J], Journal of Luoyang institute of technology(social science), 2015,05:25–29. 6. Hongchun Li, The empirical analysis on influencing factors of capital structure of listed company in construction industry[J], Manager, 2014, 02:51. 7. Dahong Lu, The dividend policy research in construction enterprise[J], Modern Business, 2011,11:225–226. 8. Yuzhe Sun, The cash dividend policy research in our listed companies, East China University of Political Science and Law, 2013.

400

A Study on Silver Stock in Britain

X. Ji History and Cultural Institute, Northeast Normal University, Changchun, JiLin, China E-mail: [email protected]

Currency is the central issue in economic history research as it is the most important measure for the progress of human society. Therefore an in-depth study of currency history is indispensable for the analysis and description of economic history. As new voyages are discovered, Britain’s GDP has increased due to numerous reasons and the most important reason is that the improved financial sector boosted economic growth. In order to research on the historical process of the development of monetary systems in ancient agricultural societies, this paper firstly discusses and provides explanations on the fluctuations of currency stock and other factors. Next, silver data in 11th to 17th century Britain is collected and analyzed and the silver stock is found to be beneficial to control currency flow and economic changes. According to the statistics of silver in Britain, it is believed that silver currency per capital, currency stock and other factors promoted growth of the domestic and national economy.

Keywords: Currency; Silver; Stock; Britain.

1. Introduction

What is the core of national competitiveness? Of different viewpoints, national competitiveness signifies national military ability, economic resources, and the national culture of competition, whose reflects one aspect of national competitiveness. However, in fact the core of national competitiveness is currency competition, even more the financial structure of the competition. To some degree, Finance manifests national economic lifeline, and currency manifests national hegemony of the highest. Therefore, currency research relates to economic history research, which reflects the competitiveness of a country accurately, and the process of a nation's rise and decline. Currency System refers to currency circulation model and construction which is fitted by national law. Currency belongs to central and foremost weights and measures. Currency system refers to national currency structure and currency organization form written by national law. [1] Currency as unique payment and

401

land way belongs to central and important weights and measures. With introducing ownership and debt system, and bills, Currency system gradually establishes enormous credit and debit system, ownership and debt system, which sustains production and consumption in capitalist society. [2] American scholar Joseph believes that stable currency as legal tender has sustained credit institution and financial system for economic development. Without money credit system, British never acquire 0.2% per capital GDP economic increasing under agricultural production in 1000 AD, and Similarly 9%~10% per capital GDP economic increasing in China. Silver standard refers to standard money which is equipped with legal tender powers. Silver coins could be melted freely. Silver and silver coins, which are exchange for paper money freely, output and input among internationals. Silver coins as precious metal in middle ages is equipped with monetary attribute. In middle of 15th century, Silver gradually become basic currency in China. Silver coins regards as flat money in 800 AD. In 1581, Britain gradually stepped into credit money era and silver stage, thus this paper studies the silver stock in Britain.

2. Results

Currency stock, currency supply index and currency per capital promote largely commodity transaction and economic growth, which are relative to national and domestic economic growth. Meanwhile, those promote trade growth, shrink trade scale, and direct influence economic growth directly. Statistics for British currency are as shown tables.

A. Statistics for British Currency (1000–1348) Silver Coins Stock in Britain (1240–1340)

According to the viewpoints on Precious Metals in the Later Medieval and Early Modern Worlds, Research data on Silver Coins Stock in Britain (1240–1340) is as shown in Table 1.

Table 1. Statistics for Silver Coins Stock in Britain (1240–1340) [3][4]

402

B. Statistics for British Currency (1348–1520) Silver Coins Stock in Britain (1348–1520)

According to the viewpoints on Policies, Ratios, and Outputs in the Low Countries and England, 1335–1420: some Reflections on New Data, and Precious Metals in the Later Medieval and Early Modern Worlds, Research data on Silver production in England (1350–1495) is as shown in Table 2.

Table 2. Statistics for Silver Coins Stock in Britain (1350–1500) [5[6]

C. Statistics for British Currency (1520–1600) Silver Coins Production in Britain (1520–1600)

According to the viewpoints on A History of Money from AD 800, Research data on amount of currency between Henry VIII and Edward VI of England (1526–1551) is as shown in Table 3.

Table 3. Statistics for Silver Coins Stock in Britain (1542–1649) [7]

Silver currency index of average annual growth rate of rapid growth, directly promoted the countries and the economic growth of the family. Historical data show that because of the new air route opened up, even the world market as a whole, and the growth rate of money stock increase rapidly, directly promotes the growth of population and economic growth.

403

3. Conclusion

Economic laws remind us Premise of commodity production is based on commodity transaction. Without commodity transaction, commodity itself has no values, which values of currency. Base of Irving Fisher formula, MV=PT (M: quantity of money; V: velocity of money; P: price; T: trading capacity; MV: monetary operation quantity; PT: commodity transaction quantity). The theory tells us that commodity transaction quantity increase is base on monetary operation quantity increase. And monetary operation quantity increases with quantity of money and velocity of money increase. Statistics above all shows that Year 1550 is historical turning point for silver stock. Due to silver inflowing from Americans, Index for silver money stock per capita presents growth trend. Silver currency per capita increasing shows that the country, the business organizations and individuals have more opportunities to tread, which also shows the trade activity, and wealth per capita increasing. With Rota Nova discovered, World market becomes international economic integration. Growth rate of currency stock improve rapidly. According to Irving Fisher formula, currency stock increasing promotes monetary operation quantity increasing, commodity transaction quantity increasing, and growth rate of population and economic growth rate increasing. Of 17th century financial reform, currency stock amount increase by 25%, but Currency amount does not increase together. [10] Although British economic growth decrease anaclisis of precious metal, to spare enough precious metal to output to the Far East, China, India, and other Asian areas to trade. Therefore, Index number for silver, particularly currency stock promotes economic growth and population increase.

References 1. Zhou Jun, Wang Xue-qing. Money and Banking Theory, Chinese Finance Publishing Press, 2002, p38. 2. Joseph, A., Schumpeter, History of Economic Analysis, Beijing Commer- cial Press, 2008, p526. 3. Munro, J. H., 'Mint policies, ratios, and outputs in the Low Countries and England, 1335–1420: Some reflections on new data', Num. Chron., 141 (1981), pp. 71–101. 4. J.F.Richards, Precious metals in the later medieval and early modern worlds, Carolina Academic Press, 1983.p.131. 5. J.F.Richards, Precious metals in the later medieval and early modern worlds, Carolina Academic Press, 1983.p.131.

404

6. Munro, J. H., Mint policies, ratios, and outputs in the Low Countries and England, 1335-1420: some reflections on new data, Num. Chron., 141 (1981), pp. 71-101. 7. John, F. Jon, A History of Money from AD 800, Beijing Commercial Press, 2002, P58. 8. Carlow, M. Cipolla, European Economic History Volume II, Beijing Commercial Press, 1299, P4

405

Price Analysis of Land Rent, Price and Interest in Britain (1200–1700)

H.W. Wang Medieval History Institute, Northeast Normal University, Changchun, Jilin, China E-mail: [email protected]

Land is the most important means of production in agricultural societies and it is also a family and national property. In this paper, we collected and analyzed data on land rent, price and interest in Britain (1200-1700) for price analysis. It is believed that in the year 1500, land rent and profit possibly accounts for 1/5 of national income each, and land prices account for 3/5 of the national income. According to the research conducted, several economic phenomena have been found. Firstly, British land price and tax are lower than China. Secondly, annual land earning in Britain has improved greatly over time, with rates of return and land rent declining constantly. This proves that there has been a change in the industrial structure of the economy in Britain. Lastly, there was a rise in the ratio of salary and reward to national revenue, reflecting that price for labor and the average per capita income are rising. Keywords: Land Rent; Land Price; Land Interest, Britain.

1. Introduction Land is the most important means of production in agricultural society which is also national and family property. Therefore, price analysis of land rent, price, and interest are the most important price data in agricultural society. By the way of those data collection and analysis, those data describes movement locus of agricultural asset price. By means of that medieval price information, we find out lots of economy regulations. What’s ratio of land rent and national income, what’s distribution ratio of landlord and peasant. Land interest reflects land capitalization income. Economic index reflects social relations for treasure distribution, how finance affects economic development. In this paper, we collected and analyzed data on land rent, price and interest in Britain (1200- 1700) for price analysis.

406

2. Results

2.1. Sum of British land rent

2.1.1. Sum of British land rent in the end of 13th century Kosminsky believes that sum of currency land rent in the end of 13th century dominates important place. Labor rent amounts to less than 1/3; money rent amounts to 2/3 above [1]. According to survey for tenant rent of hundred areas, Statistics manifests 15 acres for free peasant and 15 acres for noblemen belong to standard peasant. 15 acres for free peasant should pay once land rent 3 shillings, and 15 acres for noblemen should pay once land rent 7 shillings and 9 pennies. In 1299, Land rent for noblemen in Cliff Manor should pay 4~10 pennies per 1 acre. If we extract 7 pennies for land rent, 15 acres for noblemen should pay land rent 8 shillings and 9 pennies. Deduction is same to 15 acres for free peasant in Gibb, who should pay once land rent 6~7 shillings near [2]. Dale believes that amount of land rent was different largely in the end of 13th century and early 14th century. Of complete set of land rent, land rent amount to the lowest 7 shillings, the highest 40 shillings, mostly 4~10 pennies. Per acre land rent is between 4~10 pennies. Per acre land rent for free peasant pays between 1~2 pennies [3]. Dale and Kosminsky have the approach research data, but land rent for serf is more than Kosminsky research data. Here, 15 acres for free peasant should pay once land rent 3 shillings. 15 acres for noblemen should pay once land rent 7 shillings. Above all, we believe that 15 acres for free peasant and pays annual land rent 3 shillings. 1 acre for annual land rent = 36 pennies ÷ 15 =2.4 pennies; 1 acre×6=6 mu for annual land rent = 2.4 pennies × 3.24 kilograms wheat/ 1 penny = 7.76 kilograms; 1 mu for annual land rent = 1.296 kilograms wheat×2 = 1.296 kilograms. Annual land rent of 15 acres for noblemen = 7 shillings (84 pennies); annual land rent of 1 mu = 84 pennies ÷15 = 5.6 pennies. 1 mu ×6=6 annual land rent = 5.6 pennies ×3.24 kilograms wheat/1 penny = 18.14 kilograms; annual land rent of 1 mu = 3.02 kilograms wheat × 2 = 6.04 kilograms wheat.

2.1.2. Sum of British land rent in 1550 In the end of 13th century to in the end of 15th century, sum of British money rent was unchanged. By 16th century, for population increase and price

407

revolution, land rent in Britain begun to rise drastically. Land right for village in Medieval England has been classified three: Free holding tenure, book tenure and loan tenure. By 13th century, feudal lord had begun to rent out self-support land. By the end of 1348, after the Black Death broke out, serfdom breaks up. Thus, feudal lord acquires earnings by means of land rent rather than farming. For long lease deadline, approximately 99 years, price revolution leads to currency inflation to treasure reassignment, which damages noble benefit badly. Farmers acquire earnings largely [4]. Lots of feudal lords acquire earnings largely and get rich by means of land rent rising [5]. Economic historian Coolidge has researched deeply on new land rent between 16th ~17th century and royal family land rent in the Tudor Dynasty. In 1550~1559, price revolution busted in 1550~1559. If we take price of this time quantum to compare, the data 1 penny could buy 0.6 kilograms wheat, which amounted to average price of in the end of 16th century. New land rent in 1550~1559 1 mu for annual land rent = 20.192 pennies; wheat price in 1550: 1 penny could buy 0.6 kilograms wheat; 1 mu for annual land rent = 20.192 pennies ×0.6 kilograms wheat =12.12 kilograms; 1 mu for annual land rent = 3.37 pennies = 2.02 kilograms wheat × 2 = 2.02 kilograms wheat. Royal family land rent in 1550~1559 1 acre for annual land rent = 10.268 pennies; wheat price in 1550: 1 penny could buy 0.6 kilograms wheat; 1 mu for annual land rent = 10.268 pennies ×0.6 kilograms wheat =6.16 kilograms; 1 mu for annual land rent = 1.71 pennies = 1.03 kilograms wheat × 2 = 1.03 kilograms wheat.

2.1.3. Comparison of 15 acre land rent in 13th ~ 16th currency Compare New Land Rent in 1550~1559 with 15 acres for free peasant land rent in the end of 13th century. New Land Rent in 1550~1559 - 15 acres for free peasant land rent in the end of 13th Currency = 20.192 pennies – 2.4 pennies = 17.192 pennies; = 12.12 kilograms – 7.77 kilograms = 4.35 kilograms. Compare New Land Rent in 1550~1559 with 15 acres for noblemen land rent in the end of 13th Currency New Land Rent in 1550~1559 - 15 acres for noblemen land rent in the end of 13th Currency = 20.192 pennies – 5.6 pennies = 14.592 pennies; = 12.12 kilograms – 18.14 kilograms = - 6.02 kilograms.

408

To compare 1 acre land rent in 13th ~ 16th Currency, we find out by means of compare New Land Rent in 1550~1559 with 15 acres for free peasant land rent in the end of 13th Currency, whether penny for money or wheat for kilogram, New Land Rent in 1550~1559 exceeds free peasant land rent. By means of compare New Land Rent in 1550~1559 with 15 acres for Noblemen land rent in the end of 13th currency, penny for money, New Land Rent in 1550~1559 exceeds free peasant land rent; wheat for kilogram, New Land Rent in 1550~1559 was inferior to Noblemen land rent. We could declare Noblemen land rent in the end of 13th Currency is higher.

2.2. British ratio of land rent

2.2.1. Land Rent Ratio Postan believes that land rent accounts total harvest for 1/5 in 13th currency. Jian-Xin Hou believes that ratio of land rent to land production value in 15th ~16th currency changed from 1/3 to 1/5, or 1/6, or even 1/8[6]. Therefore, we believe that land rent in 13th ~14th currency accounted for 30% around. By 14th ~15th currency, land rent accounted for 20%~17%. If we think of land rent as 18% around, falling range is 40%. Ireland economist Richard Cantillon believes that landowner generally acquired 1/3 of land product, and farmers generally acquired 2/3 of land product in 17th ~18th currency, 1/2 of which are used for cost compensation, 1/2 of which are used for their profit [7]. In another way, possessory land rent to land product is 33.3% around. Profit of Leasehold farmers to land product is 33.3% around. Seeds, farm tools and hired labors amount to 33.3% around.

2.2.2. Ratio of land rent to national income British famous economist William Petty on his book “Treatise on Taxes and Contributions” estimates land rent ratio in Britain in 13th ~17th currency. He indicates “for the past four hundred years, English population increased 4 times than before. Of all Expenditure, land rent accounted for 1/4, 3/4 of all expenditure had been used for labor and raw material investment.” [8] According to his estimate, British land rent to national income is 25%. He supposes British population amount to 6 million, on the basis of expenditure for 7 pounds per capita, national expenditure in Britain amounts to 42 million pounds. Land rent amounts to 8 million pounds, labor income amounts to 26

409

million pounds. Another way, land rent to national income is 19%, movable property to national income is 19%, labor pay to national income is 62%. Hamilton believes that land rent accounts national income for 1/5 in Britain and France; profit (including interest) accounts for 1/5; During Price Revolution times (1n 1550), labor pay accounts for 3/5 [9]. But labor pay to national income is overestimated. Among of Europe and America developed country, labor pay accounts for 70%~75%. In middle ages, Wage workers are inferior to 1/3, which is farmers themselves and possesses land and land rent partly. Land rent to national income is 3/5, 60%; labor pay account for 1/5, 20%.

2.3. British land rent interest and land price British economist Nicholas Barbon in 17th currency believes that interest, which belongs to use value of capital and measure value of land rent, stipulates buying and selling price of land that is land price. Usually to superadd interest for 3 years obtains State owned land price. 3 years for difference is allowable, land is more reliable to currency and money. Capital interest means land price interest. In Holland, Capital interest is 3%, A × 3 = 100 pounds, A = 33, in addition 3, which constitutes earnings of 36 years, and belongs to Holland land values. As same standard measure, British interest is 6%, land values for 20 years in Britain amounts to land values for 13 years in Holland, and Holland interest is 10%.thus, according to interest rate, we could acquire one national land values [10]. on the basis of Nicholas Barbon’s research, we could deduce the land rent ratio and land price in 1571.

2.3.1. British land rent interest and land price in 1571 Formula: land rent ratio=land rent / land price British land rent ratio in 1571 amounts to 10%, land price earnings years: 100÷10=10years+3years=13years. 1 acre for land rent=28.551 pennies, 1mu for land rent=4.759 pennies; 1 penny=0.6 kilograms wheat. British land rent ratio: Land rent for 1 year / Land rent for 13 years=7.69% British average land price: Land rent for 1 acre=13 years ×28.551 pennies=371.163 pennies ×0.6 kilograms wheat=222.6978 kilograms wheat; Land rent for 1 mu=222.6978 kilograms wheat ÷ 6=37.1163 kilograms wheat.

410

3. Conclusion Land is the most important means of production in agricultural society, which also belongs to primary property. According to research on Land Price, Land rent, and Land interest in Britain between 1571~1660, Some economic phenomenon has been found: Firstly, British land price and tax are inferior to Chinese; Secondly, Annual land earnings in Britain improves largely, rate of return declines constantly, land rent also declines relatively. It seems to prove that industrial structure of economic society in Britain has been changed. Non- agricultural industries have been improved to become source of demotic and national earnings. Thirdly, Ratio of salary and reward to national revenue is rising, which reflects price for labor and average per capita income rising.

References 1. Zhun Huan, “A Comparative Study of Feudal Economic Character in Asia and Europe”, Northeast Normal University Press, Changchun, p129, 1996. 2. Li Chaowei, “England Countryside Farmer Family Economic Conditions in the Late Medieval”, Jilin People's Publishing House, Jilin, pp.486-487, 2001. 3. Yang Jie, “A Bottom to Up Perspective: the Agriculture Revolution in England”, Chinese Social Science Publishing House, Beijing, pp.48-50, 2009. 4. Karl Marx & Samuel Moore, “Capital”, People’s Publishing House, Beijing, p853, 2004. 5. Shen Han, “A History of Land System in England”, Akademia Press, Shanghai, p15, pp.85-93, 2005. 6. M M. Epstein, “The Cambridge Economic History of Europe (Volume I )”, Economic Science Press, Beijing, p475, 2002. 7. Richard Cantillon, “Essay on the Nature of Commerce in General”, the Commercial Press, Beijing, pp.22-23, 1997. 8. William Petty, “A Treatise of Taxes & Contributions”, Huaxia Publishing House, Beijing, p109, 2006. 9. Price Revolution begun in 1550 around, according to Colman’s research on Price index (Grain, industrial product, agricultural labor force and others), which had been found in England in 1450~1469, and in 1630~1649. After compare for all indexes, then to be defined. 10. Thomas Meng & Nicholas Barr & Dudley North, “Discourses upon Trade”, the Commercial Press, pp.62-63, 1982.

411

A Case Study of Development Intervention Techniques: Job Design and Redesign

Pei-Lun Ju Economics and Management School, Chang’an University, Xi’an, Shaanxi province, China E-mail: [email protected]

Job design and redesign is one of the development intervention techniques to improve organisational and individual performance. This paper uses a case study of TC Company to discuss the differences before and after job design and redesign. Although there will inevitably be several new problems after job design and redesign, the high efficiency and productivity provided by development intervention is still an attractive option for managers to implement to increase profits and performance.

Keywords: Development Intervention; Job Design and Redesign; Organisational and individual performance.

1. Introduction The high speed developing of the organisation led to a strong demand of development intervention. In order to improve the current situation of organisation and enhance organisational and individual performance, the development intervention techniques had been utilised into the organisational and individual development. The development interventions have been classified into three levels: the first level is at the structural level, which includes broad programs of social change; the second level is about the government; the third level is at the community base. All the three dimensions have relatives with each other. Thus, the macro and micro issues should be taken into account at structural level. A company or an organization cannot achieve a successful development intervention without an unambiguous picture which shows the opportunities and limitations existing at higher levels (Barbanti, 2004). Job design and redesign is one of the techniques of development intervention. This paper would firstly give a definition of job redesign intervention, and then take TC Company as a case study to illustrate the whole process of job redesign intervention. The case study would have the following four aspects: (1)

412

background of TC Company, (2) needs analyses of job redesign, (3) implement job redesign intervention, and (4) discussion. In the end part, a brief conclusion would be given for this paper.

2. Job Design and Redesign Job design and redesign is an efficient method to implement development intervention. Through job design and redesign, the productivity would be improved by providing challenge, decreasing repetitive or mechanistic elements and increasing responsibility levels through some specific techniques: job simplification, job enlargement, job enrichment, job rotation and other non- monetary methods (CIPD 2013). Using job redesign as an intervention strategy to improve organisation structure and organisational and individual performance has a long history (Parker &Wall, 1999). It is generally assumed that job redesign interventions affect organization structure through the change in job characteristics is the mechanism (Baron & Kenny, 1986). It is important for organisation to use job redesign interventions which aim to change multiple job characteristics, and according to Holman et al (2010), the reasons are as follows. First, it is a key factor to set up that a change in job characteristics is the mechanism through which the job redesign intervention affects organisation structure, and that any change of organisation structure is not just a direct result of being involved in an intervention itself. Due to the effects of increased job redesign intervention involvement rather than changes, participative job redesign interventions is fairly important to have the improvements in organisation structure. Second, it would show the competence of job redesign interventions in restructuring organisation structure.

3. Case Study—TC Company

3.1. Background In this article, a Chinese company called TC Company which is a power supplier located in Jiangsu Province would be chosen as an example, in order to demonstrate the needs, impacts, problems, and improvements of the job redesign. This company has made the job redesign of the organization structure in 2010. With the changes of the organization structure, the changes of job redesign in some positions subsequently follow. The definition, process, and advantages of job design and redesign have already illustrated as above. The following parts would be based on a customer service case, makes a comparison

413

of the working methods and problems before and after the job redesign, and then suggests the solutions and the theoretical bases respectively.

3.2. Needs Analyses of Job Redesign In order to adapt to the new organisation structure, the changes in some positions may be huge that sometimes totally different. For TC Company, especially the power business section, providing a better customer service in time is the most important work. This made the management level considered an job redesign intervention to combine same part from different departments. What’s more, it is also a kind of ‘self-actualization’ of the company on the basis of Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs (Maslow, 1943). The Needs divided by Maslow (1943) into five levels, and from the bottom to the top are: physiological needs, safety needs, love and belonging needs, esteem needs and self-actualization needs. Considered the company as a person, that changing the organisation structure by job redesign intervention could be seen as the top need. In this power plant, there are two aspects of supplying the power, which are power transmission and distribution and the indoor use of power. Before the job redesign, the features of the organization structure is that two groups are set on the scale of the whole thing, that is, the organisation structure is grouped into two, which are transmission and distribution company and service company. Subsequently, the transmission and distribution company is then divided into more groups according to the different functions, while service company is divided into three branch service companies according to the convenience principle and the administrative regions. Each branch service company is in charge of the comprehensive administration such as the sale of electricity, the customer service and the maintenance of the power line network system (Figure 1). Therefore, the administration method before job redesign is a combination of the specialization division of labour and the comprehensive administrative, also called vertical integration. The below picture shows that the TC Company’s (power business section) organisation structure before job redesign is a little complex which have many departments response for the same function. This is definitely a redundancy and personnel and material source waste. Also, the operation costs would be pretty high. Additionally, the communication channel from the top to the bottom is fairly long that may lead to management difficulties. Moreover, the customers always complained about the low efficiency. For the sake of optimising internal management and external service, as well as fit for the company’s overall

414

Figure 1. The structure of TC Company (Power business section) before job redesign restructuring, the power business section need to change its structure by using job redesign intervention.

3.3. Implement Job Redesign Intervention Taylor (1979) have identified three key factors of job design and redesign: minimising skill requirements, maximising management control, and minimising the time required to perform a task. After the job redesign, the features of form of organization is that the complete specialization groups are formed on the scale of the whole thing referring to the different parts responsible for different matters, all of which are realized by restructuring of the company for several times. In detail, some changes take place. According to the specialization principle, the former transmission and distribution department and the former service department are separated into such sections as the high voltage section, the medium voltage section, the marketing section, the engineering section, the customer service section and the maintenance and the emergency repair section (Figure 2). Furthermore, according to the features of the position, every section is further divided into some special branches such as line patrol, leak detection and adjustable voltage in the medium voltage.

415

Figure 2. The structure of TC Company (Power business section) after job redesign

By making a comparison of the forms of organization before and after job redesign, based on the fruits and accomplishments of the service operation, the latter form of organization is entirely different from the former form of organization in that every department (the transmission and distribution department and the service department) was responsible for the whole thing in the past, which functions as a complete working unit while every section after job redesign functions as a specialist who do well in the high voltage, the medium voltage, the customer service, the marketing and the engineering, all of which are the individual parts of the whole thing. Job redesign could take a variety of forms and arise for many reasons, but it normally involves an attempt to increase the amount of variety, autonomy and/or completeness inherent in the work of one or more people. There are two main parts of the concerns leading to job redesign: people-orientated concerns and business-orientated concerns. Specifically, job redesign should, first concern to help people to develop, second concern with people’s quality of working life and mental health, third concern to promote an organisational culture of proactivity and personal responsibility, fourth concern to maintain or improve quality, fifth concern to make maximum use of people’s skills, sixth concern to be responsive to customer needs, seventh concern to make technology and people compatible and eighth concern with people’s work motivation (Arnold et al 2005). The form of organization makes a big shift from the former one to the latter one, leading to a lot of differences in the administrative methods. Here is a case of the customer indoor power breakdown maintenance, which states what changes take place in terms of the customer service and how to provide the service to the customers. Before job redesign, the administrative style is a combination of the specialization division of labour and the comprehensive

416

management (the vertical integration). After informed of the power breakdown, the managers of the company often make a decision of where the problems are, then distribute the repairing men who are specialized in the house maintenance, the medium voltage maintenance and the emergency repair to the site together in order to solve the problems. After job redesign, the company adopted the complete specialization management mode. The customer hotline judgments the source of problem initially when the customer informed the repair, then distinguish and distribution to indoor maintenance department, medium voltage maintenance department or emergency department, and the department should sent its staff to the site to solve the problem. It is obvious that the biggest change is that the former combination of the specialization division of labour and the comprehensive management (the vertical integration) is shifted to the complete specialization division of labour, and the specialization division of labour is more narrow.

3.4. Discussion After restructuring, the more narrow specialization division of labour results in some problems in the field of administration. For example, in terms of the customer service, there are more cross points over the jobs because of the specialization division of labour, which causes the waste of more time and the vague boundary line between responsibilities of different groups, which is especially apparent in the maintenance of the customer service. Based on the administrative theory, the specialization division of labour will be achieved as long as it satisfies a principle of “the job can be divided”. Concretely, three points must be taken into account. Firstly, the whole work can be clearly divided into some parts. Secondly, each individual part has a clear outline of the responsibility without any cross points. Thirdly, the relationship between each individual part can be set by means of the rules, principles and process. Satisfying those three points mentioned, the job itself (that is, the problem needed to be solved) and the working condition must be affirmed (Daft 2009).

4. Conclusion Job design and redesign, as illustrated above, utilise the theory into practice, is definitely a good choice for the company to improve the organisational and individual performance, as well as reform the organisation structure in order to fit the high speed of economic development. TC company redesigned the job and reformed the structure in all department in order to optimise the management mode and adapt to new requirements of the market. Even though, the reform is not suitable for every department and work situation, and of course, results in 417

many new problems, it is still an efficient method for companies to improve the organisational environment and enhance the organisational and individual performance. Therefore, in accordance with the analysis of specific issues, the suitable job redesign should be retained and carried on, while the unsuitable job redesign should be re-redesigned so as to improve the job efficiency and serve better for the customer.

References 1. Arnold, J. et al. (2005) Work Psychology. 4th ed. Financial Times: Prentice Hall. 2. Barbanti, O. (2004) Development and Conflict Theory. Beyond Intra- ctability. University of Colorado, Boulder, Colorado, USA. Available from: http://www.beyondintractability.org/bi-essay/development-conflict-theory [Asses- sed: August 2004] 3. Baron, R. M., & Kenny, D. A. (1986). The moderator-mediator distinction in social psychological research: Conceptual, strategic, and statistical considerations. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 51, 1173– 1182. 4. CIPD (2013) CIPD Factsheet: Job Design [Online]. Available from: http://www.cipd.co.uk/hr-resources/factsheets/job-design.aspx [Assessed: April 2013] 5. Daft, R.L. (2009) Organisation Theory and Design. 10th edition. The U.S.A.: Joe Sabation 6. Holman, D. J. et al (2010). The mediating role of job characteristics in job redesign interventions: A serendipitous quasi-experiment. Journal of Organizational Behavior, 31(1), 84-105. 7. Maslow, A. H. (1943). A theory of human motivation. Psychological Review,50(4), 370. 8. Parker, S., & Wall, T. D. (1999). Job and Work Design. London: Sage. 9. Taylor, J.C. (1979) Job design criteria twenty years later. In: Davis, L.E. & Taylor, J.C. (eds) Design of jobs, 2nd edition. Santa Monica, CA: Goodyear.

418

An Empirical Study of the Impact on the Export Competitiveness of Labor-Intensive Industries Affected by the Changes of Industry-Specific Exchange Rates and Producer Prices

Jing Hong Economy and Trade Department, Fujian International Business & Economic College Fuzhou, 350016, China Email:[email protected]

This paper selected the bilateral trade and exchange rate data of China (mainland) and its 9 major trading partners and selected four different industries HS08, HS11, HS12 and HS13 as the Industry-Specific representatives of Labor-Intensive Industries according to the Harmonized System (HS) classification. We collected and sorted out the annual and monthly related data of Chinese mainland from January 2010 to December 2012. Three indicators: Industry-Specific Exchange Rate Index, Producer Price Index and Trade Competitiveness Index were defined and used as variables for the establishment of the variable intercept constant coefficient fixed effects panel data model. The model was thereafter used to test the effects of Industry-Specific Exchange Rates and Producer Prices on the competitiveness of Labor-Intensive Industries empirically. The results confirmed that export competitiveness was positively correlated to Industry-Specific Exchange Rates, while negatively correlated to Producer Prices, and there was a close relationship between these two indicators.

Keywords: Industry-Specific Exchange Rates; Producer Prices; Labor-Intensive Industries; Trade Competitiveness Index.

1. Introduction Based on the bilateral nominal exchange rates (from 1980 to 2004) between the United States and its major trading partners, Linda S. Goldberg (2004) used monthly time series data of trade value , GDP Deflator and Price Index of five different industries assorted according to the standard of SIC, and constructed Industry-Specific Dollar Exchange Rate Index [1]. Since then, the index and its application had been referred and cited frequently. In this paper, the author also referred to and followed Linda S. Goldberg’s theory on Industry-Specific Exchange Rates, but added the factor of Producer Prices to analyze the impact of the changes arising from these two aspects on

419

the export competitiveness of China’s (here referred to China Mainland) Labor- Intensive Industries. Monthly data between January 2010 and December 2012 were used for analysis and verification in this article. And the monthly series data of exports came from four different industries among Labor-Intensive Industries according to HS classification. The paper selected the bilateral nominal exchange rate between China and its nine major trading partners which include: Hong Kong, India, Japan, Taiwan, Korea, the European Union, the Russian Federation, the United States and Australia. This thesis first defined and valued the three indicators: Industry-Specific Exchange Rate Index, Producer Price Index and Trade Competitiveness Index. Then Industry-Specific Exchange Rate Index, Producer Price Index were used as the independent variables, and Trade Competitiveness Index as the dependent variable to build model. Finally, regressed the variable intercept and constant coefficient Fixed Effects Model.

2. The Index Set and Selected The concept of Labor-Intensive Industries was relative. Different standards existed in different social and economic development stages. At current stage, it referred to the industry in which: unit product cost much manpower, the labor compensation expense proportion generated in the production cost was much greater than that of the research and development expenses and equipment depreciation, the added value of the products were relatively low, such as agricultural, forestry and textiles, clothing, toys, leather, furniture, iron, steel, construction and so on. Based on the HS classification in “Monthly China's Customs Statistics”, 4 kinds of more representative Labor-Intensive Industries were selected and as described next : Class VIII HS08 (raw hides, leather, fur and products; saddlery and harness; travel goods, handbags and similar products); Class XI HS11 (textile materials and textile products); Class XII HS12 (shoes, hats, umbrellas, canes, whip and parts thereof; processed feathers and products; artificial flowers; human hair products) and Class XIII HS13 (stone, gypsum, cement, cloud cotton, mica and similar material products, ceramic products, glass and its products). 2.1. Industry-Specific exchange rate index The writer used “c” to represented China's close trading partner countries or regions C. “i ”indicated China's industry I. The export volume between China

420

and other major trading partners in Industry I was used to calculate the weighting. So, the Industry-Specific Exchange Rate Index formula showed as follows:

(1)

Here represented the real bilateral exchange rate between China and its trading partner C in the period T. In direct quotations, the real bilateral exchange rate was the product of the nominal bilateral exchange rate and the ratio of consumer price index (CPI) of trade partner country to CPI of China, namely . “e” was the bilateral nominal exchange rate between the two countries in Direct Foreign Exchange Quotation; “ ” referred to the price level of the foreign country C which was expressed in foreign currency; “ ” is the price level of the domestic commodity presented in local currency. represented the exports volume of China to the trading partner C in the industry I during the period T. was the ratio of the total exports to the trading partner C to the total amount of the country's exports to the principal trading partner countries or regions in the industry I. When the value of increased, the Industry Exchange Rate of Industry I depreciated in T period, thus the export competitiveness of Industry I will be enhanced. When the value of XRER reduced, the result was the opposite. 𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡 36 monthly export volume data (between January, 2010 and December, 2012) from Chinese customs statistics (Unit: thousand dollars) were chosen in this paper. On the base of the same period GDP Deflator and the nominal rate of RMB against USD, export monthly data were calculated and adjusted, and were sorted into effective values which took 100 million Yuan as a unit and eliminated the GDP variable factors. Consumer price index (CPI) over the same period, the bilateral (China and other countries) nominal exchange rate announced by the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and other related monthly statistical data were collected and calculated to reach the following four Labor- Intensive Industries with the amount of export as the weight. As shown in Table 1, the paper supposed XRER =100 (t=1 means the period of January 2010), and made all data expressed as𝑖𝑖 the numerical value with 100 as the fixed 1 base index of the starting month.

421

Table1. Industry-specific exchange rate index of labor-intensive industries

Month/ Industry HS08 HS11 HS12 HS13 January, 2010 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 February, 2010 100.29 97.62 97.19 97.24 March, 2010 92.98 76.61 94.03 87.23 April, 2010 95.26 81.21 88.80 89.63 May, 2010 98.09 89.98 91.80 89.75 June, 2010 95.41 94.16 91.32 87.72 July, 2010 91.76 99.33 94.39 90.44 August, 2010 95.61 96.85 94.22 91.89 September, 2010 87.04 89.66 90.75 90.58 October, 2010 91.13 85.56 92.59 93.39 November, 2010 89.04 85.67 94.20 91.77 December, 2010 92.52 89.26 94.31 95.13 January, 2011 95.61 84.66 91.25 90.59 February, 2011 106.30 92.19 95.99 92.48 March, 2011 91.29 77.50 91.11 86.20 April, 2011 95.26 84.83 91.04 90.69 May, 2011 99.60 95.95 94.90 88.62 June, 2011 98.67 101.80 95.58 88.18 July, 2011 96.37 101.82 95.01 90.19 August, 2011 94.19 94.55 91.32 90.99 September, 2011 92.34 82.17 87.33 87.97 October, 2011 90.35 77.08 86.74 85.33 November, 2011 95.30 81.37 90.39 93.65 December, 2011 89.72 86.78 90.80 88.04 January, 2012 91.01 87.91 89.95 80.07 February, 2012 79.36 70.97 84.42 70.86 March, 2012 85.8 74.57 84.17 80.16 April, 2012 89.72 74.40 83.74 87.51 May, 2012 90.36 82.53 87.99 85.08 June, 12 88.31 87.44 87.73 83.39 July, 2012 81.07 86.88 86.13 81.51 August, 2012 78.66 82.43 83.91 82.27 September, 2012 75.25 76.00 81.88 81.30 October, 2012 78.24 75.01 85.17 82.17 November, 2012 65.05 73.06 82.22 70.95 December, 2012 85.40 81.44 90.16 85.61 Source: The above data was proceeded and calculated by the author based on the original data of the customs statistics.

422

It could be seen easily that the numerical value of the four industries Exchange Rate Index had a clear downward trend. Between January 2010 and December 2012, these four Industry-Specific Exchange Rate Index of Labor- Intensive Industries all rose. Among them, the Exchange Rate Index of HS11 (textile materials and textile products) appreciated a lot and reached nearly 20%; while the appreciation rate of HS12 (processed feather and its products; shoes, hats, umbrellas, walking sticks, whips and parts; artificial flowers; hair products) was relatively small. The Exchange Rate Index of HS08 (hide, leather, fur and products; saddlery and harness; travel goods, handbags and similar goods) was higher than that of other industries as a whole.

2.2. Producer prices As part of the explanatory variables and indicators, Producer Prices were the monthly data got from the China National Bureau of Statistics and the industry monthly database of the China Economic Information Network. The initial data was shown in the way that the same month last year equaled to 100. On that base, all the following data was to be calculated into the form with year 2010 as the base period. In order to calculate more accurately, this paper also removed the seasonal influence factors of some time series monthly data (as shown in Table 2). As could be seen from the table, the Producer Price Index of these four Labor-Intensive Industries showed an ascendant tendency in general, except for some months.

423

Table 2. Industry-specific producer price index Month/Industry HS08 HS11 HS12 HS13 January, 2010 99.50 103.90 101.00 99.60 February, 2010 100.30 105.50 101.20 100.10 March, 2010 100.80 105.30 101.70 101.20 April, 2010 101.10 106.60 101.60 101.10 May, 2010 101.60 107.50 101.80 100.90 June,2010 101.60 108.20 101.60 101.80 July, 2010 102.20 108.20 101.90 102.20 August, 2010 101.90 108.60 101.30 102.00 September, 2010 101.80 109.10 101.40 102.50 October, 2010 102.40 110.20 101.20 102.80 November, 2010 103.10 113.80 102.10 104.80 December, 2010 103.70 115.40 103.00 105.90 January, 2011 103.70 116.80 104.00 108.00 February, 2011 103.40 118.10 104.00 107.90 March, 2011 103.90 118.80 103.40 108.40 April, 2011 104.30 117.40 103.80 108.60 May, 2011 104.40 115.60 103.80 108.80 June, 2011 104.50 113.30 103.80 109.00 July, 2011 104.80 111.70 103.70 108.90 August, 2011 105.30 110.00 103.80 108.40 September, 2011 105.60 108.80 103.60 107.20 October, 2011 105.60 106.10 103.80 105.90 November, 2011 104.90 100.80 103.10 103.00 December, 2011 104.30 99.10 103.30 100.50 January, 2012 107.64 114.58 107.02 108.54 February, 2012 107.23 114.32 107.22 108.44 March, 2012 106.91 113.10 106.71 108.83 April, 2012 106.80 111.53 106.40 108.17 May, 2012 106.80 110.28 106.29 107.49 June, 2012 107.01 108.43 106.19 107.04 July, 2012 107.21 107.12 105.88 106.29 August, 2012 107.30 106.59 105.67 105.04 September, 2012 107.40 105.75 105.57 103.88 October, 2012 107.18 103.24 105.67 103.25 November, 2012 106.58 98.68 104.96 101.04 December, 2012 106.18 97.51 104.64 98.89 Source: the data was converted from monthly database of State Statistical Bureau with 2010 as the base year.

424

2.3. Trade competitiveness index There were many ways to measure the export competitiveness of a country or a region. There were also a lot of differences between these various methods. Considering the industry as well as data availability, this paper used the Trade Competitiveness Index to measure the export competitiveness of various industries (Sato K, Shimizu J, Shrestha N, et al.2011)[2]. Trade Competitiveness Index represented the ratio of the balance of imports and exports of a trade commodity of a country to its total amount of imports and exports. That is: = (2) 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖−𝑀𝑀𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖+𝑀𝑀𝑖𝑖 Among them, TCi indicated 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇the Trade Competitiveness Index of China’s Product I; Xi represented China's total exports of Product I in a specific period of time, Mi meant China's total imports of Product I. This indicator not only reflected the competitive advantage or disadvantage of a product in the world market, but also reflected the degree of advantages and disadvantages, so it was a very powerful tool for the analysis of industry export competitiveness. Specifically, TCi> 0 meant that: the export of Product I is greater than its imports and China had achieved net exports of Product I, so China's Product I have strong international competitiveness. The closer to 1 TCi got, the more competitive China's Product I was. On the contrary, if TCi was less than 0, it meant: the export of Product I was less than its imports; China had achieved net imports of Product I and Product I was lack of international competitiveness. The closer to -1 TCi was, the less competitive China's Product I was. The variables explained -- the monthly Trade Competitiveness Index of the 4 Labor-Intensive Industries (HS08,HS11,HS12 and HS13),namely TCi, were calculated by the writer according to the above-mentioned formula concerned. In order to meet the Producer Price Index, TTCi was used to indicate 100 times the monthly Trade Competitiveness Index of the 4 Labor-Intensive Industries, that meant, used the percentile (%) of the index as the unit (as shown in Table 3).

425

Table 3. Industry-specific trade competitiveness index (%)

Month/Industry H08 H11 H12 H13 January, 2010 55.80 77.70 93.81 57.98 February, 2010 53.12 77.03 94.93 61.74 March, 2010 22.44 59.85 89.60 54.87 April, 2010 37.29 68.78 94.03 59.52 May, 2010 44.97 74.15 94.76 64.04 June, 2010 47.21 76.56 94.81 62.68 July, 2010 51.70 77.72 94.93 63.32 August, 2010 52.91 77.29 94.06 61.73 September, 2010 55.80 77.70 93.81 57.98 October, 2010 57.65 79.12 93.92 61.54 November, 2010 57.47 75.42 92.91 61.39 December, 2010 56.21 67.39 93.67 59.59 January, 2011 53.79 72.71 94.27 58.99 February, 2011 42.46 66.65 92.17 52.45 March, 2011 36.41 65.23 90.28 55.15 April, 2011 48.25 72.27 93.57 57.51 May, 2011 49.35 74.87 94.03 59.13 June, 2011 53.78 77.43 93.73 59.43 July, 2011 55.86 79.35 93.31 62.65 August, 2011 55.63 77.38 93.10 61.56 September, 2011 55.92 75.45 92.68 60.12 October, 2011 58.05 73.24 92.99 62.49 November, 2011 58.23 70.09 92.19 67.44 December, 2011 49.36 65.11 92.08 63.21 January, 2012 9.80 42.64 82.63 40.45 February, 2012 9.80 42.64 82.63 40.45 March, 2012 40.52 63.67 90.06 57.79 April, 2012 52.39 66.89 92.70 65.57 May, 2012 52.51 69.07 93.91 66.28 June, 2012 54.92 72.27 94.54 65.84 July, 2012 54.24 73.05 93.61 65.71 August, 2012 52.19 75.24 92.37 60.91 September, 2012 56.82 77.81 93.64 59.93 October, 2012 56.15 76.84 94.22 60.41 November, 2012 50.74 72.97 92.18 57.93 December, 2012 64.23 72.89 94.45 67.45 Source: Calculated according to the import and export data of customs statistics.

426

From the above table, we could see that due to the existence of the Chinese Spring Festival, the change and fluctuation of the data of January 2012 and February 2012 were obvious. During the Spring Festival, because of the staff holiday and the home boom, the export declined sharply. The commodity exports of Labor-Intensive Industries fluctuated greatly on the whole, and the fluctuation direction differed. At the same time, during the downturn period in external demand, the overall presentation was a slightly decreasing trend.

3. Model Construction and Inspection There existed many factors which affected the Labor-Intensive Industries export competitiveness. They included not only international environment such as joining the WTO and the change of international trade rules, but also domestic conditions such as production costs, the per capita GDP, RMB real exchange rate and so on. Based on research purposes and data availability, this paper selected the above mentioned Industry-Specific Exchange Rates and Producer Prices as the most important influencing factors. Panel data model (also known as time series cross-sectional data model) mixed time series data with cross section series data. As the number of section units involved in this paper was 36 and was much greater than the number of time units which was 4, there was no way to use variable coefficient model to study and analyze separately different influence the export competitiveness suffered in every Labor-Intensive Industry. Since the research content of this article mainly used the sample's own effect as the conditions for the analysis, there was no need to use the sample to reason overall effect, but used Fixed Effects Regression Model to regress these three variables. Therefore, this article chose the variable intercept constant coefficient Fixed Effects Regression Model for regression. This paper used TTC to indicate the above-calculated monthly Trade Competitiveness Index of Labor-Intensive Industries and used it to express the industry commodity export competiveness. RR represented the monthly numerical value of Industry-Specific Exchange Rates of Labor-Intensive Industries. PP showed the monthly numerical value of Producer Prices of Labor- Intensive Industries. Then a panel data model was built as follows:

= + 1 + 2 + (3) 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 Among them, i represented𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 α Industryβ 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 I, whichβ 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 was 𝑢𝑢one of China’s Labor- Intensive Industries; t denoted the period T; αi was the intercept term of the equation; βi was the coefficient of each variable; uit was a random error term.

427

In the regression analysis, the first of all to do was to test the stability of the data. In this paper, the method of unit root, mainly the method of Fisher-ADF Tests was chosen to test the stability of TTC and RR in the analysis of the time series.(As shown in Table 4).

Table 4. Results of stationary test

Variables ADF Test Value P Stationary Result

RR 19.5901 0.012** Stable

TTC 40.0367 0.000*** Stable

Note:**,***means significant when the level of significance was5%, 1%. As could be seen from the above table, RR and TTC were stable in the 0-Order, that’s to say, they were integrated of Order 0. Since the two variables, RR and TTC, were integrated of the same order, the requirements for the Cointegration Test were achieved. So, Cointegration Test could be used to test the long-term stable relationship between them (as shown in Table 5).

Table 5. Results of panel model cointegration test

Original Test Statistic P Values Results of Cointegration Test Hypothesis No Pedroni-group Cointegration -3.81242 0.0003*** Cointegration Relationship Existed RHO Relationship No Pedroni-group Cointegration -3.45145 0.0010*** Cointegration Relationship Existed ADF Relationship

Note:***means significant when the level of significance was 1%. By the RHO and ADF Cointegration Test, the P values of these two statistics were far less than 0.05, in other words, they rejected the original hypothesis. That meant, there was a cointegration relationship among the different variables in each equation, and the relationship was stable, so the original equation could be regressed directly. This paper applied P=0 in FE and rejected the null hypothesis that uit was complete zero, and the existence of individual effects was admitted. So that the fixed effect regression was better than the mixed regression, which also proved the accuracy of the method used.

428

4. Results and Discussion The following was the empirical analysis achievement of the variable intercept constant coefficient fixed effects panel data model constructed in this paper.(As shown in Table 6).

Table 6. Regression results

Independent Estimated Coefficients Standard Deviation t Test Value Variable Intercept 87.37972*** 23.101 3.78 PP -0.36841** 0. 1914877 -1.92 RR 0.22236** 0. 0958996 2.32 Fixed Effects Already Controlled

Note:**,***represented respectively the level of significance 5%, 1%. From the respective t test value of these independent variables, we could see their system values were significantly not zero. This showed that in the overall or average, both the Industry Real Exchange Rate and Producer Prices had a more significant impact on the Trade Competitiveness Index of Labor-Intensive Industries.

5. Conclusion Specific conclusions were: Firstly, the Industry-Specific Exchange Rates of Labor-Intensive Industries was positively related to Competitiveness Index , and the correlation coefficient was 22.2%, which reflected that Industry-Specific Exchange Rates had a more important influence on the export competitiveness of the industry. It showed that from 2010 to 2012, when the Industry-Specific Exchange Rates of Labor-Intensive Industries, which was represented by direct pricing method, became lower, the industry's export competitiveness was weakened. Conversely, they also reacted inversely. So the results were in keeping with the expect of current theories. At the same time, the absolute value of the estimated coefficient also stated clearly that the Industry-Specific Exchange Rates could reflect the international competitiveness of the industry level better. And the linear relationship between these two was more closely. Second, the Producer Prices of Labor-Intensive Industries was negatively correlative with Trade Competitiveness Index of the same industry. The correlation coefficient value reached -36.8%, which reflected the great influence of Producer Prices of Labor-Intensive Industries on the industry's export competitiveness. This demonstrated that, in recent years, the higher the Producer

429

Prices of Labor-Intensive Industries, the higher the product price offered. Thus the export volume also subsequently reduced, and the export competitiveness weakened. On the contrary, the results were reversed, which meet the theoretical expectation. The forces of Producer Prices and Industry-Specific Exchange Rates were just the opposite. And the absolute value of the estimated coefficient also showed that the influence of the Producer Prices of Labor-Intensive Industries on the export competitiveness was slightly greater than that of the Industry-Specific Exchange Rates. Third, in recent years, Labor-Intensive industries export competitiveness was almost stagnant, and some industries were even relatively weak. These phenomena had a great relationship with the Industry-Specific Exchange Rates and product costs. But this was also the result of many factors, including many factors that were not included in the scope of this study. Focused on the current domestic conditions, on the one hand, the reform of the RMB exchange rate formation mechanism had a direct influence, but it was at the level of tactics of government decision maker; on the other hand, enterprises themselves should continue to speed up technological innovation and other ways to reduce production costs, thereby effectively offset the adverse effects of cost.

References 1. Goldberg L S. Industry-specific exchange rates for the United States[J]. Federal Reserve Bank of New York Economic Policy Review, 2004, 10(1). 2. Sato K, Shimizu J, Shrestha N, et al. Exchange Rate Appreciation and Export Price Competitiveness: Industry-specific real effective exchange rates of Japan, Korea, and China[J]. Discussion Papers (by fiscal year), 2011.

430

Recommendations for the Cost Control of Foreign Trade Enterprises in RMB Cross-Border Settlement

Jing Zhang

Institute of Economics and Management, Jiangsu University of Science And Technology ZhengJiang, Jiangsu Province, China E-mail:[email protected]

In July 2009, the People's Bank of China, General Administration of Customs, Ministry of Commerce and other related ministries launched the pilot cross-border RMB settlement and there have been significant developmental results today. Since the implementation of the RMB cross-border settlement, the cost control of foreign trade enterprises has experienced great change. This paper discusses the advantages of RMB cross-border settlement such as avoiding exchange rate risk, reducing financial costs, etc., and proposes several recommendations for the cost control of foreign trade enterprises using the RMB cross-border settlement.

Keywords: Foreign Trade Enterprises; RMB Cross-border Settlement.

1. Introduction Cost control is an enterprise based on a certain period, the preset target cost management, cost control by the company or body within its terms of reference, occurred before the production cost or cost control process, the various factors that affect the cost of a series of defense and measures adjusted to ensure that the cost of management behavior to achieve the objective. In the corporate cost control process, the theory now generally used for the value chain cost management theory. In short, the “value chain from suppliers is the beginning, until a series of value-added activities and processes to achieve customer value in the value chain, along with logistics, as well as information flow, capital flow in logistics operations circulation [1].” Development of China’s international trade has been an important driving force for China’s economic development, is the focus of China’s economic development, countries continue to deepen reform, the introduction of policies conducive to the development of international trade, foreign trade companies are constantly adjust itself to adapt to more intense international competition. Cost control has been a very important issue, especially in the RMB cross-border settlement, foreign trade enterprises to cost control methods to generate a little new changes, and continue to influence the future development of foreign trade enterprises. Therefore this paper discusses the advantages of RMB cross-border

431

settlement and proposes several recommendations for the cost control of foreign trade enterprises using the RMB cross-border settlement.

2. The Traditional Modes of Foreign Trade Enterprises’ Cost Control This article foreign trade enterprises cost control stage in RMB cross-border settlement as a demarcation point, we call the mode before the RMB cross- border settlement as the traditional mode of foreign trade enterprises cost control. Meanwhile, we divided these mode into two substantive aspects: Means of financing or practice means.

2.1. Practice means

2.1.1. Select favorable currency for valuation Foreign currency business transactions greatly influenced by different pricing currencies, different companies suffered foreign exchange risk. Enterprises in the import contract as soft denominated used; when export contracts denominated by strong money as possible.

2.1.2. Estimated forward rate Foreign trade enterprises can make reasonable estimates of future exchange rate, and then make a reasonable contract budget. Foreign trade enterprises can arrange a special business and finance staff, reasonable price in mastering the spot, while the RMB foreign exchange forward and swap offer tracking, reasonable estimates appropriate offer, thereby reducing the exchange rate risk.

2.1.3. Coordination of trade instrument operations Foreign trade enterprises in international trade through price negotiation, avoid foreign exchange risks. Enterprises in the course of contract negotiations, the price can be negotiated transactions, or the additional protocol, part of the foreign exchange losses, are shared or adjust the transaction price [2]. 2.1.4. Forward foreign exchange operations To avoid exchange rate risk, foreign trade enterprises for the future settlement or sale of foreign exchange currency, amount, duration, etc. agreed to do, regardless of how the exchange rate fluctuations during the period when due, are not parties to the transaction will have an impact, and are not required pay additional charges.

432

2.1.5. Export credit insurance China ECIC is the only undertake export credit insurance policy the insurance company, the financial means of export promotion policy,, short-term export credit insurance can help avoid foreign exchange risks of foreign trade enterprises, insurance companies by reducing the risk of foreign exchange and easier access to bank financing.

2.1.6. Export tax rebate policy In some industries, companies enjoy national export tax rebate policy, companies need to constantly follow changes in national policies, constantly learning and related procedures and processes, thereby reducing the cost of doing business.

2.1.7. Staff management and training Employees As a business executive, and is divided into different sectors, is the largest corporate management. To build business objective and accurate cost control standards, the department "who spend money and who is responsible," and the results of the assessment departments and individuals; at the same time, the company employees as practitioners, is the easiest place to find cost control, to cultivate staff cost control ideas, encourage innovation, and to achieve fair treatment, immediately reflect reasonable experiment, to implement execution, in order to manage the company's cost control fundamentally [3].

2.2. Means of Financing 2.2.1. The use of bank credit to reduce financing costs Import companies can get bank financing status. Importers thus obtaining low- cost long-term financing and payment exporter thus obtaining immediate payment, the issuing bank implemented a margin goods mortgage and other procedures, but no increased risk [4]. 2.2.2. The use of "forfeiting" to obtain low-cost financing and other services When handling foreign trade enterprises accounts receivable problems, you can choose to use the "forfeiting" business, in order to reduce financing costs. When the presence of foreign trade enterprises accounts receivable, but found other investment income is higher than the expected direction, "forfeiting" when

433

charges or cash flow difficulties and do not want to use bank credit, you can use the "forfeiting" business. "Forfaiting" main provider of long-term trade finance business, also belong to the rational use of accounts receivable financing and other aspects of the negotiation as well as export, export factoring and invoice financing business.

2.2.3. The use of packaged loans and short-term financing Package loans to banks to support the export performance of the contract schedule exporter, shipped delivery, qualified to receive credit for exporters to provide procurement, production and shipment of special loans under the credit goods. Applicable to the export management rights of enterprises. Liquidity shortage in foreign trade enterprises, foreign importers although not accept advance payment conditions, but under the circumstances agreed to open letters of credit, foreign companies can choose packing loan business.

2.2.4. The use of interest rate differentials reduce financing costs Companies can borrow foreign currency when domestic and foreign currency loans to changes in interest rates different at different times of foreign trade enterprises are very worthy of attention. As in other currencies interest rates significantly lower than the domestic RMB interest rate when the loan may be appropriate in other currencies, SAFE on foreign currency financing loans and packaged export bills under other items may be for settlement procedures, in particular, can be used in credit, under collection settlement.

3. Status of RMB Cross-Border Settlement Development Since the RMB cross-border settlement start date, the state promulgated the multiple documents to regulate and promote the development of our country today, the RMB settlement of cross-border development and lay a solid foundation. 2014, the RMB cross-border payments and foreign currency accounts for the proportion of cross-border payments of up to 23.6%, according to the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication (SWIFT) data, the RMB has become the world's fifth-largest currency of payment, the sixth largest foreign exchange credits, the world's second largest trade funding currency. From another perspective, the exchange rate risk with the gradual liberalization of exchange rate management, is gradually increased. SDR exchange rate of RMB against the variance expanding since April 16, 2014, the

434

inter-bank spot foreign exchange market, the RMB against the US dollar trading price floating range expanded from five thousandths of one percent, the fluctuation range of the RMB exchange rate against the SDR swells, exchange rate risk is self-evident.

4. The Use of the RMB Cross-border Settlement to Reduce the Costs of Foreign Trade Enterprises

4.1. To avoid foreign exchange risk Since 2005, restart the reform, the dollar, the euro and other major international settlement currency continued to depreciate, especially after the 2008 financial crisis, China's foreign trade enterprises, especially export enterprises, to a certain extent by the huge losses. When the RMB cross-border settlement can, foreign trade enterprises in RMB as the settlement currency denominated, exchange rate fluctuations no longer can effectively avoid exchange rate risk.

4.2. To reduce exchange costs and other transaction costs For a long time, China's foreign trade enterprises to the dollar, euro and other major currencies as the main international currency denominated international trade, and our currency is the yuan, which China's foreign trade enterprises in cross-border trade, inevitably generates costs and foreign currency derivatives exchange costs, It also relates to foreign exchange, foreign exchange and other aspects of cost, add up, can not be overlooked. When the yuan for cross-border settlement, these costs will be canceled, reducing the portion of the foreign trade enterprises directly past the inevitable long-term costs. After the RMB cross-border settlement, foreign companies can not import and export foreign exchange verification and other relevant sectors, to provide work efficiency; not only simplify the process on investment in human and financial occupancy and preparation are greatly reduced, for enterprises to reduce Profile costs.

4.3. The use of new financial instruments

Foreign trade enterprises cost control chain, generally is regarded as the supplier and partners the whole value chain, in order to design cost control link, and could not be included in banks, financial institutions being. In fact, companies use reasonable means necessary to process interest rates, exchange rates and

435

other trade financing is cost control, cost control should be included in the session, deemed cost management process [5]. People cross-border settlement development to promote the development of foreign trade enterprises, in addition to avoid exchange rate risk, but also on the role of financial instruments, from the RMB cross-border settlement development has already produced a non-resident RMB business, cross-border RMB offshore credit financing, cross-border purchase of foreign exchange and other business. The appropriate choice of financial instruments, make full use of the various participants in international trade conditions for their own arbitrage and it is also a common means of cost-reduction for indirect foreign trade enterprises.

4.3.1. Arbitrage in trade settlement Cross-border purchase of foreign exchange. Enterprises can buy foreign currency in Hong Kong and other offshore markets, compared to the onshore market, more favorable price. There are companies in the name of money and other external payments, foreign payments of RMB, then buy foreign currency at a low price, in order to obtain the exchange differences; RMB bank transfer remittance business will have a similar effect, the bank will help the territory through the relevant product importers to pay RMB domestic banks' overseas branches, foreign exchange purchase by its branch line to be paid to foreign exporters, the price differences between the use of foreign exchange in order to help companies cash in exchange gains. Banks will increase transfer payment business. Domestic Bank of China shall apply for domestic enterprises, the use of foreign exchange price differences will start with its foreign receivables Bank of China overseas institutions in accordance with the agreed exchange rate and fees converted into yuan, and then paid to the domestic enterprises. With the previously mentioned bank RMB transfer and remittance services in the future if the RMB offshore market price volatility, it can be converted to use. Foreign companies can also take advantage of deferred payment arbitrage. Domestic export enterprises, upon payment of the purchase price, you can choose to save the line within a year of deposit, and then with both inside and outside the line agreements to pledge to do business bank deposits, foreign line payment in foreign currency to foreign exporters, a year when after the expiration of RMB deposit business, the purchase of foreign currency to pay foreign equivalent foreign currency outside money. Domestic enterprise through

436

the territory of the RMB deposit interest rate and foreign currency interest rate spreads and the outer section of RMB appreciation arbitrage.

4.3.2. Arbitrage in trade finance Trade financing, overseas RMB yuan a full pledge and pay class portfolio of products is relatively common means, including payment of import and export agency payments. When domestic banks to customers for RMB settlement, foreign institutions and correspondent banks can use RMB funds, under its full pledge RMB conditions and provide short-term financing services. Banks also gained business benefits, enterprises spread income. RMB imports of domestic banks can provide customers with a full pledge RMB factoring. RMB also has some long-term credit financing function, taking the foreign currency for foreign trade enterprises to provide a convenient spreads benefits. There are other combinations of products, its financing model and several more similar.

5. Recommendations on the Cost Control of Foreign Trade Enterprises under the RMB Cross-border Settlement

5.1. Foreign companies need to be more proactive use of RMB cross- border settlement In international trade, cannot use the RMB cross-border settlement, it can be set to be denominated in the currency RMB, or according to both the bargaining power of the future currency expectations and enterprises, its own power to decide. Companies need to continuously upgrade their strength, the careful study of the RMB cross-border settlement of the relevant measures in order to better use in the course of negotiations, so that both parties can benefit. Meanwhile, the exchange rate risk in the growing conditions, enterprises should be more proactive in research to exchange rate fluctuations, changes in exchange rates reasonably be expected to make to protect the interests of enterprises, and even help enterprises arbitrage arbitrage trading options.

5.2. Foreign companies need to continuously train staff to adapt to new formats RMB cross-border settlement level will continue to deepen and started toward the personal RMB settlement of cross-border aspects of development, is bound to the birth of more new financial derivatives in the financial sector, foreign

437

exchange difference spreads appropriately selected depending on can help companies avoid risks , reduce costs and maximize profits, which require employees to discover in the front line, and to respond quickly, companies need to invest more time and money on staff training. Qualified foreign trade enterprises can be established in due course the relevant departments, to focus exclusively on research of national policies, estimates the international environment, and in accordance with the actual business will continue with the appropriate financial derivatives, in order to improve business efficiency and reduce costs [6].

5.3. Foreign companies need to pay attention to the development of the new platform The current increasingly fierce international competition, China's international trade slowdown, to a certain extent, is turned to a new platform, especially cross-border e-commerce platform, foreign companies can combine their strengths, build their own e-commerce stronghold, and find more business in cross-border e-commerce platform, and make good use of the financing platform for financial and other functions in order to bring more revenue.

6. Conclusion The development of RMB cross-border settlement is promising as it can effectively assist foreign trade enterprises in cost control. The advantages of RMB cross-border settlement are discussed and several methods have been proposed for foreign trade enterprises to utilize RMB cross-border settlement to reduce costs.

References 1. H. C. Dekker, Value chain analysis in inter-firm relationships: A field study, Management Accounting Research. 14, 1 (2003). 2. D. Jiang, The exchange rate risk of foreign trade company and Its Countermeasures, Friends of Accounting. 5, 38 (2010).(In Chinese) 3. R. Cooper and R. Slagmulder, Inter organizational cost management and relational context, Accounting, Organizations and Society. 29, 1 (2004). 4. Y. Chen, A preliminary study on the control scheme of trade financing cost of small and medium sized foreign trade enterprises, Practice in Foreign Economic Relations and Trade. 19, 1 (2004).(In Chinese)

438

5. S. Xu, Analysis of the current arbitrage behavior of RMB cross-border settlement, Financial practice. 425, 1(2012).(In Chinese) 6. M. Christopher and J. Gattorna, Supply chain cost management and value- based pricing, Industrial Marketing Management. 115, 34(2005).

439

Chapter 4

Culture

The Model of Deformed Ancient Tower

Jun-Er Ma1, Meng-Yuan Li2 and Dong-Ming Li3 1Zhejiang University of Water Resources and Electric Power, 2Hangzhou Tian Hang Experimental School, 3Hangzhou Xia Yan Middle School, Hangzhou, China E-mail: [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

This paper constructs a deformation model for the ancient tower using four groups of observational data and by plotting and calculating the center of each layer to find scenarios where the tower would experience deformation such as bending and tilting. Furthermore, the inclination angle with respect to OZ axis of each layer and the tilt circumstances of the entire tower are discussed. To obtain the degree of distortion of each layer, this paper uses the continuous curve’s curvature definition and averaged the curvature. The average distortion in each layer from two time periods: July 1986 to August 1996, and from March 2009 to March 2011, is calculated using the formula of plane’s distortion degree. Keywords: Center Point; Title Angle; Curvature; Tortuousity.

1. Introduction Due to be prolonged to bear a variety of roles like the weight, temperature, wind, etc, with occasional earthquake and hurricanes, ancient tower will produce various modifications, such as tilt, bending, twisting, etc. To protect the ancient tower, the cultural relics department will observe the ancient tower timely. The kinds of deformation will help to develop the necessary protective measures. Ancient tower has a thousand years of history; it is a key cultural relics’ protection in China. The administration has commissioned a mapping company in July 1986, August 1996, March 2009 and March 2011 to observe the tower four times. (Observation data is omitted). Question 1 is to give a general method for determining the center position of the layers in Ancient tower, and list the center coordinates of Ancient tower layers in every individual measurement. Question 2 is to analysis the tower tilt, bending, twisting and other deformation’s circumstances.

2. The Assumptions of the Model (1) Assuming the shape of the Ancient tower is a regular octagon, center and center of mass are at the same point. (2) Assuming each layer of the tower is in similar shape. They are both in a symmetrical pattern with center point.

443

(3) Assuming each layer of the tower is a planar sheet with uniformly distributed mass. (4) Assuming the observation point is collected in specification, and each point’s distance to the center is equal in the same layer.

3. Symbol Description

Qi : Center in i-th layer; x : Center’s abscissa; y : Center’s ordinate; z : Center’s vertical coordinate; γ: Angle between OZ axis and the vector; K: Curvature; θ: The angle between two vectors;

4. The Model’s Establishment and Solution Question 1, is to establish a mathematical model of the general method to determine the center position of each layer in the ancient tower, and list the center coordinates of Ancient tower layers in every individual measurement. In the space coordinate system, there are n dots, which are placed at

(x1 , y1 , z1 ), (x2 , y2 , z2 ), (xn , yn , zn ), quality are m1 , m2 , mn respectively, the coordinates of the centroid in the particle system is: n n n ∑ mi xi ∑ mi yi ∑ mi zi x = i=1 y = i=1 z = i=1 n , n , n ∑ mi ∑ mi ∑ mi i=1 i=1 i=1

Since the ancient tower is homogeneous, so mi = m . Therefore, the particle coordinate particle system can be reduced to: n n n ∑ xi ∑ yi ∑ zi x = i=1 y = i=1 z = i=1 n , n , n Since ancient tower is a regular octagon shape, so the ancient tower’s center, the center of mass and the centroid are the same point. Thus, this paper uses above models to calculate the centroid of each layer in ancient tower. First step is to calculate the data sample points of the ancient tower’s first layer in 1986: Since the first layer has eight points, so n  8 .

8 8 8 x y ∑ i ∑ i ∑ zi x = i=1 = 566.6648, y = i=1 = 522.7105, z = i=1 = 1.7874 8 8 8

444

Thus, the center point of the first layer in 1986 is (I566.6648,522.7105, 1.787375). And so on, all the center points can be calculated in 1986 (see Table 1). Similar way to calculate the ancient tower layers’ center coordinates in 1996, 2009, 2011. Table 1 The coordination of layers’ center calculated in 1986. Coordinate Layer x/m y/m z/m 1 566.6648 522.7105 1.787375 2 566.7196 522.6894 7.32025 3 566.7735 522.6273 12.75525 4 566.8161 522.5944 17.07825 5 566.8621 522.5591 21.7205 6 566.9084 522.5244 26.23513 7 566.9468 522.5081 29.83688 8 566.9843 522.4924 33.35088 9 567.0218 522.4764 36.85488 10 567.0569 522.4624 40.17213 11 567.1045 522.423 44.44088 12 567.1518 522.3836 48.71188 13 567.2115 522.3045 52.83 Top of 567.2473 522.2438 55.12325 the tower

From Table 1’s data, via mapping in MATLAB, this paper obtains an image of the ancient tower layers’ center in 1986.

Fig. 1. The coordinate diagram of each layer’s center in 1986

445

Question 2 Analysis of the tilt, bending, twisting and other changes of the ancient tower

4.1. Tilt

The basic explanation of tilt refers to an object or the degree of slope tilting, skewing, the angle between the ground. Tilt here is the ratio of the two end points of the basis of the tilt direction and its distance from the settlement difference. In mathematics, the method to calculate the tilt of the ancient tower is as follows. Set up the center of two adjacent layers in the ancient tower are

Qi( x iii ,y ,z) , Qi+1( x i+1 ,y i+1 ,z i+1 ) respectively. Credited the angle between π QiQi+1 and OZ axis is γ (Set up 0 < γ < ), from 2 z − z cosγ = i+1 i (1) (x − x )2 + (y − y )2 + (z − z )2 i+1 i i+1 i i+1 i Such as i  6 , by equation (1), obtained the inclination angle in 1986 γ=0.662907; the inclination angle in 1996γ=0.671619; the inclination angle in 2009γ=0.615881; the inclination angle in 2011γ=0.61783. Therefore, equation (1) can calculate the inclination angle γ between the center of each layer and OZ axis in 1986, 1996, 2009, and 2011.

4.2. The curvature

In engineering and technology, the need to study the degree of bending curve, with the curvature K to measure smooth plane curve y = f (x) of curvature mathematically, that the angle size of the unit arc tangent turns on. When the ancient tower is just made, its layers use symmetric geometric shapes which are acquaintance in shape, and all the geometric centers of the floors O12 ,O , ,O n are collinear, where the straight line (called the column axis) perpendicular to the ground. As a long time to bear a variety of roles like the weight, temperature, wind, etc., the ancient tower will have various modifications, such as bending, most direct reflect is that the centers will gradually deviated from the straight line, to form a segment. Assume the curvature of tower embodied in the junction of each layer’s center.

Denoted the turn angle from vector Qi−1Qi to vector QiQi+1 is π θii(0 ≤≤θ ) ,set up the coordinates of Qi is (xiii ,y ,z) (2≤≤ i n-1) . 2

446

Then

( xxiiii−−+11)( x −+− x) ( yy ii−1)( y i + 1 −+− y i) ( zz iiii−+11)( z − z) cosθi = (2) 2 222 22 xx− +− yy +− zz x − x + y − y + z − z ( ii−1) ( ii − 1) ( ii −+ 11) ( ii) ( ii + 1) ( ii + 1)

From equation (2) to calculate the angle θi , then the mean curvature Ki at this point Qi is:

θi (3) K i = Q Q + Q Q i−1 i i i+1 Via formula (3), the average curvature of the layers in the ancient tower in 1986 is listed below: The Layer 2 0.000696; The Layer 3 0.000393; The Layer 4 0.000006; The Layer 5 0.000038; The Layer 6 0.000396; The Layer 7 0.000005; The Layer 8 0.000013; The Layer 9 0.000053; The Layer 10 0.000664; The Layer 11 0.000011; The Layer 12 0.001260; The Layer 13 0.001146 . The data in 1996, 2009, 2011 is omitted. The overall curvature of the tower is obtained by calculating, in 1986 is 0.003218; in 1996 is 0.00586; in 2009 is 0.006137; in 2011 is 0.006186.

4.3. The definition and calculation of twisted plane

A plane of the building is seen as a no-thickness plane A, when deformation occurs in the future, its position and shape become a curved surface B. Assume surface B may be represented by that equation s (x, y). To simplify the analysis, ignore any point in the surface of the plane B does not change its x, y coordinates, and only change the z coordinates (longitudinal changes). Cut a rectangle in the plane A, and cut out the rectangle with its corresponding rectangle in plane B, the four points of micro element in the plane , and its ordinate displacement is . A are represented by a1,b1,a2 ,b2 Sa1, Sb1, Sa2 , Sb2

Their new location in the plane B is a1′,b1′,a2′ and b2′ . Plane distortion is defined as: the rate of the considered plane’s two symmetry rotational angle differences between each other along with the distance variations. First calculate the x direction of curved surface deformation.

Due to the rotation angle θ of side a1,a2 and side b1,b2 are generally small, and therefore can considerθ ≈ tanθ . Therefore.

Sa2 − Sa1 , Sb2 − Sb1 . θ ≈ tanθ = θb ≈ tanθb = a a ∆y ∆y

447

If θa = θb , then the rectangular symmetry produce uniform vertical displacement, the points remain in the same plane after deformation. It means that, what happens to the rectangle is a rigid rotating, otherwise, when θa ≠ θb , i.e. there is a difference in the angle of rotation between the two sides, that forms distortion. The size of the distortion can be represented by the change rate between the difference of the two angles and distance between the two sides: ∆θ θ −θ ∆θ (S − S )− (S − S ) T = = a b or T = = b2 b1 a2 a1 (4) w ∆x ∆x w ∆x ∆x ⋅ ∆y

With the above formula, the twist degree of each layer in the tower can be calculated, the data from 1986 to 1996, and 2009 to 2011 are listed in Table 2. Table 2’s data shows that: in 10 years from 1986 to 1996, the first layer distorted 0.000956 degrees, the third layer distorted 0.000655 degrees, the fifth layer distorted 0.000899 degrees. Two years from 2009 to 2011, the first layer distorted 0.002162 degrees, the third layer distorted 0.000796 degrees, the fifth layer distorted 0.001282 degrees. Table 2. The coordination of layers’ center calculated in 1996 86 to 96 09 to 11 1 0.000956 0.002162 2 0.813076 0.009463 3 0.000655 0.000796 4 0.001023 0.006110 5 0.000899 0.001282 6 0.002617 0.002703 7 0.001556 0.003621 8 0.001576 0.000716 9 0.002241 0.021062 10 0.002366 0.086292 11 0.002579 0.005227 12 0.002828 0.159858 13 0.389591 0.002991

5. Conclusion It may be presumed that tilt angle of the first four layers in the ancient tower will remain at roughly 0.5 degrees, a slight increase compared with 2011. And tilt angle of the tower on the 8th floor also been increased. The 6th layer, the 10th layer and 11th layer of the ancient tower will be basically maintained their original status. But the 13th layer’s tilt angle will be slightly reduced.

448

References 1. Wang Moran. MATLAB6.0 and Scientific Computing[M]. Beijing: Electronic Industry Press. 2001.09. 2. Chang Hong, Zhao Zilong. Mechanics of Materials [M]. Beijing: Science Press. 2012.02. 3. Qi Kang. China Civil Engineering Encyclopedia [M]. Beijing: China Building Industry Press. 1999.05. 4. Han Xuan. Analysis of the distortion caused by subway building construction [J]. Civil Engineering Journal. volume 43, page 83–84. 2010.01.

449

Study on the Modern Folk Robes Shape and Structure Recovery

Peng-Peng Cheng and Dao-Ling Chen Department of Garment and Art Engineering, Minjiang University, Fuzhou 350108, China E-mail:[email protected]

This paper studies the shape and recovers the structure of modern folk robes through observation and measurement, interviewing experts and utilizing successful methods from related research. The shape of modern folk robe consists of structural characteristics such as cutting the front piece and back piece at the mid-line, a relatively long sleeve length, etc. There are two types of inner structure design method: The inner and back piece as a whole piece or the inner piece as an independent piece. Therefore this study is of positive significance for research improvements of modern folk robes, while inheriting and preserving an intangible piece of culture.

Keywords: Modern; Folk Robes; Collection; Shape; Structure Recovery; Regional Culture.

1. Introduction This paper is a study on the folk robes of the late Qing Dynasty and the Republic, namely the modern folk robe. At present, the theory overview of domestic research on traditional Chinese tunic suit is strong, which is to the research of this paper provides a good reference value, but their shape and structure of the neoteric folk costume of specialized study inadequate, so the paper study the shape and the structure to of modern folk robe clothing more detailed.

2. The Shape and Modern History of the Folk Robes The folk robes is a bodysuit worn by the Qing Dynasty and the Republic of Chinese men. There are single gowns, gowns and cotton clip, single robe, which are also known as "coat". In modern times, the robe is one of the necessary clothing for the businessmen, bureaucrats, scholars and dinary people. It is essential to daily life dress [1]. The basic form of the early period of the Qing

450

Dynasty robes had T-shirts, narrow sleeves, dajin, below the knees, lap slit [2]. The style of the late Qing Dynasty robe tends is simple, it is fit and had the collar. During the period of the Republic of China, the basic shapes had the collar, narrow sleeves, dajin, below the knees, sides slit [3].

3. Modern Traditional Robe Size Measurements and Structural Rehabilitation

3.1. The study types of the folk robe China has a vast and the long history, due to different natural environment and economic development, she has the different regional cultures. From an overall perspective, the cultures can be roughly divided into two systems: one is the culture of the Yellow River or Northern culture; the second is the culture along the Yangtze River Valley (including the Pearl River and Minjiang River basin) or Southern culture [4]. According to the local culture Division of importance and representation of Central Plains culture in Chinese culture, the paper selects robes represented in Henan province to study the structure of modern civil robe. For the Central Plains of modern robes, we introduce measurement and structural restoration, the picture is shown in Figure1. This robe style has stand collar, dajin you ren, straight waist, lap outreach, length to ankle, slit on both sides, cut the front piece and back piece at the mid-line, sleeve length up to finger-tip, sleeve completely covers the palm with 7 buttons to fix, it is the hand-sewn, as shown in Table1.

Fig.1 Central Plains Robe Real figure

451

Table 1 Style Feature and Appearance Figure of Central Plains Robes

Clothing parts Style Appearance Figure length to ankle cardigan way dajin you ren waist straight waist, collar stand collar stitching on the sleeve type sleeves sleeve completely sleeve length covers the palm cut the front cut the front piece piece and back and back piece at piece at the mid- the mid-line Front view line or not slits form sides slit lap style straight lap 2.5cm radian lap radian between the front and back lap Neckline, cuffs, trim position cardigan

number of 7 buttons Back view buttons sewing mode hand-sewn

3.2. The size measure and structure of the Central Plains robes rehabilitation In order to obtain accurate data samples, using the full range of measurement is a prerequisite for restoring the structure of the sample. In this paper, the sample was measured from outside to inside, from the primary to the secondary program [5]. In order to ensure the accuracy of measurement, before measuring the first sample, we must fix it on a flat white fabric to avoid pulling samples, ensure that the sample yarn to determine the nature and straight horizontal and vertical axes. We can refer to this site when subsequent measurement axis, and the measurement show that after wearing apparel, clothing structure some deformation, so the measure not only some of the key parts of the measure, also some other parts of the measure. For example, using the figure of the letter is not marked as an auxiliary line measuring line, further accurate sample recovery. But in the garment structure and crop, we do not need these guides.

452

3.2.1. The measurement and recovery of the main structure The main structure can be seen outside the structure, including the collar, garment body and sleeves, Figure 2 as an example measurement. Length measurement is the length of the front robe and the back robe. The length of the front robe refers to the distance from the middle line of the sleeve to the front lap at the most convex, such as distance from point A to point B is 134 cm. The length of the back robe refers to the distance from the middle line of the sleeve to the back lap at the most convex, a distance from point O to point A, its length is the same as 134 cm. Sleeve measurement refers to the distance between the left and right cuff, such as C to D is 166 cm. Joint sleeve measurement is between sleeve seams and cuffs, such as point D to point E is 15 cm. Cuff width measurements is the width of the edge of the sleeves, such as the distance from the point J to K point is 38 cm. The narrowest measure of Chest width is the narrowest of the front body, such as the distance from the point I to H point is 51 cm. Lap width measurement is the width of the lower edge of the lap, such as the distance from P to G is 70 cm. Slit measurement of the lap is from the slit points to the lap, such as the distance from F to G is 50 cm. The convex measurement of the lap is the distance from U to B which is 2.5 cm. Horizontal open collar width is from left neck point to the right, such as from R to Q which is 14 cm. Straight open collar depth is the distance from the front point of the neck to the back point, such as from S to T which is 10 cm. Collar width is the straight distance between the collar opening and collar seam, such as the middle of the width of the collar is 5 cm, the end point arc connection with the arc at a radius of 4.9 cm. The neckline length below collar is the joint length of the garment body and collar, such as 39.5 cm shown in the Figure 2. Cardigan line is the distance below the front neck T about 1.5 cm, then horizontally to the right 10 cm, is a turning point in the first line cardigan X, the distance below T point is 14 cm, then horizontally to the right 18.5 cm, to second turning point Y, another distance below T point about 18.5 cm, then horizontally to the right 25.5 cm, the third turning point is Z. Finally, the X, Y, Z are connection with smoother arc, we finish constituting the cardigan line.

453

Fig.2 Measurement and Restoration of Main Structure

3.2.2. The measurement and recovery of the under fly Under fly is the coincidence parts of you ren and dajin [6]. Its width is according to the needs and capabilities of the fabric to be decided. The under fly of the robe connects with the right piece of clothing, with a pocket on the under fly, showing hidden structure is traditional Chinese costumes pursued. The under fly length is 74.5 cm, its width is 31 cm. The Figure 3 shows structure recovery of the under fly and the right piece of back piece.

454

3.2.3. The measurement and recover of the welt The main function of welt is to reinforce and coat burr. Central Plains robe has more welt because it is single clothing, which were distributed in the collar, dajin line style, side seams, lap, slits and cuffs, width varies with different positions, most wide at the 4 cm, the narrowest is 3.3 cm. Figure 4 shows specific location and the measured data of the welt.

Fig. 3 Measurement and Restoration of Under Fly Fig. 4 Measurement and Restoration of Facing

Finally, we gather 7 pieces of Central Plains robes to finish the measurement data of the main structure, under fly and welt as shown in Table 2.

455

Table 2 Measurement Data of 7 pieces of Central Plains robes cm

As can be seen from Table 3: first, in terms of length, the length of the robe is usually 121-137 cm, and the height of the lap slit will also increase with the length of the robe; second, in terms of width, sleeve is about 150-200 cm, when the whole sleeve is 150 cm, the width of cloth (75 cm or so) is just to accommodate half bodice, so then the joint sleeve length is zero; when sleeve length is greater than 150 cm, we find the narrowest width less than the width of the lap; third, parts size, horizontal open collar is 12.5-15 cm, straight open collar is 8-10 cm, the height of the collar is 5-7 cm.

4. The Structure Characteristics and Analysis of Modern Folk Robes

4.1. Cut the front piece and back piece at the mid-line By studying the robes, we find a seam at the mid-line of the front piece and back piece. This seems that Chinese ancients pursue "the whole" [7]. Finally, through the sleeve length, the length of the joint sleeve, lap width and seam of the mid- line on the front piece and back piece, we can find that 1/2 Sleeve is more than 75 cm , then the fabric will be more than the width of the cloth, and therefore appear connected sleeve length; then according to Chinese traditional costumes to cut a straight line method, we must cut the front piece and back piece at the mid-line to ensure that the piece of cloth width to accommodate half body. Thus, the robe’s structure with a seam at the mid-line of the front piece and back piece depends on sleeve length, joint sleeve length, lap width.

456

4.2. Robe’s Sleeve "rather long not to short" The sleeve length of the Central Plains robe is generally 150-200 cm. "rather long not to short" can reflect the essence of Chinese traditional clothing, that exhibit versatile thrift consciousness and awareness functionality masking. The long-sleeved depends on the season or the temperature which can be increased and short while also reducing the number of the clothing, so as to achieve the purpose of frugality. Masking functional consciousness mainly because under the influence of ancient traditional ideas, it is believed the human body, organs concealed exposed more than good, more beautiful. Thus, the length robe sleeves can be usually longer than the wrist, masked palm, which reflects the sense of thrift and masking functional awareness of the ancients.

4.3. The design of the under fly As it can be seen from Table 2, the ender fly width of six pieces of Central Plains robe is a fixed value. Through the process of making traditional Chinese clothing successor research, we understand why people use these two methods to design the under fly. The main reason is that when the relatively low level of productivity, coupled with the extreme lack of substance, only a portion of a wealthy family made robes with lap connected to the back piece; poor families in order to save costs, used the remaining fabric to make the under fly, which not only affect the appearance of clothing, but also save fabric. Therefore, this structure has been widely adopted.

5. Conclusion Through the statistics and summarize of the modern civil robe shape, we can see that the basic structure of modern civil robe in different areas has not difference. They all have stand collar, you ren, stitching on the sleeves or not, collect waist or not, side slits, straight place or round place, cut the front piece and back piece at the mid-line. Modern civil robe is to cut the front piece and back piece at the mid-line, which seems to pursuit “the whole”, it is entirely different, it is actually limited by old cloth width and had to use process method; robe sleeve "rather long not to short" is according to season, and temperature which has to be increased and short, this increased versatility of the clothing, while also reduced the number of clothing, reflecting thrift consciousness of ancient; Sleeve length is longer than your wrist, and can cover the Palm, is the embodiment of masking functionality of the ancients.

457

Acknowledgments

Fund project: 1, The education scientific research project of young teachers in Fujian Province in 2015 (Project number:JA15430); 2, College students innovation project in Fujian Province (Project number: 201510395032).

References 1. Wang Dongxia. From Robes Jacket to Suit[M]. Chengdu: Sichuan People’s Publishing House, 2003: 24-28. 2. Xu Ke. Qingbai, Leichao[M]. Beijing: Zhonghua Press, 2010: 61-75. 3. Bao Mingxin. The Chinese Men’s Wear in Late Qing Dynasty and Republic Period[M]. Shanghai: Donghua University Press, 2008: 13. 4. Li Shuyou. The theory of Jiangnan culture[J]. Jiangsu Social Sciences, 1990(4): 66-71. 5. Liu Ruipu. Investigation of Chinese Traditional Clothing Structure[M]. Beijing: Guangming Daily Press, 2009: 52. 6. Chen Daoling, Zhang Jingqiong. Workmanship of modern Chinese-style padded coats in Jiangnan area[J]. Journal of Textile Research, 2012(3): 102-107. 7. Ye Lang. Outline of Chinese Aesthetics[M]. Shanghai: Shanghai People’s Publishing House, 2006: 19-37.

458

American Modernist Poetry under Intertextual Perspective

Rong Yua and Wei-Yan Shenb College of Foreign Languages, Donghua University, Shanghai, China, 201620 [email protected], [email protected]

The theory of intertextuality emphasizes the complicated mutually affected relationships among different literary works. This paper utilizes the approach of intertextual perspective to study the origin and development of the American modernist poetry in the twentieth century, to analyze its relationship with both English romantic poetry and ancient Chinese poetry; and to interpret the characteristics and ideologies of the American modernist poetry.

Keywords: Intertextual Perspective; American Modernist Poetry; English Romantic Poetry; Ancient Chinese Poetry.

1. Introduction Intertextuality has been one of the key words in the contemporary post- modernism in the western literary criticism since the sixties. The theory of intertextuality was first proposed by Julia Kristiva, the famous French literary theorist. She said: “a text contains a permutation and combination of several intertwined changes in the text, showing one kind of intertextuality coming from other text” [1]. She also once said, “Any text is the absorption and transformation of other texts just like any other text” [2]. The American narratologist Gerald Prince gave a clearer definition on “intertextuality” as the relationship between a certain text and its references, revision, absorption, expansion, or and other texts generally transformed, on which the text can be possibly understood [3]. Although definitions of the theory of intertextuality vary, the idea of the theory of intertextuality as a way of textual construction is widely accepted that it focuses not only on the influence on time, but also on the interwoven mesh- like relationship between two texts or among more than two texts. Therefore, the study under the perspective of intertextuality breaks from a single and isolated text to examine the value of literary works. It advocates seeking correlation

459

among literary works in a number of texts, which helps us to conduct a more in- depth research and analysis of the origins and development of the literary traditions. T. S. Eliot once claimed there was no sense of one poet or artist alone that can constitute his importance, and that his artistic value lay only in his relationship with poets and artists of the past. [4]. This sentence succinctly explains the literary traditions of writers for the individual affected, and it is also a good mutual elaborate theory of intertextuality: in the process of literary creation, each writer intentionally or unintentionally, absorbs and transforms the ways to participate in the literary tradition. In this sense, there is no such work that can be fully interpreted without the association with the everlasting literary traditions. Poetry plays an essentially important role in the development of modern literature. “Skills and declarations in modernist literature are both started by the modernist poets.” [5] Under the intertextual perspective, the history of American modernist poetry is clearly inextricably linked with English romantic poetry and with the impact of the images in the ancient Chinese classical poems. More than that, the poets did not blindly follow the old literary traditions and practices, American modernist poetry has a distinctively local color and is imprinted with a unique brand of the times.

2. Influence of English Romantic Poetry on the American Modernist Poetry - Origin and Development European romantic literature appeared and grew in the second half of the eighteenth century, among which poetry achieved the highest. Romantic poetry emphasizes individual freedom and imagination, worships nature, cares for the feelings of ordinary people; and its meters and tones are freer and more flexible than the strict restrictions of the rhythms of the classical poetry. English Romantic poetry, represented by the Lake Poet William Wordsworth, promotes “emotion”, “imagination” and “rural life”. Traditional poetry studies suggest that romantic poetry movement began in 1798, when Wordsworth’s Lyrical Ballads was published jointly with Coleridge as a symbol, whose Preface clearly stated the aesthetic theory of the romantic poetry as “All good poetry is the spontaneous overflow of powerful feelings”, and he made the claim that he deliberately chose to represent incidents and situations from common life [6]. In the following forty years in the mid-nineteenth century, other famous English romantic poets like Burns, Blake, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley and Keats created a lot of immortal poems. Byron and Shelley are labelled as the representatives of the optimistic romantic poets with the unrestrained emotions in their poems,

460

while Coleridge represented the pessimistic romantic poets. They selected a wide range of subjects, and created both beautiful short lyrics and philosophic long narrative poems. At the same time, the United States as the emerging nation in the literature also ushered in the golden period of rapid rise and development of the nineteenth century. The most famous pioneers in American poetry are the Transcendentalist poet Ralph Waldo Emerson, Death poet Emily Dickinson, and National poet Walt Whitman. Their poems, without exception, were deeply influenced by the theory of English romantic poetry with distinctive features of English romantic poetry. Emerson once met the English poets Coleridge and Wordsworth when traveling in Europe, and absorbed their theory of poetry. Emerson believes that nature is the symbol of the spirit [7]. He argues that nature is so highly a supreme honor that the poet should always get back to nature for the revelation and inspiration. His famous poem Nature more specifically sets forth his view of nature as the trinity of nature, spirit and beauty Whitman's poetry outlook is reflected in his famous poem Song of Myself included in the long romantic poem Leaves of Grass. The popular line “I sing for myself” is the best declaration of the English romantic poetic concern of oneself and individual freedom. Emily Dickinson's poems are mostly just a few sentences, and physical death and spiritual immortality is the major theme of her poems. Besides, her poems of nature are also American household. In these three poets’ representative poems, features of English romantic poetry are distinctive, so poetry of this period in the United States is often summarized into romantic literature category, whereas these three poets are recognized as pioneers of the modern American poetry. The heyday of American modernist literature is generally considered from 1910 to 1939 until the outbreak of World War II. Modernist writers make harsh reality a strong reaction with the value of diversity and a variety of violent collisions of social thoughts. The twenties and thirties is the peak of American literature, and saw the most important changes in American poetry which entered a period of prosperity as a very important literature genre. In the modernist poetry movement of the twentieth century in the United States, many great poets such as Pound, Eliot, Williams, Frost, Stevens and Sandburg carried out a bold innovation and practice in poetry. Their poems for the first time made the achievements beyond the contemporary poetry in England. Pound captured the needs of the times, helped new poets and fostered their own theme and techniques of poetry, indicating the direction of development of modernist poetry. T.S. Eliot argued that poetry should avoid any emotional catharsis, and

461

promoted the personal feelings stripped from poetry. These poetic theories in its essence, opposed to the Victorian romanticism inherited since the late nineteenth century.

3. Cultural Origins of Ancient Chinese Poetry and American Modernist Poetry – Themes and Images The highest achievements of modern American poetry are commonly attributed to t the poetry movement of Imagism launched by the poet Ezra Pound. The word “image” became the key word in the imagist poetry. Pound made a clear definition of image as such a thing that shows that a sudden intellectual and emotional complex [8]. In 1912, Pound published the famous three principles of Imagism, to further promote the transformation of American poetry: l) direct treatment of the “thing” whether subjective or objective 2) to use absolutely no word that does not contribute to the presentation; and 3) as regarding rhythm, to compose in the sequence of the musical phrase, not in the sequence of a metronome [9]. Under the guidance of these ideas, imagist poetry gradually developed into a short, rhythmic-free, colloquial and imagery- based free verse, which emphasizes the accurate, and concentrated visual impression of an object or a scene, without involving any subjective comments, value or judgments of the poets. Poets no longer express their feelings out of direct representation, but by the language of the depicted images to the readers, allowing readers to appreciate its underlying meaning so as to obtain their individual understanding of the poems. As we all know, it takes thousands of years for Chinese imagist poems to evolve from the ancient poems to the contemporary poems. Chinese great poets like Li Bai, Wang Wei, and Du Fu all had excellent imagist poetry works. In the early period of the American Imagist poetry, literary works and theories of the ancient Chinese poems aroused widespread concern in the British and American poetry. Chinese classical poetry began to be introduced and translated in a large numbers into Anglo-American; some of the main Imagist followers also joined in the translation and comments on ancient Chinese poems. Major American publishing houses have published a lot of English translations of the ancient Chinese poetry; while major American newspapers and magazines also competed in publishing comments on Chinese poetry. The reason why Imagist poets showed so much interest in ancient Chinese poetry is mainly because they found there is a lot of fit between their poetic ideas and Chinese traditional aesthetics of imagist doctrines.

462

First, in ancient Chinese literature, the word “image” is very rich in meaning. Image, which is a major aesthetic characteristic of Chinese classical poetry, can convey the author’s emotions and ignite the author’s artistic thoughts. There are many successfully created images in ancient Chinese poetry. For example, in the poem “Autumn Thoughts” written by Ma Zhiyuan, a famous poet in Yuan Dynasty: Over old trees wreathed with rotten vines fly evening crows/Under a small bridge near a cottage a stream flows/On ancient road in the west wind a lean horse goes/Westward declines the sun/Far, far from home is the heartbroken one. (Translated by Xu Yuanchong) The poet used numerous dense and rich poetic images to express hatred of autumn and his journey of suffering. Twenty-eight Chinese characters are lined with dozens of images, which depict both the heartbreaking physical environment and sorrow and depression in his mental mind. American imagist poets’ images also refer to the mental stimulation with the outer physical body reactions, which is a complex of emotions and intellects and a combination of the objective images and the subjective aesthetic consciousness. Pound has a very popular poem In a Station of the Metro: The apparition of these faces in the crowd/Petals on a wet, black bough. This poem depicted all sorts of objective images in a noisy subway station. He used “a wet black bough” to express the inner unpleasant feelings and emotions of the dark urban life. Meanwhile, “faces” of crowds in the subway station and the poet’s desire and passion for beauty merged and integrated to sprout out of the “petals”. Thus, the poet subtly used these specific images to imply his own emotions hint to the readers. Secondly, in the image itself, Chinese poetics require that aesthetic styles exhibit simplicity and conciseness, and substitute hyperboles for the specific images which correspond with the accurate and concentrated visual impression of an object or scene advocated by the American imagist poets. Li Qiao, a poet in Tang Dynasty, created the famous poem Wind: Blow down the autumn leaves/push flowers in February. /Make great river waves /tilt thousands of bamboos. It is a very short poem describing the wind, with just twenty words to make a specific description of the wind dynamically. Sandburg described in the poem Fog: The fog comes /on little cat feet./It sits looking/over harbor and city/on silent haunches/and then moves on. The poem also uses a handful of words to vividly sketch out the silent dynamic features of the wind. Finally, the profound eastern classical philosophy in ancient Chinese poetry is one of the main factors intriguing the American imagist poets’ keen interest. Pound developed a strong interest in Confucianism when he translated Cathay. In 1915, Pound claimed in an article published in The Cantos that ancient

463

Chinese poetry is a treasure trove in the coming century where American poets can find the driving force, just as the people in the age of Renaissance looked for driving force from the Greeks [10]. The study and re-creation of the ancient Chinese classical poetry made it possible for Pound’s epic Cantos the milestone of the modern poetry in the 20th century. In Cantos, Confucianism can be felt everywhere. His practice in poetry enriched the theory of imagist poetry, but also greatly facilitated the dissemination and exchange of eastern and western cultures. From the surficial images to the complicated humanistic ideas underneath, the imagist poets found the driving forces that promoted itself and the whole American modernist poetry development in the process of the acceptance of Chinese poems and formed a far-reaching impact in the world literature as a whole.

4. Local Consciousness of American Modernist Poetry- Opposition and Interaction The United States is a multicultural country of immigrants. In the early stage, American poetry was heavily influenced by British romantic poetry, followed by the rise of imagist poetry and the introduction of creative elements of ancient Chinese poetry. American modernist poetry is subject in form and contents to the influence of English romantic poetry and ancient Chinese poetry. The fact that American poets were inspired by the English romantic poems and ancient Chinese poems became a case in point of the successful cross-cultural interaction. This process of diversification enhanced the strength and breadth of its reform and innovation, and formed the American style of modernist poetry. However, it is worth noting that the American modernist poetry did not completely abandon its own cultural background or lose their unique characters. The term “Local Consciousness” was first proposed in China by Professor Ou Hong in 1988. He believes that research, translation and learning from a foreign literature are all affected by the local consciousness. The local ethnic cultural awareness is the core of the local consciousness, which will show a different awareness and consciousness at different times and with different individuals. When people study a foreign literature, they consciously or unconsciously, will present the characteristics of the national culture as an intermediary reference items, or as the medium of accepting foreign influences [11]. It is also worth noting that the local consciousness is compatible with an open mind, rather than with the narrow sense of complacency. In academia, this is an indisputable fact that American poetry evolves from the English poetic tradition. However, in a country of the United States as a melting pot of many

464

cultures, poetic traditions in other cultures, even native American traditions, especially the increasingly strong local consciousness cannot avoid merging into the traditions of American poetry to constitute a confrontation with English poetry. Since Whitman's relentless pursuit of a strong local sense, the commitment to get rid of the traditional English poetry to create the local poetry has always been the voice of American modernist poets, among whom Pound, Frost, Williams, are the models. Robert Frost, the “New England Poet” who won the Pulitzer Prize four times, is considered to have the strongest local consciousness among the American modernist poets. He was famous for lyrics The Pasture, New Hampshire, The Road Not Taken, Stopping by Woods on a Snowy Evening and the like. Most of his poems are describing the northeastern American natural scenery and farming life, which is full of philosophical feelings. As a modern poet of the twentieth century, in the form of poetry, Frost rarely wrote free verses. The poetic forms of his best-written poems comply more with the traditional forms of rhythms such as heroic couplets and sonnets. Unlike the characteristics of poetry with the poet Ezra Pound’s image factions, Frost depicted the natural scenery to symbolize or metaphorically imply the feeling of being bewildered and confused of the modern people with the traditional forms of local pastoral poems. At this point, he has a much closer poetic theme with his other contemporary poets. William Carlos Williams has always been considered a persistent quester of American native traditions. Under the impact of his reserved father with a lifelong British nationality, his early creations have obvious signs of the English romantic poetry. He had full recognition of his American citizenship and managed to integrate into this land. His famous poem The Red Wheelbarrow uses a few phrases of a vulgar description of the typical scenery of trolleys in the United States. The image of the wheelbarrow is legible and local, and this choice of the image has the dual characteristics of nationalization and modernization. Based on the real life, Williams insisted all the arts should be produced in the local area, that is, true American literature can only be produced in the land of the United States, no matter what the topic or the language is. This insistence reflects his strong local consciousness, namely the imprint of the United States and of the local American culture. Five years later in 1920, Williams published Spring and All and the other four books in plain everyday language like line drawing creation featuring American local poetry. Paterson, the long narrative poem he began writing in 1948, described the history and social life in a small American town to reveal the essence of American culture and the conditions of the local people. 465

Pound, the leader of modernist poetry movement, made bold innovations with a global vision. His poetry draws on ancient Chinese poetry and traditional Confucian culture. He spent 30 years working on The Cantos, the creative masterpiece in modernist poetry. The whole work is permeated with the philosophy of Confucius, which has multiple references to Chinese cultural classics such as The Four Books (The Great Learning, The Doctrine of the Mean, The Analects of Confucius, and The Mencius), etc., and he even used some Chinese characters without translation in the poem. However, due to differences between the eastern and western cultural backgrounds, poets unavoidably restricted their own cultural traditions, ways of thinking and languages of expression and other objective conditions, which led to the inevitable unintentional misreading. Despite the huge influence of ancient Chinese culture on Pound, he is eventually a veritable western poet and his poetry is still typically western-style poetry rather than the Chinese-style poetry. For instance, Pound chose to ignore the fact that ancient Chinese poetry strictly follows the metrical rules in the translation of Chinese ancient poetry, and did not put them translated into metrical verses, but translated into free verses. But this misreading is not entirely opposing or harming, on the contrary, this misreading, to some extent, not only makes the translated ancient Chinese poems modernistic in forms, but also improves the readability of ancient Chinese poems in the United States, which triggered an everlasting Chinese craze in the Anglo-American poetry. The adoption and absorption outside the domain of local culture or literature, whether it is for the English romantic poetry or ancient Chinese poetry, have not only highlighted the performance of the open compatibility of the local consciousness in American culture, but also proved the theory that eastern and western poetic theories have always been integrated and penetrated with each other. American modernist poetry itself develops and transforms into a new school of literature on the basis of the absorption of English romantic poetry and other foreign literatures. This exchange and interaction of local and foreign cultural awareness and complementarity, in turn, have promoted the internationalization and diversification of American modernist poetry, and this development trend is certainly bound to be long-lasting and coherent.

5. Conclusion In a pluralistic, concept-confusing and seriously alienating age, the trend of modernist poetry is a great literary revolution in American literature. It not only enables poets to express their feelings about the modern perspective of life and

466

the environment, but also effectively promotes the process of internationalization and diversification of American literature and greatly enhances its influence in the modern world literature. American modernist poetry has a strong intertextual relationship with English romantic poetry and ancient Chinese poetry. But for the latter two, the former would have become a source without water; and only with the full understanding of the latter two, the interpretation of the former would be possible. From the study of American modernist poetry in the twentieth century under the perspective of intertextuality, we can clearly see it is never a simple replicating behavior of the poets to absorb different cultures. They transformed, interpreted, and took advantage of other foreign literatures. Revolution and innovation are the basic attitudes of the modernist poets and thus created a pioneering modernist poetry. At the same time, this pioneering poetry not only has a strong compatibility, but also has its own distinctive national characteristics, which enables the theory of the American modernist poetry to lead the new wave of development in the world modern poetry, and provide examples and references for poetic practices in other countries.

Acknowledgments

This work is supported by 2015 Humanities and Social Sciences Base Construction Project of Key Universities (15D111421).

References 1. Liu Xiangyu. A Reader’s Guide to Contemporary Literary Theory [M] Beijing: Peking University Press, 2006:196. 2. Hatim, Basil and Mason. Ian Discourse and the Translator, London and New York: Longman, 1990:125. 3. Gerald Prince. A Dictionary of Narratology (Revised Edition). Shanghai: Shanghai Translation Publishing House, 2011, P 286. 4. Richard D.Altrick. The Art of Literary Research. New York: WW Norton & Company, 1975:6. 5. Zhan Jianhua. The High Tide of American Literature. Shanghai: Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press, 2004:207. 6. The Norton Anthology of English Literature (7th Edition), W.W. Norton & Company, 2001: 1436.

467

7. R.W Emerson. Nature and Other Writings. [M] Shanghai: Shanghai Academy of Social Sciences Publishing House, 1993: 20. 8. Wu Yifu. Modern Western Literary Critical Theory. Shanghai: Shanghai Translation Publishing House, 1983:108. 9. Chang Yaoxin. A Survey of American Literature. Tianjin: Nankai University Pressing House, 1990: 221. 10. Zhao Yiheng. The Muse from Cathay. Chengdu: Sichuan People's Publishing House, 1985: 11.

468

Using Films to Promote Cultural Awareness in an EFL Classroom

M. H. Hu, Y. Y. Sun and Z. Y. Li† College of Foreign Studies, Guangzhou, Guangdong 510632, China †E-mail: [email protected]

Learning a foreign language and its culture is an interactive and interdependent activity. This paper presents a program designed to promote both language and culture learning in the English as a foreign language (EFL) classroom, specifically by incorporating several carefully-selected films and video clips into an American Culture classroom. The students are requested to accomplish individual and/or cooperative tasks to enhance their English language proficiency and cultural awareness. These authentic films expose students to authentic American language and social contexts and the tasks require the students to practice their critical thinking and communication skills. The positive reception and excellent student performance has demonstrated that this program is an effective method to improve students’ listening and speaking abilities, enlarge their vocabulary and enhance their writing skills. In addition, it arouses their cultural literacy through the examination of both American and Chinese values, beliefs and traditions. Therefore, this teaching method may provide a direction for the feasible implementation of a massive open online course on language and culture.

Keywords: Language Learning; Cultural Literacy; Intercultural Communication.

1. Introduction The learning of language and culture, especially the role of culture in language learning, has been a topic of considerable interest for years. The culture class has transformed from the invariant and static one to the variable and dynamic one [1]. Meanwhile, language learning has also shifted from the traditional teacher-centered to the student- and technology-centered classroom. The relationship between language and culture learning is dynamic: words and their meanings vary in different cultural contexts, and learners’ prior experience and other factors may also play a role [2]. Many scholars have explored it in a sociocultural context [3–6].

† Corresponding author.

469

For the non-native English speakers (NNESs), when their English proficiency still needs to be improved, culture learning is more challenging because it involves “intercultural competence and multiliteracies” [7]. How to equip the NNESs with better language proficiency and intercultural competence and multi-literacy is what a culture and language class pursues. Endeavors include incorporating films into a foreign/second language classroom at different levels for a variety of languages [8–11] because film-based language and culture classroom brings many advantages – other than exposure to the authentic language context, it can motivate the learners [12] and, more importantly, develop their intercultural competence and literacy [7]. This paper intends to describe how a film-based American Culture course for the undergraduates at the tertiary level in a Chinese university was designed and delivered and how the NNESs have benefited from this course – they have enhanced their English language skills, especially speaking and writing; they have raised their awareness in American culture, and meanwhile critically speculated their own culture.

2. Methods

2.1. Course and students This selective course of American Culture is part of the undergraduates’ English language program, with 72 teaching hours for 18 weeks. The students are from all disciplines of our university. The number of students varies each semester, but there are at least 40 students for each class. The students’ English level is somewhere between intermediate to advanced – they have strong reading skill than other language skills. Their purpose of taking this course also varies – some plan to go to the United States for further study such as an exchange program or a master program, others are interested in understanding the American society. Surprisingly, more students (about 2/3) majoring in science and engineering enroll in this course. They are self-disciplined and highly motivated. The majority of the class has never been to the U.S., but they have much knowledge about the American culture, such as the movies (Oscar, Hollywood blockbusters), TV series (Big Bang, Desperate Housewives, and Mad Man), pop music (Grammy) and sports (NBA, MLB, and Super Bowl). The course book is a set of American language and culture books - Rethinking America (1, 2, 3) [13], authored by M.E. Sokolik, and published by Foreign Language Teaching & Research Press in Beijing, China. The Preface of the book states that “Rethinking America is a multi-skill cultural series for

470

students of English as second language.” It is to make students examine the American and their own cultural values and get engaged in meaningful activities and to refine their English language skills [13]. But since this is mainly a book for reading, additional activities are designed, such as films or video clips that are closely related to the topic in discussion.

2.2. Theme-based films selected and tasks developed for each chapter Each chapter of the course book has a central theme. The course book itself has a suggested list of films to watch, but the instructors carefully choose the ones that are appropriate to their language level and that are available to the audience in China. In addition, individual and/or cooperative tasks are developed for the students to accomplish. Here is a list of the first four chapters’ themes, films recommended, tasks developed accordingly and the purpose of the tasks:

Table 1. American Culture course chapter themes, suggested films and tasks to be accomplished.

Chapter Suggested Tasks to be accomplishedc Purpose themea filmsb The The Pursuit of Speaking & sentence American Happyness writing: Students (Ss) Understanding the Dream (2006) rehearse some dialogues changing notion of American and define what American American Dream, the Beauty (1999) dream is. fulfilled and broken American Dream. Money Wall Street Paragraph writing: Ss Exploring the (1987) define what “greedy” business world in Pirates of refers to in China and in China and in the U.S. Silicon Valley the U.S. with supporting (1999) details. Tradition My Big Fat Note taking and short Understanding the Greek paper writing: Ss take U.S. as an immigrant Wedding notes of the film, society: “melting (2002) comparing & contrasting pot” vs “salad bowl” Joy Luck Club different ethnic culture in (keeping the original (1993) the U.S. country’s customs or not). People Kramer vs. Acting and writing: Ss are Developing shifting Kramer (1979) divided into groups to act ideas about Scent of a and then to write a term motherhood and Woman (1992) paper regarding the role of fatherhood. mother and father. Note: Table notes. aThe themes are taken from the course book: Rethinking America 2. bFor some chapters, two films are included – one is a must, and the other is optional. cOne or more tasks can be arranged according to class schedule.

471

2.3. Methods At the beginning of the semester, the students are given a detailed course description so that they know what to do for each class, especially what tasks and how they are to be accomplished – speaking or writing, individually or cooperatively, and by when. The films and video clips have been uploaded to the university platform of Blackboard. The students are asked to watch them and take notes individually first, and then meet with their group members after class to complete the group tasks (mostly presentations). The instructor will replay the most typical and relevant part of each film in class to impress the students with the specific language use and contexts. The evaluation of each task is performed differently. For speaking and individual tasks, students need to present in class while for writing and cooperative ones, they need to peer-review each other’s piece before they finally submit it to the instructor or they will present together to the whole class.

3. Results and Discussion The course ends up with positive reception and excellent performance from the students in that they have been exposed to a valuable opportunity to learn language as well as culture. Benefits from this program include the authentic cultural exploration, critical comparison and contrast of American and Chinese culture and identity, integration of language skills, especially communicative skills of speaking and writing. The introduction of the film-based American cultural heritage raises the students’ awareness of both American and Chinese values, beliefs and traditions, and they critically examine, analyze and reflect their own Chinese cultural heritage and identity, which further supports other film studies as an educational tool. For example, The Pursuit of Happyness and American Beauty represent the positive and negative perspective of the American Dream [14]. By comparing and contrasting these two films, the students get to know the contradictions in American dream. Wall Street and Pirates of Silicon Valley represent the “positive and negative organizational ethics” [15] and the shift to “social entrepreneurship” [16]. As the saying goes, “a picture is worth a thousand words”, the visual impact from these films to the students is much impressive than that from other media. The increased cultural difference awareness can guide the students to interpret other people’s beliefs and behavior more objectivity with more tolerance. In their future intercultural communications, the students will also attend to their verbal and non-verbal communication mode.

472

The second benefit from this program lies in the fact that having been exposed to the authentic English materials, they become a more sensitive language learner – by acting the lines and by writing. They have observed and analyzed the verbal and non-verbal strategies adopted in the films, so they express themselves with careful choice of language in different contexts. For example, they know when to “cross your fingers” and when to call someone a “freak”. More importantly, they know their limitations of language and culture knowledge, and they become a more motivated and eager learner. The third benefit goes to the instructors: they are NNESs themselves. The process of screening films and developing tasks proves to be a valuable learning experience for the instructors as well, though it also is a great challenge. The contextualized inter-cultural and interactive communication visualizes and optimizes the culture and language classroom to a certain extent.

4. Conclusion This film-based culture and language course is well received by the students. When deciding which films to be introduced, factors like the theme, release time, language level and availability to the students should be taken into consideration. Therefore, this program is only an initial step to scaffold an inter-cultural communication course that involves more in-depth theory orientation as well as more students’ participation. An ideal modality of culture and language communication should be a multi-dimensional one.

Acknowledgments The authors would like to thank Jinan University for the grant so that the authors could obtain the desired films and upload them to the Blackboard. Thanks should also be given to the students whose positive reception and excellent performance at the end of the semester initiated the writing of this paper. This paper was written based on a presentation delivered at the English Language Teaching International Conference 2015 held at the University of Macau. The language and culture project was supported by Grant JG2014034 of Jinan University, Guangdong, China.

References 1. Paige, R., Jorstad, H., Siaya, L., Klein, F. & Colby, J. (2000). Culture Learning in Language Education: A Review of the Literature.

473

2. Street, B. V. (1993). Culture is a verb. In D. Graddol et al. (Eds.), Language and culture (pp. 23–42). U.K.: BAAL and Multilingual Matters. 3. Halliday, M. A. K., & Hasan, R. (1985). Language, context and text: Aspects of language in a social semiotic perspective. Waurn Ponds: Deakin University Press. 4. Hall, K. J. (2002). Teaching and researching language and culture. London: Longman 5. Clark, J. B. (2012). Heterogeneity and a sociolinguistics of multilingualism: Reconfiguring French language pedagogy. Language and Linguistics Compass, 6(3), 143-161. 6. Surmont, J., Struys, E., & Somers, T. (2015). Creating a framework for a large-scale implementation of Content and Language Integrated Learning: The first steps. European Journal of Language Policy, 7(1), 29–41. 7. Pegrum, M. (2008). Film, culture and identity: Critical intercultural literacies for the language classroom. Language and Intercultural Communication, 8 (2), 136–154. 8. Sturm, J. L. (2012). Using film in the L2 classroom: a graduate course in film pedagogy. Foreign Language Annals, 45(2), 246–259. 9. Zhang, Q. (2013). The Impact of Film and Film-based Activities on the Attitudes of English-speaking Secondary-school Students towards L2 Chinese. Creativ Practices in Language Learning and Teaching (CPLT), 1(2), 1–17. 10. Truong, L. B., & Tran, L. T. (2014). Students' intercultural development through language learning in Vietnamese tertiary education: a case study on the use of film as an innovative approach. Language and Intercultural Communication, 14(2), 207–225. 11. Okuyama, Y. (2015). Japanese Mythology in Film: A Semiotic Approach to Reading Japanese Film and Anime. Lexington Books. 12. Sherman, J. (2003). Using authentic video in the language classroom. Ernst Klett Sprachen. 13. Sokolik, M.E. (2004). Rethinking America (1, 2, 3), Beijing: Foreign Language Teaching & Research Press. 14. Corcoran, C. E. M. (2012). The American Dream: a study of the contrasting representations in film as a motivational myth or delusional disappointment?. http://eprints.port.ac.uk/id/eprint/14090. Accessed March 1, 2016.

474

15. Dunphy, S. (2013). Developing an Understanding of Positive and Negative Organizational Ethics by Watching Scenes from the Greatest Hollywood Business Movies. Journal of the Indiana Academy of the Social Sciences, 16(1). 16. Martin, R. L., & Osberg, S. (2007). Social entrepreneurship: The case for definition. Stanford social innovation review, 5(2), 28–39.

475

Chapter 5

Social Science and Sports

The Empirical Study of Factors that Influence Housing Satisfaction – Case Study of a Community in Foshan City, Guangdong Province

Min-Jun Lan and Yong Wu ∗ Management Department, China West Normal University, Nanchong 637009, China E-mail: [email protected]

This paper discusses and tests the theory of housing satisfaction through analysis of its influencing factors by logistic regression model, using data collected in Foshan city, Guangdong province. The results have demonstrated that construction quality, indoor design, surrounding environment, etc. affect the residents’ housing satisfaction to a certain extent and that construction quality is the biggest influencing factor of housing satisfaction. Keywords: Housing Satisfaction; Influential Factors; Logistic Regression Analysis; Foshan City.

1. Introduction Chinese urban residents had always been troubled by the problem of housing, it’s also the important problem of the people's livelihood, in the CPPCC committee members' questions: the top ten livelihood issues concerned by Chinese people in 2013, "Can I live in a house?" Ranked fourth. In the year of 2013 and 2014, the CPPCC, housing has been in the top five topics of people most concerned (see Figure 1). Concern people's livelihood, carry out the Scientific development concept of people-oriented concept, allow the residents to eat satisfied, to live well, to build a harmonious society and realize Chinese dream. The housing satisfaction reflects whether the housing quality of urban residents has increased, whether the housing area has increased, whether the housing environment has improved, whether the surrounding infrastructure of housing is convenient in the current environment.

∗Corresponding author.

479

Figure 1 The CPCC in 2013 and 2014, the top five most concerned topics Data sources: DeGongWang data

In order to speed up the development of urban economy, ensure the residents' housing conditions, improve the quality of residents' housing, increase the residents' housing area, improve the level of residential property services, since the effort of government’s the reform and opening up for 30 years, had increased the investment in residential construction, the area of urban per capita housing had increased from 6.7 square meters per person in 1978 to 28 square meters per person in 2008,the housing shortage had solved basically, the urban residents' housing conditions had improved [1]. But how about the effect with a series of policies to improve the quality of residential satisfaction? How to build the housing satisfaction index evaluation system for reasonable evaluation? Which factors will affect the housing satisfaction? The analysis based on Logistic regression model of urban housing satisfaction influencing factors is useful to improve the housing related theory, and it is of great significance to improve residents' housing conditions, had been concerned in the academic research subject. This article takes X district, foshan city, guangdong province as an example, based on the perspective of building, using Logistic regression model to analyze and inspect the collected data, finally get the variables which affect the housing satisfaction. The pearl river delta with large population density after the reform and opening up due to the advantages of geographic location, policy support and had achieved rapid economic development. But at the same time, with the city's economic development, the urban residents' housing conditions had improved? housing area had increased? What about urban residents housing satisfaction? These problems not only affect the individual citizens, but also affect the construction and development of the housing system in the whole society and the government housing policies in the future. The results not only is helpful to enrich the housing satisfaction

480

investigation and theory, in practice, provide a scientific basis for the improvement of residential quality. Wu Shuoxian, based on the quality of life about1297 households survey questionnaire, multivariate statistical analysis method is used to study the relationship between the various factors of the quality of living environment and law, at the same time, choose the relatively independent evaluation factors, mainly is the visual environment factors [2]. Xu Leiqing, on the basis of predecessors' research deepening, think that living environment quality is not only a visual environment factors, also including the social aspect, space and comfort level and other factors, and also compared the residents of multistoried buildings and high-rise residential satisfaction [3][4]. Chenfu, in view of safe, comfortable, harmonious, convenient, based on the investigation of urban housing residents, established the urban human settlements environment satisfaction evaluation index system and put forward the optimization measure and scheme of urban human settlements environment[5]. Li Zhanghua,for the first time to introduce the housing finance and government policy to the customer satisfaction model, and using the model in the sampling survey and has proved its feasibility in practice[6]. Yu Xiaofen, from quantitative angle, housing satisfaction in combination with fuzzy comprehensive evaluation method and multifactor quantitative evaluation method, evaluation factors of housing satisfaction study [7]. In addition, there are scholars residents satisfaction questionnaire designed six criteria and 46 factors as evaluation factors, finally it is concluded that satisfaction from high to low housing factors [8].

2. Data Description, Setup of Variates and Model Establishment

2.1. Data description In this paper, the data comes from the field investigation of author and his team members, select X village, located in nanhai district, Foshan city, Guangdong province, the research object for the resident of X village, located in nanhai district, Foshan city, including the owner of the new building and the owner of the second-building and the owners who renting building, obtain the data with the random sampling questionnaire survey and the interview. The survey given out 90 copies of questionnaires, recycled 78 copies of effective questionnaires, the effective recovery rate was 86.7%. The subjects of survey including new housing residents, second-hand housing residents and tenants, the new housing residents have 50 households, accounted for 64.1%; second-hand housing

481

residents have 20 households, accounted for 25.6%; The tenants have 8 households, accounting for 10.3% (Table 1).

Table 1. The descriptive statistics of X community housing characteristics

City Community Respondents Frequency Percentage Foshan The new house owner 50 64.1% X community The second-hand house owner 20 25.6% Tenant 8 10.3% In total 78 100%

2.2. Setup of Variates

2.2.1. The dependent variable Whether the urban residents is satisfied with housing, the housing satisfaction represents the subjective desire, as the dependent variable, this paper conducted the inquiry of "the influence of different factors on housing satisfaction".

2.2.2. The independent variable The various external factors influencing the residents' housing satisfaction, such as building quality and environment. Base on the survey and a lot of literature review, combine with the actual situation of the research area, concludes and summarizes the main factors influencing the housing satisfaction, selects the three big and seven small variates, building quality: construction quality, interior design, exterior design; community environment: affiliated facilities and greening environment; realty service: property management and complaint handling, there are ten variates, three big variates reflects the residents' overall housing satisfaction, seven little variates reflects which factors influence housing satisfaction. The satisfaction mainly adopts the likert scale, is divided into five levels of measurement: very dissatisfied (0-20 points), not satisfied (20- 40 points), general (40-60 points), fairly satisfied (60-80 points), very satisfied (80-100 points).

2.3. The hypothesis of research and model establishment Aiming at the object of research, put forward the hypothesis of research: housing satisfaction is influenced by three major factors: the quality of building, environment, property management service quality. Through the analysis of

482

questionnaire shows that the test statistic of Bartlett sphericity is 1377.743, the number of P is 0.000, less than 0.05, shows that there have strong correlation between variables, so the sample suitable for factor analysis; Found by reliability, the reliability coefficient is 0.991, indicate that the reliability between variables is high, so the selection of variables is able to measure the housing satisfaction. Based on the construction of the Logistic regression model about urban residential housing satisfaction are following: Y=0+1X1+2X2+3X3+4X4+5X5+ 6X6+7X7+[9] In this model, Y means the dependent variable, represents the housing overall satisfaction; X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7 represent: construction quality satisfaction, interior design satisfaction, appearance design satisfaction, afforest environment satisfaction, ancillary facilities satisfaction, property management satisfaction and complaints treatment satisfaction; 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 is the partial regression coefficients,1 means when X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7 stay the same, the X1 change for each unit of the dependent variable, the average amount of change about Y, other partial regression coefficients:2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 have the same meaning as the1.

3. Data Analysis and Discussion of Results According to the above established Logistic multivariate regression model, SPSS data analysis results are shown in Table 2.

Table 2. The Logistic regression results of housing satisfaction influential factors

Unstandardized Standardized The 95.0% confidence coefficients coefficients interval of B Standard Lower Upper Model B error trial version t Sig. limit limit (Constant) -.756 .914 -.827 .411 -2.578 1.066 Construction quality .183 .029 .156 6.336 .000 .126 .241

Interior design .099 .030 .087 3.260 .002 .038 .159

Appearance design .157 .030 .152 5.214 .000 .097 .217

Affiliated facilities .138 .023 .162 5.884 .000 .091 .185

Green environment .146 .025 .145 5.832 .000 .096 .196 The property .157 .019 .177 8.100 .000 .119 .196 management Complaint handling .127 .024 .141 5.398 .000 .080 .174

483

From the analyzed results above after spss19.0 software was applied, we can know the seven independent variables have significant positive influence on housing satisfaction. The number of the seven independent variables are: 0.183, 0.099, 0.157, 0.099, 0.157, 0.157, 0.127. So, therefore, the hypothesis is verified by the data analysis, but how to affect the quality of housing satisfaction needs further analysis. (1) The number of construction quality is 0.183, the construction quality has positive effect on housing satisfaction, it is as the same results of Pi Jin Jing, the construction quality has important influence on housing satisfaction, is the key to the determinants of housing satisfaction factors [10]. The regression coefficient is 0.183, reflects the impact on the quality of housing satisfaction is the largest. This suggests that the construction quality is the most direct factors affecting housing satisfaction, once the construction quality is bad, the housing satisfaction of residents will plummet. (2) The number of interior design is 0.099, the interior design has significant positive influence on housing satisfaction, but its regression coefficient is small, this shows that in the seven factors, the interior design has the smallest influence, for its reason, may be the resident’s requirements for interior design is not very high, and the interior design style is different from person to person, different people like different kinds of interior design. But the ventilation and lighting performance and each functional area distribution is reasonable. (3) The number of appearance design is 0.157, the appearance design has a significant positive effect on housing satisfaction, appearance design is mainly the housing external design, mainly reflects the construction of overall appearance, wall color and the design of the practicability, roof, first of all, from the appearance of the housing satisfaction can preliminary evaluated, then evaluate the indoor, so the effect of design is self-evident. (4) The number of affiliated facilities is 0.138, the auxiliary facilities has significant positive influence on housing satisfaction. It is as the same results of Ma Jun’s results: affiliated facilities attached great importance, people are eager to have good public service facilities [11]. The regression coefficient of affiliated facilities is 0.138, reflects the influence is big. This suggests that the housing satisfaction of affiliated facilities demand is bigger, and it affects the housing satisfaction. (5) The number of greening environment is 0.146,it has positive effect on housing satisfaction. Greening environment includes not only how many of the trees, lawns, also includes a few adornments such as water, mountain, the lamplight. Greening environment affects residents' satisfaction is also

484

very obvious, let residents experience the feeling of nature, it gives residents the most intuitive feelings, after they go back to home. (6) The number of property management is 0.157, it has a positive correlation relationship to the housing satisfaction. This agree with Chen Hao's results: to improve the quality of residents living, the first step is to improve the quality of property services[12]. Property management belongs to the owner's demand for services, different from the traditional property services, modern property services not only stay on the quality of service, with the development of the era and the change of the owner's demand, people pay more attention to the humanistic care. The traditional property management focuses on providing the property services, and the maintenance of the building, modern property management focuses on service attitude and timeliness; Community service and community culture; Service personnel quality, etc. (7) The number of complaint handling is 0.127, complaint handling has positive effects on housing satisfaction. Complaint handling mainly in the following aspects to affect housing satisfaction: the complaint channels, complaint handling staff attitude, timeliness, the satisfaction of complaint handling results. Whether the complaint channel is obstructed, relate to the resident’s problems reflect to the property; the attitude of the complaint handling, relate to the expression of resident’s demand and the realty service quality; Complaints of dealing relate to the timeliness of realty service quality and the realty service satisfaction; Whether the complaint handling results are satisfied relate to the harmonious relation between the property and the owner.

4. Conclusion Through a questionnaire survey in Foshan city, we can find: (1) Urban residential housing satisfaction is influenced by different comprehensive factors, these factors including building quality and property services, community environment, larger influence is the construction quality, property management, and green environment. This reflects the requirements of urban residents for the urban living environment, living quality and living comfort. (2) Modern urban residents pay more attention to the comfortable living environment and convenient living conditions and the quality of property services, this shows that the Maslow’s needs of people is constantly improving, and housing service providers should keep up with the pace, adapt to the residents' changing needs. According to the findings, we may take the following measures:

485

(i) We should strengthen the quality management of the building because the urban residents housing satisfaction most visually reflect in the building quality, as like Qiang pointed out that "to ensure the quality as the lifeline of housing projects, housing quality is more important than quantity, meticulously to ensure the quality of housing, constantly improve the level of housing quality management". So improve the quality of housing construction is the core of improve the quality of housing satisfaction. (ii) Improve the housing satisfaction, at the same time, we should pay attention to humanistic care, community culture and experience owner, it is not only beneficial to set up a good brand image, but also more conducive to improve their competitiveness. To carry out meaningful community cultural activities, such as a donation for disaster area, care for the elderly, etc.

Acknowledgments

This work was suported by research Foundation of CWNU (11B034).

References 1. He Lihua,Yang Chongqi.Housing satisfaction of urban residents and its influential factors[J]. Journal of public management, 2011, 11:51 + 43–125. 2. Wu Shuoxian, Li Jinpeng,HuoYun,Zhang sanming.Evaluation of factors affecting the living and environment quality of resident areas.[J]. Journal of environmental science, 1995, 01:354–362. 3. Xu Leiqing,Yang Gongxia.The evaluation research of living environment in shanghai[J]. Journal of Tongji University (Natural Science Edition), 1996, 12:546-551. 4. Xu Leiqing. Defend for high-rise residential, two instances of high-rise residential living satisfaction and neighborhood relationship analysis [J]. Journal of new buildings, 2000, 11:45 to 47. 5. Chen Fu. Urban living environment and satisfaction evaluation study [J]. Journal of urban planning, 2000,07:25-27+53. 6. Li Zhang-Hua. Customer satisfaction theory and its application in the housing market [J]. Journal of Beijing union university, 2002, 61:57–61. 7. Yu Xiaoen, Wuji.The evaluation system design of residents' housing consumption satisfaction and the empirical study [J]. Journal of technology economy and management research, 2003,01:34–36. 8. Li Hongfen. Commercial housing residents satisfaction empirical analysis and countermeasures [J]. Journal of Zhejiang Statistics, 2004, 10, 12–13.

486

9. Li Dan, Li Yufeng. The urbanization of new generation rural migrant workers and the problem analysis, based on the perspective of life satisfaction [J]. China's population, resources and environment, 2012, 07:151–155. 10. Pi Jin Jing. The empirical research of urban residents living satisfaction influencing factors[D]. Zhejiang University, 2008. 11. Majun. The evaluation of urban residential quality satisfaction[D]. Huazhong Agricultural University, 2008. 12. Chenhao. Evaluation of urban residential quality satisfaction-case of Shanghai[J]. Journal of economic north, 2011, 2011:54–57.

487

Stochastic Frontier Analysis of Dental Care Industry in United States of America

Lei Chen Big Data Research Center, Jianghan University Wuhan, Hubei 430056, China E-mail: [email protected]

With the availability of new data and new methodology, this paper investigates the technical efficiency of dental practices in the dental care industry using the stochastic frontier analysis (SFA). SFA is used to decompose the inefficiency into random shock and technical inefficiency. Subsequently, each environmental factor is tested to determine their effects on the distribution of inefficiency, which further affects the technical efficiency of dental practice.

Keyword: Dental Care, Stochastic Frontier Analysis, Second Stage Regression.

1. Introduction Dental services are important to our health. With limited resources, we want to make dental services efficient so that more people could benefit from the services. For this reason, dental care industry and dental practice efficiency becomes an important research topic in health economics. Gary Crakes (1984) did his PhD dissertation on the economic estimation of dental practice production process in 1984. In that dissertation, he analyzed the dental production process by measuring the contribution of particular inputs to dental production and by estimating the return to scale exhibited by dental practices. One of his emphases was to compare the production functions for solo and non-solo practices. In his models, he investigated the production functions in the Cobb-Douglas form and in the Transcendental Logarithm (Trans-Log) form. He used gross billing as the single output, and dentist hours, staff hours, and operatory expense as three inputs, based on 209 practices survey data. In our research, we will have a more detailed measurement of production function. For instance, in our model we can include eight inputs in the production function, where four of them are labor inputs and the other four are capital inputs. Therefore, we will be able to disaggregate the general variable “staff hours” in Crakes’ model into three variables, i.e., hygienist hours,

488

chair-side assistant hours, and other staff hours. This will enable us to measure the marginal product of each labor input instead of having an aggregate measure. Also, for the capital inputs, instead of having only one capital input in Crakes’ work, we will have four, which are square footage of practice area, number of operatories, laboratory expenses, and supply expenses. Thus we will be able to investigate how each of these capital inputs would affect the production. Also, with the additional information about local community from the Census data, we can include the social-economic factors in the analysis and see how each of the environmental variables would affect the distribution of random shock thus further affecting the technical efficiency of the dental practice.

2. Methodology We assume that each practice uses a nonnegative vector of inputs to produce a nonnegative vector of outputs. For the simplicity but without losing generality, we first consider the case of single input-single output. Under the same technology, different levels of input will produce different levels of output. If we plot the input-output bundles on a two-dimensional graph, the production possibilities set will be bounded below by the x-axis and bounded above by a curve emanating from the origin, which is called production frontier (Kumbhakar & Lovell, 2000). Since the upper boundary represents the maximum output that can be produced from any given input under certain technology, we can measure the technical efficiency by measuring how far the actual input-output bundle is away from its vertical mapping on the frontier. That is, the further away the actual bundle is from the frontier, the lower the technical efficiency is. Similarly we can derive the technical efficiency of a dental practice for the multiple inputs-multiple outputs case in the same way. Aigner, Lovell, and Schmidt (1977) and Meeusen and van den Broeck (1977) simultaneously introduced stochastic production frontier models. These models allow for technical inefficiency, but also acknowledge the fact that random shocks outside the control of producers can affect output. The stochastic production frontier model can be expressed in the following way: , (1) ln yi = β0 + ∑ βn ln xni + vi − ui n where vi is the two-sided random shock term, and ui is the nonnegative technical inefficiency term. Thus ε i ≡ vi − ui is the error term of the equation. If we assume vi and ui are distributed independently of xi , estimation of equation (2) by OLS will provide consistent estimates of βn s, but not for β0

489

because E(ε i ) = E(−ui ) ≤ 0 . Therefore we need additional assumptions and different estimation techniques to obtain a consistent estimate of the intercept and the technical efficiency of each practice. We use a two-step procedure proposed by Jondrow et al. (1982). In the first step we use OLS to estimate the slope parameters, while in the second step we use maximum likelihood method to estimate the intercept parameter and the variances of the two error components. Here we assume vi are identically and 2 independently normally distributed with mean 0 and variance σ v . We assume ui are identically and independently distributed. We still assume vi and ui are distributed independently of each other, and of xi . But we have to choose the assumption of distribution of ui . We know ui have to be nonnegative, thus we can assume ui follow a half normal distribution, an exponential distribution, a truncated normal distribution, or a gamma distribution. Of course the sample mean efficiencies would be sensitive to the choice of model, but Kumbhakar & Lovell (2000) discussed that the ranking of producers by their individual efficiency scores, or the composition of the top and bottom efficiency score deciles, is not particular sensitive to the choice of model. The technical efficiency can be estimated as (Battese & Coelli, 1988)

 µ∗i  1− Φ(σ ∗ − ) σ ∗ 1 2 . (2) TEi = E(exp{−ui}| ε i ) =   ⋅ exp{−µ∗i + σ ∗ } µ∗ 2  1− Φ(− i )   σ   ∗ 

A (1− α)% confidence interval (Li, Ui) for E(exp{−ui } | ε i ) is proposed by Horrace & Schmidt (1996) as

L = exp{−µ − z σ } , and U = exp{−µ − z σ }, (3) i *i L * i *i U * µ where −1 α µ*i , and −1 α *i . zL = Φ {(1− )[1− Φ(− )]} zU = Φ {[1− (1− )][1− Φ(− )]} 2 σ * 2 σ * The corresponding equations in the normal-half normal model are derived in detail in appendix A. One can easily derive the above equations by following the steps in appendix A and replace the half-normal density function to truncated normal density function for u . Now if we assume u are truncated normally distributed yet the mean of the distribution before truncation is not a constant, then we can introduce environmental variables in our model and investigate how each of the environmental factors would affect technical efficiency of the practice by affecting the distribution of inefficiency. This normal-truncated normal with

490

changing mean model is first introduced by Kumbhakar, Ghosh, and McGuckin (1991). The advantage of introducing environmental variables in the mean of distribution of u instead of directly in the production is that it decomposes the inefficiency term into technical inefficiency and random shock (would be either favorable or unfavorable) and let the environmental factors affect only the technical efficiency. Thus under certain technology, the production frontier for every practice is the same, but how far each practice is away from the frontier depends on the random shock to the practice and the technical efficiency of the practice, where the latter could be affected by the social-economic environment in the practice’s neighborhood.

3. Data & Results In our research, we include 91 dental practices out of the 164 survey data because some practices didn’t provide complete information we need for the analysis. We use gross billing as the single output because we believe gross billing is a better measure of output than total visits in the sense that total visits is a simple sum of visits which doesn’t distinguish the different types of visits, whereas gross billing captures the differences of visits by weighing them by prices. As for the inputs, we use dentists working hours and hygienist working hours as two labor inputs, and number of operatories, laboratory expenses, and supply expenses as three capital inputs. We include incorporate, practice density, education level of local residents, per capita income, percentage of uninsured patients, and percentage of co-paid patients as environmental variables. Here incorporate is a dummy variable which indicates if a practice is an incorporated one or not. In general we expect that an incorporated dental practice would have better allocation of resources and enjoy economies of scale, but have less flexibility to choose its marketing strategies. Practice density is a variable that measures the local market competitiveness. It is defined as the total number of practices in the local area (by the same zip code) divided by the square kilometer of the area. It’s reasonable to believe that higher level of competition would bring higher efficiency. Education level of local residents gives the percentage of local residences that have a Bachelor degree or above. Per capita income indicates the wealthiness of local residences. We include this variable because we want to find out if wealthiness of a local community would affect the efficiency of dental practices in that community. The last two environmental variables capture the percentages of penitents who do not have dental insurances or have to pay part of the bill out of their pockets, respectively. We expect low efficiencies of practices with high portion of these

491

types of patients. Some of these environmental data are form the survey and others are from the Census 2002 data.

Table 1: SFA results of normal-truncated normal with changing mean model

Applying the data to the normal-truncated normal with changing mean model described above, we get the estimate of variables as shown in Table 1 on the previous page. We can see that all the inputs are statistically significant at the 1% level. Also, the sum of estimated coefficients is approximately one, which means the production function is constant return to scale in all input variables. Another interesting thing to see is that all the environmental variables are somewhat significant and the signs of most coefficients are consistent with our expectation. For instance, incorporate is negative, meaning incorporated dental practices would have higher technical efficiencies than those which are not. Density also has a negative sign, which means competition helps on improving technical efficiency. Education has a positive and strong impact on dental practice technical efficiency, probably because well education people are more concern on dental health and more willing to cooperate with dental services. And not surprisingly, uninsured patients and co-pay patients have positive signs, which tell us that the high portion of these types of patients the practice had, the lower the technical efficiency would be. One reason could be that it’s relatively harder to receive payment from these patients than those who have a

492

better dental care plan where dental insurance company would take care of the bills. One may already notice that per capita income has a negative but very small impact on technical efficiency. Yet this result is statistically significant. Literately speaking, it tells us that the effect of per capita income on technical efficiency is very small, but not inexistent. Also the sign of it seems suspicious – we would rather expect it to be negative. But in fact a wealthier community is not necessary having incentive to behave more efficient. They may spend resources on other luxury things instead put them on the momentum of production. We actually have seen this phenomenon in different circumstances in our other researches. It’s definitely worth being further pursuing.

4. Conclusion With the availability of new data and new methodology, we investigate practice level dental industry technical efficiency by using SFA to decompose the inefficiency into random shock and technical inefficiency. Using SFA, we estimate how environment factors would affect technical efficiency of the practice by affecting the distribution of inefficiency.

References 1. Aigner, D. J., C. A. K. Lovell, and P. Schmidt (1977). “Formulation and Estimation of Stochastic Frontier Production Models”, Journal of Econometrics, Vol. 6, No. 1, pages 21-37. 2. Battese, G. E. and T. J. Coelli (1988). “Prediction of Firm-Level Technical Efficiencies with a Generalized Frontier Production Function and Panel Data”, Journal of Econometrics, Vol. 38, pages 387-399. 3. Crakes, Gary (1984). “An Economic Estimation of The Dental Practice Production Process”, Ph.D. dissertation, University of Connecticut, Storrs, CT, 1984. 4. Horrace, W. C. and P. Schmidt (1996). “Confidence Statements for Efficiency Estimates from Stochastic Frontier Models”, Journal of Productivity Analysis, Vol. 2, No. 2/3, pages 257-282. 5. Jondrow, James, et al (1982). “On the Estimation of Technical Inefficiency in the Stochastic Frontier Production Function Model”, Journal of Econometrics, Vol. 19, No. 2/3, pages 233-238. 6. Kumbhaker, S. C., S. Ghosh, and J. T. McGuckin (1991). “A Generalized Production Frontier Approach for Estimating Determinants of Inefficiency

493

in US Dairy Farms”, Journal of Business and Economic Statistics, Vol. 9, No. 3, pages 279-286. 7. Kumbhaker, Subal and Knox Lovell (2000). “Stochastic Frontier Analysis”, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, United Kingdom. 8. Meeusen, W. and J. van den Broeck (1977). “Efficiency Estimation from Cobb-Douglas Production Function with Composed Error”, International Economic Review, Vol. 18, No. 2, pages 435-444.

494

Optimal Sequence of Parallel Activities with Generalized Precedence Relations

Han-Ying Wei and Zhi-Xiong Su Business Administration College, Nanchang Institute of Technology Nanchang 330099, China E-mail: [email protected]

In projects with generalized precedence relations (GPRs), a typical problem of resource- constrained project scheduling with GPRs is that 2n parallel activities are adjusted to n sequence activities pairs. In order discuss the theory and to tackle this problem, this paper studies the optimal sequence of parallel activities with GPRs and proposes an algorithm to adjust 6 parallel activities to 3 activity pairs with minimum effective on project duration under GPRs.

Keywords: Project Scheduling; Generalized Precedence Relations; Activity-pair-set.

1. Introduction Project scheduling is a core issue in project plan and schedule management [1], and the optimal sequence of parallel activities is a important problem of resource-constrained project scheduling. This paper mainly focuses on the optimal sequence of parallel activities with generalized precedence relations (GPRs), that is, under the condition of resource shortage, how to adjust parallel activities to sequence ones with minimum effect on the project duration. GPRs is first proposed in 1960s by Roy [2], which are temporal constraints that mandate that the start/finish times of a pair of activities in a project must be separated by a minimum or maximum amount of time referred to as a time lag. A common precedence relation is the strict precedence relation that the start time of an activity is no earlier than the finish time of its preceding activities. The resource-constrained project scheduling with GPRs is NP-hard so that main approaches for the problem are heuristic algorithm. Literatures [3,4] proposed branch and bound algorithms for the problem, and literature [5] further proposed a penalty function method. Literatures [6-10] proposed some approximate models and algorithms, such as the genetic algorithm and tabu search algorithm, while literature [11,12] proposed some heuristic scheduling

495

algorithms based on precedence rules. This paper mainly considers the optimal sequence of parallel activities, for example, under the condition of resource shortage, how to adjust n parallel activities to one sequence activity-chain with minimum effect on the project duration, or adjust 2n parallel activities to n activity-pairs with minimum effect on the project duration, and so on. This paper focuses on the above second problem. The computation for the problem will increase rapidly following the increase of n while using common methods such as enumeration and mathematical programming. For example, if adjusting 30 parallel activities to 15 sequence activity-pairs with minimum effect on the 15 20 project duration, we need to choose the optimal scheme from A30 > 10 schemes. Therefore, new approaches and new ideas are urgently needed to solve the problem. Current works for the problem mainly aim at the issues with strict precedence relations, and fewer authors focus on the problem with GPRs. Based on the literature [11], this paper studies the problem that adjusting any 6 parallel activities in project with GPRs to 3 sequential activity-pairs with minimum effect on the project duration, and proposes a simple algorithm.

2. Generalized Precedence Relations (GPRs) GPRs in a project contain finish-to-start, finish-to-finish, start-to-start, and start- to-finish types of minimum and maximum time lags between activities of the project. Time parameters of the project with GPRs mainly contain the earliest start- and finish-times ESk and EFk, and the latest start- and finish-times LSk and LFk of activity k.

3. Conceptions Parallel activities: Activities without precedence relations between each other. Activity-pair and its effectiveness value: Combining an activity-pair means to adjust two parallel activities, A and B, to the sequence of A → B, which is marked as ( AB) . ( AB) may prolong project duration; this lengthening of duration is its effectiveness value, which is marked as [ AB] . Centre of activity: The sum of the earliest start-time and the latest finish-time of an activity, which marked as CA that

CA=+ ES AA LF (1) Three-activity-pair-set and its effectiveness value: Combining an activity pair set means adjusting 6 parallel activities AAABBB123123,,,,, to 3 sequential

496

A1 A2 A3 AAA123 AAA123 activity pairs , , , which is marked as .  may B1 B2 B3 BBB123 BBB123 prolong project duration; this lengthening of duration is its effectiveness value,

AAA123 which is marked as . BBB123

AAA123 Standard activity-pair-set: A standard activity-pair-set is  with BBB123 EF≤ EF and LS≤ LS . AAii+1 BBii+1

AAA123 Normative activity-pair-set: A normative activity-pair-set is  with BBB123 EF≤ EF and LS≤ LS . AAii+1 BBii+1 Cognate activity-pair-sets: Activity-pair-sets with same standard activity-pair- set. Akin activity-pair-sets: Activity-pair-sets with same normative activity-pair- set. Congener activity-pair-sets: Activity-pair-sets containing same activity-pairs.

4. Theorems Theorem 4.1. Formulae for the effectiveness values of an activity-pair and an activity-pair-set are the following:

[ AB] =−max{ 0, EFAB LS } (2)

AAA123  AA12  A3  = max  ,  ,  (3) BBB123   B1  B 2  B 3

Theorem 4.2. The effectiveness value of an activity-pair ( AB) with CCAB≤ is no greater than that of activity-pair (BA) . Theorem 4.3. The effectiveness value of an activity-pair-set is no less than that of its normative one. Theorem 4.4. The effectiveness value of an activity-pair-set is no less than that of its standard one. Theorem 4.5. Standard and normative activity-pair-sets must contain the one with minimum effectiveness value. The proofs of the above theorems are in literature [11].

497

5. Algorithm for Three-activity-pair-set with GPRs We design the following algorithm for adjusting 6 parallel activities in a project with GPRs to 3 activity-pairs with minimum effective on the project duration. Step 1: Compute the center of the 6 parallel activities and mark as CCCCCC≤≤≤≤≤. AAAAAA123456

Step 2: List the following 5 standard activity-pair-sets:

AAA123  AAA 134  AAA 135 AAA124 AAA125   ,,,,    . AAA456  AAA 256  AAA 246 AAA356 AAA346 

Normalizing and standardizing each of them. Step 3: Compute the effectiveness value of these normative and standard activity-pair-sets, and find the one with minimum effectiveness value. Proof: According to the conceptions, congener activity-pair-sets of the 6 activity contain the following 6 different activity-pair-sets:

AAA123 AAA 132 AAA 312 AAA 213 AAA 321 AAA 231 ,,,,, . BBB123 BBB 132 BBB 312 BBB 213 BBB 321 BBB 231 According to the conceptions, non-congener activity-pair-sets are different, and cognate activity-pair-sets contain the following 8 non-congener activity-pair- sets:

AAA123  BAA 123  AB 123 A  AAB 123   BBB 123   ,  ,  ,  ,...,  . BBB123  ABB 123  BAB 123  BBA 123   AAA 123  Therefore, cognate activity-pair-sets contain 6×= 8 48 different activity-pair- sets. According to Theorem 4.4 and the conception of cognate activity-pair-sets, the 48 different cognate activity-pair-sets can be standardized as one standard activity-pair-set with minimum effectiveness value. We could choose any activity-pair-set from cognate activity-pair-sets and standard it. According to the conceptions, non-cognate activity-pair-sets are different. The 6 parallel activities could combine 6!= 720 different three-activity- pair-sets which contain 720÷= 48 15 kinds of cognate activity-pair-sets. Then we only consider the 15 different activity-pair-sets for the optimization. According to Step 1, the 15 different standard activity-pair-sets are as follows:

AAA123 AAA 123 AAA 123 AAA123 AAA 123 AAA 123 (1) ,,,,,; AAA456 AAA 465 AAA 546 AAA564 AAA 645 AAA 654

498

AAA134 AAA 134 (2) , ; AAA256 AAA 265

AAA135 (3) ; AAA246

AAA124 AAA 124 AAA 124 AAA 124 (4) ,,, ; AAA356 AAA 365 AAA 635 AAA 536

AAA125 AAA 125 (5) , . AAA346 AAA 436

According to the conceptions, all activity-pair-sets in each group of the above 5 groups of activity-pair-sets are akin activity-pair-sets. The activity-pair- sets in different groups are non-akin activity-pair-sets. Therefore, there are 5 kinds of akin activity-pair-sets. According to the conception of cognate activity-pair-sets and Theorem 4.3, the cognate activity-pair-sets can be normalized as one normative activity-pair- set with minimum effectiveness value. Therefore, we only need to choose one activity-pair-set from cognate activity-pair-sets and normalize it for the optimization. We could choose the first activity-pair-set from above each group of activity-pair-sets and name it as basic activity-pair-set. According to Theorem 4.5, standard and normative activity-pair-sets must contain the optimal one. Therefore, we should normalize and standardize the basic activity-pair-set until obtain the standard and normative ones. According to Theorem 4.5, The optimal activity-pair-set could be found in the standard and normative ones. The standard and normative activity-pair-set with minimum effectiveness value is the optimal one of the standard and normative one, and is the optimal one of the all activity-pair-sets too. This completes the proof.

6. Conclusion This paper studies the optimal sequence of parallel activities with GPRs and proposes an algorithm to adjust 6 parallel activities to 3 activity pairs with minimum effective on project duration under GPRs. Comparing with common methods such as enumeration and mathematical programming, the algorithm in the paper has lower difficulty so that provides optimization schemes for similar problems in project management.

499

Acknowledgments This research was financially supported by the Natural Science Foundation of Jiangxi Provincial Department of Science and Technology in China (No. 20151BAB211015).

References 1. E.L, Demeulemeester, W.S. Herroelep. Project Scheduling: A Research Handbook. (Kluwer Academic Publisher, Boston, 2002). 2. B. Roy. Graphes et ordonnancements, Revue Française de Recherche Opérationnelle 25, 323-326 (1962). 3. A. Schnell and R.F. Hartl. On the efficient modeling and solution of the multi-mode resource-constrained project scheduling problem with generalized precedence relations, OR Spectrum online, 1-21 (2015). 4. L. Bianco and M. Caramia. An exact algorithm to minimize the makespan in project scheduling with scarce resources and generalized precedence relations, European Journal of Operational Research 219, 73-85 (2012). 5. P. Leyman and M. Vanhoucke. A new scheduling technique for the resource-constrained project scheduling problem with discounted cash flows, International Journal of Production Research 53, 2771-2786 (2015). 6. A. Alfieri, T. Tolio and M. Urgo. A project scheduling approach to production planning with feeding precedence relations, International Journal of Production Research 49, 995-1020 (2011). 7. W.V. Tony, V. Paul, V.B. Greet and D.C. Patrick. Real-world production scheduling for the food industry: An integrated approach, Engineering Applications of Artificial Intelligence 25, 222-228 (2012). 8. J. Bagherinejad and Z.R. Majd. Solving the MRCPSP/max with the objective of minimizing tardiness/earliness cost of activities with double genetic algorithms, The International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology 70, 573-582 (2014). 9. L.H. Zhang and X. Zou. Repetitive Project Scheduling: Theory and Methods. (Elsevier, 1st Edition, Holland , 2015). 10. L.P.T. Jose, P. Eugenio, B.M. Javier and A.R. Carlos. The Fuzzy Project Scheduling Problem with Minimal Generalized Precedence Relations, Computer-Aided Civil and Infrastructure Engineering 30, 872-891 (2015).

500

11. J.X. Qi, X.M. Li and Q. Wang. Path Length Theorem in CPM network and its applications for optimal sequence. (Science Press, Beijing, 2008). 12. D.G. Zhang, L.S. Nie and J.T. Jin, etc. Spatial resource constrained project scheduling based on priority rules, Computer Engineering 41, 62-69 (2015).

501

Analysis on the Characteristics of the Tactical Ability and Technical Skill of Chinese Women Table Tennis Rising Star Zhu Yuling

Mei-Rong Wan and Liang Tan

School of PE,Jiangxi Normal University, Nanchang, Jiangxi, China E-mail: [email protected]

China’s women table tennis players are front-runners in the global table tennis scene and are supported a strong development program. However, recent defeats in competitions such as the 1-3 loss to Singapore in the 50th World Table Tennis Championship finals have raised some concerns. Moreover, the International Assistance and Development Plan implemented by the Chinese Table Tennis Association have allowed for the sharing of table tennis tactics and techniques and this has bridged the gap between other countries and China. Therefore this paper analyzes the characteristics of the tactical ability and technical skill of the Chinese women table tennis rising star Zhu Yuling, to identify and provide solutions to her problems and weaknesses in order to provide full preparation for the 2016 Rio Olympic Games.

Keywords: Table Tennis; Zhu Yuling; Techniques and Tactics; Characteristics.

1. Introduction This paper analyzes the characteristics of Zhu Yuling’s tactical ability and technical skill in the World Table Tennis Championships, the Olympics and ITTF Pro Tour, from 2012 to 2015. By the end of 2015, she was ranked sixth in the world with 2972 points.

2. Research Methods

2.1. Research methods

2.1.1. Method of documentary Check training analysis competition and on-spot guidance about table tennis in relevant monograph magazine and periodical through CNKI CDDB CQVIP and Jiang Xi Normal University library, and focus on the situation of world women table tennis technique and tactic development to provide this study a solid theoretical basis.

502

2.1.2. Method of sports techniques statistics Collect and review the 12 games of Zhu Yuling from 2012 to 2015 in home and away big table tennis games to have a intuitive understanding of her characteristics in on-spot tactical application and to count her techniques and tactics.

2.1.3. Method of three-phrase This study uses three-phrase, which is most commonly used in Chinese table tennis, to arrange and analyze statistics of techniques. (see Table 1) Score rate = score of one phrase / (score of one phrase + lose of one phrase) * 100% Use rate = (score of one phrase + lose of one phrase) / (all score + all lose) * 100% Aggress and control score = aggress and control score / (aggress and control score + aggress and control lose) * 100% Evaluation criteria:

Table 1. Three-phrase techniques assessment standard table

Score rate (%) The three section Usage rate (%) excellent good pass Rush to grab 70 65 60 25—30 Grab segment 50 40 30 15—25 Stalemate 55 50 45 45—55

2.1.4. Method of logical analysis Based on the material and statistics we have, use analogy deduction comprehensive and logical methods and so on to analyze and summarize the characteristics of techniques and tactics used by excellent Chinese women table tennis player in competition, to make a concrete and systematic study.

3. Results and Analysis

3.1. Zhu Yuling attack technique and tactics characteristic analysis With the adjustment of the world table tennis competition rules, "sampan" technique has not been ignored by the athletes, but "sampan" technology of the outcome of the game effects become more apparent. At the same time, loop

503

combination of fast break game types of techniques and tactics of "of the first three" requirements page more and more high. Service quality is good or bad, in a certain extent determines the aggress the quality and stability, the same is that a solid basic skills of athletes on the basis of. Loop with fast break game type rotating elements are top heavy, can through the rotation changes to contain the opponent's attack, causing the opponent to back the ball low quality or losing. Table 2 shows, Zhu Yuling, serving a total of 298 times, scoring 39 points, active faults and was attacked losing a total of 23 points, indicating that Zhu Yuling serve disrupt the opponent of the sending and receiving of the skills and tactics, limit the opponent's sights. Zhu Yuling backspin serve a total of 174 times, utilization rate is as high as 58.39%, score better, side serving a total of 45 times, but relatively low score, losing rate to 15.56%. And spin serve for the lowest percentage of utilization rate of only 5.70%, the pros and cons of equivalent. And combined with video analysis showed that Zhu Yuling characteristics of serving is spin serve primarily, and to side, side serve, serve little tricks, arc is low, rotation variation in abundance for taking initiative in the match to create favorable conditions

Table 2. Zhu Yuling serve rotary table

Category Frequency Usage% Score Score rate% Points Losing rate

Topspin 17 5.70 2 11.76 2 11.76 Backspin 174 58.39 23 13.22 11 6.32

32 10.74 7 21.88 3 9.38 On the side of Side 45 15.10 4 8.89 7 15.56 Other 30 10.07 3 10.00 0 6.67 Total 298 100.00 39 13.09 23 7.72

3.1.1. Analysis of Zhu Yuling the third tactics Loop combination of fast break game serve sights in the style of play is an important part. To aggress the quality of its rotation, placement, speed and strength winning factors and table tennis project winning rules are closely related. From Table 3 shows, Zhu Yu Ling the third tactical grab and control the use of a considerable, use rate were 50.94%, 49.06%, but serves assaults scoring rate accounted for the total score rate of 66.67%, was significantly higher than that of control score rate is 33.33%, showed that Zhu Yuling serve sights high

504

quality, forehand drive technology, especially the backhand screw pull and fast with the technical ability, good basic skills and robust Psychological quality.

Table 3. Zhu Yuling third board technical and tactical use of statistical tables

Score Score rate% Points Losing rate Tactics / techniques Frequency Usage%

Forehand 33 12.45 5 15.15 5 15.15 attack Rob Sideways 18 6.79 8 44.44 4 22.22 attack Backhand 84 31.70 17 20.24 13 15.48 attack

A short swing 52 19.62 6 11.54 5 9.62

Control Split long 7 2.64 0 0 0 0

Dial or block 71 26.79 9 12.68 3 4.23

Total 265 100.00 45 16.98 30 11.32

3.2. Characteristics analysis of Zhu Yuling’s receive-then-aggress technique and tactic application As 11 points system adapted by the International Table Tennis Federation, rule of unblocked service changed, advancement of table tennis equipment and comprehensiveness and creativity of techniques, receive-then-aggress become critical to get each point and even to win each game. Through observing the videos, we find that Zhu Yuling uses various methods to take receives such as backhand fast bringing, backhand drive, drop short, side aggress, and forehand aggress and so on. She is proactive in aggress and has outstanding stability, which has strong connection to her good feeling and controlling ability. See from Table 4 Zhu Yuling’s using rate of receive-then-aggress and receive of placement are 64.79% and 35.21%, scores are 31 and 19, and lose are 18 and 8, which shows Zhu Yuling has certain attack ability of receive-then-aggress. Though she has high hit rate and good stability, she is not fierce enough so that her lethality to the opponents is not enough, which makes the opponents score a lot from her flaw. Specific to each technique, Zhu Yuling has a good control of backhand drive, quick flick, and good ball feeling, so as to her quick reaction

505

and strong ability to connection. She uses more than a half receive-then- aggressive, but she need to reduce mistakes and lose. Side aggress makes higher score rate, so she should use it more. Drop shot and pitch shot are also used very often, and she finds aggressive chances through transition. During receive-then- aggress phrase, Zhu Yuling mainly uses place after place and attack after place, through the transitional one stroke two strokes or even more strokes to find attack chances, which beyond traditional of playing of Chinese player and their playing pattern.

Table 4. Zhu Yuling receive skills tactics statistics

Tactics / techniques Frequency Usage% Score Score rate% Points Losing rate

Forehand 24 8.45 9 37.50 5 20.83 attack Sideways Grab 13 4.58 7 53.85 3 23.08 attack Backhand 147 51.76 15 10.20 10 6.80 attack A short 73 25.70 12 16.44 4 5.48 swing Take control Split long 23 8.10 7 30.43 3 13.04

Skim, cut 4 1.41 0 0 1 25.00

total 284 100.00 50 17.61 26 9.15

With the development of women table tennis in the new era, placement controlling become critical in five competitive techniques. Instead of the pursuit of brute force of their body, the excellent players to greater extent pursues placement to control the placement has become the key of table tennis five competitive factors, the greater degree of elite athletes is the pursuit of placement, line and the variation of rotation "art" to subdue the blind pursuit of its absolute power "brute force".

506

Table 5. Zhu Yuling serve tables

Category Frequency Usage% Score Score rate% Break points Attack rate% forehand 24 8.55 5 20.83 1 4.17 Near the middle road 27 9.62 3 11.11 0 0 net backhand 31 11.04 6 19.35 3 9.68 forehand 23 8.20 2 8.70 2 8.70 Taiwan middle road 34 12.11 3 8.82 3 8.82 backhand 54 19.23 15 27.78 7 12.96 forehand 25 8.91 6 24.00 2 8.00 baseline middle road 16 5.70 2 12.50 2 12.50 backhand 47 16.74 8 17.02 3 6.38 total 281 100.00 50 17.79 23 8.19

By Table 5 we know that Zhu Yuling uses 281 times of receiving serve placement path in total, in which near net 82 times, middle court 111 times, end line 88 times. Ranking from more score to less is middle court end line and near net. Ranking from more lose to less is end line middle court and near net. This shows that Zhu Yuling break up the opponents’ attack rhythm through placement change, to reach the tactical aim of fight with surprise. From Zhu Yuling and Wu Yang’s characteristic of receiving serve, we know that their receiving serve path mainly bases on backhand and supplements forehand and middle court. See from 3-14, Zhu Yuling’s using rate of backhand middle court and forehand are 47.01% 27.33% and 25.66%, in which the using rate of middle court backhand and end line backhand in all is 35.96%, nevertheless, the scoring rate of middle court backhand is 27.78% and its being attacking rate is 12.96%. Those rates reflect that Zhu Yuling’s receiving serve features in characteristics such as based on stability and supplemented by speed and various placement. But, receiving serve at end line and middle court lose are still need to be improved and advanced. Improving receiving serve placement control shows an excellent table tennis player’s comprehensiveness and growth of techniques and tactics.

3.3. Zhu Yuling in the stalemate of technical and tactical characteristics analysis With the rapid development of table tennis competition level. In table tennis athletes stalemate is becoming increasingly common. Through the video game can be found, a competition may be locked in a stalemate plate 7, 8 in even

507

more, and the use of technical and tactical, line placement changes could not a thousand times uniformly. From the Table 6 shows, Zhu Yuling in stalemate segment with a score of respectively 104 points, 90 points, indicating that the stalemate in the Zhu Yuling in the largest proportion, combined with video game that, Zhu Yuling in active stalemate in the score was significantly higher than that of the passive stalemate, active stalemate a total of 99 points, high utilization rate, indicating that Zhu Yuling in active stalemate in the pre- emptive. Occupy the initiative in competition. In passive stalemate, scoring rate and utilization rate are in a low level, losing has reached 50 points, that Zhu Yuling in passive stalemate is pressing opponents offensive and aggressive limit their advantages and aggressive. Therefore, Zhu Yuling must be in phase to started the first, take the initiative to force, the good sense of the ball and the ability to control the ball, suppress the opponent's attack, in order to improve the stalemate segment, with a score of efficiency.

Table 6. Zhu Yuling stalemate tactics statistics

Points Score rate% Usage% Tactics Core

Active stalemate 2 24 4.74 9.18 Serving round Passive stalemate 7 2.11 9.79

Active stalemate 47 6 47.47 2.47 Receiving round Passive stalemate 3 .03 8.56

Total 04 90 3.61 00.00

4. Conclusion 4.1. The stage of serve sound attack No matter the “all cut strategy” or the “Loop play skills”, the player should make “The stage of service sound attack” the most common way to get a high score of his own. Active attack is the guarantee of victory and it also conforms to the development of “virilize the female’s skills” in women’s table tennis. In this stage, Zhu Yuling’s serving is just perfectly coordinate with her attacking. She mainly serves back spin with a strong tactical awareness, an rich changes of the whirl and fall of every ball, swift reaction and small movement, which gives a great pressure for her adversary to hit back.

508

4.2. The stage of receive and attack The stage of receive and attack is more and more prominent during a ping-pong competition because it reveals the multiformity and efficiency of the receive and attack techniques of a ping-pong player, and it also decides who holds the initiative when a competition is at a stalemate. Zhu Yuling has abundant ways in dealing with balls, such as the banana stroke, sideways stroke and short stroke. She also has a high rate of occupation coefficient and scoring.

4.3. The stage of stalemate With the improvement of ping-pong tactical techniques, the stage of stalemate is growing to be the “main battlefield” in a competition. Zhu Yuling, as a Women’s Table Tennis star who combines the Loop Drive with the running game, undoubtedly, holds a good stalemate ability, stability, and a good continuity. She can also shift between attacking and defending swiftly, has a abundant falling points. Her nimble reaction, ability to predict, and composure at the stage of stalemate make her an expectant competitor in the Rio Olympic Games in 2016.

References 1. Li Qiang of table tennis on statistical analysis method, the contribution rate of [D]. Statistics, Shanghai Institute of Physical Education, 2011. 2. Qiao Mengjie. Excellent men and women transverse table tennis players technical and tactical characteristics of the comparative analysis of [D]. Beijing Sport University, 2009. 3. Wang X. Analysis of the world elite women table tennis players technical and tactical one to 52 World Table Tennis Championships women's singles top 8 as an example of [D]. Yangzhou University, 2014.

509

Author Index

Chang, Kang-Ming, 295 Guan, Tao, 253 Chen, Dao-Ling, 169, 450 Guo, Qing-Qing , 77, 117 Chen, Dong-Sheng, 169 Guo, Wei, 84 Chen, Hong, 117 Guo, Zhong-Ning, 143 Chen, Lei, 488 Chen, Li-Qin, 176 Han, Min-Qi, 130 Chen, Xiao-Wei, 156 Han, Jun, 137 Chen, Ya-Wen, 295 Hong, Jing, 419 Cheng, Peng-Peng, 169, Hou, Min, 137 450 Hou, Xue-Lian, 3 Cheng, Si-Yuan, 143 Hu, M. H., 469 Cui, Wei-Chun, 301 Hu, Xue-Wu, 246 Huang, He-Yan, 102 Deng, Bin, 96, 125 Huang, Yong-Chang, 365 Dong, Shu-Xia, 260 Du, Feng, 339 Ji, X., 401 Du, Han, 55 Ju, Pei-Lun, 412 Du, Zhi-Hui, 191 Kang, Xue-Jun, 176 Fan, Feng-Hua, 365 Lan, Min-Jun, 479 Gan, Ying-Jin, 169 Li, Chen , 176 Gao, Hong-Xiao, 130 Li, Dong-Ming, 443 Gao, Xin-Yan, 281 Li, Fu-Yun, 274 Gao, Xiu-Qing, 130 Li, Kan, 102 Ge, Bao, 240 Li, Meng-Yuan, 443

511

Li, Ru-Yu, 395 Shah, S., 373 Li, Shao-Yu , 61, 67 Shang, Jie-Lin, 357 Li, Xiao-Hong, 211 Shen, Kang-Wei, 176 Li, Xuan-Hai, 357 Shen, Wei-Yan, 459 Li, Z. Y., 469 Sheng, Xiao-Ming, 246 Liang, Hung-Meng, 295 Song, Ji, 77 Lii, Pei-Chi, 67 Song, Yuan, 176 Lin , Pei-Kuan, 61 Stan, M. E., 373 Lin, Chao, 8 Su, Hsiao-Ting Jannis, Lin, Xiao-Hua, 41 295 Liu, Bo-Wen, 274 Su, Zhi-Xiong, 495 Liu, Cheng-Bin, 130 Sun, Y. Y., 469 Liu, Hong-Chao, 267 Liu, Jing, 137 Tan, Liang, 502 Liu, Shan, 395 Tang, Ai-Xue, 301 Liu, Xiao-Jun, 320 Tian, Ji-Ya, 333 Lu, Xiao-Wei, 35 Tian, Yin, 240 Lv, Guo-Rong, 206 Lv, Wei-Dong, 84 Wan, Mei-Rong, 502 Wang, Cai-Xia, 314 Ma, Jun-Er, 443 Wang, Dan-Yang, 22 Ma, Lu, 8, 16, 22, Wang, H. W., 406 183 Wang, Lei, 382 Ma, Yu-Qin, 176 Wang, Pei-Qi, 240 Meng, Wei-Jia, 55 Wang, Qiao-Ying, 108 Wang, Shu-Qin, 191 Nguyen, Hien Thi Thu, Wang, Si-Bao, 108 61 Wang, Ting, 320 Wang, Wei, 301 Pan, Qing-Quan, 35, Wang, Xiao-Hui, 320 48 Wang, Xiao-Ping, 223, Pei, Hong-Mei, 357 231 Wang, Xin, 143 Qi, Min, 183 Wang, Xin-Lei, 84 Wang, Xu-Long, 267 Ren, Bin-Bin, 77, 117 Wang, Zhen-Hua, 206

512

We, Han-Ying, 495 Zhang, Duan, 163 Wei, Ben-Yong, 326 Zhang, Dun, 130 Wei, Min, 16 Zhang, Hao, 130 Wu, Chao-Yan, 28 Zhang, Jia-Sha, 137 Wu, Huan-Jie, 326 Zhang, Jing, 431 Wu, Jia-Xiang, 206 Zhang, Li-Li, 198 Wu, Yong, 382, 479 Zhang, Ning, 314 Wu, Zhuang-Wen, 218 Zhang, Sheng-Lin, 267 Zhang, Shu-Yan, 333 Xia, Long, 301 Zhang, Wei-Hua, 150 Xu, Fa-Lu, 3 Zhang, Wen-Jun, 289 Xu, Han-Xue , 156 Zhang, Xu, 77, 117 Xu, Xu-Bing, 307 Zhang, Yue-Yue, 223, 231, Xu, Ya-Qiong, 382 253 Xu, Yun, 156 Zhao, Meng-Chao, 307 Zhao, Yang, 223, 231, Yang, Jin, 176 253 Yang, Li-Zhen, 274 Zhou, Xue-Guang, 84 Yao, Ke, 240 Zhu, Juan, 333 Yin, Bai-Hui, 260 Zhu, Liang-Rong, 218 Yin, Shu-Jiao, 117 Zhu, Qin, 301 Yu, Fang, 48 Zou, Da-Peng, 143 Yu, Rong, 459

513